Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Table of Contents
Classifier Administration Server Guide 9
Classifier Documentation 10
Common Label Handling Features 12
Label Propagation 13
Printable Labels 14
Recognition of received Label values 14
Mandatory Selectors 14
Default Label Values 14
Insert Marking as Field Code (Word only) 15
Document Properties (Office Classifier) 15
Message Properties (Email, OWA, Mail Add-in, Notes and Mobile) 16
Use of Templates 17
Common Label interface actions 17
Label Selection Interfaces 17
Ribbon Examples 18
Label Selection Dialog 19
Favourites 22
Portion Mark 23
Recently Used Labels and Portion Marks 24
Single Click operation 25
Assisted Labelling operation 27
Classifier Decision Tree 31
Decision Making Process Example 32
Configuration of the Decision Tree 34
Decision Tree in the Client 35
Mobile Classifier user interface 37
Label Options 38
Clear (Label value) 39
Default 39
Link to site defined help 39
Show Summary Marking 39
About Classifier 40
Folder View Labelling operation 40
Classifier Administration 43
Administrator Management Menu 44
Configuration Folder Paths 44
System Roles Management 45
Add a User or Group To a Role 47
Edit a System Role 50
Delete a User or Group from a Role 53
Custom Roles for Policies 53
Create a Custom Role 55
User Roles and Permissions 57
Properties (Classifier Administration) 59
Get Server Configuration 59
Publish Configuration 60
Configuration Archives 62
Permissions for Publish to AD 63
Audit non-privileged attempts to Publish Configuration 66
Configuration size estimation 69
Publish Test Configuration 70
Test Mode Administration 71
Lock / Unlock Configuration 73
Create Web Configuration 73
Settings Applicable Across the Organisation 76
Global Settings 76
Application Settings 77
Audit Settings 78
Languages 83
Licence 86
Features versus Licence 88
View Client Licence status 92
Image Library 93
Add a new image 94
Properties (Image) 95

p2
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Delete (Image) 95
User Message Library 96
Use of User Messages 96
Add a new message 98
Language (Message) 99
Properties (Message) 99
Copy (Message) 99
Delete (Message) 99
User Interface Library 100
Add a new UI definition 101
Properties (UI definition) 102
Copy (UI definition) 102
Delete (UI definition) 102
Properties (UI Definition Items) 103
Challenge (UID) 104
Classification History (UID) 106
Content Inspection Check (UID) 107
Decision Tree (UID) 109
File Classifier (UID) 110
Folder View Labelling (UID) 111
General Messages (UID) 114
Label Selection (UID) 115
Management Agent (UID) 117
Menus (UID) 118
Organise Fav ourites (UID) 119
Policy Check (UID) 120
Ribbon (UID) 122
RMS Apply Template (UID) 124
RMS Apply User Permissions (UID) 125
Labelling Configurations 127
Add a new label configuration 128
Properties (Label Configuration) 129
Delete (Label Configuration) 129
Selector Library 130
Selector Actions 131
Add a new selector 131
Mov e Up / Move Down 132
Language (Selectors) 134
Edit Selector 134
Single selection list 135
Multiple selection list 136
Text entry 138
Date picker 139
Date offset list 139
New (Selector v alue) 141
Properties (Selector v alues) 141
Buttons (Selector v alues) 143
Obsolete / Restore Selector 144
Activ e Obsolete and Retained Selectors and values 145
Delete (Selector) 145
Label Dominance 146
Marking Library 147
Add a new marking format 148
Properties (Marking Format) 148
Inserting a Selector Element 150
Text Display 151
Date Format 153
Marking Selector options 154
Inserting a Hyperlink 156
Inserting an Env ironment Property 157
Inserting a Document Property 158
Inserting a Directory Attribute 160
Font options and Rich Text Formatting 161
Align Text 161
Preview a Marking Format 161
Copy (Marking Format) 162
Delete (Marking Format) 164
Content Library 165

p3
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Defining Expressions 166

Add a new expression 168
Properties (Expression) 169
Delete (Expression) 170
Copy (Expression) 170
Matchers 171
Add a new matcher 171
Properties (Matcher) 173
Delete (Matcher) 173
Content Checking User v iew 174
Matching algorithm control 175
Condition Library 176
Add a new condition 178
Properties (Condition) 180
Copy (Condition) 184
Delete (Condition) 184
Question Library 186
Columns 187
Actions 188
Question Properties 189
Add a Question 190
Enable the Decision Tree Functionality 192
Decision Tree Editor 193
Decision Tree Options 194
Remov e a Node 195
Insert a Question into the Decision Tree 196
Edit Av ailable Answers 198
Set a Label 199
Bottom Pane 200
Configuration Settings 201
Classifier Application Settings 202
Allow classification of meeting requests and appointments 204
Allow classification of tasks 204
Allow Folder View labelling 206
Allow label change on protected documents 206
Allow manual upgrade when sending messages 206
Allow use of OWA Basic/Light Mode 207
Allow v isual markings on a meeting request response 207
Always use distribution list clearances 207
Apply Headers/Footers when label is changed 208
Apply Headers/Footers when workbook is sav ed 208
Automatically elevate email label 208
Automatically update Label fields 209
Custom format for 'Insert Label' 209
Custom format for 'Label' column 209
Display selector values in context menu 209
Enable Back Button on Sav e As 210
Ensure attachment markings are consistent 210
Ensure label dominates all portion markings 210
Folder View column name 210
Folder View column populate on start-up 212
Force Summary Marking in task pane 212
Include embedded images when performing attachment checks 212
Maximum file size for icon ov erlay (in KB) 212
McAfee Host DLP marking 213
McAfee Host DLP scan 213
Portion Marking 213
Process rules when exporting 216
Process rules when printing 216
Process rules when sav ing 216
Search for Outlook Item Properties that match email label locations 217
Set property to refresh markings 217
Show Classifier 'C' on icon ov erlay 217
Show Classifier on ribbon when reading 217
Show 'Insert Label' Context Menu 218
Show label dialog on Sav e or Print 218
Show label dialog on Send 218
Show label dialog style 219

p4
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Show label dialog when mandatory label 219

Show Summary Marking in task pane 220
Show Summary Marking in title bar 220
Suppress Classifier alerts when running macros 221
Text displayed when an item without a label cannot be checked into SharePoint 221
Text displayed when OWA Basic/Light Mode is disabled 221
Update markings when indicated 221
Use Alternate Data Stream (ADS) marking 222
Use default label when replying to unmarked emails 222
Use From field for Originator Clearance 222
Warn if file contents cannot be accessed 222
Watermarks use marking format font 223
General Settings 224
Automatically expand policy warning messages 226
Azure RMS Document Tracking 227
Azure RMS Tracking portal URL override 227
Cache Active Directory attributes on start-up 227
Check Label Locations first 228
Classification History 228
Classification History Display 229
Classifier Rbbon Single Click Buttons as a Gallery 230
Classifier ribbon group location 231
Classifier ribbon layout mode 233
Content checking - case sensitiv e 234
Content checking - include document properties 234
Custom format for 'Classifier Auditing' 234
Custom format for ' Label Summary' custom document property 234
Custom format for Portion Marking 234
Custom format for Summary Markings 235
Disable OK on Label dialog if mandatory v alues are missing 235
Display of Favourites button 236
Display of Label Dialog launch button 236
Indicate mandatory selector check failures 237
Label integrity check failure error message 237
Masking of selectors against clearance 237
Minimise space between selector v alue buttons on ribbon 238
Prompt for reason for ignoring policy warning 238
Remov e Classifier Options from the Ribbon Bar 238
Select v alue for Masked Selector 239
Show 'Help' button on ribbon bar 239
Show labeller 'Clear' button 240
Show labeller 'Default' button 240
Single Click best match 240
Summary bar size changes are preserv ed 241
Summary Marking as black text on a white background 241
Text displayed when a distribution list fails to expand 241
Text displayed when attachment check failed to complete 242
Text displayed when Folder View labelling fails 242
Text displayed when mandatory label is absent 242
Text displayed when originator check failed to complete 243
Text displayed when prompting for a reason for ignoring policy warnings 243
Text displayed when recipient check failed to complete 244
Text displayed when RMS protection failed to complete 244
Text displayed when S/MIME application failed to complete 244
Text to display for notifying of policy checks performed 244
Text to display for resolution of policy issues 245
Text to display if attachment markings are inconsistent 246
Text to display if no marking is av ailable 246
URL for your labelling help site 247
Use Alternate Data Stream (ADS) for Visio files 247
User defined RMS protection 247
Label Locations 248
Supported document label locations 250
Supported mail label locations 250
Recognising and Parsing Label Markings 250
Combined Label Locations 252
Policies 253
Policy Management 253

p5
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Add a New Policy 256

Properties (Policy) 257
Policy Name and Description 260
Maximum Number of Labels to Show 260
Use Assisted Labelling 260
Use Decision Tree 262
User Selectable Default Classification 263
Use Intelligent Default Label 264
Use Single Click With Predefined Labels 264
Show Selector Captions on the Ribbon Bar 268
Where Possible Wrap Buttons After 269
User Interface Definition 270
Default Language 271
Settings 273
Policy User Interface Settings 275
Base Colour 276
Caption Placement 277
Custom Image 278
Image to Apply 280
Show Top Three Fav ourites 283
Style to Apply 285
Tab Placement 287
Title Colour 289
Copy (Policy) 290
Delete (Policy) 290
Lock / Unlock Policy 292
Label Preview 292
Suggested Classification Settings 294
Policy Label UI 295
Selector Properties (Policy) 296
Selector Properties / General 297
Selector Properties / Options 298
Single selection list options 299
Multiple selection list options 300
Date picker options 302
Text entry options 303
Date offset list options 303
Selector Value Filtering 305
Selectors in policy 306
Ribbon 307
Tabs 307
Retained 312
Language (Policy) 313
Connect Selectors - Assisted Labelling 313
Add a selector 315
Remove selector 316
Edit selector options 317
Assisted Labelling examples 320
Example 1 - Categories with many Annotations 320
Example 2 - An additional user choice if Category 2 is selected 323
Example 3 - Separation of Personal and Corporate information 326
Suggested Classifications 327
Add a New Classification 328
Edit Classification 330
Delete (Suggested Classification) 332
Suggested Classification Warnings 334
Default Label (Policies) 335
Add a new Default Label 336
Properties (Default Label) 336
Delete (Default Label) 337
Rules Management 337
What is a Rule? 338
Set Rules Tab 340
Add a rule 341
Rules wizard operation 343
Rule Icons 345
Edit (Rule) 346
Delete (Rule) 347

p6
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Copy (Rule) 347

Defining Label Conditions 350
Rule overlap handling 351
Move rule up / down 352
Rules supported 352
Add rules 353
Attachment List Notes 364
Add Header / Footer additional notes 366
Removable Visual Markings 367
Visual Markings Controlled by the User 371
Examples of FLOT 371
Apply rules 372
Apply rules - descriptions 373
Apply RMS policy notes 376
Azure RMS support 376
Check rules 377
Check these mandatory selectors 379
Check for Author label change 380
Check for label change 382
Check for the high-water mark 384
Attachment Handling 384
User experience v ariance between Email, OWA and Notes 386
Check clearance for attachments, recipients or originator 387
Check subject length 388
Check message size 388
Check content 389
Check number of recipients 390
Check for these recipients 391
Check for Reply to All response 392
Check for use of default label 392
Check with the user 393
Check these selectors for expired dates 393
Check for additional recipients on reply or forward 394
Check for unlabelled attachments 394
Check for a suggested classification 395
Check RMS user defined permissions for uncleared recipients 398
Check for RMS protection 398
Warn / Prev ent / Audit / Challenge options for Check rules 401
Challenge Options 402
Clearance Settings 404
Perform Clearance Checks when sending messages 405
Check Attachments/Recipients/Originator - Warn / Prev ent 405
Email Domains 407
Add a new email domain clearance 408
Edit email domain clearance 410
Delete email domain clearance 410
Clearance Library 411
Add a New Clearance 412
Properties (Clearance) 413
Delete (Clearance) 413
Dynamic Clearances 415
Add a new Dynamic Clearance 415
Properties (Dynamic Clearances) 417
Delete (Dynamic Clearance) 417
Email, OWA, Mail Add-in, Notes and Mobile Differences 418
OWA Classifier and Classifier Mail Add-in v s Email Classifier 419
Notes Classifier vs Email Classifier 420
Mobile Classifier vs Email Classifier 421
Browser Support (OWA) 421
Configuration Deployment 422
Configuration Registry Search Algorithm 424
Client Registry Locations 424
Classifier Service Registry Locations 424
Exchange Classifier Registry Locations 425
Classifier Administration Registry Locations 425
Set the Registry Keys directly 425
Set the Registry Keys using Group Policy 426
Applying supplied ADM/ADMX /ADML files 429

p7
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Registry Keys set by Group Policy 431

Label Configuration Registry settings 431
Registry Settings 432
Service Mode Registry Settings 433
Web Host Settings 435
Client Configuration Registry settings 436
Settings to Auto Enable Microsoft Office Header / Footer controls 437
File Classifier Registry settings 438
Extending the Activ e Directory Schema 439
Software Deployment 439
Appendix - Label Propagation Mechanisms 440
Plugins 445
Appendix - Example of ‘Best matching Rule’ Algorithm 446
Appendix - BJTrace Logging Facility 449
Appendix - Auditing Event Messages 450
Appendix - Content Checking File Types Supported 457
Appendix - Address Book to AD attribute mapping 458

p8
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

CLASSIFIER ADMINISTRATION SERVER GUIDE

This Classifier Administration Guide (PDF) and on-line Help provides reference for Classifier
administrators planning to use Classifier Administration. It assumes knowledge of the terminology
defined in Suite Overview.
Note: In your environment you may already use the term Classification to refer to the value(s)
selected to classify an item. Throughout Classifier documentation the term Label is used for this
purpose, Classification is sometimes used in examples as the name of the first Selector.
The Classifier Administration Server Guide describes all the features available through the Classifier
Administration web interface. The Classifier Documentation topic lists the other Classifier documents
and summarises their contents.
Many topics include a reference at the head of the topic to the Classifier Administration Server
location that relates to that topic. The references are of the form
Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Set
Selectors]/{selector}->Properties
 indicates a sub-node in the tree in the left-hand pane.
/ indicates a choice from the central pane.
{item} indicates a site defined item to be selected.
[tab] indicates a Tab in the central pane to be selected.
-> indicates select the action (sometimes from a context menu).
Throughout this document, the instructions direct you to select a particular Classifier Administration
action from the Actions Pane.
A list of actions is presented at the top of the Actions Pane relevant to the item selected in the
left-hand pane: for example, Marking Library - Add a new marking format .

In addition, a list of actions is presented at the bottom of the Actions Pane relevant to the item
selected in the middle pane. Summary Marking - Properties, Copy and Delete in the
example below.

Summary Marking.

Classifier Administration Server lets administrators:

 Define the Classifier Configuration.
 Publish Configuration, including the Policies based on that Configuration, to groups of users.
 Define SMTP domain clearances.

p9
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

If you are new to Classifier, it is recommended that you read the Classifier Getting Started Guide.
Environment requirements are defined in Release Notes. Environment deployment options are defined in
the Classifier Evaluation Guides.
Note: Classifier Administration's target environment assumes screen resolutions of 1280 * 800 or
better. The application can run at smaller resolutions, but some operational issues may be encountered,
particularly using minimal screen sizes. For example, running Classifier Administration in Windows Safe
Mode can result in a screen resolution of 640x480. The interface will be mostly useable, but exceptions
such as Buttons at the bottom of some dialogs (Rules Wizard, Clearance Wizards) are hidden behind the
taskbar (Window s 7). Auto hiding the taskbar may help in this circumstance.

The document provides various general information:

 Classifier Documentation
 Common Label Handling Features
 Common Label Interface Actions

and then describes the Classifier Administration interface:

 Classifier Administration
 Settings applicable across the organisation
o Global Settings
o Image Library
o User Message Library
o User Interface Library
 Labelling Configurations
o Selector Library
o Marking Library
o Content Library
o Configuration Settings
 Policies Configuration Settings
 Clearance Settings
 Email, OWA, Mail Add-in, Notes and Mobile Differences
 Configuration deployment
 Software deployment

The various topics provide details of which Classifier applications support which features.
Note: Actual default values depend on the Configuration Template used to establish your configuration.
Where this document defines default settings, it assumes the ‘Empty’ Configuration Template has been
used.

Classifier Documentation
The following documents can (mostly) be found under the Classifier Administration folder on the
Classifier Product Suite Base bundle.
Note: user specific documentation is not supplied with any of the Classifier client side products. Instead
Email, Office, OWA and Notes Classifier support the ability to invoke URL links to an organisation defined
w ebsite, intranet or similar to provide guidance relating to their own labelling terminology. This is
implemented through Classifier Configuration.

Overview Documents

Suite Overview The starting point for those new to the Classifier product family. It
introduces terminology used by the Classifier family of products; provides
examples of how Classifier Labelling appears to the user; provides a
summary of the part that may be played by Active Directory when
deploying Classifier applications; and summarises some of the key

p10
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

features supported by the various Classifier products.

Quick Start Documents

Getting Started Shows you how to quickly install Classifier Administration Server and Email
Guide and Office Classifier products; establish a test configuration on a Windows
desktop and begin to explore the user effects of that configuration.
PowerShell Getting Shows you how to quickly install Classifier Administration Server's
Started Guide Pow erShell feature, establish a test configuration using PowerShell
commands and begin to explore the user effects of that configuration
Administration If you are familiar with Classifier Administration Console, this guide
Transition Guide highlights key differences w ith the Classifier Administration Server. It
show s you how to quickly transition to using Classifier Administration
Server to maintain your Classifier configuration.
Deploym ent Documents

Planning Describes the various steps and considerations from initial familiarisation
Considerations through to live deployment of the Classifier products.
Evaluation Documents

Evaluation Guide Describes how to create and configure a working system that you can then
use for evaluation or testing.
Reference Documents

Administration Server The PDF version of the Classifier Administration Server on-line Help,
Guide providing full details of the various features and options supported by the
Classifier applications. It describes Email Classifier, Office Classifier, OWA
(This document)
Classifier, Mail Add-in, Notes Classifier and Mobile Classifier features.
Administration Server Describes installation of the Classifier Administration Server product.
Installation Guide

Box Classifier Guide is an integration application which

Describes Box Classifier which
controls documents labelled using Classifier within the Box
(www.box.com) environment.
Classifier for McAfee Describes how the product is installed and used with the McAfee ePolicy
ePO and DXL Orchestrator to provide reporting abilities. This guide is delivered with the
associated product.
Exchange Classifier Describes the Exchange Classifier product which supports the extension of
Guide Microsoft Exchange (Hub) Transport Agent(s) to apply configurable
Classifier policy defining various Classifier rules (e.g. Add a FLOT, Check
clearance for recipients, add recipient, etc.) to be applied to inbound and
outbound messages passing through the Transport Agent. An optional
Message Tracking service can also be deployed which can be used by the
Transport Agent(s) to look up original message labels if a reply without a
label is received.
File Classifier Guide Comprehensive guide to the File Classifier product which supports
Labelling of files through Windows Explorer.
Frequently Asked Provides answers to commonly asked questions about the Classifier suite
Questions of products.
Mac Classifier This document summarises the Classifier features of Mac Classifier.
Supplement
(A supplement to the
main Administration
Guide)

Management Agent Describes the features provided by the optional Classifier Management
Agent.
Mobile Classifier Describes installation of the Mobile Classifier Service product. The product
Service Installation is a proxy server that allow s the Mobile Classifier App running on mobile
Guide and tablet devices to access Microsoft Exchange and/or Office 365

p11
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

mailboxes and provide Classifier functionality on the mailbox contents.

Notes Classifier Describes installation of the Notes Classifier product. The product
Installation Guide supports labelling of messages and the application of Classifier rules from
the Classifier configuration. The features supported are summarised in
Notes Classifier vs Email Classifier.
Power Classifier for Describes Pow er Classifier which supports Labelling of files through an
Files Guide application and/or using PowerShell commands.
Power Classifier for Describes Pow er Classifier for SharePoint product which supports Labelling
SharePoint Guide of items within a SharePoint library through an application and/or using
Pow erShell commands.
SharePoint Classifier Describes SharePoint Classifier which extends Microsoft SharePoint to
Guide support Classifier Labels in document library views.
Classifier Reporting Guides
(delivered with the Reporting Product)
Reporting Console Describes the Reporting Console Features supplied (Data dashboards).
Guide
Reporting System Describes how the product is deployed.
Guide

COMMON LABEL HANDLING FEATURES

This section describes label handling features (e.g. support for label propagation between Classifier
products) that are common to the various applications (Email Classifier, Office Classifier, OWA, Notes
and Mobile Classifier), and usually available if a Classifier product (e.g. Microsoft Excel, Pow erPoint,
Project, Visio, Word, Outlook, OW A, Mail Add-in, Mobile or Lotus Notes) is installed and enabled. Any
application specific variance or licence dependence is highlighted in each topic.
These features are:

 Label Propagation
 Printable Labels
 Recognition of Received Label values
 Mandatory Selectors
 Default Label Values
 Insert Marking as Field Code (Word only)
 Document Properties (Office Classifier)
 Message Properties (Email, OWA, Mail Add-in, Notes and Mobile)
 Use of Templates (Office Classifier and Outlook)

p12
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Label Propagation
Classifier product architecture defines how products will operate to ensure that label information applied
under one Classifier application can be recognised and processed by another Classifier application, or
indeed a suitable third party application.
Office Classifier stores label information in the properties of a document allowing other Classifier
applications to process the object according to the rules defined by the site.
Email Classifier, OWA, Notes and Mobile Classifier store label information in custom properties of a
message allowing other Classifier applications to process the object according to the rules defined by
the site.
Label Propagation includes the following configurable features:

 Use label values in templates as the initial label values for any derived item (see Use of Templates).
 Recognise and use label values from a received message as the initial label value for any reply or
forward of that received message.

 The ability in Email, OWA and Notes Classifier to ensure that the label associated with the email
message ‘dominate’s all labels associated with any Classifier labelled attachments (documents or
messages; or for emails only - Portion Mark). This usage is described further in the section Check for
the high-water mark.
Note: Further details of how one Classifier application handles label values assigned by another
Classifier application can be found in the section Appendix - Label Propagation Mechanisms .
Note: Saving a document as another type (e.g. Word --> TXT or EXCEL --> CSV prompts that
information will be lost. The Classifier label information is one of the casualties of such operations.

p13
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Printable Labels
Office Classifier allows label values to be stored as markings in a variety of document locations that
w ill appear when printed including:

 Header
 Footer
 Watermark (Word only)
 Field codes (W ord only)
 Portion Mark (Word, Pow erPoint and Excel)
Email, OWA, Mail Add-in, Notes and Mobile Classifier allow markings to be assigned to content
and/or properties that are normally included in printed material:

 FLOT
 LLOT
 Start and/or end of Subject
 Portion Mark (Outlook only)
Note: Printing uses standard Outlook / OWA / Notes mechanisms. Therefore if the only label value on
an email message is an X-Header then any hardcopy of the email message will be effectively unlabelled.

Recognition of received Label values

If, when an existing document is opened, Office Classifier cannot find the 'Classifier label' in the
expected property, it checks the document for any recognisable label values in the defined Label
Locations (e.g. Document properties).
If, when an email or w eb email message is received, Email/ OWA / Mail Add-in / Notes Classifier
cannot find the 'Classifier label' in the expected custom property, it will then check the message for any
recognisable label values in the defined label locations (e.g. X-Header, FLOT and Subject).
If more than one label location is found containing a recognisable label value, then the configurable
relative precedence defined through Label Locations is used to determine the authoritative value to use.
The most significant value is then used as the document or message label value.
Note: Further details of how one Classifier application handles label values assigned by another
Classifier application can be found in Appendix - Label Propagation Mechanisms . This appendix also
covers files labelled by File or Power Classifier products.

Mandatory Selectors
Each Selector may be designated as Mandatory through application specific Check these mandatory
selectors rules as described in Check rules.
Mandatory selectors are indicated on the label selection interface by an asterisk ( *).
Display of the * can be inhibited using the Indicate mandatory selector check failures setting.

Default Label Values

Whenever a new document or email is created, Classifier must determine the initial value of the label.
This initial value will be blank for each label selector unless the Classifier policy in use specifies a
default value for that selector, in this case the default value will appear as the initial value.
Default values are defined as selector options in the policy, either using Selector Properties / Options , or

p14
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

for assisted labelling policies using Edit selector options.

Insert Marking Label as Field Code (Word only)

Note: If a Word document is opened via an Office Web App, all field codes will be presented as [Field]
rather than the actual value as would be presented when viewed using Microsoft Word.
A label value can be inserted as a field code in a Word document. It will use the Summary Marking
format. The feature is enabled/disabled using the Show 'Insert label' context menu setting.
This feature is designed for Administrators to create template documents with rich headers and footers
containing document label information.
To insert a field code:
 Select a Label Value for the document using the label drop down selectors.
 Navigate to where the field code should be inserted.
 On the context menu (right mouse button), click Insert Label. The label value is placed at
the location of the cursor as a field code value.

Document Properties (Office Classifier)

Note: This feature is only applicable to Office Classifier.
In Excel, PowerPoint, Project or Word, when a label has been selected, a number of private properties
relating to the Classifier label are stored in document properties.

Note: Visio does not support Custom Properties, and the Classifier Label value is held using a different
mechanism.
Note: Saving a document as another type (e.g. Word --> TXT or EXCEL --> CSV prompts to indicate
that information w ill be lost. The Classifier label information is one of the casualties of such operations.
Note: Saving as PDF: You can populate various standard document properties ( Title, Author,
Subject and Keywords) that will be propagated if you save an Office document as PDF. However,
Office applications do NOT propagate any custom properties to the PDF. In particular the
bjDocumentSecurityLabel is NOT propagated. Email, OW A and Notes Classifier will check defined
label locations for recognisable labels in standard PDF file properties for the Check for the high-water
mark and Add an attachment list rules.

The properties can be viewed using standard Office application actions. These vary across the
applications, and Office versions:

For Office (Excel, PowerPoint and Word) 2010:

 Click the Office button then choose Prepare and Properties. A task pane w ill display.
 On the task pane, click Document Properties then Advanced Properties. A dialog will
display with a number of tabs.
 Select the Custom Tab.
For Project 2010 or 2013:
 Select File / Info and then choose Project Information / Advanced Properties .
 Select the Custom Tab.
For other Office 2013 applications along w ith Office 2016, 2019 and 365:
 Select File / Info and then choose Properties.

p15
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Select the Custom Tab.

Document Properties
The private document properties maintained by Classifier are listed below . These properties should not
be modified by users or administrators:
Property Name Description
bjDocumentSecurityLabel The combined markings. Format is controlled by the Custom format
for 'Label Summary' custom document property
bjDocumentLabelXML XML format of the document Label.
bjDocumentLabelXML-0 Internal XML identifier
docIndexRef Unique document identifier.
bjFooterBothDocProperty Only if a Footer rule has been applied
bjHeaderBothDocProperty Only if a Header rule has been applied

Message Properties (Email, OWA, Mail Add-in, Notes and

Mobile)

Note: This topic is only applicable to Email, OW A, Mail Add-in, Notes and Mobile Classifier.
When a message is saved or sent, any label value selected is stored in a custom property. Any markings
defined by applicable rules are stored in the relevant locations. The values stored may be readily visible
if they are in a visible location (e.g. Subject), but others are not readily visible (e.g. x-headers).
The private properties maintained by the various Classifier mail applications should not be modified by
users or administrators, but are documented here for information purposes:
Property Name Description
(x-)bjprotectivemarking The Classifier encoded (SISL) label.
docIndexRef Unique document identifier (used for audit trail purposes).

Note: In a Lotus Notes environment: to cause the x-bjprotectivemarking to be transmitted across an

SMTP connection, bjprotectivemarking must be included in the Domino server list of x-headers to be
transmitted across that connection (the "x-" is automatically applied by Domino).

p16
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Use of Templates
Note: This feature is not supported by OWA Classifier, Mail Add-in, Mobile or Notes Classifier
The Office applications allow you to create template files that can be used as the basis for new
documents.
You can set Classifier label values on these templates. When you subsequently create a new file using a
labelled template, Classifier uses the template label as the initial label value, rather than using any
default label setting.
If the template has no Classifier label value set then the configured default label value (if any) will be
used.

COMMON LABEL INTERFACE ACTIONS

These mechanisms and actions relate to the interface presented to the user to select label values. They
are described under:

 Label Selection Interfaces (Selectors and Values presented)

o Ribbon examples
o Label Selection dialog
o Favourites
o Portion Mark
o Recently Used Labels and Portion Marks
o Single Click Operation
o Assisted Labelling Operation
o Tabs (defined via a policy)
o Mobile Classifier user interface

o Classifier Decision Tree

 Label Options (Clear, Default and Link to Site Defined Help)

 Folder View Labelling Operation

Text presented to the user can be configured in one of four ways:

 User Message Library - Messages displayed to users if Rules trigger. The product provides default
text.

 Marking Library - Markings that are applied to items (Messages, Documents etc.).

 User Interface Library - Text presented through standard dialogs. The product provides default text.

 Configuration of the names of Selectors, Selector Values and Alternative names using Selector
Library and Policy Label UI features.

Label Selection Interfaces

Note: There is a subtle distinction between an unlabelled document (where there is no Classifier Label
property), and a document that is labelled but has no selected values (where there is an empty
Classifier Label property). In either case, the Summary Marking presented to the user will be the text
configured via Text to display if no marking is available .
Classifier applications allow the user to select labels from Selectors and Values presented through the
Ribbon. The Selectors, Selector Values and associated options are defined in the Classifier policy
configured for the current user. Further details can be found under Policy Selector properties / Options .
Circumstances arise where the user needs to select a label value and the Ribbon is not available (e.g.

p17
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Mandatory Label value missing when sending a message). In such situations, Classifier applications will
present the selector choices in a Label Selection dialog.
If Masking of Selectors against Clearance is Enabled, then the list of values presented for each Selector
w ill be restricted by the user's clearance.
These basic label selection mechanisms may be extended by use of Portion Mark, Favourites,
Recently Used Labels and Portion Marks , Single Click operation, Assisted Labelling operation
and the definition of Tabs in a Policy.
Display selector values as buttons may be Enabled for single selection list selectors within the
policy (Single selection list options ). This will affect the presentation of the Ribbon, the Label Selection
dialog, Assisted Labelling operation and Tabs as described under those topics.

 Ribbon Examples
 Label Selection dialog
 Portion Mark
 Favourites
 Recently Used Labels and Portion Marks
 Single Click operation
 Assisted Labelling Operation
 Tabs (defined via a Policy)
 Mobile Classifier user interface

Ribbon Examples

This topic contains examples of label selection via the Ribbon.

Note: The examples below show the standard operation. This will be modified if you make use of the
Favourites, or Recently Used Labels and Portion Marks or Single Click operation or Assisted Labelling
operation, or Tabs features.
Label selection is presented along with the Label Options menu in the Classifier label item in the ribbon,
subject to the setting of Remove Classifier Options from the ribbon .
The placement of the Classifier label item w ithin the ribbon can be configured using the Classifier ribbon
group location setting.
Note: In some circumstances (e.g. Office 2013) the ribbon w ill not appear when a read only document is
opened until you choose Edit.
Note: For Outlook, you can use the Show Classifier on ribbon when reading to hide the Classifier Ribbon
entry when reading a message.

Outlook 2010 - Label Selection

p18
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

The dialog above show s the first (Single selection list) selector with Show value as set to Colour and
text and Display selector values as buttons option Enabled (Single selection list options ), the
second (Single selection list) selector has the option Disabled and that selector appears as a drop down
selection list. Note that items are displayed in columns and that the width of the 'column' is governed by
the widest element.
The selector captions (Classification and Department) appear in the ribbon. You can use the policy
property Show selector captions on the ribbon to change this effect.
The Favourites button in the examples above will only appear if Display of Favourites button is
Enabled (see Favourites for further details).
The Portion Mark button show n in the examples above will only appear if the option is Enabled for the
current application (see Portion Mark for further details).
Note: Favourites are not supported under OWA Classifier or the Mail Add-in.
Note: Portion Mark is not supported under OW A Classifier, Mail Add-in or Notes Classifier.
Ribbon handling
The Office ribbon places a limit on the number of items that can be placed inside a group on the ribbon.
If a single/multi selector contains many values and is configured to be show n as buttons (or checkboxes
in the case of multi-select selectors) then Classifier may not display the items on the ribbon, instead
the selector w ill need to be set via the label dialog. The limits are:

 If the policy contains at least one selector to be displayed as a button on the ribbon and no selectors
that are to be displayed as checkboxes on the ribbon, then Classifier can display up to 150 items in
the ribbon for the selector(s).

 If the policy contains at least one selector that is to be displayed as checkboxes on the ribbon and
no selectors that are to be displayed as buttons on the ribbon, then Classifier can display up to 150
items in the ribbon for the selector(s).

 If the policy contains at least one selector that is to be displayed as buttons on the ribbon and at
least one selector that is to be displayed as checkboxes on the ribbon, then w e allow up to 100
items to be displayed

Label Selection Dialog

In various situations the user will need to choose a label when the ribbon is unavailable. For example if
a check mandatory selectors rule detects that a mandatory selector has no value chosen.
In such situations, Classifier applications present the Classifier Label Selection dialog which will show
the selectors and values pertinent to the current user. This dialog is also used to choose values for
selectors that cannot be displayed in the ribbon. For example, more than three selectors or multiple
selection list selectors.
The dialog below shows the first (Single selection list) selector with Display selector values as
buttons option Enabled. The second (Single selection list) selector has the option Disabled and that
selector appears as a drop down selection list. Refer to Single selection list options for more
information.

p19
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Select Label - all selectors

Note: The example above displays the standard operation. This is modified if you make use of the
Favourites, or Recently Used Labels and Portion Marks or Single Click operation or Assisted Labelling
operation or Tabs features. The presentation is slightly different under OWA.

OWA
In an OWA environment, label selection and the standard label actions appear on an extended message
compose form.

OWA Label interface actions

Mail Add-in
In a Mail add-In environment, label selection and the standard label actions appear on an extended
message compose form.

p20
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Mail Add-in New Message

The Classifier label interface is invoked using the Classifier button found in the bottom right hand
corner of the New Message dialog. The example below does NOT have single click enabled.

Mail Add-in Label selection dialog

Notes
In a Notes environment, the current label setting is displayed, but the label value is set via the
configured Classifier label dialog if the Classify button is clicked.

p21
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Notes Classifier New message

Favourites

Note: This feature is not supported by OWA Classifier. Classifier Mail Add-in, Notes 8 and Mobile
Classifier.
Note: Availability of the Favourites button is controlled by the Display of Favourites button setting.
Users can use the Favourite Labels feature to remember their favourite label values (on that
w orkstation), and to choose the label value directly rather than choosing each selector value in turn.
The feature can be used alongside the Recently used Labels and Portion Marks features.
Access to the feature is via the Favourites drop dow n menu in the Classifier label ribbon bar with
availability controlled by Configuration Settings / General Settings / Display of Favourites button .
If the Recently Used feature is also enabled (Maximum number of labels to show > zero), then the
Favourites menu of actions w ill appear as:

Favourites - Office 2010 and Recently used

Note: The favourites and recently used values that appear in the menus are initially presented using the
marking format associated w ith the General Settings / Custom format for Summary Markings .
Favourites can subsequently be renamed as described below.
The user can:

 Add current label to favourites - it will then appear as a sub item in the menu.

 Organise Favourites - which shows icons allowing the user to manage the order in which the
Favourites appear, change the name presented for a Favourite, or delete entries from the list:

p22
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Organise Favourites.

 The Rename action is inline which makes it easier to replace the text presented in the favourites
list.

Rename Favourite.

 Set current label as default allows the user to set the current label as their own personal default
rather than using any policy defined default. This option is only available if User Selectable
Default Classification is Enabled in Properties (Policy).

 Select a Favourite label from the sub-list (e.g. Public Sales) - the label value then appears in the
main label selection display.

 Select a Recent label from the Recent sub-list (e.g. Public).

Portion Mark

Note: This feature is not available under OWA Classifier, Classifier Mail Add-in, Notes Classifier nor
Mobile Classifier, and is not applicable to Visio and Project.
A Portion Mark is usually an abbreviated marking derived from a label value. For example, [P] for
Public.
Availability of the feature is controlled by application specific options as described in Portion Marking.
If the feature is enabled, then Portion Mark appears in the Classifier label ribbon.

p23
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Portion Mark menu - Outlook 2010

If the Recently Used Labels and Portion Marks feature is enabled, then the recently used portion
mark (label values) will appear as a sub-list.
Note: The portion mark and recently used values that appear in the menus are presented using the
marking format associated w ith the General Settings / Custom format for Summary Markings .
The user can:

 Select a Recent Portion Mark from the sub-list.

 Choose Portion Mark... which will present the dialog below, allowing the user to select a specific
label, or choose a favourite label, or a recent portion mark subject to their availability:

Portion Marking - Favourites and recently used

Favourites will only appear if there are favourites stored.
Recently used values w ill only appear if the Display of Favourites button is Enabled. The number of
recently used portion marks that are remembered is governed by the Maximum number of labels to
show setting.

Recently Used Labels and Portion Marks

Note: This feature is not available under OWA Classifier nor Classifier Mail Add-in.
Note: The feature is unavailable unless Display of Favourites button is Enabled, as this is how
recently used labels are accessed.
Note: Recently used labels are displayed using the Custom format for Summary Markings .
These features are only enabled if Maximum number of labels to show is set greater than zero.
The Recently Used Portion Marks is only relevant if Portion Marking is Enabled in the application
(see Portion Marking).
Label values are only added to the list of 'Recently used labels' when a message is submitted or a
document is saved - selection of a label value does NOT update the list.
Recently used labels are available to the user under Favourites.
Recently used portion marks are available to the user under Portion Mark.

p24
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Single Click operation

Note: This mode of operation is only available if the current policy has Use Single Click with pre-defined
labels configured.
The administrator can use the Use Single Click with pre-defined labels feature to configure up to tw elve
separate buttons, each with its own Label value, Caption, Tooltip and Colour or Image that replace
the standard drop downs in the Classifier Label Ribbon. Single Click can be used in conjunction with
Assisted Labelling.
Note: The actual appearance shown below will be modified according to whether other features such as
Favourites or Recently Used Labels and Portion Marks are in use.
Note: The matrix of single click buttons displayed is affected by a windows re-size operation, so short
captions are advisable.
The user is presented with the buttons configured, and selects the associated label by clicking the
appropriate button (Pub / Sales or Conf / Board in the Outlook example below, or Non-Business etc. in
the OWA example).

Outlook Single Click operation

p25
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

OWA Single Click UI

The user still has the ability to select individual Selector values by clicking the Classifier label dialog box
launcher in Outlook, the Select Label button in OWA, to launch the general label selection dialog:

Label Selection dialog

Note: In Outlook, the dialog box launcher can be replaced by a button by enabling the Display of
Label Dialog launch button setting.
If single click is in use; and the label selection dialog needs to be presented (e.g. mandatory selector
missing when replying to an unlabelled message; and there is no default value defined; and the user
clicks Change on the No label Policy Check dialog), then an intermediate dialog may be presented
allowing a Single Click button to be clicked, or the full label selection dialog (above) to be invoked by
clicking the 'Current Marking' button (No Marking in the example below ).

p26
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Label Selection dialog - Single Click

The Continue button allow s you to proceed without selecting a label value. The dialog above is changed
slightly if Display of Label Dialog launch button is Enabled.

Assisted Labelling Operation

Note: These features are not supported by Mobile Classifier.

Assisted Labelling can be configured to guide user selection of label values by limiting the choices of
selectors and / or selector values depending upon the value chosen for a preceding selector.
Note: The actual appearance shown below will be modified according to whether other features such as
Favourites or Recently Used Labels and Portion Marks are in use.
The following show s a simple example of the user operation where selecting a value for the category
selector in the ribbon adds a second selector (Annotation) with the values of Annotation being tailored
according to the choice of Category.

Office Classifier
Initially the Classifier label shows only the category selector with no default value.

Initial state - no category selected

The actual presentation may vary if favourites or portion mark are configured to be available.
If Display selector values as buttons is Enabled (Single selection list options ), this dialog might
appear as:

Initial state - Display as buttons

Selecting Cat 3 will add the Annotation selector to the display and present the configured Annotation
values.

p27
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Cat 3 with Annotations

If there are more than three selectors or selector types that cannot be shown in the ribbon, then the
label selection button may appear as per the examples below depending upon space utilisation within
the window:

Select label (a)

Select label (b)

Select label (c)

More examples of the user experience can be found in the following, each of which describes the
configuration and user experience for a particular scenario:

 Example 1 - Categories with many Annotations

 Example 2 - An additional user choice if Category 2 is selected

 Example 3 - Separation of Personal and Corporate information

Label Selection dialog
The label selection dialog may sometimes be presented when assisted labelling is in use. The configured
selectors and values appear / are hidden in a similar manner to the ribbon operation. In the following
example the Fourth selector appears, but w ould be hidden if a different value were selected for the
Third selector.

p28
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Label Selection dialog - Assisted Labelling

The dialog will be populated with appropriate defaults.
OWA Classifier
Initially only the first selector is show n - in this example Classification:

OWA Assisted Labelling initial state

Selecting a value extend the label selection according to the configuration. In the example below,
selecting General Business has made Annotation available for selection.

p29
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

OWA Assisted Labelling General Business selected

Notes Classifier
Notes Classifier operates only in response to the Classify button, (there is no ribbon equivalent), and
for assisted labelling operations the Label selection dialog is always presented showing the relevant
configured values for each selector.

p30
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Classifier Decision Tree

The Decision Tree is an alternative way for the user to generate a label for an email or a
document.

It aims to reduce the need for the user to know details of what actual label to pick, and
instead presents a series of questions for them to describe the work that they are doing. For
example, it’s a personal email, it’s related to a proof of concept, research and development, a
purchase request for a new toaster, etc. By answering the questions posed a user is guided to
select the most appropriate label.

The Decision Tree is displayed in its own dialog on the client, invoked by the user selecting a
ribbon button or from within the Classifier Label Selection dialog. It is independent of the
other means of selecting a label. All methods – Single-Click, Label Dialog, Decision Tree – can
be configured to be available in a policy concurrently.

A Decision Tree is created by referencing Question and Answer items defined in a Question
Library.

A different Decision Tree may be defined for each configured Policy.

For more detailed information, see the Question Library.

To enable the Decision Tree, see Enable the Decision Tree Functionality.

To configure the Decision Tree, see Decision Tree Options.

Classifier Decision Tree Terminology

 Question – A question presented on the client dialog that offers a choice or requires some
input from the user, e.g. Is this a personal or business email?

 Answer – The choices available in response to the question, e.g. It’s a personal email.

 Label – a specific label, label(or part of a label) to be applied as a result of a user

choosing a specific action, e.g. It’s a personal email – the label is then set to “UNMARKED
EXTERNAL”.

 DT – Decision Tree.

 QL – Question Library.

p31
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Decision Making Process Example

This is a simple example configuration. The user is asked to select the department that will
own the document and what type of data the document contains. If a user chooses a
particular answer then a label can be set.

An example configuration of a Dec ision Tree.

p32
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

The data classification label questions follow the exam ple configuration of the Dec ision Tree in
the previous picture.

p33
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Configuration of the Decision Tree

An Administrator can use the decision tree as an alternate way to generate a label for an
email or document. It presents a series of questions such that a user can describe the work
they are doing allowing them to be guided to select the m ost appropriate label.

Question Library
The Question Library (QL) contains questions and pre-defined answers for eac h question. It
enables the reuse of questions between policies and groups potential answers together. This is
a new section within the admin tool and is located together with the other libraries outside of and
available to the policies. It w ill contain a collection of independent questions, each having a number of
associated answers.

Decision Tree Editor

A different Decision Tree may configured for each policy. The Decision Tree Editor operates in
a similar way to the Assisted Labelling Editor and when enabled is presented on a new
Decision Tree tab in the adm in tool.

User Interface Library

There is a user interface area for the Decision Tree dialog allowing c ustomisation of the dialog
that appears on the client. See the User Interface Library.

Refreshing the User Interface

 Renaming of selectors and selector values w ill be applied to any in use in the Decision Tree.
Therefore renaming then sw itching back to the Decision Tree will show the new names in the
configured labels.

 Changes of selectors in the policy (unless prevented by the ‘in use’ check) will be reflected in the
label dialog in the Decision Tree editor. That is, the currently available selectors and values,
together w ith colours and captions, will be shown w hen the Add Label dialog (or its corresponding
Properties instance) is next opened.

 Question Library changes are monitored and updated where they are used in the Decision Tree
Editors (all policies).

For more detailed information, see the Question Library.

p34
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Decision Tree in the Client

The Decision Tree dialog in the client is launched by a ribbon button. This button is available
when composing emails and when editing documents. The Decision Tree dialog may also be
invoked from the Label Selection dialog.

Note: The Decision Tree in the client feature will not be available for Sent Item email
messages.

The following images show examples of how the Decision Tree Dialog may appear in the
Client.

Single-select example using combo style options.

p35
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Single-select example using radio buttons.

Multi-select example using check boxes.

Decision Tree Option in Outlook

Note: Check that the Decision Tree has been enabled in the Classifier Administration User
Interface. This is found under Labelling Configuration>Policies
(Policy)>Properties>Use Decision Tree .

Note: More questions can be added under Labelling Configuration>Policies

(Policy)>Decision Tree tab.

p36
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Selecting a message option label.

Decision Tree Feature in O utlook

To see the Decision Tree Feature in Outlook:

1. In the Message menu, select the Use Guidance icon. A Classification Guidance window
w ill appear.
2. The description w ill ask, What kind of message is it? Select an option in the list. Once the option
is selected a label will appear.

3. Click on the OK button. T he resulting label will be applied to the em ail. Other options are:

 Clear - The Clear button will reset the label back to its initial state, i.e. em pty.

 Cancel - If Cancel is chosen, no changes will be made to the label.

Mobile Classifier user interface

Mobile Classifier is an email App that can be installed on a supported mobile device. The App will appear
as an entry in the App list either as an icon, or as an icon with associated text:

Mobile App
When view ing messages in a folder the classification value (if any) appears as follows:

p37
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Mobile folder view

When composing a message the classification value is shown as a 'summary marking':

Mobile compose message

Clicking the classification value displays the single click selection list:

Mobile classification selection

Label Options
Email, Office and OWA Classifier present the standard label options menu. The actions supported are:

 Clear (for Notes Classifier this only appears on the label selection dialog.
 Default (for Notes Classifier this only appears on the label selection dialog.)
 Link to site defined help (for Notes Classifier this only appears on the label selection dialog)
 Show Summary Marking (only appears if relevant)
 About Classifier (not available under Notes Classifier)

p38
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Label Interface Options

There are some differences between Outlook and OWA as per the examples in Ribbon examples.
This menu is by default displayed in the ribbon bar (see Ribbon examples). This operation can be
modified under Office Classifier using the Remove Classifier options from the ribbon.

Clear (Label value)

Note: For Notes Classifier this only appears on the label selection dialog. Not available under Mobile
Classifier.
This action clears the current values for each selector.
You can control whether this option appears using the Show labeller 'Clear' button setting.

Default

Note: For Notes Classifier this only appears on the label selection dialog. Not applicable under Mobile
Classifier.
This action restores the label value to the default label values defined by the policy.
You can control whether this option appears using the Show labeller 'Default' button setting.

Link to site defined help

Note: Not supported by Mail Add-in or Mobile Classifier. Only appears on the Label selection dialog for
Notes Classifier.
This action will open the link configured in URL for your labelling help site .
This action will be unavailable (greyed) if the setting is not configured.
Note: Whilst OWA Classifier supports the Help links defined in a Classifier Configuration, the nature of
OWA access may mean that a defined link is not accessible due to external access controls (e.g.
additional authentication requirements). Classifier Mail Add-in does not support this feature.

Show Summary Marking

Note: This is only applicable to Office Classifier. OW A Classifier and Mail Add-in Classifier do not allow
the user to close the Summary Marking area.
This action allows the user to re-instate the Summary Marking area. The action w ill only appear if the
following are all true:

 Show Summary Marking in task pane is Enabled (Disabled means the summary marking area never
appears).

 Force Summary Marking in task pane is Disabled (Enabled means the summary marking area
cannot be closed).

p39
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 The user has closed the summary marking area that normally appears at the bottom of the
application window, AND the current environment does not provide another means of restoring the
summary marking area (e.g. Outlook provides an expand option after closure).

About Classifier

Note: Not available under Notes Classifier, Classifier Mail Add-in, nor Mobile Classifier.
Selecting About Classifier shows information about the installed Email or Office Classifier product
including the licence state for that client, and configuration location etc.

About Classifier

Folder View Labelling operation

Note: This feature is only applicable to Email Classifier (Outlook) and OWA Classifier.
If the Allow Folder View labelling is Enabled, the user has access to two additional actions:

 A Label selected message(s) button when viewing a folder summary in Outlook (not available
under OWA)

p40
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Folder View - Label selected messages

 A Set Label... button when viewing an open message.

Folder View - Set label

The ribbon may include an additional action ( Show Label in the above) because there are either
selectors not visible on the ribbon (e.g. insufficient space, text selectors etc.) or assisted labelling is
in operation. Show label will present the current settings.

Folder View - Set label OWA

 To label one or more messages in a folder, select the required messages and click Label
selected message(s). To change the label on a message that is open, click Set Label....
 In either case the usual label selection dialog (Single Click if enabled) will appear allowing
choice of the label to be applied to the message(s). The dialog will show the existing label of
the message(s) except if at least one message has a different label in which case the label
values are blank.

Label Selection dialog

 Select the required selector values and click OK to apply the change.
If you label a message AND a label change rule is triggered, then a standard policy check dialog is
presented. If you use Label selected messages with multiple messages selected AND more than one
message triggers a label change rule, then the following dialog appears enabling user modification of
the affected message labels individually by selecting a message and then clicking Label selected
message.

p41
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Folder View Labelling - multiple message check

p42
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

CLASSIFIER ADMINISTRATION
Selecting the root node of Classifier Administration presents the initial display.

Top Level display

Note: It is possible for multiple administrators to maintain the published labelling configuration using
the System Role Management and Lock / Unlock Configuration . in conjunction with Get Server
Configuration and Publish Configuration.
The following courses of action are available:

 The Administrator Management Menu provides access to features relating to the control of
Administrator activities.

 To establish a Classifier configuration for the first time, choose Labelling Configurations .

 To administer an existing local configuration, expand the Labelling Configurations node and
proceed.

 To set/view Classifier administration (audit control) properties, choose Properties (Classifier

Administration).

 To retrieve an existing master configuration to your local File Store, choose Get Server
Configuration.

 To publish the current configuration, choose Publish Configuration.

 To publish a test configuration choose Publish Test Configuration . This test configuration can then be
accessed using the Test Mode Administration application.

 To lock / unlock the configuration, choose Lock / Unlock Configuration .

 To generate configuration information suitable for retrieval from a URL (Classifier Management
Agent), choose Create Web Configuration .

p43
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Administrator Management Menu

Admin : Classifier Administration -> Administrator Management Menu

This menu is available at the top right of the Classifier Administration w indow. It provides access
to the following features:

Administrator Management menu features

 Configuration Folder Paths

 System Roles Management

 Custom Roles for Policies

 User Roles and Permissions

Configuration Folder Paths

Admin : Classifier Administration -> Administrator Management Menu -> Configuration Folder
Paths
This dialog lets an administrator define the folder locations pertinent to Get Configuration, Publish
Configuration, Create Web Configuration and Test Mode.

Configuration Folder Paths

The current values are stored in registry entries on the system running the Administration Server. The
registry keys and initial values are held below HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Boldon James
\BoldonJames Classifier Management WCF Service\:
Item Initial value Further information:

ConfigImportFolder C:\ProgramData\Boldon James\ Get Server Configuration

p44
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Config Import Folder\

ConfigPublishFolder C:\ProgramData\Boldon James\ Publish Configuration

Config Publish Folder\

WebConfigPublishFolder C:\ProgramData\Boldon James\ Create Web Configuration

WebConfig Publish Folder\

TestFolderRoot C:\ProgramData\Boldon James\ Publish Test Configuration

TestMode Folder\

System Roles Management

Admin : Classifier Administration -> Administrator Management Menu -> System Roles
Management
This allows a Full Administrator to assign various Classifier configuration administration capabilities to
individual users or groups.
Initially, at installation, the installer and the user under which the service runs (specified during
installation) are assigned as Full Administrators.
Note: All other users w ho might logon to the Classifier Administration Service will see the basic
Classifier Administration interface, but w ill have no access to any underlying information.

System Roles Management

To change the users/groups assigned to a role:
1. Select the role and click Edit. A dialogue is presented that allow s you to Delete existing entries, or
to use the Find option to supply a value and search for a user/group.
2. Select a found entry and then click Add User / Group.

System Role
Note: The current administrator cannot delete themselves from the Full Administrator set.
Note: Only a user in the Full Administrator role can modify the roles and configuration.

p45
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

The system role capabilities of each category are described in the following table.
Role Description

Full Read and w rite access to all elements of the configuration.

Administrator
The ability to manage these capabilities, and to manage Custom Roles for
Policies.
Includes Publisher capability. Only a user in the Full Administrator role can modify
the roles and configuration.
Note: Only the Full Administrator can perform the Get Server Configuration
action.

Exclusive Exclusive write access to all configuration elements

Modifier Lock
Owner

Full Auditor Read access to all elements of the configuration (e.g. to produce reports).

Publisher Permission to publish the configuration. This role also includes the permissions that
the General Administrator role has.

Policy Read and write access to configuration for all policies. Can lock / unlock the
Administrator publication of the configuration.
Includes Policy Auditor role and General Auditor capabilities .
Can Publish Test Configuration.
Further delineation between users capabilities regarding policies is possible by
configuring Custom Roles for Policies allowing you (for example) to assign specific
policy capabilities to specific users/groups.
Policy Auditor Read access for all policies and policy settings. Includes the General Auditor role.

General Read and w rite access to configuration libraries and settings, but NOT to policies.
Administrator Can lock / unlock publication of the configuration.

General Auditor Read access to configuration libraries and settings, but not to policies.

p46
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Add a User or Group To a Role

An Administrator can add a user or group to system roles in System Roles Management.

Note: The operations for w orking with roles can only be performed by full Administrator users.

Role Menu.
To add a user(s) and/or group(s) to a role:
1. Go to the Classifier Administrator User Interface and click on the right hand Administration

Management menu with 3 lines and select System Roles Management. The System
Roles Management w indow will appear. The user roles are defined in System Roles Management.

Edit the System Role.

2. To add a user or group to the System Role, click on the highlighted Edit link. An Edit Role window
w ill appear.
3. Enter the name of the user(s) and/or group(s) and click on the Find button.

p47
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Adding a user and a few groups.

4. Select an the appropriate user(s) and/or group(s) and then click on the Add User/Group button.

p48
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

The users and groups assigned to a system role.

5. Add more user(s)/group(s) as required. click OK. The custom role has been added to the parent
dialog. In the System Roles Management window the user and groups that were added will
appear in the Users/Groups Assigned to... column under the System Role that was initially
selected.

p49
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Edit a System Role

An Administrator can edit a system role in System Roles Management.

Note: Role operations are audited.

Role Menu.
To edit a system role:
1. Go to the Classifier Administrator User Interface and click on the right hand Administration

Management menu with 3 lines and select System Roles Management. The System Roles
Management window will appear.

Edit the System Role.

2. To edit the System Role click on the highlighted Edit link. An Edit Role window will appear.
3. Enter the name of the user/group and click on the Find button.

p50
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Adding a user and a few groups.

4. Select an the appropriate user or group item(s) and then click on the Add User/Group button.

p51
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Users and groups assigned to a system role.

5. Add more users/groups as required. click OK. The custom role has been added to the parent dialog.
In the System Roles Management window the user and groups that were added will appear in
the Users/Groups Assigned to... column under the System Role that was initially selected.

p52
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Delete a User or Group from a Role

An Administrator can delete a users or groups from a role in System Roles Management.

Deleting a user.
To delete a user or group from system role:
1. Go to the Classifier Administrator User Interface and click on the right hand Administration

Management menu with 3 lines and select System Roles Management. The System Roles
Management window will appear.
2. Click on the highlighted Edit link. An Edit Role window will appear.
3. To delete the user or group click on the Delete link next to the user or group. The user or group will
be deleted.
4. To save, click on the OK button otherwise click on the Cancel button.

Custom Roles for Policies

Admin : Classifier Administration -> Administrator Management Menu -> Custom Roles for
Policies
If no Custom Roles are established for a policy, then that policy may be administered by any user that
has Policy Administrator / Auditor capability.

p53
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

If one or more Custom Policy Roles are defined for a policy, then that policy may only be
Administered / Audited by users defined by the assigned Custom Policy Roles.
A user may be designated as having a Policy Auditor system role (but not Policy Administrator), but
be assigned read/write capability through the Custom Policy Roles mechanism - the latter w ill take
precedence for policies that have the relevant Custom Policy Role assigned.

p54
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Create a Custom Role

A user can create a custom role using the Custom Roles for Policies selection.

Role Menu.
To create a Custom Role for Policies:

1. First assign users/groups to the Policy Administrator/ Auditor role.

Custom Roles for Policies

2. Go to the Classifier Administrator User Interface and click on the right hand Administration

Management menu with 3 lines select Custom Roles for Policies. The Custom Roles for
Policies window will appear.

p55
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Adding a name and description to the Role.

3. Initially no Custom Roles are defined; click on the Add a new policy role button.
4. Enter the Name and Description of the role.
5. Enter the name of the user/group and click on the Find button.
6. Select an the appropriate item and then click on the Add User/Group button.
7. Add more users/groups as required. click OK. The custom role has been added to the parent dialog.
8. Select the required policy in the custom roles for policies dialog (e.g. All Users) and click Edit. A
dialog is presented displaying the currently defined custom roles, and the permissions associated
w ith each role (for that policy).

Policy Permissions.

9. Select the relevant role and click Edit.

p56
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Edit Policy Role Permissions.

10. Choose the required permissions and click OK then Ok again. The main dialog is updated to display
the changes:

Custom Roles updated

User Roles and Permissions

Admin : Classifier Administration -> Administrator Management Menu -> User Roles and
Permissions
When groups are assigned roles, it is sometimes difficult to understand the effective permissions that an
individual group member possesses. This is especially true when a user is a member of multiple groups.
To view the effective permissions for a User or Group:

 Invoke User Roles and Permissions from the Administration Management menu ,
this will present the follow ing:

p57
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

User Roles and Permissions

 You can use the search field to enter the User or Group of interest and then click the search
button represented by the magnifying glass icon.
 Once you have found the User or Group that you are interested in, click the Show hyperlink
in the Action column. The effective permissions w ill be presented:

p58
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Properties (Classifier Administration)

Admin : Classifier Administration -> Properties
These top-level settings allow you to configure the audit information tracking you require.
Indicate the operations, performed under the various Classifier Administration functional groups such as
Selectors or Rules that you wish to be audited.
Separate controls are available for auditing run time Email and Office Classifier operations which are
described in Settings applicable across the Organisation/Global Settings/ Audit Settings.

Classifier Administration Properties

Get Server Configuration

Admin : Classifier Administration -> Get Server Configuration
This is used to retrieve a copy of the deployed configuration to your local machine. It is typically used
w hen you w ish to apply changes to the existing master configuration. You retrieve a local copy, make
the required changes then (re-)publish the configuration to the master location. Further details of how
this fits into the overall process can be found in Configuration Deployment .
Note: This can only be performed by a Full Administrator role.

 Select Classifier Administration and choose Get Server Configuration .

 Click Yes if a confirmation dialog appears to draw your attention to the fact that it will
overwrite any existing local configuration.

p59
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Get Configuration warning

 Select the Active Directory or File Store option as required.

Get Configuration from location

 If you choose File Store, the Configuration is retrieved from the location defined by the
following registry setting:
 HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTW ARE\Boldon James\Boldon James Classifier Management
WCF Service\ConfigImportFolder.
By default this points to c:ProgramData\Boldon James\Config Import Folder .
 Acknowledge the retrieval complete dialog.
Note: Getting the server configuration has no effect on any local Configuration Archives.

Publish Configuration
Admin : Classifier Administration -> Publish Configuration
Note: If the action is unavailable, it may be because a policy is locked.
Once your configuration is stable you need to publish it to make it available to the wider community
using either Active Directory or the file system. For an overview of these mechanisms see Configuration
Deployment.
Every time you publish a configuration, an archive copy is stored locally as described in Configuration
Archives.
Note: The configuration space requirements are outlined in Configuration size estimation .
Note: If you wish to publish the Classifier configuration via Active Directory then the Active Directory
Schema must be updated ( Extending the Active Directory Schema ). Schema update is not required if
you intend to publish the configuration via file store.
Publishing a configuration replaces any version previously stored in that location and is accomplished as
follows:
 Select the Classifier Administration node and choose Publish Configuration which will
display the follow ing:

p60
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Publish Configuration
 Select the Active Directory or File Store option as required.
 If you choose File Store, the configuration is retrieved from the follow ing registry setting:
 HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTW ARE\Boldon James\Boldon James Classifier Management
WCF Service\ConfigPublishFolder.
By default this points to c:ProgramData\Boldon James\Config Publish Folder .
 The OK button is disabled until you enter a Publish Reason. The text entered w ill appear in
the event log entry that records the publication.
 If a policy has been configured in either of the following ways:
 To use the Use Single Click with pre-defined labels feature, but no buttons are
configured

 To use Connect Selectors - Assisted Labelling but no connected selectors are

configured
you cannot publish the configuration and a suitable dialog will be presented:

Publish - Single click ill defined

 Click OK. The following reminder appears:

p61
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Publish reminder
Note: Each time you publish a configuration, an archive copy is stored locally. See Configuration
Archives for full details.
 Click OK on the confirmation dialog.
Note: Publishing to Active Directory requires particular permissions that may not be available by default
to Domain Administrators on systems other than the Domain Controller. See Permissions for Publish to
AD for details of the permissions required.
Note: If you publish the configuration to file store you must ensure that the target (master) location
has suitable permissions. End users should have the ability to read from that location and administrators
that are to modify the master configuration must also have the ability to write to that location using the
network path.
Note: Changes made to the Classifier configuration must be published to ensure that Classifier
environments access the updated information.
Note: OWA Classifier only changes its configuration after a restart. Thus after publishing an updated
configuration, an IISRESET w ould be required to cause OWA Classifier to use that new configuration.
Note: SharePoint Classifier only picks up changes to the configuration after a restart or recycle of the
w ebsite w here SharePoint Classifier WCF service is installed. This is done through Internet Information
Services or on the command line through the Microsoft provided tool.
Note: Email and Office Classifier only pick up updated configuration on application restart. It is
advisable to restart all applications (Outlook, W ord, Excel etc.) to avoid applications using different
versions of the configuration.
Note: Users of File Classifier must Logoff/logon to pick up changes to the published configuration. This
is because explorer.exe stays running in the background (using the Classifier configuration available at
the start) even if the user closes the Explorer window.

Configuration Archives

Every time you publish a configuration, an archive copy is stored locally (on the Server system).
Note: The files in a configuration should NOT be edited manually - the configuration is signed, and
almost any change invalidates the configuration.
Archives are stored in a separate folder structure (C:\ProgramData\Boldon James
\CustomConfigurationArchives).

Each time you publish a configuration, a copy of the configuration being published is stored in a new
folder below CustomConfigurationArchives. The folder names start at zero and are incremented by one
each time.
The example below shows an archive structure of four archives (0 to 2):

p62
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Archive file structure

The archive copies mean that it is possible to manually roll back to an earlier configuration as follows:
 Choose the archive to which you wish to revert.
 The contents of description.txt (...ConfigurationArchives\n\Label Configurations\<Classifier
test>\description.txt) can be checked for the publish reason associated with that archive -
the publish reason supplied appears at the end of each entry made to the file.
 Delete the current contents of the ConfigImportFolder Configuration folder (Label
Configurations, Management and Messages).
 Copy the same folders (Label Configurations, Management and Messages) from below the
relevant archive and into the configuration folder.
 Invoke Get Server Configuration .
 Check that the restored configuration is the one you want.
Note: Housekeeping and backup of these archive folders is a matter for the user.

Permissions for Publish to AD

Publishing the configuration to Active Directory requires the ability to delete (and re-create) relevant
objects below the cn=Boldon James node. These permissions are not assigned by default to Domain
Administrators. The following sequence shows you how to check / assign the relevant permissions:
 Logon as a user that has Enterprise Administrator capabilities.
 Run ADSIedit.
 Choose Connect to ... and select Configuration from Select a well-known Naming
Context.

p63
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Connect to Configuration
 Expand the Configuration and select the CN=Services/CN=Boldon James node

Select CN=Boldon James node

 View Properties/Security

p64
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

View Properties - Security

 Select an existing <Group or user> (or add a new entry if required).
 Click Advanced. Select the relevant <entry> from the list presented. Click Edit.

Advanced Security Settings

 All permissions are required except for Full control and Modify permissions.

p65
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Boldon James - Object Permissions

 A key requirement is that Apply to: must be set to This object and all child objects .
 Click OK and then ensure Include inheritable permissions from this object's parent is
checked on the previous dialog.
 Click OK on extant dialogs to complete the sequence.

Audit non-privileged attempts to Publish Configuration

You can get Active Directory to report attempts by a non-privileged user to publish a Classifier
configuration to AD.
 For 2008 using the Group Policy Management Editor MMC snap-in:
 Edit the Default Domain Policy and navigate to Computer Configuration > Policies >
Windows Settings > Security Settings > Local Policies > Audit Policy

p66
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Audit Policy
 Select Audit directory service access and edit the properties - enabling both Success
and Failure:

Audit directory service access

 Repeat for Audit object access and enable Success and Failure.
Now using ADSIEdit:
 Navigate to Configuration > CN=Configuration,DC=classifier,DC=test > CN=Services
> CN=Boldon James

p67
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

ADSIEdit - Boldon James

 Select the node and choose Properties; select the Security Tab and click Advanced.

Auditing tab
 Select the Auditing tab and click Add. Add Everyone and click OK.

p68
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Add everyone
 In the Auditing Entry for Boldon James presented for Everyone, enable Success and
Failure for each of the following:
Delete
Delete Subtree
Modify permissions
Modify Owner
All validated writes
Create all child objects
Delete all child objects
Create account objects
Delete account objects

Configuration size estimation

The Classifier configuration comprises a set of folders and files that are published.
Publication to file store is a copy process and the size is easily determined (e.g. the structure below C:\|
Users\<username>\Appdata\Roaming\Boldon James\Configuration - note these folders may be hidden):

Configuration folder structure and size

p69
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Publication to Active Directory maps each folder and file to an individual object in Active Directory, and
requires base-64 encoding for image files. This encapsulation process incurs an overhead. The impact
on the Active Directory (the NTDS.dit file typically found in the Window s\ntds folder) can be estimated
using the following:

Component Impact on Active Directory (Kb)

Configuration content. Configuration size in file store.

Overhead estimate per object in AD (1.1 Kb per The number of folders plus the number files in the
item). configuration * 1.1.

Overheads for base-64 encoding of image files. The size of all image files *.33.

Total Sum of the above.

A typical Classifier configuration contains about 15 folders and 16 files; plus 1 folder and 7 files per
policy; plus however many image files are added. With no image files and a single policy the
configuration w ithin Active Directory would typically be less than 300 Kb.

Publish Test Configuration

Admin : Classifier Administration -> Publish Test Configuration

Note: This action is not applicable to server based Classifier applications (e.g. OWA Classifier) as it is
designed to operate in conjunction with Test Mode Administration which operates in a local desktop
environment.
Once you have completed configuration of a policy (including the Label UI and Rules) you should check
that the policy produces the desired effect for the end user. The Publish Test Configuration action
facilitates this w ithout disturbing the deployed configuration.
Note: If you just wish to see how the label selection interface will look for a policy, you can use the
Label Preview action rather than starting an application after Publish Test Configuration .
Note: There is a Test mode auditing setting that can be used to stop the capture of audit information
when Publish Test Configuration is invoked.
There are a number of steps, most only apply the first time the test configuration mechanism is used.
1. Establish a configuration that you wish to test.
2. Establish a folder in a suitable location into which test configurations can be published (e.g.
\\ICS-DC-1\TestMode.
This needs to be a file store folder:
o That can be w ritten to by the Classifier Administration Service (and by the user under which
that service is running).
o That can be accessed (read) by the user(s) who will use Test Mode Administration.

3. The path to the test folder can be set using Administrator Settings menu -> Configuration Folder
Paths.
4. Select Classifier Administration then choose Publish Test Configuration and provide a name
for the sub-folder that w ill hold the test configuration, and a reason for the publication.

p70
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Publish Test Configuration

5. Click OK to publish the test configuration.
6. See Test Mode Administration for details of how to use the test configuration.

Test Mode Administration

Admin : Classifier Administration -> Publish Test Configuration -> Test Mode Administration
This topic describes how you can explore the effects of a test configuration published using Publish Test
Configuration.
For each system that is to be used as a platform for exploring test configurations:
1. Ensure that the relevant base applications (e.g. Microsoft Office) are installed and working.
2. Ensure that Email and Office Classifier is installed.
3. Ensure that Classifier Test Mode Administration is installed (this is a separately installable item
that can be found in the TestModeAdministration folder under the Classifier Administration Server
installation structure.
4. Ensure that none of the Classifier applications (Word etc.) is running.
5. Invoke Classifier Test Mode Administration from the start menu. This w ill present a dialog
allowing you to define the location containing the test configurations (e.g. \\ICS-DC-1\TestMode).
The dialog is updated to show the available test configurations.

p71
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Choose Test Configuration

1. Select the required Test Configuration and click Run Test.
2. If the configuration contains multiple polices, you are prompted to select the policy to be used:

Available Policies
This test sequence w ill temporarily set specific registry settings that direct Classifier applications to
use the chosen test configuration and policy, rather than any deployed configuration.
3. Start the application(s) to be tested. A dialog shows the currently active (Classifier) applications

Running Applications
4. End Test Mode is only enabled if there are no Classifier application running.

p72
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Close Applications
5. When a Classifier application starts running it indicates that it is operating in Test Mode.

Application Test Mode warning

6. End Test Mode is only enabled if there are no Classifier application running
Once you have checked the Classifier functionality, close all open affected applications (e.g. Word
and Outlook) and then click End Test Mode on the Classifier Administration Policy Test dialog.
When the applications are restarted, they revert to standard operation.

Lock / Unlock Configuration

Admin : Classifier Administration -> Lock / Unlock Configuration
The Lock Configuration action can be used to indicate to other Classifier administrators that the
configuration should not be published at the moment (e.g. because configuration changes are
incomplete).
If the configuration is locked, the Unlock Configuration action is displayed and the Publish
Configuration action is inhibited (greyed).
There is a similar Lock / Unlock Policy actions. Note, however, that Unlock Configuration will NOT
affect any policy locks - they w ill remain in effect.

Create Web Configuration

Admin : Classifier Administration -> Create Web Configuration
Note: If the action is unavailable, it may be because a policy is locked.
Classifier clients and Classifier Management Agent retrieve master configuration updates from the
location defined using Classifier Configuration Settings . These may point to a file store location,
Active Directory, or a URL location.
This topic describes how to produce a copy of the Classifier configuration in the format required in
support of this feature (retrieval from a URL).

 It is assumed that you have already:

o An established Classifier configuration.

o If Classifier Management Agent is to be used, then you have already deployed Classifier
Management Agent version 3.8.1 or later BUT configured to retrieve the master configuration
from Active Directory or file store, (i.e. you have established the relevant registry entries

p73
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

described in Classifier Management Agent Guide (UM6411)).

The general steps to support retrieval of configuration from a URL by Classifier Management Agent are:
1. Establish a zipped version of the master configuration and associated version.txt file as described
below .
2. Establish the zipped version of the master configuration and associated version.txt file on your
designated w eb page.
3. Establish the necessary Web Host Settings.
4. When the Clients / Management Agent restarts, they retrieve the master configuration from the
designated w eb location.

To establish the encrypted version of the master configuration:

 Select the Classifier Administration node and choose Create Web Configuration which
w ill display the following:

Create Web Configuration

 Supply a passw ord and click Save.
The configuration (config) and version file are saved to the folder defined by Folder for
'Create Web Configuration' described under Administration Management Menu ->
Configuration Folder Paths .
 The dialog presented shows an encrypted form of the password. For example:

Encrypted Password
The value shown is required to populate the WebConfigKey (Service Mode Web Config
Key) registry entry (see Web Host Settings) that allows Classifier Management Agent to
decrypt the configuration from the configured URL. Click Copy to clipboard, and then
Close.
Note: It is a matter for site policy as to whether the same password is used to encrypt
subsequent iterations, but if the plain text password value changes, the WebConfigKey
registry entry must be updated accordingly.

The encrypted string generated above may change each time EVEN IF THE PLAIN TEXT
PASSWORD VALUE IS UNCHANGED. There is NO need to update the WebConfigKey registry
entry just because the encrypted string has changed.
 Check that the target (Zipped Configuration) folder contains both zip and version.txt files.

p74
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Generated Web Configuration files

Copy both the zip and version.txt files your intended web location.
Note: Each time the Classifier Configuration is published the version.txt file is re-written
containing a unique value. Management Agent uses the contents of this file on the URL site
to ascertain whether the (encrypted) configuration has changed.
 Ensure that the relevant Web Host Settings are established, in particular that the encrypted
password value is stored in WebConfigKey (Service Mode Web Config Key) .
 Maintain the URL configuration by repeating the steps above every time a new master
configuration is published.

p75
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

SETTINGS APPLICABLE ACROSS THE ORGANISATION

This section describes the configuration wide settings which apply to all users of Classifier applications –
they cannot be modified through labelling policy.

 Global Settings
 Image Library
 User Message Library
 User Interface Library

Configuration Wide Settings

Global Settings
Admin : Global Settings

Global Settings apply to all users in the site that have Office Classifier functionality installed. For
example you can disable each Office application whilst leaving the software installed. The settings
available are

 Application Settings
 Audit Settings
 Languages (only visible if Allow multiple languages is enabled in Properties (Classifier
Administration) / View)

 Licence

p76
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Global Settings
The individual settings are available through Properties.

Application Settings

Admin : Global Settings / Application Settings

Global Application Settings apply to all users in the site that have Classifier functionality installed or
w hich control the availability of Administration functionality.
The list of settings appears in a table with alternative setting values ( Enabled / Disabled) selectable
from a drop dow n list available if you select the current value.

Application Settings

The settings supported are summarised in the table below. Changes will only take effect after policy
changes have been deployed and affected applications have been restarted
Setting Link to description
AutoDesk CAD (These options only appears if the relevant component
licence has been applied).
Dassault DraftSight
Allows you to Enable / Disable CAD Classifier operation
for the specific application post installation.

p77
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Clearance check Email domains Enabled - The Email Domain Clearance features of
Classifier Administration are available. Email Domain
Clearance is supported by Email, OWA and Notes
Classifier. See Email domain clearances for details of this
functionality.
Disabled - The Email Domain Clearance features are NOT
available. within Classifier Administration
Clearance Library Enabled - The Clearance Library features of Classifier
Administration are available. Clearance Library entries are
used by SharePoint Classifier. See Clearance Library for
further details.
Disabled - The Clearance Library features are NOT
available w ithin Classifier Administration
Dynamic Clearances Enabled - The Dynamic Clearance features of Classifier
Administration are available. See Dynamic Clearances for
details of this functionality.
Disabled - The Dynamic Clearance features are NOT
available w ithin Classifier Administration.
Note: For new Classifier configurations this settings will be
Enabled by default. For existing configurations the setting
is Disabled by default.
Maximum file size for icon overlay (in Defines the maximum size file (in KB) that File Classifier
KB) w ill attempt to generate an icon overlay for. If no value is
set the file size is unlimited.
Type: integer (stored as string in config)
Default Value: Not set, which means no restriction to
supported file size
Microsoft Excel Enable / Disable for each individual application.
Microsoft Excel for Mac The Classifier functionality for an application can be
activated using this setting (Enable / Disable ). Any
Microsoft Outlook
Classifier configuration associated w ith application is
Microsoft Outlook for Mac retained unchanged even if the setting id disabled.
Microsoft Pow erPoint The Mac options only appear if a suitable Classifier for Mac
Microsoft Pow erPoint for Mac licence has been applied.

Microsoft Project (2010 onw ards only)

Microsoft Visio (2010 onw ards only)
Microsoft Word
Microsoft Word for Mac

Note: There is no Enable/Disable setting for Outlook Web Access (OWA Classifier) or (Lotus)
Notes Classifier as these are Enabled / Disabled by server based Installation / Removal in conjunction
w ith a component licence.

Audit Settings

Admin : Global Settings / Auditing

Audit settings allow the administrator to control which operations are audited by applications that have
Classifier capabilities. Some settings may apply to most applications (e.g. Open), others are only
pertinent to a subset of the applications (e.g. Send is not applicable to documents – sending a
document will invoke Outlook which will take notice of this setting). Some actions are not audited
because of environment limitations (e.g. Save is not audited by OWA). Each setting takes the value
Enabled or Disabled.
Note: Classifier Mail Add-in does not perform any auditing.

Classifier Actions and Events Audit Settings

p78
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

C lassifier Actions and Events.

Classifier Actions and Events Audit Settings Table

Setting Description
Automatic label upgrade Audit the application of an automatic label upgrade.
Enabling this option audits if a rule applying this check succeeds
or fails – e.g. A message label is automatically upgraded as a
result of the addition of an attachment not dominated by the
message label.
Close event Audit the close action in Classifier-enabled Office applications.
Enabling this option audits if a Microsoft Office document is
closed.
Document and Email Audit the application and email protection, either RMS or S/MIME.
Protection Enabling this option audits if a rule applying S/MIME or RMS is
actioned i.e. S/MIME security or RMS policy is applied to a
document or email.
File label addition Audit when the file labels are added.
Note: Only available if File Classifier is licensed.
Enabling this option audits if File Classifier adds a label to an item.
File label change Audit when file labels are changed.
Note: Only available if File Classifier is licensed.
Enabling this option audits if File Classifier changes the label on an
item.
File label removal Audit when file labels are removed.
Note: Only available if File Classifier is licensed.
Enabling this option audits if File Classifier removes a label from
an item.

p79
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Label Folder View Audit the labelling of email items in a folder.

Note: This option is only applicable if you have the Allow Folder
View labelling Outlook option is Enabled.
If the Label Folder View setting is Enabled, Email Classifier audits
any use of the Folder View Labelling feature, recording the new
label value, and any previous label value.
Open event Audit the Open action in Classifier-enabled Office applications.
Enabling this option audits if an existing classifier document is
opened
Print event Audit the Print action in Classifier-enabled Office applications.
Enabling this option audits if a request is made to print an object.
(This setting is not supported by Visio nor Outlook nor OWA
).
Save event Audit the Save action in Classifier-enabled Office applications.
Enabling this option audits if an object is saved. Note that this w ill
also be triggered by any background automatic Save actions (This
setting is not supported by OW A Classifier). Email Classifier w ill
audit saving of Draft messages, Outlook msg and template
formats, but other formats including Html and Word docs are not
audited.
Send event Audit the Send action in Classifier-enabled Office applications.
Enabling this option audits if Outlook sends a message.

Classifier Checks Audit Settings

Classifier Checks.
Classifier Checks Audit Settings Table

p80
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Setting Description
Attachment Check Audit the outcome of checking the labels of attachments
against that of the containing message.
Enabling this option audits if a rule applying this check
succeeds or fails – e.g. An attachment is found with a
label not dominated by the message label.
Author label change check Audit the outcome of performing an author label change
check. Enabling this option audits if a Check for Author
label change rule succeeds or fails – i.e. The 'Author' tries
to change the value of a label element w hen this is
inhibited by such a rule for Office applications.
Content check Audit when the user uses content checking. Enabling this
option audits if a Content Checking rule is actioned. That
is when a message Subject, Body or Attachment contains
a 'checked for phrase'. The audit entry w ill contain the
groups checked, the element (Subject / Body /
Attachment) that contained a 'checked for phrase'.
Default label check Audit when the default label check is triggered. Enabling
this option audits every time the configured Default Label
Check rule is actioned.
Disable reply to all check Audit the outcome of performing a message disable reply
to all check. Enabling this option audits every time the
Disable reply to all rule is actioned.
Label change check Audit the outcome of performing a label change check.
Enabling this option audits if a Check for label change rule
applying this check succeeds or fails – i.e. The user tries
to change the value of a label element but the action is
inhibited by the rules for application (Office, Email, OWA,
Notes or Mobile Classifier (Warn or Prevent).
Label expiry check Audit the outcome of performing a label expiry check.
Enabling this option audits if a Check these selectors for
expiry rule succeeds or fails.
Label validation check Audit the outcome of validating the complateness of a
label. Enabling this option audits if a rule applying this
check succeeds or fails.
Maximum message subject length Audit the outcome of performing a minimum message
check subject length check. Enabling this option audits if the
Check subject length does not exceed rule is actioned.

Message size check Audit the outcome of performing a message size check.
Enabling this option audits if the Check message size does
not exceed rule is actioned.
Minimum message subject length Audit the outcome of performing a minimum message
check subject length check. Enabling this option audits if the
Check subject length exceeds rule is actioned.
Number of recipients check Audit the outcome of performing a number of recipients
check. Enabling this option audits if the Check number of
recipients does not exceed rule is actioned.
Originator clearance check Audit the outcome of a clearance check on the message
originator. Enabling this option audits if a rule applying
this check fails – i.e. the Originator tries to send a
message but does not have the required clearance.
Recipient Clearance Check Audit the outcome of a clearance check on the message
recipients. Enabling this option audits if a rule applying
this check succeeds or fails – e.g. Originator tries to send
a message to recipients that do not have the required
clearance
Recipient list addition check Audit outcome of performing a recipient list addition
check. Enabling this option audits if a Check for additional
recipients rule is actioned. That is the user replies to or
forwards a message that triggers such a rule.
Recipient Type check Audit the outcome of performing a recipient type check.
Enabling this option audits if a Check recipient type rule is
actioned.

p81
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Suggested Classification check Audit the outcome of performing a suggested

classification check. Enabling this option audits if a
Suggested classification check is actioned.
Unlabelled attachment check Audit when the unlabelled attachment check is triggered.

User warning check Audit when the user w arning check is triggered. Enabling
this option audits if a User Warning check rule is actioned.

Options Audit Settings

Options.

Options Audit Settings Table

The other settings configure whether an audit message is logged to the system application event log.
The audit message describes the event which has taken place. An event ID and user ID is included
when an audit takes place.

Setting Description
Always Use SMTP addresses When auditing email addresses alw ays try to obtain an
SMTP address.
Note: This setting applies to Email Classifier, OW A
Classifier and Notes Classifier.
Enabled - Auditing will attempt to obtain an SMTP
address for the sender and all recipients. In some
situations this can lead to significant delays because no
SMTP address can be found.
Disabled - Classifier auditing w ill use the email address it
has available.
Test mode auditing Perform selected auditing operations even in the `test`
mode. mode. Enabling this option audits activities
performed whilst running in Test Mode. Disabling this
setting w ill stop events being logged w hen in Test Mode.

Privacy Settings Audit Settings

p82
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Privacy Settings Audit Settings Table

There are five privacy settings in the list that affect all auditing. These allow you to mask selected
pieces of information from audit logs. The privacy settings are:
Setting Description Enabled/Disabled

Mask document file Obscure the document file name on

name save.
Enabled - The item is replaced in
Mask document title Obscure the document title on the audit entry by *** (three
save. asterisks).
Mask message Obscure the message attachment
attachment names names on submission. Disabled - The item is included in
the audit entry.
Mask message Obscure the message recipient
recipient email email addresses on submission.
addresses
Mask message subject Obscure the message subject on
submission.

An example of event message content and a list of the different event messages can be found in
Auditing Event Messages.

Languages

Admin : Global Settings / Languages

Classifier Administration allows you to configure all the text presented to users through the various
Classifier features (e.g. User Message Library, User Interface Library etc.). However, these basic
facilities support a single set of definitions which equate to a Configuration default language .
The Configuration default language is initially English, but you can change the presentation values
configured for this 'language' using the language mechanisms described in this document.
Classifier Languages mechanisms allow you to support multiple languages such that the text presented
to each user is appropriate (site configurable) for their chosen Language / Country.
Overview of the Languages mechanisms:

 The Languages to be supported are defined by selecting the Global Settings / Languages node.
Initially the list only includes the Configuration default language entry.

p83
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Languages initial state

 When a Language is added to the configuration it has no language specific values defined. You must
configure each required value - if an item does not have a language specific value defined, the
Algorithm (below) will be used to produce a value for display.

 You can Add additional language entries, and Delete any language entry except for the
Configuration default language (you will be warned that all associated values will be lost). This
list of languages is presented wherever per Language values may be configured (see table below).

 Selected languages can be of the form Language (Country) or Language (e.g. French
(Belgium) or French).

 Algorithm for finding the text to display

Once the language configuration is complete and deployed, the Classifier applications (e.g. Office
Classifier) will observe the algorithm below to obtain the 'appropriate' text to display (e.g. button
caption, User message etc.):
o If the item of interest ( e.g. User message) has a value defined (not blank) for a Language
(Country) setting that exactly matches the current environment, then use that value,
otherwise -
o If the item of interest has a value defined for the (culture neutral) Language, that matches
the current environment then use that value, otherwise -
o If the item of interest has a value defined for the Policy default Language , then use that
value, otherwise -
o If the item of interest has a value defined for the Configuration default Language , then
use that value, otherwise -
o There is no defined value.

Thus you only have to define Language specific values if the algorithm described above would not
yield an appropriate value from one of the other Languages.
As an example you might have a French speaking community to serve, where most users can use
general French, but a few settings require community specific values (e.g. a Swiss variant of
French). You would then:
o Define French and French/Swiss as your supported languages;

o Configure the full range of values (actually only those essential for your environment) for
French;
o Set French as your policy default;
o Configure French/Sw iss variants only for those items that specifically require a different
value.
Features supporting Language mechanisms
Global Settings No facilities (not applicable).

User Message Library You can define per language Title, Text and Help URL link values for each
message through the Message Properties as described in Add a new message.
You can select which Language settings the User Message List presents.

p84
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

User Interface Library You can define per language values for each of the configurable text items as
described in the sub-topics below User Interface Library / Properties (UI
Definition Items).

Selector Library Limited facilities are provided (see features excluded table below).
Per language values for the Caption and Tooltip can be defined for each
selector as described in Add a new selector. Equivalent policy settings are also
available.
Single selection list supports localisation (Languages) of selector Value Name,
Tooltip, Portion and Alternate Name /2/3.
You can select which Language related settings the Set Selector view presents.
You can also make use of the Alternate names which can be defined for
Single Selection Lists, Multiple Selection lists and Date offset Lists as
described under Selector Library / Selector Actions / Edit Selector.

Marking Library No facilities (see features excluded table below).

Content Library No facilities (not applicable).

Configuration Settings No facilities (not applicable).

Policies The Policy default language can be defined as described in Properties (Policy).
Per language values for the Caption and Tooltip can be defined for each
selector (Set Selectors) as described in Policies / Policy Label UI / Selector
Properties (Policy) / Selector Properties / General .

Policy / Single Click Per language values for the Caption and Tooltip can be defined for each
Single Click button as described in Use Single Click with pre-defined labels.

Clearance Settings No facilities (not applicable).

The following Classifier features are excluded from the Languages mechanisms (are not site
translatable):
Marking Formats Markings present business policy information (e.g. sensitivity) which must be
meaningful to all users. Supporting different markings for different locales
would be confusing to end users.
Sites can make their Markings multi-language (e.g. include both German and
English in a LLOT disclaimer).
(Not recommended) Sites may assign separate policies (applying different
Markings) to different groups (languages) of users.

"No Marking" text is For the same reasons as Marking Formats above. Sites can define 'composite'
not translatable text if required, e.g. "No Marking / Pas Marking / Nein Marking / ..".

Selector values are not Multiple selection list and Date offset list do NOT support localisation
translatable (Languages) of selector Value Name, Tooltip, Portion and Alternate Name /2/3.
Note: Selector Captions and Tooltips do support the Languages mechanisms.

Classifier English only.

Administration
interface

Administrators The product as shipped provides English only.

Documentation
Administrators on-line
Help

Auditing English only.

User URL help page A single link can be defined. The site can provide language related
(available on
redirection at the web server using the browser supplied locale.
the Label selection

p85
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

interface).

Licence

Admin : Global Settings / Licence

The features available to users are determined by the configuration established using Classifier
Administration and deployed to those users.
Classifier Administration only enables configuration of features for which the site is licensed. The
available features for each licence can be seen in the table Features versus Licence. The licence status
can be inspected from Email and Office Classifier as described in View Client Licence Status.
A Licence may be effective for a limited duration (e.g. for evaluation), subscription or in perpetuity
(Full).
Note: This document (Classifier Administration Server Guide) describes all features supported by
Classifier. Depending upon the licences you have, some features may not appear or be greyed out. For
example, if you do not have a licence for OW A Classifier, then OWA Classifier features will be
unavailable.
Initial installation w ill supply one or more Classifier licence files in the Licence sub-folder on the
Classifier Administration CD image. Each licence file has a name of the form IMP xxx.LIC, where xxx
relates to the feature or option (e.g. IMPCEM - Email Classifier; IMPCOF - Office Classifier; IMPCOW -
OWA Classifier; IMPCLN - Notes Classifier).
The initial installation has no licence files applied to the configuration. Each licence is applied using the
sequence described below . If a site purchases additional options, an additional licence file is supplied
w hich can be merged into the existing licence settings.
Note: For Citrix environments: Classifier licences are on a per user basis, thus there is no difference if a
user is using Email or Office Classifier using Citrix or that same user is using a Windows desktop, or
using Window s Terminal Server. OWA Classifier requires its own licence.
 Run Classifier Administration.
 Select Global Settings
 Choose Licence. This presents the current licence information in the dialog below. Initially
this is empty.

Licence management interface

 To merge in a new licence file (enabling additional features) c lick Add / Update.
 Browse to the location of the new licence file, select the file and click Open. For an initial
installation the default location to find Licence files is in folders (one per licence) below the
Licence sub-folder on the Classifier Base bundle.
 The selected file is merged into the existing licence file and the Licence Management dialog
w ill be updated to reflect the changes.
 Licence consistency w ill be checked when you click OK. When upgrading existing licences to
a new Level you may have to Update all current licences to the new level before clicking OK
.

p86
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Selecting an entry in the list and clicking Details will show further information about the
licence.

Licence details
Note: If you have difficulty merging a new licence on to an existing system, it is likely that w hat you
are attempting is breaking the restrictions below (e.g. you have Evaluation licences and are attempting
to update only one of your products to a Full licence - you must update all installed products at the
same time (do not exit the licence dialog until all product licences have been updated),
Restrictions
There are certain limitations applied by the licence management software:

 All licences must be at the same level (3 or 4). For example you cannot use an (historic) Email
Classifier Standard Edition licence (Level 3) and an Enterprise Edition (Level 4) Office Classifier
licence. Therefore, to add the Enterprise Edition Level 4 licence for the Office Classifier to a
configuration that contains Email and Office Classifier, you need to obtain and apply an Enterprise
Edition (Level 4) licence for Email Classifier at the same time.

 You can update Evaluation licences to a Full licences, but not revert from a Full to an Evaluation
licence. You can have a configuration that includes a mixture of Full and Evaluation licences. If an
Evaluation licence expires, the features it licences are disabled/unavailable.

 If you wish to stop using one licensed feature (e.g. OWA Classifier), and want to ensure that only
the relevant features are made unavailable in Classifier Administration, you may have to
reimplement your configuration using only the subset licences now required, or request assistance
from Classifier support.

 Historic - You must use at least a Standard Edition (Level 3) licence if you have an existing
configuration created w ith Classifier Administration Console Version 1.0.

Licence Filenames
impBOX Box Classifier
impCAD CAD Classifier for AutoCAD
impCAD (DraftSight) CAD Classifier for DraftSight
impCEM Email Classifier
impCLN Notes Classifier
impCMB Mobile Classifier
impCOF Office Classifier
impCOW OWA Classifier and Classifier Mail Add-in
impBLK Pow er Classifier for Files
impCRP Classifier Reporting Console
impCRS Classifier Reporting Service

p87
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

impCPA Pow er Classifier for Administration

impDCS Data Classification Service
impEXC Exchange Classifier
impMOF Mac Classifier
impFCF File Classifier
impSPC SharePoint Classifier

Licence Codes
These are the licence codes associated w ith each licensed Classifier product. The licence file supplied will
be made up of this code prefixed w ith "imp", e.g. impCRS for the Classifier Reporting Service. This
applies up to and including version 1.3.1 and has been superceded by the Classifier Reporting Service
CRS licence for v1.4 onwards.

Box Classifier BOX

CAD Classifier CAD
Classifier API CPI
Classifier Reporting Service CRS
Data Classification Service DCS
Email Classifier CEM
Exchange Classifier EXC
File Classifier FCF
Mac Classifier MOF
Mobile Classifier CMB
Notes Classifier CLN
Office Classifier COF
OWA Classifier COW
Power Classifier BLK
Power Classifier for Administration CPA
SharePoint Classifier SPC

Note: This applies up to and including version 1.3.1 and has been superceded by the Classifier Reporting
Service CRS licence for v1.4 onwards.

Classifier Reporting Tool CRP

Classifier API CPI

Features versus Licence

This topic summarises various features indicating Classifier product support (Email, Office, OWA, Notes,
Mail Add-in and Mobile Classifier) and the release versions in which they were first supported.
Note: This document assumes that the Classifier Licence(s) are Enterprise Level. Some features may
not be available on systems using (historic) Standard level 3 licences. These are annotated as [NH] in
the table below.
In the table below , x.y (e.g. 3.5) indicates a feature that is new in that version of Classifier products.
Versions of Classifier products prior to that number do NOT support the feature (Classifier 1.3 (which
preceded 3.4) is assumed as the baseline). For products other than Email and Office Classifier, and
Classifier Administration you should also check the Application (e.g. OWA Classifier) Release Note for
Application specific limitations additional to those in the table below and in individual topics.
Note: A summary of functional differences for the various mail Classifier products (Email Classifier,
OWA Classifier, Notes Classifier, Mobile Classifier and Classifier Mail Add-in can be found in Email, OWA,
Mail Add-in, Notes and Mobile Differences ,

p88
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Enterprise Edition
Features
Level 4

Applications

Support for 32-bit Microsoft applications Y

Support for 64-bit Microsoft applications 3.6.4
Outlook Y
Word, Excel and PowerPoint Y
MS Project (Office Classifier) [NH] Y
Visio (Office Classifier) [NH] Y
AutoCad 3.7
McAfee HDLP integration (Outlook only) 3.7.4

General Features

Common Label Handling Features Y

Common Label Interface Actions Y
Label Selection dialog Y
Label Options Y
Favourites [NH] Y
Y (not OWA or Mail Add-in or
Recently used labels [NH] Mobile)
Folder View Labelling (Email) Y (not Notes, Mail add-in or
Mobile)
OWA - 3.6.4
Y
Portion Mark (not OWA, Mail Add-in, Notes or
Mobile)
Control of options shown and ribbon location 3.6.4
Remove Classifier Options from the ribbon 3.7.4
(Not Mail Add-in nor Mobile)
Show 'Help' button on ribbon 3.6.6
(Not Mail Add-in nor Mobile)
Global Settings Y
Configuration Settings Y
Policies
One or more policies may be defined Y
Users see a policy view of the features Y
Outlook specific policy 3.6 (not OWA or Notes)
File Classifier specific policy 3.7
Policy control of Rules (Rules supported) Y
Challenge option 3.6.4
Mobile Classifier rules 3.7.4
Policy UI controls
Display selector values as buttons (Single selection list 3.6.6
only)
Show selector captions in ribbon 3.6.6
Suggested Classifications [NH] 3.9
Default Clearances (SharePoint related only) 3.10.1

Selectors and Label selection interface

3 selectors Y
Up to 3 Selectors in Label Ribbon / ribbon Y

p89
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Additional selectors (no specific limit is imposed, but

Classifier testing has exercised up to 12) [NH] 3.5
Label Selection interface Tabs [NH] 3.5
Single selection list Y
Multiple selection list [NH] 3.5
Text entry selector [NH] 3.5
Date picker selector [NH] 3.5
Date offset list selector 3.5
Masking of selectors against clearance Y (Not Notes)
Single Click [NH] 3.4
Best match option [NH] 3.6.4
Assisted Labelling [NH] Y (not Mobile)

Marking Formats

Marking Formats w ith Hyperlinks 3.4

Environment Variables in Marking Formats [NH] Y
Document properties in Marking Formats (Office) [NH] Y
Email properties in Marking Formats [NH] Y
Use plain text style 3.7.4

Other Features

User features controlled by Classifier Policy Y

Configuration in Active Directory or File store Y
Extensive audit features Y
Dynamic Clearances 3.11
SMTP domain clearances Y
Clearance Library (SharePoint related only) 3.10.1
User Interface Library 3.4
Content Library Email [NH] 3.4
Office [NH] 3.6
Conditions Library [NH] 3.9
Multiple Language support 3.6
Localisation of selector value Name, Tooltip, Portion, 3.7.4
Alternate Name /2/3 (Single selection list only)
Licence control of feature availability Y
Image Library 3.6.4
Images for Single Click 3.6.4
Rules for Word and PowerPoint 3.6.4
Site control of user messages Y

File Type Support (Label Propagation mechanisms)

Microsoft Office types (Word, Outlook etc.) Y

JPEG (manual configuration) 3.4
HTML (manual configuration) 3.5
Open Office file types (manual configuration) 3.5
AUTOCAD files (DWG and DXF) 3.7

Note: SharePoint Classifier, File Classifier and Power Classifier each have their own licence, and each
provides a single level of features.
Note: OWA Classifier and Notes Classifier each have their own licence. They support a subset of the

p90
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

features supported by Email Classifier as summarised in Email, OWA, Mail Add-in, Notes and Mobile
Features.

p91
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

View Client Licence status

The current Classifier Licence status can be inspected from Email and Office Classifier (e.g. Outlook,
Word etc.) applications by selecting About Classifier from the Options menu on the Classifier Label
interface. Not available under Classifier Mail Add-in or Mobile Classifier.

Select About Classifier

This will present a dialog showing the licence state:

Current Licence state

p92
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Image Library
Note: Classifier currently only supports images stored as .JPG, JPEG or .PNG files.
Note: Images stored in the configuration are limited to a maximum size of 5Mb, and if you add an
image greater than 500Kb a warning will be presented.
The Image Library allow s you to define site specific images to be presented to the end user in some
circumstances (Single Click configuration option, and specific W ord, PowerPoint rules). This section
describes how you establish these images and their usage.
The set of images is managed through the Image Library node in the Classifier Configuration. The full
set of images is available for the Administrator for selection in all Classifier Policies.
If you intend to configure a Rule that supports an image, you should ensure that a suitable image is
available before defining the rule, or define the image at the image selection point in the rule definition
sequence using the "New..." option.
The rules that support images are described under Rules supported / Add rules:
o Add this image into header w ith this text wrapping and this alignment (Word)
o Add this image into footer w ith this text wrapping and this alignment (Word)
o Add this image as a w atermark (Word/Outlook )
o Add this image to top of page w ith this text wrapping and this alignment (PowerPoint )
o Add this image to bottom of page w ith this text wrapping and this alignment (PowerPoint)

The optional ability to display an image for Single Click items is described in Use Single Click with
pre-defined labels.
The set of actions supported by the Image Library are:

 Add a new image

 Properties (Image) [Provides the ability to view and change selected Properties of the image,
including changing the associated image].

 Delete (Image)
Selecting the Image Library node displays a list of the currently defined images. This list is initially
empty.

Image Library initial state

p93
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Add a new image

Admin : Image Library  Add a new image

Note: Images stored in the configuration are limited to a maximum size of 5Mb, and if you add an
image greater than 500Kb a warning will be presented.
Note: Any image assigned to a Single Click button is scaled to appear as 16*16 pixels.
You can add a new image as follows:
 Select the Image Library and choose the Add a new image action. This will present a
windows explorer window.
 Select the required image file and click Open. This will present a dialog:

Add a new image

 Fill in the Description if required. The description is only relevant to the Classifier
Administrator.
 Click OK and the new image will appear in the image list.

Image list

p94
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Properties (Image)

Admin : Image Library / {image}  Properties

You can view the properties of an image (e.g. its size), or change the description associated with the
image.
 Select the Image Library and select the relevant image.
 Choose the Properties action (see Add a new image for a description of the properties).
 View / Change the relevant details. Changing the image file will replace the existing image
w herever it is used.
 Click OK.

Delete (image)

Admin : Image Library / {image}  Delete

You may delete an image that you have created. You should confirm that there are no outstanding uses
of that image before proceeding. If you attempt to delete an image that is still referenced from one or
more rules for example, the action fails and you will be presented with a list of the rules that use the
image.
 Select the Image Library and select the image to be deleted.
 Choose the Delete action.
 Click Yes on the delete confirmation.

p95
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

User Message Library

The User Message Library allows you to define site specific messages to be presented to the end user
instead of default product messages. This section describes how you establish these messages and their
usage.
The set of User Messages is managed through the User Message Library node in the Classifier
Configuration. The full set of messages is available for the Administrator for selection in all Classifier
Policies. If you use multiple Classifier Policies you may find it useful to define alternative texts for use in
different policies.
If you intend to configure a Rule that presents a User Message configuration option, you should ensure
that a suitable message is available before defining the rule, or define the message at the message
selection point in the rule definition sequence using the " New..." option. The set of rules that require
User Messages is defined in Use of User Messages.
The following actions are supported on User messages:

 Add a new message

 Language (Message) [Only available if Languages support is enabled. Provides the ability to switch
the view to see the message configuration for a specific Language.]

 Properties (Message) [Provides the ability to change any of the Properties of the message including
its name (i.e. Rename)].

 Copy (Message)
 Delete (Message)
Selecting the User Message Library node displays a list of the currently defined messages. This list
initially contains pre-defined messages which you can use as you wish (adapt, delete, etc.).

User Messages List

Use of User Messages

Check rules in the Policy configuration perform checks and allow you to select the message that is
displayed to the end user, or to define reasons presented to users if you use the Challenge Options
For example an Outlook rule to check recipient clearance refers to a 'this message' item:
“Check clearance for recipients. Warn user if check fails with this message.”
The rule template is presented with a value ( Warn - Unapproved recipients ) supplied as a placeholder

p96
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

for this as in the example below :

Rule showing message token

You can click on the current value (placeholder) and it w ill present a list showing the set of configured
messages from which you can select the one you want.

Available Message List

The full set of rules requiring User messages is defined in Check rules.

p97
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Add a new message

Admin : User Message Library  Add a new message

You can add a new message by:
 Select the User Message Library and choosing the Add a new message action.
 Fill in the fields as required:
Name (Mandatory) The unique name of this message. This is the value that will
appear in a list of messages available to you when defining various rules.
Language You only need to define Language specific values if the algorithm defined
in Languages would not yield a suitable value from another configured
Language.
Choose the Language and then define the Title / Message text / Help
URL as required.
Title: (Mandatory) This is the title that will appear on the dialog presented to the
end user if this message is to be displayed.
Message text (Mandatory) This is the text that will be presented to the end user. Note:
The display area in the run time dialog only show s the first three lines of the
message text. The user may click for more information to see the rest of the
text.
Help URL (Optional) A site accessible URL that you can use to provide users with
access to further information pertinent to this message. If this is not
configured, but the General Setting URL for your labelling help site is
configured. If this is populated, the dialog that presents the message will
provide a Help button, otherwise the Help button will be disabled.

Add a new Message

 Click OK and the new message will appear in the message list.

p98
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Language (Message)

Admin : User Message Library  Language

By default the User Messages list will present the messages and associated text for the Configuration
default language.
You can select the Language action to see a drop down list of the currently configured languages.

Languages list
Selecting a language will update the message list to show the Message Text configured for each
message for that language.

Properties (Message)

Admin : User Message Library / {message}  Properties

You can change any aspect of a message definition. Changing the name of a message (Rename)
essentially deletes the selected message and creates a new one, updating any references to the
message in existing Rules.
 Select the User Message Library and select the relevant message.
 Choose the Properties action (see Add a new message for a description of the properties).
 Change the relevant details.
 Click OK.

Copy (Message)

Admin : User Message Library / {message}  Copy

You can create a new message by using an existing one as a base.
 Select the User Message Library and select the relevant base message.
 Choose the Copy action. This will create a new Message entry with the name "<original
name> - Copy".
 Select the Copy and click Properties to change the relevant details (Name etc.).
 Click OK

Delete (Message)

Admin : User Message Library / {message}  Delete

You may delete a message that you have created. Messages that are created from a Label Configuration
template cannot be deleted since they are associated with rules in the template.
You should confirm that there are no outstanding uses of that message before proceeding. If you
attempt to delete a message that is still referenced from one or more rules, the action will fail and you
w ill be presented with a list of the rules that use the message.
 Select the User Message Library and select the message to be deleted.

p99
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Choose the Delete action.

 Click Yes on the delete confirmation.

User Interface Library

Admin : User Interface Library
Classifier is highly configurable. Some user visible text controlled by the site through the User Message
Library. However, other aspects of user presentation (e.g. Button captions and tooltips) have default
values built in to the code.
The User Interface Library allow s you to create and manage one or more User Interface Definitions
w hich can override these default values. Each policy then defines, through Properties (Policy) the User
Interface Definition (UI definition) it is to use - there is a fixed default UI definition (named as Default)
w hich is the UI definition assumed when policies are created.
The initial state of the User Interface Library shows no UI definitions - the Default UI definition is
always hidden and cannot be changed.

User Interface Library

This Library supports the following actions:

 Add a new UI definition

 Properties (UI definition)

 Copy (UI definition)

 Delete (UI definition)

To view or modify the settings in a UI definition:

 Select the relevant UI definition (e.g. Test UI definition).
 Select the required <Item> from the list displayed. One of:
 Challenge (UID)

 Classification History (UID)

 Content Inspection Check (UID)

 File Classifier (UID)

 Folder View Labelling (UID)

 General Messages (UID)

 Label Selection (UID)

 Management Agent (UID)

p100
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Menus (UID)

 Organise Favourites (UID)

 Policy Check (UID)

 Ribbon (UID)

 RMS Apply Template (UID)

 RMS Apply User Permissions (UID)

 Select the <Item> Properties action (the lower of the two instances in the action pane)
w hich will present the settings available for modification under that item. (See the topic for
the relevant action for details of the settings.)
 Make any changes required and click OK.

Add a new UI definition

Admin : User Interface Library  Add a new UI definition

This action adds a new User Interface Definition.
You can add a new UI definition by:
 Select the User Interface Library and choose the Add a new UI definition action.

Add a new UI definition

 Provide a unique Name and (optional) Description.
 Click OK - the UI Definition list will be updated.

p101
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

UI Definitions list
The initial state of a UI definition is a straight copy of the Default UI definition.
You can view or change the settings associated with a UI definition as described in Properties (UI
Definition Items).

Properties (UI definition)

Admin : User Interface Library  Properties

You view and modify the Properties of a UI definition by:
 Select User Interface Library and select the relevant UI definition.
 Select the Properties action.
 Change the Name or Description as required.

Copy (UI definition)

Admin : User Interface Library  Copy (Properties)

You can delete a UI definition by:
 Select the User Interface Library and select the UI definition you wish to copy.
 Click Copy. This will clone the existing UI definition w ith a name of "<original name>(1).
 Select the new copy UI definition and change its name etc. as required.

Delete (UI definition)

Admin : User Interface Library  Delete

You can delete a UI definition by:

p102
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Select the User Interface Library and select the UI definition you wish to delete.
 Click Delete.
 Click OK on the delete confirmation dialog presented.
 You will not be allowed to delete the UI Definition if it is in use in a policy:

Delete UI Definition

Properties (UI Definition Items)

Admin : User Interface Library / {UI definition} / {definition item}  Properties

You can view or change the settings associated with a UI definition as follows:
 Select the User Interface Library and select the relevant UI definition (e.g. Test UI
definition).
 Select the required <Item> from the list displayed. One of:
 Challenge (UID)

 Classification History (UID)

 Content Inspection Check (UID)

 File Classifier (UID)

 Folder View Labelling (UID)

 General Messages (UID)

 Label Selection (UID)

 Management Agent (UID)

 Menus (UID)

 Organise Favourites (UID)

 Policy Check (UID)

 Ribbon (UID)

 RMS Apply Template (UID)

 RMS Apply User Permissions (UID)

 Select the <Item> / Properties action which will present the settings available (described
under the appropriate sub-topic) for modification under that item.
 Make any changes required and click OK.

p103
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Challenge (UID)

Admin : User Interface Library / {UI definition} / Challenge  Properties

This User Interface item allows you to change the text presented to the user through the Challenge
dialog which appears after the user chooses Continue during a Policy Check sequence AND the rule has
been configured with the Challenge Options.

Challenge Policy Failure

The settings are contained in the dialog shown below. The default value appears to the left, you supply
the replacement text in the right-hand side.
Language [Only visible if Allow multiple languages is enabled - see Properties (Classifier
Administration)]. You only need to define Language specific values if the algorithm
defined in Languages would not yield a suitable value from another configured
Language.
Choose the Language and then define the relevant values.

Note: The rule specific text (A required label element... . above) is the same as appears on the
parent Policy check dialog.

p104
Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Challenge Properties

p105
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Classification History (UID)

Admin : User Interface Library / {UI definition} / Classification History  Properties

This User Interface item allows you to change the text presented to the user through the Classifier
History Display dialog w hich appears subject to the Classification History and Classification History
Display settings.

Classification History Display

The settings are contained in the dialog shown below. The default value appears to the left, you supply
the replacement text in the right-hand side.
Language [Only visible if Allow multiple languages is enabled - see Properties (Classifier
Administration)]. You only need to define Language specific values if the algorithm
defined in Languages would not yield a suitable value from another configured
Language.
Choose the Language and then define the relevant values.

Classification History Properties

p106
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

This also includes a section that applies when viewing within Office ’s BackStage View.

Content Inspection Check (UID)

Admin : User Interface Library / {UI definition} / Content Inspection Check  Properties
Note: These items are only relevant to Email Classifier (Outlook) and Office Classifier.
This User Interface item allow s you to change the text presented to the user if a content check rule
detects content of interest, and the user then selects View.
Note: The text presented to the user in the initial Policy Check dialog is configured either via the User
Message Library, or through the User Interface Library / Policy Check item.
The default Content Matches dialog appears as follows:

Content Matches
The properties contained in the dialog shown below can be set. The default value appears to the left,
you supply the replacement text in the right-hand side.
Language [Only visible if Allow multiple languages is enabled - see Properties (Classifier
Administration)]. You only need to define Language specific values if the algorithm
defined in Languages would not yield a suitable value from another configured
Language.
Choose the Language and then define the relevant values.

p107
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Content Inspection Check Properties

p108
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Decision Tree (UID)

The Decision Tree guides the user to select labels using question and answer combinations. The Decision
Tree area can be customised. A user can view and modify user interface definitions that are available for
configuration.

The properties contained in the dialog shown below can be set. The default value appears to the left,
you supply the replacement text in the corresponding fields.
Language [Only visible if Allow multiple languages is enabled - see Properties (Classifier
Administration)]. You only need to define Language specific values if the algorithm
defined in Languages would not yield a suitable value from another configured
Language.
Choose the Language and then define the relevant values.

File Classifier Properties

p109
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

File Classifier (UID)

Admin : User Interface Library / {UI definition} / File Classifier  Properties

Note: These items are only relevant to File Classifier licence has been applied.
This User Interface item allow s you to change the text presented to the user if a File Classifier policy
check fails.
The default File Classifier policy check dialog appears as follows:

File Classifier policy check dialog.

The properties contained in the dialog shown below can be set. The default value appears to the left,
you supply the replacement text in the right-hand side.

Language [Only visible if Allow multiple languages is enabled - see Properties (Classifier
Administration)]. You only need to define Language specific values if the algorithm
defined in Languages would not yield a suitable value from another configured
Language.
Choose the Language and then define the relevant values.

p110
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

File Classifier Properties

Folder View Labelling (UID)

Admin : User Interface Library / {UI definition} / Folder View Labelling  Properties
Note: This feature is only relevant to Email Classifier (Outlook).
This User Interface item allows you to change the text presented to the user through the Folder View
Labelling dialog that can appear in some circumstances as described in Folder View Labelling Operation
Note: The text presented to the user in the initial Policy Check dialog is configured either via the User
Message Library, or through the User Interface Library / Policy Check item.
The default Content Matches dialog appears as shown below.

p111
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Folder View Labelling - multiple message check.

The properties contained in the dialog shown below can be set. The default value appears to the left,
you supply the replacement text in the right hand side.
Language [Only visible if Allow multiple languages is enabled - see Properties (Classifier
Administration)]. You only need to define Language specific values if the algorithm
defined in Languages would not yield a suitable value from another configured
Language.
Choose the Language and then define the relevant values.

p112
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Folder View Labelling Properties

p113
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

General Messages (UID)

Admin : User Interface Library / {UI definition} / General Messages  Properties

There are miscellaneous values that do not relate to any other item in a UI Definition and are grouped
under this General Messages item.
The settings are contained in the dialog shown below. The default value appears to the left, you supply
the replacement text in the right hand side.

Language [Only visible if Allow multiple languages is enabled - see Properties (Classifier
Administration)]. You only need to define Language specific values if the algorithm
defined in Languages would not yield a suitable value from another configured
Language.
Choose the Language and then define the relevant values.

The last few (Please Wait..., Updating workbook.... etc.) all relate to a progress dialog that appears
when saving Excel workbooks.

General Messages Properties

General message Relevance
Classifier is currently operating in Classifier Administration Publish Test Configuration.
Configuration Test Mode.

p114
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Do you want to save the changes you Only applicable to Microsoft Excel. Classifier has to
made to {0}? replace the standard application dialog to ensure
consistent operation.
Failed to calculate high w atermark - Check for the high-w ater mark
leaving document label at original value.
Failed to calculate high w atermark - Check for the high-w ater mark
leaving message label at original value.
It is not possible to dow ngrade the label. Check for label change
The item contains a label w ith a higher Portion Mark
value than the overall label.
Ensure attachment markings are consistent
This cell is not empty. A portion mark Portion Mark
cannot be inserted here.
Unable to insert the label into the An attempt to set the label on an item.
document since it is marked as protected.
Unable to insert a portion marking since Portion Mark
the document is protected.
Unable to insert the label into the An attempt to set the label on an item.
document since it is marked as read-only.
Unable to insert a portion marking since Portion Mark
the document is read-only.
Your labelling policy requires you to save Microsoft Project only.
this document before you send it.
Your labelling policy requires you to save Office 2003 obsolete
this document before you send it. Would
you like to save the document now ?
Your labelling policy requires you to save Office 2003 obsolete
this presentation before you send it. Would
you like to save the presentation now ?
Your labelling policy requires you to save Office 2003 obsolete
this workbook before you send it. Would
you like to save the w orkbook now ?
Failed to access attachment. Warn if file contents cannot be accessed
It is not possible to change the label at this An attempt to set the label on an item.
time as this item is protected.
Please Wait... Whenever a progress dialog is presented.
Updating w orkbook... Indicates Classifier is applying policy rules etc.
Updating w orkbook footers... No longer used
Updating w orkbook headers... No longer used
Completing update of w orkbook... Indicates Classifier is applying policy rules etc.
New Default Label applied successfully. You User Selectable Default Classification - Properties
must restart Office for your change to take (Policy) .
effect.
Classifier Attachment List General Email content

Label Selection (UID)

Admin : User Interface Library / {UI definition} / Label Selection  Properties

This User Interface item allow s you to change the text presented to the user if the Label Selection dialog
appears.

p115
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Label Selection dialog

The settings are contained in the dialog shown below. The default value appears to the left, you supply
the replacement text in the right-hand side.
Language [Only visible if Allow multiple languages is enabled - see Properties (Classifier
Administration)]. You only need to define Language specific values if the algorithm
defined in Languages would not yield a suitable value from another configured
Language.
Choose the Language and then define the relevant values.

p116
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Label Selection Properties

Note: The settings for Clear and Default above relate to the Label selection dialog. There are similar
settings (Clear and Default) found under Menus which relate to the text shown in the Ribbon.

Management Agent (UID)

Admin : User Interface Library / {UI definition} / Management Agent  Properties

Note: These items are only relevant if you are using the Classifier Management Agent which is
configured to Show the System Tray Icon .
This User Interface item allows you to change the text presented to the user through the various dialogs
documented in the Classifier Management Agent Guide.
The properties contained in the dialog shown below can be set. The default value appears to the left,
you supply the replacement text in the right-hand side.
Language [Only visible if Allow multiple languages is enabled - see Properties (Classifier
Administration)]. You only need to define Language specific values if the algorithm
defined in Languages would not yield a suitable value from another configured
Language.
Choose the Language and then define the relevant values.

Management Agent Properties

p117
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Menus (UID)

Admin : User Interface Library / {UI definition} / Menus  Properties

This User Interface item allows you to change the text presented to the user through the various menus
as per Label Selection Interfaces , Label Options, Favourites and Portion Mark.
Note: Some of these items w ill only appear if an Enterprise license is applied and/or a feature is
Enabled.
The settings are contained in the dialog shown below. The default value appears to the left, you supply
the replacement text in the right-hand side.

Multiple Languages

Language [Only visible if Allow multiple languages is enabled - see Properties (Classifier
Administration)]. You only need to define Language specific values if the algorithm
defined in Languages would not yield a suitable value from another configured
Language.
Choose the Language and then define the relevant values.

Menus Properties

This also includes a section that applies when viewing within Office ’s BackStage View.

Note: The settings for Clear and Default above relate to the text shown in the Ribbon. There are
similar settings (Clear and Default) found under Label Selection which relate to the text shown in the
Label selection dialog.

Menu Tooltips

 Label Dialog - Create or change the label using the label dialog.

 Favourites - Choose a favourite label.

 Add Current Label to Favourites - Add the current label to your favourites (Under Favourites).

p118
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Organise Favourites - Change the order your favourites appear in the Favourites menu (Under
Favourites).

 Set current label as default - Set the current label as the user defined default label (Under
Favourites).

 Clear User Defined Default - Clear the current user defined default label (Under Favourites).

 Portion Mark - Choose a portion mark to apply.

 Use Guidance - Get assistance w hen applying a classification to this document.

 Classifier Label Policy Help - Click here for help.

 Options - Display additional options for labels and other advanced features.

 Clear - Clear the current label for this document. (Under Options)

 Portion Mark - Choose a portion mark to apply.

 Choose Portion Mark - Choose a portion mark to apply. (Under Portion)

 Classifier Visual Markings - Image in header (Word).

 Classification History - View the history of the label changes on this document (Word)

 Default - Apply the default label to this document/email.

 Show Summary Marking - Show the summary marking of the current label in the pane below the
document (Note: This only becomes active on the Option menu if the summary label is not
displayed).

 Track Document - Azure RMS Document Tracking (Note: This only becomes active if enabled in
the CAS and the client is using RMS.

Organise Favourites (UID)

Admin : User Interface Library / {UI definition} / Organise Favourites  Properties

This User Interface item allows you to change the text presented to the user through the Organise
Favourites dialog.

p119
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Organise Favourites.

The settings are contained in the dialog shown below. The default value appears to the left, you supply
the replacement text in the right-hand side.

Language [Only visible if Allow multiple languages is enabled - see Properties (Classifier
Administration)]. You only need to define Language specific values if the algorithm
defined in Languages would not yield a suitable value from another configured
Language.
Choose the Language and then define the relevant values.

Organise Favourites Properties

Policy Check (UID)

Admin : User Interface Library / {UI definition} / Policy Check  Properties

This User Interface item allows you to change the text presented to the user through the Policy Check
dialog. The Policy Check dialog appears if a configured policy rule 'fails'. Different buttons may be
presented depending upon the rule (e.g. Content Check, Recipient check, Check clearance for
attachments...) and rule settings, but the dialog structure is the same.

p120
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Policy Check dialog.

Note: The Back button may be unavailable in some circumstances. See Process rules when printing
and Process rules when saving.
Note: The subordinate box titles (e.g. Unapproved recipients) are taken from the 'Title' of the user
message associated w ith the rule - not the Name of the massage (e.g. Name = Warn - Unapproved
recipients / Title = Unapproved recipients).

The settings are contained in the dialog shown below. The default value appears to the left, you supply
the replacement text in the right-hand side.

Language [Only visible if Allow multiple languages is enabled - see Properties (Classifier
Administration)]. You only need to define Language specific values if the algorithm
defined in Languages would not yield a suitable value from another configured
Language.
Choose the Language and then define the relevant values.

p121
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Policy Check Properties

Ribbon (UID)

Admin : User Interface Library / {UI definition} / Ribbon  Properties

This User Interface item allows you to change the text presented to the user through the Classifier
Ribbon. The ribbon holds the selectors in a Classifier application, together with some associated options.
The menus can be configured in the separate Menus (UID) section.

The settings are contained in the dialog shown below. The default value appears to the left, you
supply the replacement text in the right hand side.

p122
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Classifier Ribbon Properties under the User Message Library Properties.

This also includes a section that applies when viewing within Office ’s BackStage View.

Definitions for the button text are:

 Select Label - The text of the ribbon menu that displays the labeller dialog to create or edit a label.

 Show Label - The text of the ribbon menu to show the label dialog in read-only mode.

 Label selected message(s) - For Outlook Explorer folder view labelling.

 Set Label - The text of the ribbon menu to change a label on an existing received message (only
applies if Folder View Labelling is enabled)

 Label Dialog - The text of the ribbon menu that allows a user to add additional label elements that
are not available on the ribbon when in single click mode.

Other settings that appear in the primary label interface can be found under:

 Label Selection (UID)

 Menus (UID)

 Organise Favourites (UID)

p123
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

RMS Apply Template (UID)

Admin : User Interface Library / {UI definition} / Ribbon bar  Properties
This User Interface item allows you to change the text presented to the user as a result of an Apply RMS
policy or option rule.

RMS policy or option

The settings are contained in the dialog shown below. The default value appears to the left, you supply
the replacement text in the right-hand side.

Language [Only visible if Allow multiple languages is enabled - see Properties (Classifier
Administration)]. You only need to define Language specific values if the algorithm
defined in Languages would not yield a suitable value from another configured
Language.
Choose the Language and then define the relevant values.

RMS Apply Template Properties

p124
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

RMS Apply User Permissions (UID)

Admin : User Interface Library / {UI definition} / Ribbon bar  Properties
This User Interface item allows you to change the text presented to the user through when they click
the Apply Ad Hoc protection button on the policy check dialog shown in response to a Check for RMS
protection rule.
[The UID configuration settings (buttons and tool-tips) for the RMS protection policy check dialog are
found under the Policy Check (UID) item.]

RMS Apply Ad Hoc Protection.

The settings are contained in the dialog shown below. The default value appears to the left, you supply
the replacement text in the right-hand side.

Language [Only visible if Allow multiple languages is enabled - see Properties (Classifier
Administration)]. You only need to define Language specific values if the algorithm
defined in Languages would not yield a suitable value from another configured
Language.
Choose the Language and then define the relevant values.

p125
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

RMS Apply User Permissions Properties

p126
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

LABELLING CONFIGURATIONS
Note: At this time only a single Labelling Configuration is supported.
Most Classifier settings are held in a Labelling Configuration (with the exception of the Settings
applicable across the organisation). The initial installation has no labelling configuration defined. A
Configuration is established by an administrator who can then Publish that configuration to a master
location. To make a change to the master configuration you should retrieve the master configuration,
operate on it locally and then publish the update. Care should be taken if more than one person is
making changes to the configuration, and further details of this process can be found in Configuration
Deployment.
The following actions are relevant:

 Add a new Label Configuration

 Properties (Label Configuration)

 Delete (Label Configuration)

Immediately after installation there is no Label Configuration defined. Once you have established your
local configuration (using Add a new label configuration ) you will have access to the various configurable
features summarised below.

Labelling Configurations
The Configuration (including the Global Settings and User Message Library) can be Published and
retrieved using:

 Publish Configuration (available from the Classifier Administration node)

 Get Server Configuration (available from the Classifier Administration node)

You have access to the following top level features:

Selector Library The set of Selectors and Selector values defined for this configuration
Marking Library The set of Marking Formats defined for this configuration
Content library The set of definitions to be used by Content Checking
Condition Library The set of Conditions that can be used w ith Add Rules and Apply Rules.
Configuration settings Settings that apply to all users of the Label Configuration.
Policies One or more Policies that tailor the features to meet the requirements for a
group of users.
Clearance Settings (Optional) Provides access to the settings that manage Domain (if enabled)
and Dynamic Clearance features.

p127
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Add a new label configuration

Admin : Labelling Configurations  Add a new label configuration
Note: Configuration features are made available according to the features licensed. Before creating a
configuration you must apply at least one suitable licence using the features described under Licence. If
you try to create a configuration before you apply a licence, Classifier Administration will direct you to
supply a licence.
A new Labelling Configuration can be established as described below. Any existing local Configuration
must first be deleted [Delete (Label Configuration) ].
You should consider if there is an existing (Master) configuration that you should retrieve from a central
location using Get Server Configuration.
A labelling configuration is based on a template configuration. The product is supplied with a number of
template configurations including an Empty Configuration.
 Select Labelling Configurations and choose Add a new Label Configuration to display
the following:

Add a new label configuration

 Enter the Name of your labelling Configuration. This name may be included as the
"Configuration Name” element in Marking Format definitions (e.g. Classifier test).
 Choose a Category and select the Template most appropriate to your environment (this
document has used the Miscellaneous / Empty Ccnfiguration template).

p128
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 If there is no licence currently applied (e.g. immediately after installation) when you invoke
Add a new Label Configuration you will need to add apply a licence file as follow s.
 Click the Browse button which will present an Open dialog. Navigate to the location of the licence file to
be applied (e.g. below Base Bundle\Licence and open a suitable folder (e.g. Email Classifier).
 Select the .LIC file presented (e.g. IMPCEM.LIC) and click Open. This will populate the Licence File field.
[These licence files are limited period evaluation licences).
 Click OK.
 You can apply additional licences as described under Licence.
You now have a complete configuration that can be explored or modified.

Properties (Label Configuration)

Admin : Labelling Configurations / {configuration}  Properties
You can view and change the properties of the selected Label configuration. Changing the Name field
effectively performs a rename as per the sequence below.
 Select Labelling Configurations and select the relevant configuration.
 Choose Properties.
 Change the contents of the Name field and then click OK.
Note: This will change the local name of the configuration. To make this Configuration operational you
w ill have to Publish the configuration and ensure that all client environments are updated to refer to the
new configuration.
Note: 'Renaming' a Configuration changes how the Configuration name appears (e.g. in an applied
Marking). Classifier maintains the unique identifier originally assigned, and so pre-existing Label values
are still valid.

Delete (Label Configuration)

Admin : Labelling Configurations / {configuration}  Delete
You can delete your local Labelling Configuration. This removes the local information, but will not affect
any published location.
 Select Labelling Configurations and select the relevant configuration.
 Choose Delete which will present the following dialog.

Delete Label Configuration

 By default any licences applied are retained and available in a Label Configuration you then
create. If for some reason you need to remove the existing licences, check the Delete
licences in use by this configuration option. You will then have to apply licences to any
new configuration you create.

p129
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Selector Library
Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Selector Library
Note: The names of Selectors and Selector values must be unique within the configuration to avoid
ambiguities when parsing text labels.
A Label (Classification) is made up of one or more Selector Values that together “classify” an object
(document / message) w ith that label having meaning within the organisation, defining qualities such as
its sensitivity / importance / operational handling. For example, a label may just contain non-disclosure
information.
Selecting the Selector Library node show s a list of the configured Selectors (initially empty if you are
using the Empty Configuration Template) and the Values defined for the currently selected Selector.
Each Selector defines one or more Values that may be selected by the end user (using the Label
Selection interface). The Selector Library defines the Selectors and Values supported by this Label
Configuration. However, the Selectors and Values actually available to end users are defined through a
Policy which allows Selectors and / or Values to be hidden from selected users according to the policy
that is assigned to them.

Control over w hich Selectors and values are presented to end users is actually controlled as part of
Policy definition. Selectors and Values must be specifically chosen for presentation in a policy.
You should define all Selectors that are meaningful in your Label Configuration. This may include
Selectors that are not included in all policies. This may arise for example because one of your Selectors
is only relevant to a specific set of users. This does not preclude those (limited) users from receiving
labels containing values from the ‘hidden’ selector.
All Selectors can be show n through the standard Marking Format mechanisms. The behaviour when a
user receives a document or email message containing a value relating to such a ‘hidden’ selector is
described in Retained (Retained Selectors being the term used to refer to Selectors NOT available for
selection in the current policy).
By default a Selector is not Mandatory – that is a Label may be valid if it has no Value selected for this
Selector. You can ensure that a user chooses a value for a Selector (it is Mandatory) by configuring
Check these mandatory selectors rules.
Selector values are relevant to any Check for the high-water mark rules (Email, OWA and Notes).
Selectors and their values are usually Active, but may be Active, Obsolete or Retained .
The actions supported are described in Selector Actions .
Once you have defined some selectors the display appears as follow s:

Selector Library

p130
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Selector Actions

The actions supported for Selectors are:

 Add a new Selector one of the follow ing:

o Single selection list
o Multiple selection list
o Text entry
o Date picker
o Date offset list
 Language (Selectors) [This is only available if Languages support is enabled. Provides the ability to
sw itch the view to see the selector configuration for a specific Language.]

Once you have selected a Selector:

 Edit Selector
 Move Up / Move Dow n
 Obsolete / Restore Selector
 Delete (Selector)

Add a new selector

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Selector Library  Add a new selector

The following Selector types are supported and appear as choices below the Add a new selector
action:

 Single selection list Appears to the user as a drop down list from which they can choose zero
or one Value from the set of values allowed through the current policy.

 Multiple selection list Appears to the user as a drop down list from which they can choose zero,
one or more Values from the set of values allowed through the current
policy.

 Text entry Appears to the user as a (possibly constrained) text entry field.

 Date picker Appears to the user as a (possibly constrained) date selection field.

 Date offset list Appears to the user as a drop down list from which they can choose one
Value from the set of values configured in the current policy. The
associated configuration is used to produce an offset to the current date.

To add a new selector:

1. Select the Selector Library and choose Add a new selector and choose the required selector type
from the those presented:

p131
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Selector types
2. This will present a dialog showing the selector Properties. The example below shows a Single
selection list selector.

Edit Selector (Single selection List)

Some Properties (Name etc.) are common to all Selector types and are described under Edit Selector.
Other Properties vary w ith the Selector type and are described in the appropriate sub-topic:

 Single selection list

 Multiple selection list

 Text entry

 Date picker

 Date offset list

3. Enter the appropriate property values (see Edit Selector)

Note: The selector type cannot be changed. If you need to change the selector type (and retain the
name), you must delete the existing selector and create a new selector with the same name.
4. Click OK
5. The Selector Library display is updated to show the Selector you have just created.

Move Up / Move Down

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Selector Library  Set selector order

The order that Selectors appear to the user is determined by the order they appear in the selector

p132
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

library.
You can change this order using the Move Up and Move Down actions.
 Select Selector Library and select the Selector to be moved.
 Choose Move Up / Move Down as required.

p133
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Language (Selectors)

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Selector Library  Language

By default the Selector Library list presents the selector Captions and Tooltips defined for the
Configuration default language.
You can select an alternative language by clicking on the Language action and choosing the required
language from the list presented.
Any Caption or Tooltip shown in the upper pane which has not had a language specific value defined
w ill be blank. The lower pane w ill show the Value Name, Tooltip, Portion, Alternate name /2/3 values
defined for that language. If no specific value has been defined then a value is derived using the
Algorithm defined in Languages.

Edit Selector

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Selector Library/{selector} Properties

When you Add a new selector, or choose the Edit Selector action you are presented with a dialog
show ing the various Selector properties described.
There are some properties common to all selector types (Name etc.), and other properties which vary
w ith the selector type.
Note: The selector type property is defined at creation time and is not changeable (or visible) through
the Properties action.
There are some properties common to all selector types (Name etc.), which are described below , and
other properties which vary with the selector type.
Properties common to all selector types:
Name This is the Name of the Selector in the Classifier Configuration. This Name is used when
assigning Selectors for inclusion in a Policy. The Name must be unique in the Configuration.
You may change the Name of a Selector (Rename) using the Properties action– it will
change all instances of the Selector name throughout the Label Configuration.
Language [Only visible if Allow multiple languages is enabled - see Properties (Classifier
Administration)]. You only need to define Language specific values if the algorithm defined
in Languages would not yield a suitable value from another configured Language. Selecting
the Language allows you to define the values to be displayed for that Language.
Choose the Language and then set the Caption and/or Tooltip and other values as required.
Caption This is the name presented to the end user. The value may be overridden by a Caption
setting at the Policy level.
If you do not set this explicitly then the Selector Name is used as the Caption.
Note: The value should be short enough to fit into the ribbon bar area that presents the
Label selection interface. It is sensible to check that the effects are reasonable in all relevant
environments (e.g. Outlook / OWA / Notes / Office etc.).
ToolTip This is an optional string that appears if a user hovers over the Selector in the Label
Selection area of the ribbon bar (maximum length 1000).
Note: The Include this Selector in Clearance Checks setting can now be found on the Edit values
(Selectors) dialog.
Properties that vary with the selector type are described in the following:

 Single selection list

 Multiple selection list

 Text entry

 Date picker

p134
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Date offset list

Some properties and actions are common to Single selection / Multiple selection / Date offset list
selector types and are described in detail in:

 New (Selector value)

 Properties (Selector values)

 Buttons (Selector values)

Single selection list

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Selector Library / {selector}  Edit

values
Note: Single selection list selectors can take part in Clearance checking, high-water mark checks ( Label
Dominance) and Check for Label Change on Reply/Forward.
Single selection list selectors can be presented in the Ribbon Bar.
Choosing Edit values for a Single selection list presents a dialog similar to below allowing you to view
and modify the various Properties.

Edit Selector (Single Selection list)

The language selection drop down menu is only presented ( Configuration default language in the
screen shot above) if Allow multiple languages - Properties (Classifier Administration) is Enabled.
This indicates support for localisation (Languages) of selector value Name, Tooltip, Portion and Alternate
name 1/2/3. Further details can be found under Properties (Selector Values) .
Note: Multiple languages are NOT supported by Date offset list selectors.
Features and properties common to Single selection / Multiple selection and Date offset list are
described in:

 New (Selector value)

 Properties (Selector Values) (Name, Colour, Image, Tooltip, Portion, Alternate name / 2 / 3).
 Buttons (Selector values) (Move up/down, Obsolete / Restore / Delete buttons).

p135
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

The remaining settings have specific relevance to Single selection lists:

Include this selector in clearance and attachment checks This setting should be checked if any of
the following apply:
o You intend to configure rules to Check for the high-water mark .

o You intend to configure rules to Check for Author label change or Check for label
change (Check rules).
o You intend to perform Label dominance checks and use Portion Marking ( Portion Marking). It
allows the software to ascertain whether one label ‘dominates’ another to ensure that the
email message label "dominates" all attachment labels for example (see also Label
Dominance).
o You intend to configure rules to Check for Author label change or Check for label
change (Check rules) under Email, OWA or Notes Classifier and this selector is to be
included in those checks (Application Settings / Clearance check Email Domains or
Clearance check Users must be Enabled).
Hierarchy This setting is only relevant if Include this selector in clearance and attachment
checks is set. [Hierarchy has no impact on Clearance checks, since all clearances are
specific]. Three choices are available via the drop down list:
o No Hierarchy This Selector does not operate as a Hierarchy. The Hierarchy column is
removed from the dialog above.
Note: Selecting No Hierarchy in conjunction with Include this selector in clearance
and attachment checks will cause the user to have to resolve issues such as High-w ater
mark checks detecting differences between message label and attachment label(s) that
might be resolved automatically if the selector was Hierarchic.
o Hierarchical based on the value order The Selector operates as a Hierarchy and the
order of appearance is the same as the display order (The value at the top of the list is
dominated by the second in the list in turn dominated by the third…). The hierarchy value is
automatically derived from the position (and is sequential - 1,2,3...).
o Hierarchical with manual configuration The Selector operates as a Hierarchy but you
must set the relative order manually (through the Edit Values dialog / Hierarchy column).
The value assigned a hierarchy value of 1 is dominated by the value assigned 2, which is
dominated by 3 etc. Choosing this value makes the relevant cells editable, and allows the
display order to be different to the hierarchy order.
Note: If you happen to define the hierarchy values sequentially starting at 1, then Classifier
w ill detect this and automatically sw itch the setting to Hierarchical based on the value order.
You can change this subsequently by assigning different values.

Multiple selection list

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Selector Library / {selector}  Edit

values
Note: Multiple selection list selectors can take part in Clearance checking, high-water mark checks (
Label Dominance) and Check for Label Change.
Choosing Edit values for a Multiple selection list presents a dialog similar to the following allowing you to
view and modify the various Properties.

p136
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Edit selector (Multi-selection list)

Features and properties common to Single selection / Multiple selection and Date offset list are
described in:

 New (Selector value)

 Properties (Selector Values) (Name, Colour, Tooltip, Portion, Alternate name / 2 / 3).
 Buttons (Selector values) (Move up/down, Obsolete / Restore / Delete buttons).
The remaining settings have specific relevance to Multiple selection lists:
Minimum Defines the minimum number of values the user should select for this Selector.
Note: Setting a positive value does NOT make the selector mandatory, it merely defines the
lower bound if at least one value is selected. A mandatory rule is required to make the
selector mandatory.
Maximum Defines the maximum number of values the user should select for this selector.
If the user has too many or too few values then display this message This allows you to choose
which message is presented to the user if they have chosen either less than Minimum or
more than Maximum number of values for this selector. You can Add a new message to
create a New user message by clicking Add.
Include this selector in clearance and attachment checks This setting should be checked if any of
the following apply:
o You intend to configure rules to Check for the high-water mark .

o You intend to configure rules to Check for Author label change or Check for label
change (Check rules).
o You intend to perform Label dominance checks and use Portion Marking ( Portion Marking). It
allows the software to ascertain whether one label ‘dominates’ another to ensure that the
email message label "dominates" all attachment labels for example (see also Label
Dominance).
o You intend to configure rules to Check for Author label change or Check for label

p137
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

change (Check rules) under Email, OWA or Notes Classifier and this selector is to be
included in those checks (Application Settings / Clearance check Email Domains or
Clearance check Users must be Enabled).
Permissive/Restrictive - This radio button is only available if Include this selector in clearance
and attachment checks is set and only applicable if Clearance Checks are configured. The
setting indicates if a Domain or User must be Cleared for one of ( Permissive) or all of (
Restrictive) the selected values. See also Label Dominance for further details).

Text entry

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Selector Library / {selector}  Edit

values
Note: Freeform text selectors take no part in Clearance checks, or high-w ater mark checks (Label
Dominance); but can be included in Check for Label Change.
Text entry selectors cannot be presented in the Ribbon Bar.
Choosing Edit values for a Text entry selector presents a dialog similar to below allowing you to view
and modify the various Properties.

Edit selector (Text entry)

Allow any text - All text is allowed.
Restrict user input. Allow only these characters to be entered - Only text indicated by the
subordinate settings is valid ( Alphabetic (a regular expression mask of "(([a-zA-Z]))+" -
English only ) / Numeric/ Punctuation/ Space). For character sets other than English use
the Custom Format features below.
Note: The following characters are always restricted even if all the subordinate options are
checked
¬"£$%^&*_+={}@~#\|<>
Define a custom format using a regular expression - Only text conforming to the defined
regular expression is permitted. Classifier invokes the Microsoft .NET Framework Regex
object to perform the checks (see http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/az24scfc
(v=vs.90).aspx for more details).
If the user enters some invalid text then display this message - This allows you to choose which
message is presented to the user if the current selector value contains text that does not
conform to the configuration. In many cases Classifier inhibits user input of 'invalid' text, but

p138
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

circumstances will arise where this is not possible (e.g. Forward of a message containing
invalid value for this selector). You can Add a new message to create a New user message
by pressing Add.
Enter text to see how this freeform text selector will behave - Allows you to see how the
configured settings affect the user interaction.

Date picker

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Selector Library / {selector}  Edit

values
Note: Date picker selectors take no part in Clearance checking, but are included in high-water mark
checks (Label Dominance), and Check for Label Change.
Date picker selectors cannot be presented in the Ribbon Bar.
Choosing Edit values for a Date picker selector presents a dialog similar to the following allowing you to
view and modify the various Properties.

Edit Selector (Date picker)

Allow any date A standard date selection calendar is presented.
Restrict to a time period The dates available for selection by the user will be limited according to
the configuration of The time period allowed is : that is a number of days/weeks/months/
years from the current date either in the future or the past.
If the user enters an invalid date then display this message This allows you to choose which
message is presented to the user if the current selector value contains a date that does not
conform to the configuration. In many cases Classifier inhibits user input of 'invalid' dates,
but circumstances w ill arise where this is not possible (e.g. Forward of a message containing
invalid value for this selector). You can Add a new message to create a New user message
by clicking Add.
Note: Information on the formatting of Date selectors in markings can be found in Date Format.

Date offset list

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Selector Library / {selector}  Edit

values
Note: Date offset selectors take no part in Clearance checking, but are included in high-water mark
checks (Label Dominance), and Check for Label Change.

p139
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Date offset list selectors can be presented in the Ribbon Bar.

Choosing Edit values for a Date offset list presents a dialog similar to the following allowing you to view
and modify the various Properties. The user sees the names of the configured values, but markings
include the date derived at run time.

Edit Selector (Date offset list)

Features and properties common to Single selection / Multiple selection and Date offset list are
described in:

 New (Selector value)

 Properties (Selector Values) (Name, Colour, Tooltip, Portion, Alternate name / 2 / 3).
 Buttons (Selector values) buttons (Move up/down, Obsolete / Restore / Delete buttons).
The remaining settings have specific relevance to Date offset list:
Number The number of days / w eeks / months / years (as defined by Period) to be added to the
current date to produce the actual date value to be stored in any applied Markings.
Period Defines how Number is to be used to provide the offset to today's date to produce a
marking value.
Note: Information on the formatting of Date selectors in markings can be found in Date Format.

p140
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

New (Selector value)

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Selector Library / {selector}  Edit

values
Note: If you add a new value to a Selector that is already assigned to a policy, you will have to
explicitly enable the new value in the policy as described in Policy Label UI /Selector Properties /
Options (Available Values).
To add a new Selector Value:
 Select the relevant selector and choose Edit Selector.
 Click New to insert a new row at the bottom of the Values list.
 Double click the entry and a form is displayed allowing you to edit the various settings.

Edit selector values

 Enter a name for the Value. The Name must be unique for this Selector, and it is
recommended that the name is unique in the Configuration to avoid confusion and potential
miss parsing of text markings.
 Amend other Properties (Selector Values) of the new value to match your requirements.
Click OK

Properties (Selector values)

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Selector Library / {selector}  Edit

values
Note: These features are only applicable to Single selection, Multiple selection and Date offset list
selector types.
Note: Localisation (Languages) is not supported for Date offset list selectors).
Selector Values and their properties are managed through the Edit Values window in three ways:

 By direct edit of a cell in the Edit Selector window (text entry or drop dow n). Simply select the cell
and perform the change.

 By selection from a drop dow n list from which you can choose the setting you require (e.g. a colour)
 By use of the Buttons (Selector values) to perform an action on the selected Value (e.g. Move up /
Move down)
Multiple language support for selector values
Single selection list and Multiple selection list selectors optionally provide multiple language support
allowing you to configure language specific values for selector value Name, Tooltip, Portion and
Alternate name 1/2/3.
Selecting a configured language will show the values associated with that language. If there is no
language specific value defined for a property then the Algorithm for finding the text to display
defined in Languages is used to determine a value to be displayed and associated with the chosen
language.

p141
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Supported properties:
Name This is the string that by default is presented to the end user for selection of this Value via
the Label Selection interface; assuming the Selector and Value are available in the policy
applicable to the user.
You can choose to present the Portion or Alternate value rather than the Name in the
Label selection interface as described in Policy Label UI / Selector Properties / Options .
Colour This allows you to associate a colour (selected from the drop dow n colour dialog). Setting
the colour property for a Selector Value means that any marking which contains that Value
w ill automatically adopt the associated colour as the text colour. This is subject to the
proviso that the marking location must be capable of presenting colour (e.g. It would be Ok
in a Summary Marking presented in information bar, but not applicable to Meta data
locations). Marking formats may override the colour setting.
By default there is no colour setting.
Note: You can 'unset' an existing colour setting by: selecting the selector, choosing Edit
Values, clicking on the Colour cell to display the Colour Picker dialog. Then press CTRL + DEL
to revert to no colour setting.
Image (Only applicable to Single and Multiple selection list selectors and only relevant if
Use Single Click with pre-defined labels is enabled). You can associate an image from the
Image Library with the chosen selector value.
Tooltip This is an optional text value (maximum length 1000 characters including CR/LF etc.) that
w ill appear if a user hovers over the Selector value in the label selection dialog. If no value
is chosen, or there is no Tooltip defined for the selected value, then the Tooltip defined for
the parent Selector will be shown.
Note: Due to the nature of the environment, certain unusual characters within a tooltip
(e.g. ) may appear as a box ( ) when displayed via OWA. It is prudent to
check that any tooltip defined appears as intended in all relevant environments.
Note: There is no support for different language variants of Selector value tooltips.

Selector value tooltip

Portion This is a text string that can be defined to make use of the Classifier Portion Marking
features. It allows you to allocate a short form of the Label Value so that when you wish to
mark parts of a Word document or email message as (for example) “Confidential" or "Public"
the short form (portion marking value) is inserted instead. For example:
[P] indicating that this text may be circulated publicly
[C] indicating that this text is confidential and must not be circulated publicly
If you are not using Portion marking in emails or Word, then you can leave this setting
blank. Please see Portion Marking for further details on the use of this mechanism.
You can choose to present the Portion or Alternate value rather than the Name in the
Label selection interface as described in Policy Label UI / Selector Properties / Options .

p142
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Alternate name / Alternate 2 / Alternate 3 These values may be defined if you wish to
establish different Marking Formats to encode the current label value in different ways.
For example you may w ish to establish a Marking Format which presents the selected values
in full and perhaps use that format in Headers and Footers; but for Subject Prefix in email
messages you may require shortened forms (e.g. Public - > Pub). Up to three “alternate
names” for a value can be defined using these properties. When you configure a Marking
Format you can use either the Value Name, or any configured Alternative name.
You can choose to present the Portion or Alternate value rather than the Name in the
Label selection interface as described in Policy Label UI / Selector Properties / Options .

Buttons (Selector values)

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Selector Library / {selector}  Edit

values
Move up / down The order Values appear in the Values area (and the Edit values area) is the order in
w hich they are presented to end users. This order may be changed by:
Note: Changing the order of display also affects the hierarchic order if Hierarchical based on the
value order is set.
 Select a Value. Click Move up/Move down to reorder the values.
 Click OK to complete the changes and return to the summary view.
Obsolete / Restore
Note: These actions relate to obsoleting and restoring Selector values. Equivalent actions for a
w hole Selector can be found under Obsolete / Restore Selector .
Over time your labelling requirements may change and you may decide to stop using a Selector
Value in the labels created, but you may have existing documents and emails that include that
Value.
The Obsolete and Restore buttons allow you to retain the Value so that existing labels are still
meaningful, but remove it from the set of Values available when creating new documents and
email messages. An obsolete Selector value will never be retained on a new email Message /
Document / Spreadsheet / Presentation.
 Select the relevant value
 Choose Obsolete
 The value name is marked by strikethrough
You may Restore an obsolete value by a similar sequence
 Select the relevant (obsolete) value
 Choose Restore
Delete This button allows you to delete a value.
Note: Deleting a Selector Value should only be used if you are sure that there are no
documents or emails in existence that use that value. It may be more appropriate to mark
the value as Obsolete using the Obsolete button.
 Select the relevant selector
 Choose Delete
 A confirmation dialog is presented. Click Yes / No.

p143
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Delete Selector Value

 If the Selector value is still in use in a Policy you are prompted and the action disallowed.

Delete Selector Value warning

Obsolete / Restore Selector

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Selector Library / {selector}  Edit

values
Note: This topic relates to obsoleting and restoring a Selector. Equivalent actions for individual Selector
values can be found under Edit Values / Buttons (Selector values) .
Over time your labelling requirements may change and you may decide to stop using a Selector in new
labels. How ever you may have existing documents and emails that include Values from that Selector.
The Obsolete feature allow s you to retain a Selector so that existing labels are still meaningful, but
remove it from the selectors available to users when creating new documents and emails (including
Reply / Forward actions). An obsolete Selector is never retained on a new email Message / Office
Document.
 Select the relevant selector. Choose Obsolete
 Click Yes to confirm the obsolete action or No to abandon the action
You may Restore an obsolete Selector by a similar sequence
 Select the relevant (obsolete) selector. Choose Restore
 Click Yes to confirm the Restore action or No to abandon the action.
Note: You cannot Obsolete a Selector until all Rules referencing the Selector have been deleted or
modified to avoid any reference to that Selector. You are warned if there are outstanding Rules when
you attempt an Obsolete action and the action is not allowed.
For further information see also Active Obsolete and Retained Selectors and values .

p144
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Active Obsolete and Retained Selectors and values

Selectors and Selector Values can be referred to as Active / Obsolete or Retained as described below. In
the simplest mode of operation selector values available in the current policy (via Policy / Set Selectors
display) are available to the user when setting the label value.
Active
Selector values 'added' into a policy are deemed Active. They are available for the user to choose as a
label value. Active values in an existing label are used as the initial value for a new object (e.g. forward
an email).
Obsolete
Over time you may find that some Selector values fall into disuse and should no longer be applied to
new objects. Classifier accommodates this circumstance by allowing you to designate Selector values
and/or Selectors (all values) as Obsolete.
Designating a Selector or Selector Value as obsolete means that it can still be recognised and presented
w hen it is found in an existing object (e.g. in the summary label for a document labelled w ith an
Obsolete value); but the user is not allowed to select that Selector/value when creating a new object.
So for example, if you forward or reply to an existing email that contains an obsolete Selector Value, the
obsolete value is dropped from the new email message, and replaced by the default value (if any) for
that selector. So obsolete selectors/selector values do not contribute to label dow ngrade checks.
Note: Saving a document containing an Obsolete selector value is treated as a new document, and any
Obsolete selector values are replaced by default values.
Obsolete Selectors take no part in Rules because Rules only apply to new objects (which by definition
cannot include Obsolete values). Whilst there is at least one Selector value active in a policy the
Selector can contribute to Rules.
You cannot obsolete a Selector until all Rules referencing the Selector have been deleted or modified to
avoid any reference to that Selector.
Note: If you have a Selector that is not Active or Retained in the current Policy AND is not marked as
Obsolete in the Selector Library it operates as though it w as actually marked as Obsolete - i.e.
presented if found, but not propagated.

Retained
You may have Selectors that are only available for selection by some users. Other users may only be
able to receive email messages containing those Selector values, but you want such users to be able to
forward an email containing the 'restricted' selector value - i.e. to retain the label value when
Forwarding. You can mark a selector as being retained via the appropriate checkbox on the selector in
the Selectors in Policy dialog. Retained Selectors can be used in Policy Rules in the same way as
active selectors and is processed by downgrading rules. Thus if you add a Selector to a Policy as a
retained selector, then any rules associated with that selector and its values are retained and applied in
the policy.

Delete (Selector)

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Selector Library / {selector}  Delete

Note: Deleting a Selector should only be used if you are sure that there are no documents or emails in
existence that use that selector. It may be more appropriate to mark the selector as Obsolete.
Deleting a Selector removes all associated Values. You cannot delete a selector if it is still in use in a
policy.
 Select Selector Library and choose the relevant selector.
 Choose Delete
 Click Yes to confirm the Delete action or No to abandon the action.
 If the Selector is still in use in a Policy you are prompted and the action disallowed.

p145
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Delete Selector warning

Label Dominance

If high-water mark (HWM) checks are configured by a rule, then when a mail message is sent the
message label must ‘dominate’ the labels of any attachments (and optionally Portion Marks).
Note: If you are using Portion Marking in Email Classifier and require message labels to dominate all
Portion marks in the email message body you must also Enable - Ensure label dominates all portion
marking.
The Label Dominance algorithm employs a different check depending upon the selector type:

Selector type Notes

Single selection list (If Include this selector in clearance and attachment checks is
un-checked the selector takes no part in label dominance operations)
The operation depends on the Hierarchy setting for a Single selection
list:
Hierarchic - the message label value is set to the 'highest' value from
the message and attachment labels.
No Hierarchy - The user will have to be involved in resolving any
incompatible label issues*.

Multiple selection list (If Include this selector in clearance and attachment checks is
un-checked the selector takes no part in label dominance operations).
The union of all values for the selector from the message and
attachments is formed, and subject to the configured Maximum, is
applied to the message label. If the Maximum is exceeded, then the
user will be involved in resolving the issue*.

Freeform text Freeform text selectors take no part in Label Dominance (HW M)
checks.

Date pick The message label value will be set to the 'highest' date of those set
on the label and attachments.
Date item

* For Single valued selectors, it may be not be possible to modify the message label to fully dominate
the attachment labels. For example:
Consider tw o selectors Classification (Hierarchic) and Department (non-hierarchic) and an email
message containing two attachments labelled as Unmarked / Sales and Confidential /
Engineering. Whilst setting a message label of Confidential would address the Classification
values, there is no single Department value that can encompass both Sales and Engineering.
Similar difficulties can arise with Multiple selection list selectors if more values would be required than
are allow ed by the maximum number of values allowed.
In either of the above circumstances, the user should resolve the issue (e.g. modify the attachments, or
use the override check option if available).

p146
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Marking Library
Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Marking Library
A Marking Format defines how selected labels are presented to end users. Each Marking Format defines
how to construct a Marking using any or all of the features below in an order defined by the Marking
Format:

 Fixed Text
 Label Elements from the selected label (Labelling Configuration, Policy and Selector Values).
 Hyperlinks
 Alternative Selector Value Names available as rendering qualifier to Label Element choice.
 Environment / Document Properties.

 Directory Attributes

 Rich text formatting.

Note: Saving a document as another type (e.g. Word --> TXT or EXCEL --> CSV prompts to indicate
that information w ill be lost. The Classifier label and marking information is one of the casualties of such
operations.
Rules that apply a Marking indicate the Marking Format to be used.
The following Marking Format actions are supported:

 Add a new Marking Format

 Properties (Marking Format) – (invoked by Add and Properties - includes the ability to Rename)
 Copy (Marking Format)
 Delete (Marking Format)
The example below shows an example Marking Library display.

Marking Library

p147
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Add a new marking format

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Marking Library  Add a new marking

format
To add a new Marking Format:
 Select the Marking Library node and choose Add a new Marking Format .
 This will present the Properties (Marking Format) dialog which will allow you to set all
properties of the Marking Format.

Properties (Marking Format)

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Marking Library / {marking} 

Properties

 Marking formats that are to be used for FLOT, LLOT, Portion Marking or email message Subject
markings should include clear delimiters around the entire marking so that Classifier can 'find' the
markings. For example:
[{Configuration Name} {Classification}].
See Recognising and Parsing Label Markings for further information.

 Using <whitespace> to separate marking elements can lead to unexpected effects and difficulties
w hen parsing labels. Additional control to avoid these issues is provided for Selector Elements
through the Text Display and Marking Selector options .

 You can define Marking Formats that span multiple lines. If you insert a 'new line' using
SHIFT+Enter, the Marking will NOT appear correctly in Microsoft Office Headers or Footers (it w ill be
correct in Outlook FLOT/LLOT). Use Enter (rather than SHIFT + Enter) to insert the 'newline' and the
Marking will appear correctly.

Add a New Marking Format will invoke this Properties (Marking Format) sequence.
You configure a Marking Format as follows:
 Select the Marking Library node and select the relevant Marking Format entry .
 Choose Properties . This presents a dialog w hich shows the current state.
 You can Rename a Marking Format simply by updating the Name field and saving the
change. It will update all instances of that Marking Format Name in the current
configuration.
 The initial state for a new Marking Format show s place holder text “Your Marking Format
here”.

p148
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

New Marking Format

You define the Marking Format in the scrollable text area. This is accomplished by one or more of the
following (performed in any order):
 Select an insertion point and type text (see the notes at end of this section).
 Select text and delete it.
 Select an insertion point then choose Insert Placeholder / Selector element, or Insert
Placeholder / Hyperlink or Insert Placeholder / Environment Property, or Insert Placeholder /
Document Property or Insert Placeholder / Directory Attribute and choose the item to be
inserted (and its rendering options if applicable).
 Select text or an insertion point and then apply a presentation effect using the Font options.
 Select the Alignment (Left, Right or Centre) from the Align Text options. Note that this
aligns the w hole format, not just a selected portion of the text.
 Set or unset the Use Selector colour values option. By default any colour value associated
w ith a Selector value w ill be used by the Marking Format even in a sequence that has the
font colour set. You can unset this option so that any colour associated w ith a selector value
is ignored w hen producing the Marking value.
 Set or unset the Use plain text style option. By default the text generated from a marking
format will always include formatting settings - even if you have not set any explicitly. A
plain text variant is inserted in contexts that do not support formatting. This setting has an
effect on the operation of Add a textbox on the header / footer (Word only) as described
under Add rules.
However, in some circumstances the formatting defined for an inserted marking may interfere w ith
formatting your site has set by other means. This option allow s you to direct Classifier to use the plain
text marking variant even though the context supports formatting. For Word and Excel any pre-defined
formatting in headers/footers is removed. For Pow erPoint any pre-defined formatting is applied to the
plain text variant of the marking. If you enable this option, Preview a Marking Format will only show the
plain text version.
Any formatting you have specified in the marking format definition is remembered regardless of w hether
this option is set or unset.
 Select a label element / environment property / document property that you have
inserted and click to launch the modify dialog.
 Select a label element and press DEL to delete it.
You can check the effects of your configuration by c licking the Preview a Marking Format button.
Once you finish amending the Format you save it by clicking OK (not available until you make a
change).
Note: The appearance of any marking should be checked in the target application(s) to ensure that the
end effect is suitable. For example, Word Watermarks apply auto-sizing and using a 'long' Marking
Format may be ineffective as some applications apply limits to the size of headers/footers (including
formatting control information). If limits are exceeded, Classifier first removes formatting information

p149
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

before truncating the text.

Note: The following characters (i.e. \/:*?”<>|) should not be used in a Marking Format either in
Selector value names, or as part of the Marking Format text supplied. Usage of these characters may
result in unexpected presentation effects in the current or future versions of Classifier, E.g.
- All formatting is lost (colour, font and alignment) (Office applications).
- The Selector value does not appear in the applied marking (Outlook).
- Run time errors.

Inserting a Selector Element

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Marking Library / {marking} 

Properties
Note: If Text / Date picker / Date offset selectors are to be included a Marking format that will be used
to parse a text label (e.g. Externally defined label, FLOT, LLOT, Portion Marking or Subject) ), Prefix and
Suffix (Marking Selector options ) must be specified so that Classifier can find the start and end of the
string which contains the associated selector value.
To insert a Selector Element into a format:
 Select the Marking Library node
 Select the relevant entry and choose Properties
 Select an insertion point
 Choose the Insert Placeholder / Selector action.
 This will present the follow ing dialog containing a list of the available Label Elements
(Configuration Name, Policy and Selectors).

Marking Format - Selector configuration

 Select the required Label Element.
 If required, choose an alternative presentation from those available, as described in Text
Display.
 If required, apply additional selector formatting as described in Marking Selector Options .
 Click OK
A placeholder for the selector element will appear at your selected insertion point. For
example:
{Configuration Name} {Classification}

p150
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Marking Format - Configuration and Selector inserted

One or more spaces may be defined as an Alternate value for a selector.
If, when a marking is being constructed a value consists only of spaces:
o Classifier w ill not check for duplicates in the selector

o Any number of spaces (up to field size limit) w ill be allowed

o You will always see delimiters plus however many spaces are defined - there is no way of
totally omitting a selector.
If a value contains anything in addition to spaces then:
o The leading and trailing spaces will be removed

o The duplicate check w ill take place.

Note: The Separator field is only relevant to Multi-select selectors.

Note: Date type selectors present date format options under Text Display

Text Display

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Marking Library / {marking} 

Properties
You can control how a selector appears in the marking by selecting one of the values presented under
Text Display.
For non-date type selectors the list will include Portion Marking or Alternate name / Alternate 2/
Alternate 3 Selector value Properties shown in selector configuration Edit Selector. The ID entry
represents the unique identifier allocated to the Selector.
Date type selectors are configured in a similar manner, but the date format choices as described in Date
Format.
To apply or modify these alternative presentations:
 Select the relevant element in the Marking Format Editor window
 Choose the Text display item you wish to use

p151
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Text display - Alternate 1 option

 Click OK and the parent edit dialog will be updated to reflect the change (e.g.
{Configuration Name} {Classification (Alternate 1)}

Alternate 1 Marking chosen

 Use the Preview option to show the effect of the changes made to the Marking Format

p152
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Alternate 1 Preview

Date Format

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Marking Library / {marking} 

Properties
Note: Date items are presented as local time.
You can control how Date type selectors are presented in the marking by using any presentation value
under Text Display:

Marking Format - Date Format options

The values Long / Short date indicate that the Long / Short date formats defined for the system
under Control Panel / Regional Settings are to be used. The default is Long date.
Selecting Custom Date will make the Custom Date Format field available allowing you to enter text
formatting control as described in:
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.globalization.datetimeformatinfo(v=VS.80).aspx .
For example, you could specify "dddd, dd MMMM yyyy" to get "Tuesday, 23 October 2012".
Note: It is recommended that you use simple custom formats, and check the effects via the Preview
mechanism.
The selector token in the Marking Format is annotated accordingly (If Long Date is chosen it is not
show n as it is the default).

p153
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Marking Format - Date selector annotation

Marking Selector options

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Marking Library / {marking} 

Properties
Marking Selector Options allow you to define prefix and suffix text which only appears in the marking if
the selector has a value selected. This feature can be used to remove redundant <whitespace> in
markings and to facilitate parsing of (externally defined) label values in Label Locations.
Note: Prefix and Suffix must be defined for Text / Date picker / Date offset selectors included in a
Marking format that w ill be used to parse a text label (e.g. Externally defined label, FLOT, LLOT, Portion
Marking or Subject).
For Multiple selection selectors the Separator field is available allowing you to define text to separate
individual selector values.
Example 1 - Multiple selection separator with a prefix
An organisation's label configuration comprises two selectors - “Classification” and “Category”. Category
is an optional selector that might not be set by the user, and it allow s multiple values to be selected.
The site wants to mark documents as “My company - Classification {classification value} | Categories
[category value(s) separated by '/']”.
Much of this is easily achieved through the basic Marking Format mechanisms, but if no Category value
w as selected a marking of “My company - Classification {Classification value} | Categories []” could
result. The site may prefer for this to appear just as “My company - Classification {Classification
value}”.
The solution to this situation is to use Marking Options when configuring the Marking Format.
By defining Selector Formatting for the Category element with a prefix of “ | Categories [“; a separator
of "/" and a suffix of “]”, the fixed text is only included if a Category has values selected.
 Select the relevant element in the Marking Format Editor w indow to trigger display of the
Select label element dialog.
 Enter the Prefix and Suffix values you require – e.g. “[ Categories: “ and “ ]”

p154
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Marking Format - Marking options dialog

 Click OK and the parent edit dialog will be updated to reflect the change (e.g.
My Company Classification: {Classification} {Categories (/[Categories:/[slash]/])}
 Click Preview to show the effect of the changes made to the Marking Format. Click OK
 Depending on the number of Categories (1, 2 or 3) selected this would show:
My Company Classification: Public
My Company Classification: Public [Categories:One]
My Company Classification: Public [Categories:One/Three]
Example 2 - Multiple line display
You could check the New line after Prefix or Suffix. This would have the effect of placing items on
separate lines as per the example below:

Label preview - multiple lines

Note: Care should be taken when using the above feature to ensure that the desired effect occurs in all
places w here the marking format is used. For example:
- Visio does not support multiple line header/footer.
- Outlook Summary Marking does not handle multiple lines.
- Word Summary Marking cannot handle more than two lines.

p155
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Inserting a Hyperlink

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Marking Library / {marking} 

Properties
Note: It is recommended that you only insert Hyperlinks in Marking Formats intended for use in Email
FLOT and LLOT rules. There is nothing to stop you using a Marking Format containing a Hyperlink
elsew here (e.g. a Word Header), but invariably the link will not operate correctly.
To insert a Hyperlink into a format:
 Select the Marking Library node
 Select the relevant entry and choose Properties
 Select an insertion point
 Choose the Insert Placeholder / Hyperlink action. This will present the following dialog
allowing you to define the text displayed and the associated Hyperlink.

Configure Hyperlink
 Set the Text to display and the Hyperlink Address.
 Once you are happy, click OK. A Hyperlink placeholder w ill appear at your selected insertion
point as in the example below:

Hyperlink Placeholder

p156
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Inserting an Environment Property

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Marking Library/{marking} Properties

Note: Some Environment values may not be available in all environments (e.g. OWA Classifier,
Summary Marking - any item not available is left blank). It is important to check the actual Marking that
appears in all circumstances where a Marking Format is used
To insert an Environment Property into a format:
 Select the Marking Library node
 Select the relevant entry and choose Properties
 Select an insertion point
 Choose the Insert Placeholder / Environment Property action. This will present a choice
of property Families (DateTime/Environment/General).

Insert Environment Property

 Select the required Family and the list below Property Name will be updated.
 Select the required Property Name and check the example formatting in Sample.
 Once you are happy, click OK. A placeholder for the element will appear at your selected
insertion point. For example:
{Configuration Name} {Classification} {$Environment:COMPUTERNAME}

Marking Format - Environment

p157
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Inserting a Document Property

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Marking Library / {marking} 

Properties
Note: Not all the properties listed are supported by all applications. Properties supported by an
application can be found via File->Info->Properties (Advanced Properties) or similar.
Note: Document properties may not be available in all environments. It is important to check the actual
Marking that appears in all circumstances - especially if it is assigned as the Custom Format for
Summary Markings.
To insert an Environment Property into a format:
 Select the Marking Library node
 Select the relevant entry and choose Properties
 Select an insertion point
 Choose the Insert Placeholder / Document Property action. This will present a list of
the available Property Types (document or email).

Marking Format - Document Property Marking Format - Email property

 Select the Property Type you require (document or email). The list below Property Name
will show the supported values.
Note: The supported properties are grouped for convenience, but Classifier just checks the
current object for a property w ith that name. In particular, selecting Subject from the list of
document properties w ill be meaningful if the marking format is applied to an email and vice
versa.
 Select the required Property Name.
 Once you are happy w ith your choice, click OK. A placeholder for the property will appear at
your selected insertion point. For example:
{Configuration Name} {Classification} {Author/document}

p158
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Marking Format - including author

Similarly adding an email property to include for example Cc recipients inserts a placeholder into the
Marking Format.

Marking Format CcRecipients

p159
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Inserting a Directory Attribute

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Marking Library / {marking} 

Properties
To insert a Directory Attribute into a format:
 Select the Marking Library node
 Select the relevant entry and choose Properties
 Select an insertion point
 Choose the Insert Placeholder / Directory Attribute action. This will present a choice of
Family Types (Computer or User).

Marking Format - Computer Attribute Marking Format - User Attribute

 Select the Family Type you require (computer or user). The list below Attribute Name will
show the supported values.
 Select the required Attribute Name.
 Once you are happy w ith your choice, click OK. A placeholder for the attribute w ill appear at
your selected insertion point. For example:
{Configuration Name} {Classification} {User:department}

Marking Format - including user department attribute

p160
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Font options and Rich Text Formatting

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Marking Library / {marking} 

Properties
Using the Marking Format / Font options it is possible for formats to include Rich Text Formatting, Font,
Colour, Size, Style (Bold, Italics and Underline).
Note: If you apply additional formatting to a header or footer it will be retained even if you
subsequently select different label values. For example, select the header created when you select label
values, and then apply double strike-through; change the label and the strike-through remains.
Note: A Marking Format that includes Rich Text features may be applied to a label location which does
not support such features. In this case the plain text version of the Marking Format will be applied.
This can give effects as show n in the example FLOT below which has Bold + Italic + Underlined set.

Rich formatted FLOT

Align Text

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Marking Library / {marking} 

Properties
You can align the text Marking applied to a location by choosing the relevant option (Left, Centre and
Right) from the Align Text control. This will only be meaningful in some label locations (e.g. Not an
X-Header)

Preview a Marking Format

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Marking Library / {marking} 

Properties
Whilst editing Marking Format you may Preview the effects of any changes made.
 Select the relevant Marking Format and choose Properties
 Make any required changes
 Click Preview which will present the format with any placeholder and qualifier annotations

p161
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

removed and replaced using representative values (the first Value for each Selector - or the
appropriate alternative value).
 Two representations are shown indicating the effects with and without text formatting
applied.
Note: Not all elements are available in all environments. It is important to check the actual
Marking that appears in all circumstances - especially if it is assigned as the Custom Format
for Summary Markings.

Marking Preview
If Use plain text style is set (Properties (Marking Format) , the Formatted text display area
is not shown.

Copy (Marking Format)

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Marking Library / {marking}  Copy

You can use an existing Marking Format as the basis for a new Marking Format.
 Select the Marking Library node and select the relevant Marking Format entry .
 Choose Copy. This adds a new entry to the list called Source - Copy
 Select the copy, choose Properties and Rename it

p162
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Marking Format - Copy

 Make the necessary changes to the new format and click OK to save.

p163
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Delete (Marking Format)

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Marking Library / {marking}  Delete

You can delete any marking format.
 Select the Marking Library node and select the relevant Marking Format entry .
 Choose Delete.
 Click Y es / No to complete or cancel the operation.
 A warning dialog is presented if you attempt to delete a Marking Format that is in use in the
configuration.

Delete Marking warning

p164
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Content Library
Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Content Library
Note: Content Checking is supported by Email Classifier and Office Classifier (Word, Excel and
PowerPoint).
Note: Content checking of RMS protected items never yields a match as the content is not accessible.
The Configuration can define that checks should be applied when sending an email message or saving /
printing a document to ensure that the content (Subject/ Body/ attachments / document) does not
contain certain 'words'. The attachment types processed during email content checking are listed in
Appendix - Content Checking File Types Supported .
The operation of the search performed can be modified using a registry key setting described under
Matching algorithm control .
The Content Library consists of one or more (Search) Expressions which can be associated with one
or more site defined Matchers. Initially there are no Expressions or Matchers defined and selecting
the Content Library shows:

Content Library initial state

Each Expression has a unique (Expression) Name, and an 'expression' defining the how content will be
checked. See Defining Expressions for further details.
Note: Expressions can also be referenced from Conditions (see Properties (Condition)).
A Matcher defines an association between the content to be matched (as defined by the associated
Expressions) and a set of selector values, such that the identified content may be considered
"permitted" for the label set defined by the selector values, or alternatively that this content is never
permitted regardless of the label value.
Check content for this rules (Check rules) can then be defined which specify the Matcher(s) relevant
to the check, and the action to be taken if a Matcher is matched. The action defined by a Content Rule
is only triggered if the associated Content Matcher fails - that is an Expression matches some content,
and either the content is never allow ed, or the current label is not in the permitted set of selector
values. The Rule also allow s you to control the level of detail shown to the user when the Rule action is
triggered.
A description of the end user experience of Content checking can be found in Content Checking User
view.
Each Content Matcher has a unique Name and Description and should have one or more Expressions
associated, along with permitted Selector values (a portion of the label space) for which the matching

p165
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

content is allow ed. If a message contains content matching an Expression in the Matcher, then the
message label must be in the defined label set for the content check to pass.
Each Content Checker has a Match Type which is either ANY (the associated content will be
considered as identified if ANY of the Expressions defined matches), or ALL (the associated content will
be considered as identified only if ALL of the Expressions match).
The following actions are available depending upon whether Expressions or Matchers tab is selected
(also via the Content Library context menu):

 Add a new expression

 Add a new matcher

The following actions are available once a Matcher / Expression has been defined:
When the Expressions tab is selected:

 Add a new expression

 Properties (Expression)

 Delete (Expression)

 Copy (Expression)

When the Matcher tab is selected:

 Add a new matcher

 Properties (Matcher)

 Delete (Matcher)

Defining Expressions

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Content Library / [Expressions]  Add

a new expression
Each Expression defines a set of values which are to be compared against the contents of a message,
and the w ay in which the comparison is to be performed.

The comparison operates by comparing 'words', so if your expression is "apple and pie", applepie is one
w ord and w ill not match.
An expression might be a simple (case insensitive) comparison, or more complex.

Regular Expressions:

 Need to be enclosed in “##” … e.g. a regular expression to search for two numbers together would
have to be entered as “##[0-9][0-9]”, therefore, if your phrase to look for was ‘banana’ and 'two
numbers together' the search phrase to enter would be: banana AND “##[0-9][0-9]”

 Must match a single w hole word. For example, a search for "##app.*ie" would not find "apple pie".

 Characters that are not indexed as letters are not searchable even using regular expressions.

 The search index does not store information about line breaks. Searches that include beginning /
end of line regular expression criteria (^ and $) will not work.

 Particular care must be exercised including "And" or "Or" as text in an expression as these are
'operators' (see Reserved words below) and must be enclosed in quotes if you want them treated
as text. For example, an expression open and closed would match if the message contained both "
open" and "closed" within it. An expression open "and" closed would only match if the string "

p166
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

open and closed" appeared in the document - a similar effect can be achieved by enclosing the
w hole expression string in quotes - "open and closed".

 Noise words - such as "if" and "the" are ignored during comparisons.

 Reserved words - The following should not be used as "text" when defining expressions:
(comma), (period),?, =, *, %, #, ~, &, ~~, ##, contains, and, or, +, -, [, ], /, \ (esc)

Examples :

Expression Meaning

banana Will match if "banana" appears somewhere in the content.

apple and pear Will match if both "apple" and "pear" appear in the content.

apple and not pear Will match if "apple" appears but "pear" does not appear in the
content.

(apple and pear) or (banana and Will match if at least one of the combinations (apple and pear) or
orange) (banana + orange) appears in the content.

appl* Wildcard expression that matches apple, or application,....

appl? Wildcard expression that will match on apple, but not apples.

"apple pie" Will match if the content contains the phrase "apple pie".

date(jan 15 2012) Matches dates in any of the date formats defined below .
date(jan 10 2012 to jun 30 2012) Matches dates in the defined range (first half of 2012).
Date formats - The following are all recognised as the same date
January 15, 2013
15 Jan 13
2013/01/15
1/15/13
1-15-13
The fifteenth of January tw o thousand thirteen
mail(*@abcxyz.com) Matches email addresses including w ild-card * or ? inside the ().

creditcard(*) Matches credit cards in any of the formats below . Matches credit
creditcard(1234*) cards starting w ith n234.
The following are recognised as credit card number formats:
n234-5678-1234-5678
n234567812345678
n234 5678 1234 5678
Numerical tests used by the credit card issuers for card validity are
used to exclude sequences of numbers that are not credit card
numbers. However, these tests are not perfect and so the credit
card number recognition feature may pick up some numbers that
are not really credit card numbers. The examples above are not
valid credit card numbers and w ill not trigger the checks - valid
credit card numbers must start (n) w ith 3,4,5 or 6.

=== == Matches a sequence of 3 digits, a space and 2 digits.

mail(*@hotmail.com) Matches a hotmail email address.

"##[a-z]{2}[0-9]{4}[a-z]" Regular expression to detect an index number of the form xxnnnnx.

"##[a-ceghj-pr-tw-z]{1}[a-ceghj- UK National Insurance with spaces

npr-tw-z]{1}" "##[0-9]{2}" "##
[0-9]{2}" "##[0-9]{2}" "##[a-d]
{1}" UK National Insurance number with no spaces.
"##[a-ceghj-pr-tw-z]{1}[a-ceghj-

p167
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

npr-tw-z]{1}[0-9]{6}[a-d]{1}"

"##([a-z]{2}[9]{3}|[a-z]{3}[9] Matches
{2}|[a-z]{4}[9]{1}|[a-z]{5})[0- NON99604079T9900 | NOONE355144BA900 |
9]{6}([a-z]{1}[9]{1}|[a-z]{2}) NONE9701010RW900
[0-9]{3}" but not
ABC12343434F9900 | NOONE355123ASDAS |
NOONE9121234UOUOO

Add a new expression

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Content Library / [Expressions]  Add

a new expression

To add a new expression:

1. Select the Content Library and select the Expressions tab.

2. Choose Add a new expression. This will present the Search Expression dialog:

New Expression.

3. Supply the Name and Expression (see Defining Expressions).

4. Click OK. The summary list will be updated to show the new Expression.

p168
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Expressions

5. The expressions established can be used when defining Content Matchers ( Properties (Matcher)) and
when defining Conditions (see Properties (Condition)).

Properties (Expression)

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Content Library / [Expressions] 

Properties
[Add a new expression will invoke this Properties (Expression) sequence.]

You view or modify an Expression as follow s:

1. Select the Content Library and select the Expressions tab. Select the relevant Expression entry.
2. Choose Properties. This presents a dialog which shows the current state.

Expression Properties.

p169
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

3. Change the Name or Expression as required. See Defining Expressions for further details on how
to define the expression.

Delete (Expression)

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Content Library / [Expressions] 

Delete

Note: You cannot delete an Expression that would result in a Matcher w ith no associated expressions.

To delete an Expression from a Matcher:

1. Select the Content Library and select the Expressions tab. Select the relevant Expression entry
.
2. Choose Delete (Expression).
3. Click Y es / No to complete or cancel the operation.

Copy (Expression)

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Content Library / [Expressions] 

Copy
You can use existing Expressions defined under one Matcher as the basis for a new Expression for use in
the current or another Matcher using a Copy and Paste sequence.

To copy an expression:

1. Select the Content Library and select the Expressions tab. Select the relevant Expression.
2. Choose Copy. A new Expression entry is created (w ith a unique name which can be changed).

p170
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Matchers
You can select a name for the content matcher and match any or all expressions within the matcher.

Add a new matcher

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Content Library / [Matcher]s  Add a

new matcher
Note: Content Checking is supported by Email Classifier and Office Classifier (Word and Excel).

To add a new matcher:

1. Select the Content Library and select the Matchers tab.

2. Choose Add a new matcher. This will launch the following dialog:

Matcher Properties.
3. Supply a Name (this Name is used when defining Content Checking rules.
4. Supply a Description is required - this is for information purposes only.
5. Choose whether Match any or Match all expressions defined for this Matcher must match for the
Content Checking rule to consider the content as matching (and trigger the defined action).
6. The Name, Description and Match any/Match all can be changed later via Properties (Matcher).
7. Click Next. This will present a dialog to allow you to choose the expressions relevant to this
Matcher.

p171
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Choose Expressions.

8. You can define a New Expression if required, or select one or more expressions from the list
presented.
9. Define the Expression. Examples of Expressions can be found in Defining Expressions.
10. Click Next. This will present a dialog allowing you to define the Label set for which "matched"
content is permitted.

Matcher - Define Label Criteria

11. The content is not allowed setting means that the defined content is not permitted regardless of
the label value. Selecting this w ill grey out the label selection tree.
12. In the above example, the content is allowed as long as the label is Internal or Confidential AND
Engineering or Board (i.e. anything with Public or Sales w ould fail the content check, as would a
value with only one of Classification or Department set).
13. The Label Criteria can be modified using the Properties (Matcher) action.

p172
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Matcher summary list.

14. Click Finish and Yes on the change confirmation dialog and the newly created Matcher w ill appear
in the summary.

Properties (Matcher)

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Content Library / [Matchers] 

Properties

To view and change the properties of a Matcher:

1. Select the Content Library and select the Matchers tab. Select the relevant Matcher entry.
2. Choose Properties.
3. You can then view or modify the properties of a Matcher:
Name, Description, ANY/ALL, Expressions, Label Criteria as described in Add a new matcher.

Delete (Matcher)

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Content Library / [Matchers]  Delete

To delete a Matcher from the Content Library:

1. Select the Content Library and select the Matchers tab. Select the relevant entry in the list of
Matchers.
2. Choose Delete.
3. Click Y es / No to complete or cancel the operation.

p173
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Matcher in use

4. A warning dialog w ill be presented if you attempt to delete a Matcher that is in use in a Rule.

Content Checking User view

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Content Library

When content checking is performed, Classifier treats each of the Message Subject, Message Body and
each attachment as a separate item, and performs checks using the Expressions associated with
Content Matchers selected for the rule. A progress bar is displayed as the content is being inspected.
(The registry setting DisplayContentCheckProgress can be used to disable this progress bar).
If a Matcher matches in any of the items (Subject, Body or attachment), a Content Check exception is
flagged and the current message label is checked against the Label criteria defined for the associated
Group. If the current label is covered by the label criteria then the check succeeds and the user is
unaware.
Further control over the matching algorithm is available as described in Matching algorithm control .

 If the current label is NOT in the defined label criteria, then the Warn/Prevent action is activated.

 If Warn or Prevent is set (as opposed to Audit only) then the user will be prompted:

Content Check - Policy Check.

 If the Show highlighted content matches option is checked in the rule, then the user also has

p174
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

the ability to scan the actual matches by clicking View:

 Clicking View will show further information. Select each location and the item contents (including
meta-data such as header / footer values) appears with matches highlighted.

 Next / Previous allow you to move up and dow n the selected location (attachment / document /
body).

Note: Highlighting of matches in PDF files is only possible if Adobe Reader / Adobe Acrobat in Edit >
Preferences > Search > Enable search highlights from external server is Enabled.

Content matches

Matching algorithm control

By default the matcher checks various aspects of the message (e.g. Subject, Body and attachments), is
case insensitive and includes document properties.
Two General Settings are provided that allow further control:

 Content checking - case sensitive .

 Content checking - skip document properties

Additional aspects of the algorithm can be controlled by setting an enumeration registry entry to be
established in one of the following locations (which are searched in the order shown):

 HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon James\Classifier

 HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTW ARE\Policies\Boldon James\Classifier

 HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\Boldon James\Classifier

 HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTW ARE\Boldon James\Classifier

 HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTW ARE\Wow6432Node\Boldon James\Classifier (if running 32-bit

Classifier applications on a 64-bit machine)
Entry \ContentCheckFieldFlags
Only applicable if Classifier Content Checking is enabled.

p175
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Type REG_DWORD
Data Not configured - The default operation applies.
Any value defined w ill modify the search algorithm according to the bit-wise values described in
the dtsearch FieldFlags support w eb page (e.g. s earch for "dtsearch support FieldFlags").
For example:
Value = 3 (1 + 2) would ignore the filename (1) and ignore document properties (2).
The setting w ill apply to all Content Check rules performed by a Classifier application.

Condition Library
Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Conditions Library
The Configuration can define conditions that can be associated with Add Rules, Apply Rules and Check
Rules so that the Rule is only triggered if the Condition(s) are met. For example a rule that applied a
LLOT only if an external recipient w as defined. Initially there are no Conditions defined. Prerequisite
conditions are associated w ith a rule as part of Rules Wizard operation.

Conditions Library initial state

The functions supported are:
o Add a new condition
o Properties (Condition)
o Copy (Condition)
o Delete (Condition)

Each Condition defined includes one or more compatible (Document or Message) Condition type
definitions:

Condition Types applicable to Active Directory Attribute:

o Active Directory Attribute Values of Computer

o Active Directory Attribute Values of User
o Active Directory Group Membership of User

Condition Types applicable to Documents and Messages:

p176
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

o Date
o IP Address
o MAC address
o Time
o Host Product Locale
o OS Locale
o Product Type
o Day of Week

Document related Condition types :

o Document Content / Document Content Count (Word, Pow erPoint and Exceland Data
Classification Service – Index Mode Only)
o Document Custom Property (All Office applications and Data Classification Service – Index
mode Only)
o Document Event Fired (All Office applications)
o Document has Different Odd & even page header/footers (Word and Excel)
o Document is marked as `final` (W ord, Pow erPoint and Excel)
o Document Property (All Office applications and Data Classification Service – Index Mode
Only)
o Document Protection Type (W ord only)
o Document Template Name (W ord only)

Message related Condition types:

o Dynamic Clearance User Properties

o Message Content / Message Content Count
o Message Class
o Message has attachment w ith an extension
o Message has attachment w ith a name
o Message has number of attachments
o Message has unclassified attachment
o Message originator domain
o Message originator email address
o Message Recipient Attribute values
o Message Recipient Count
o Message Recipient Domain
o Message Recipient Location (internal or external)
o Message Recipient Presence
o Message response type (Reply, Reply all or Forw ard)
o Message type (Message, meeting or task)

File Condition types relating to Classifier Discovery Service:

o File Attributes

o File Creation Date

o File Custom Data (only applies to Import Mode)

o File Extension

o File Last Accessed Date

o File Last Modified Date

o File Name

p177
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

o File Owner

o File Size

o File Type

Each Condition type supports specific options as described in Properties (Condition).

When defining a rule you can indicate w hether the rule applies Condition free, or subject to one or more
Conditions.

Scenarios:

1. A message containing recipients from both domains A and B should have X-header AB applied.
This can be achieved w ith a single condition (Message Recipient Domain condition w ith two entries)
and a single rule.
2. A message w ith a recipient from domain A or domain B should have an x-header A or B added.
This will require two conditions one for each domain, and two rules.
The fact that in this case there may be duplicate rules (at the same point in the rule tree) is handled
by the fact that the rule highest up the tree takes precedence (See Move rule up / down).

Add a new condition

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Condition Library  Add a new

condition

To add a new Condition:

1. Select the Condition Library.

2. Choose Add a new condition and the following is presented:

Add a new condition

3. Specify a Name, and Description if required.

4. Add one or more conditions using the Add a new condition type button (which will present a

p178
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

dialog similar to that presented by Properties (Condition).

New Condition Type

5. Select the required Condition Type from the drop down menu.

Choose Condition Type

Add a new condition entry

6. Click Add a new condition entry which will display a dialog allowing you to configure the selected
condition type (each type has its own specific settings - the example below relates to Condition
Type Active Directory Values of User):

p179
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

7. You can define multiple Condition Entries for a Condition Type, and specify how the condition entries
combine together. If you combine entries with the AND operator then all conditions must be true.
Alternatively, if you combine entries w ith the OR operator then one or more conditions must be
true

Properties (Condition)

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Condition Library  Properties

To view or change the properties of a Condition:

1. Select the Condition Library.

2. Select the relevant Condition.
3. Choose Properties . This will present the Edit Condition dialog allow ing you to configure any
aspect of the selected Condition type entry:

Note: Essentially the same dialog and operation is presented when you Add a new condition.

Edit Condition

4. You can Add a new condition type , Edit or Delete an existing entry.
5. Expanding a Condition using the arrow icon in the left hand column w ill provide condition details.
6. The Edit option allow s you to configure the selected condition type (each type has its ow n specific
settings (the example below relates to Condition Type - Active Directory Values of User):

p180
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Edit Condition Entry

7. Condition entries can be combined using either the AND operators or the OR operator. If you
combine entries w ith the AND operator then all conditions must be true. Alternatively, if you
combine entries w ith the OR operator then one or more conditions must be true. It is the user's
responsibility to ensure that conditions are logically sound.
8. Condition entries can be combined using either the AND operators or the OR operator. If you
combine entries w ith the AND operator then all conditions must be true. Alternatively, if you
combine entries w ith the OR operator then one or more conditions must be true. It is the user's
responsibility to ensure that conditions are logically sound.
9. You can Add a new condition entry , Edit or Delete an existing entry. The example below shows
options for a Active Directory Group Membership of User condition entry.

Condition - New entry

10. Each Condition type supports one or more Condition entries w ith specific options as per the table
below .

Note: Expression matching in the options below is case insensitive.

Condition type Options supported
Active Directory Attribute If Computer Active Directory attribute: Description, DN, Location,
Values of Computer Name, Operating system, Operating system service pack and
Operating system version - [Contains value] [Does not contain
value] [has value] [has value matching regular expression] [has
a value not matching regular expression]. See also Cache Active
Directory attributes on start-up .

p181
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Active Directory Attribute If User Active Directory attribute (see attribute list below this
Values of User table) - [Contains value][ Does not contain value] [has value]
[has value matching regular expression] [has a value not
matching regular expression]. See also Cache Active Directory
attributes on start-up.

Active Directory Group [Specifically the logged on user or in the case of OW A the
Membership of User Originator]
User is/ is not a member of the specified Active Directory group
or an Active Directory group matching the supplied regular
expression.
Date Date [is] [is not] [is after] [is before]
Day of Week Values: Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday,
Saturday, Sunday
Document Content Combinations that Do or Do Not match existing Expressions
Document Content Count defined in the Content Library. For example:
(Email, Word, Excel and Expressions finds a match w ith (Expression) Apples AND
Pow erPoint) and Data Expression does not find a match w ith(Expression) Bananas.
Classification Service –
Index Mode)
Document Custom Property  Document (Custom) Property Name.

Document Property
 Check (appropriate value or existence check type).

(All Office applications) and  Value if applicable.

Data Classification Service –
Index Mode)
Document Event Fired Event processed [is] [is not] w ith Event type Saving / Printing /
(All Office applications) Label selection
Document has Different Odd Document [does] [does not] have Different Odd & even page
and even page header/footers set.
header/footers
(Word and Excel)
Document is marked as final Document [is] [is not] marked as final.
(word and Excel)
Document Protection Type Document [is] [is not] protected w ith protection type
(Word only) Comments / FillingInForms / NoChanges / TrackedChanges.
Document Template Name Document template name [equals] [does not equal] [contains]
(Word only) [does not contain] [matches regular expression] [does not match
regular expression]
Dynamic Clearance User A named '(Offline) Address Book' property for a recipient - [has
Properties value] [does not have value] [contains] [does not contain]
[matches regular expression] [does not match regular
expression].
Note: Not all attributes in the Active Directory are available via
an (Offline) Address Book. See Dynamic Clearance Conditions for
further information.

IP Address Computer's IP address [is] [is not] in Netw ork (values IP address
and Subnet mask)
Mac Address Computer [has] [does not have Mac address] [matches regular
expression] [does not match regular expression].
Message Class Message Class[ equals] [does not equal] [starts w ith] [ends
w ith] [contains] [does not contain]
Message Content Combinations (AND or OR) that Do or Do Not match existing
Message Content Count Expressions defined in the Content Library. For example:
Expressions finds a match w ith (Expression) Apples AND
Expression does not find a match w ith(Expression) Bananas.
Message Has Attachment Message [has] [does not] have attachment w ith an extension
w ith Extension that equals Value.
Note: Embedded images may be excluded using the Include
embedded images when performing attachment checks setting.

p182
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Message Has Attachment Attachment name [equals ] [ starts w ith ] [ends with] [contains]
w ith Name [matches regular expression]
Does not have attachment name that [equals] [contains]
[matches regular expression].
Note: Embedded images may be excluded using the Include
embedded images when performing attachment checks setting.

Message Has Number of Message Contains [more attachments] [less attachments]

Attachments [Attachments present] [No attachments].
Note: Embedded images may be excluded using the Include
embedded images when performing attachment checks setting.

Message Has Unclassified Message [has] [does not] have Unclassified attachments.
Attachments Note: Embedded images may be excluded using the Include
embedded images when performing attachment checks setting.

Message Originator Domain Originator domain [equals] [does not equal] [starts w ith] [ends
w ith] [contains] [does not contain].
Message Originator Email Originator email address [equals] [does not equal].
Address
Message Recipient Attribute Check for recipient w hose address book properties match the
values specified value
Message Recipient Count Contains [more recipients than] [few er recipients than] Recipient
count (Distribution lists are not expanded w hen this check is
performed.
Message Recipient Domain [Contains recipients in domain] [Does not contain recipients in
domain] - checks that the address contains the supplied string -
case insensitive
Message Recipient Location Message [contains recipients that are] [does not contain
recipients that are] Internal / External
Message Recipient Presence Message [contains recipient] [does not contain recipient] [There
is one recipient and it is] [There is one recipient and it is not].
Recipient address (an exact match is performed - case
insensitive)
Message Response Type Message [is] [is not] of type Reply / ReplyToAll / Forw ard.
Message Type Message Type [equals] [does not equal] Message / Meeting /
Task.
Product Type Running application is or is not one of the Classifier supported
products (Outlook, Word, Excel, Pow erPoint, Project or Visio).

Time Check the time

List of Active Directory attributes supported by 'Active Directory Attribute Values

of User
Common Name, Country/Region, Company, Department, Description, Display Name,
Printable display name, DN, Extension attribute 1 to 15, Fax number, Given name, Home
telephone number, Telephone notes, Initials, City, email address, SMTP address, Mobile
telephone number, User culture, Pager number, Office, Zip/Postal Code, Proxy address,
Account, Surname, Street, Telephone number, Title and URL.

Data Classification Service Specific Conditions

Condition type Options supported

File Attributes [Contains] [Does not contain]

File Creation Date [Is][Is not] [Is after] [Is before]

File Custom Data - only [Contains value] [Does not contain value] [Has value] [Does not
applies to Import Mode. have value] [Matches RegEx][Does not match RegEx]

File Extension [Contains value] [Does not contain value] [Has value] [Does not
have value] [Matches RegEx][Does not match RegEx]

p183
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

File Name [Contains value] [Does not contain value] [Has value] [Does not
have value] [Matches RegEx][Does not match RegEx]

File Owner [Is][Is not] [Contains] [Does not contain] [Matches Regex] [Does
not match RegEx]

File Path [Is][Is not] [Contains] [Does not contain] [Matches Regex] [Does
not match RegEx]

File Size [Is][Is greater than] [Is less than]

File Type [Is][Is not]

Last Accessed [Is][Is not] [Is after] [Is before]

Last Modified [Is][Is not] [Is after] [Is before]

Copy (Condition)

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Condition Library  Copy

To Copy a Condition:

1. Select the Condition Library.

2. Select the relevant source Condition .
3. Choose Copy. A new Condition appears in the list w ith the name extended to provide uniqueness.
4. Select the new copy and choose Properties to change the name and underlying conditions.

Delete (Condition)

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Condition Library  Delete

To delete a Condition:

1. Select the Condition Library.

2. Select the relevant Condition .
3. Choose Delete . If the Condition is currently referenced by a Rule or Suggested Classification, the
dialog will be presented show ing the affected Rule(s) / Suggested Classifications.

Condition in use

p184
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

4. Otherw ise a confirmation dialog is presented. Click OK to complete the deletion.

p185
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Question Library
The Question Library is a repository that stores questions and answers that are used to create
Decision Trees for use in various scenarios. From these questions and associated answers the
Decision Tree guides the user to select which label to apply.

This Question Library that is located together with the other libraries outside of and available
to the configured policies.

This section describes the following features of the Question Library:

 Columns
 Actions
 Question Properties
 Enable the Decision Tree Functionality
 Decision Tree Editor

This is illustrated here using our example:

Note: There will be language variations when the adm in tool’s Allow multiple languages
option is enabled
Note: This feature we will only support plain text.

To view the question library:

 In the Classifier Administration interface select Labelling Configuration>(policy

name)>Question Library.

p186
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Columns
The top-level summary page of the Question Library presents the following columns:

 Name: Enter a name to refer to this question within the admin tool.
 Description: Enter the question. The question is truncated to a single line.

Sample Question Library summary view.

p187
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Actions
Question Library

The area where a user can create and manage Questions and associated Answers.

 There are options to Add a New Question or view Question Properties.

[Selected Question]

Properties

 The properties option presents a Question property dialog allowing a user to edit the
selected question properties and associated answers.

Copy

 Creates a duplicate of the selected question.

Delete

 Attempts to delete a Question from the Question Library.

 If you confirm the deletion of the Question the adm inistration servic e provides a warning
if the Question is being used in a Dec ision Tree.

p188
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Question Properties

Note: The name is required and the nam e must be unique within the Question Library.

Note: The size limit for text fields defaults to 1000 characters

In the Question Library:

 Languages - Multiple languages are supported within the c onfiguration. If there is

nothing defined then the editor will show it as blank. If the Allow Multiple Languages
option is disabled then the language option will be hidden.
 Answers - There is no limit to the number of Questions. Answers c an be moved up and
down in the list. This order in which answers appear here is the order in whic h they are
presented on the Decision Tree client dialog.
 Selection Style - Single or Multiple Select.

p189
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Add a Question
Adds a new Question and associated Answers to the Question Library.

Question Properties.

To add a question to the Decision Tree:

1. In the Classifier Administration interface select Labelling Configuration>(policy

name)>Question Library.
2. In the Actions Pane, select Add a new question. A Question dialog box will appear.
3. Enter a Name that will be used to refer to the question. The name is unique within the
Question Library and is used as the display nam e for the Question node in the Dec ision
Tree tab.
4. Enter a Description. A description of the Question. Used as the tooltip for the Question node
in the Decision Tree tab.
5. In the drop-down menu, select the language. There is a choice between a default
configuration language and another language. Rem ember to set the Allow Multiple
Languages option to Enabled.
6. Enter the question text. This is the Question caption text as it appears on the Decision
Tree Client dialog.

p190
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

7. Enter a tooltip. This is the Question tooltip text as it appears on the Decision Tree
Client dialog.
8. Enter the answer selection(s) by clicking on the New Answer button. Enter a Name,
Description, Answer, Tooltip and select a Language. Click OK. The answers can be
moved up or down in the list by selec ting the Up or Down text. To edit, select the
Edit text or to delete, select Delete text.
9. In the drop down menu, select the Selection Style. This can be Single Select (one
option) or Multi Select (multiple options to select in a list). Click OK. The new
question that has just been added will appear in the Question Library

p191
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Enable the Decision Tree Functionality

The Decision Tree Functionality can be enabled under the Labelling Configuration Policies area. When a
user selects this option then it will add an extra tab to the associated policy editor.

Enabling the Decision Tree.

To enable the Decision Tree:

1. Go to Labelling Configuration>Configuration Name>Policies>(Select Policy) .
2. Select the required policy node.
3. In the Action Pane, select Properties. A Properties window will appear.
4. Under Help the user chooses a label, select Use Decision Tree.
5. Click OK.

p192
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Decision Tree Editor

Note: Depending on a per-policy option, this new tab is displayed or hidden.

Note: The Administrator must define a list of questions in the “Question Library.”
The top of the tree is called Decision Tree. This serves to provide a starting point for the
Administrator to add questions. It also provides a Properties option to control the layout of
the Decision Tree dialog on the client.

The Decision Tree tab in the policy.

p193
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Decision Tree Options

The screenshot below , displays the actions that are available within the Decision Tree, shown
with an example of the context m enu
Note: The availability of menu items depends on the selected tree node.

Note: Only a single label node may be added per answer.

Only a single label node may be added per answer. The Label menu item will then be grayed
out and the Properties menu item used to edit the label. When a node is selected then the
relevant operations will enabled for the selected item.

The Context menu.

p194
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Remove a Node
A user can remove a node from the Decision Tree.

To remove a node:

1. Within the Policy, select the Decision Tree Tab and within the Decision Tree select the node to be
removed. Right click and select Remove from the context menu.
2. When removing a node an "Are you sure you want to remove this item?" question will
appear. Click Yes. All the child nodes of the selected node will also be deleted. Answer
nodes cannot be deleted here.

p195
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Insert a Question into the Decision Tree

A user can insert an available question from the Question Library into the Decision Tree.

Add a question into the Decision Tree.

To insert a question into the Decision Tree:

1. Within the Decision Tree Editor, select the node below which you want to add a new
Question. Right click and select Add. An Add Question Window will appear displaying
available questions.
2. Select the required question and click on the OK button. The result will display the
question and the the answers underneath.

p196
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

The added question and answers.

p197
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Edit Available Answers

A user can select an answ er that will be available in the policy. By default all answers will be
enabled when a question is added to the tree. The Properties dialog for a question will provide
the ability to disable some of the answers.

Note: Display style will depend on whether the question has been defined in the Question
Library as single or multi-select.

Question Properties.

To edit a question in the Decision Tree:

1. Within the Policy, right click on the question node and c lick Edit. An Edit Question Window
will appear displaying available quest ions.
2. Select the answers that will be available in the polic y.
3. In the dropdown list, select the display style. Select Display values as a list. Click OK.

p198
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Set a Label
A label can be set for an Answer Node is selected in the Decision Tree.

Note: You can only add label changes to m ulti-select answers that are processed from the
first answer until the last.

Label Properties.

To set a label:

1. Within the Decision Tree, right-click on the answer node and c lick Edit. A Classification
Window similar to the one above will be presented. The actual content of the
Classification window will depend on your c onfiguration. For our example configuration,
choose required label elements as described below.
2. In the Sensitivity dropdown menu, select one of the sensitivity options; Unmarked,
Sensitive, Commercial-In-Confidence .
3. In the Distribution dropdown menu, selec t Internal or External.
4. In the Project dropdown menu, select one of the options. Clic k OK.

p199
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Bottom Pane
For answer nodes with an associated Label the bottom pane shows a description of the label changes
to be applied. These can be label element items to add or Selectors to clear.

Displaying the label changes, Set and Clear.

p200
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Configuration Settings
Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings
Opening Configuration Settings provides access to settings that are common across all policies in this
Label Configuration. The settings apply to all policies – that is users operating under different policies
w ill see no difference with regard to these settings.

The following settings are available:

 Classifier Application Settings

 General Settings
 Label Locations

 Combined Label Locations

Configuration Settings

p201
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Classifier Application Settings

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Each application has its own settings which are viewed by selecting the appropriate tab (PowerPoint
Settings in the example below).
The settings supported by each Classifier application are summarised in the table below with a separate
sub-topic describing each setting. Options are omitted or 'greyed' if the application / feature is not
licensed.

Classifier Application Settings

Key to table
One of: OL (Outlook) / O(WA) / Notes / Mob / M(ailAdd-in) / W (ord) / Ex(cel) /
PP(Pow erPoint) / Pr(oject) / V(isio) / CAD / SP / F(ile) the applications Application
supports the setting.
Note: Classifier Mail Add-in may sometimes be referred to as 'OWA 2013/2016'.
(A) The application automatically supports the feature, but it is not configurable.
(Blank) The feature is not supported by the application.
Strike-through The setting is not supported by that application or that version of the application.

Item Outl'k OWA Mail Notes Mob Word Ex'l P'Point Project CAD S'Point
Add-in Visio & F ile
3.10.0
Allow classification of meeting OL O(A)
requests and appointments
Allow classification of tasks OL O(A)

Allow Folder View Labelling OL O

p202
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Allow label change on protected W

documents
Allow manual upgrade w hen OL
sending messages
Allow use of OW A Basic/Light O
Mode
Allow visual markings on a OL
meeting request response
Always use Distribution List OL O
clearances
Apply Headers/Footers w hen label Ex
is changed
Apply Headers/Footers w hen Ex
w orkbook is saved
Automatically elevate email label OL

Automatically update Label fields W

Custom format for 'Insert label' W

Custom format for 'Label' column OL

Display selector values in context F

menu
Enable Back Button on Save as Visio

Ensure attachment markings are OL O M Notes

consistent
Ensure label dominates all portion OL
markings
Folder View column name OL O

Folder View column populate on OL

start-up
Force Summary Marking in task W Ex PP Pr
pane Visio
Include embedded images w hen OL
performing attachment checks
Maximum file size for icon overlay F
(in KB)
McAfee Host DLP marking OL

McAfee Host DLP scan OL

Portion Marking OL W Ex PP

Process rules w hen exporting W Ex PP Pr

Process rules w hen printing W Ex PP Pr

Process rules w hen saving W Ex PP Pr + V

Search for Outlook Item OL

Properties that match email label
locations

Set property to refresh markings SP + F

Show Classifier 'C' on icon overlay F

Show Classifier on ribbon w hen OL

reading
Show 'Insert Label' context menu W

Show label dialog on Save or Print W Ex PP Pr + V

Show label dialog on send OL Notes

Show label dialog style OL Notes W Ex PP Pr + V

p203
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Show label dialog w hen OL Notes W Ex PP Pr + V

mandatory label
Show Summary Marking in task OL W Ex PP Pr
pane Visio
Show Summary Marking in title W Ex PP Pr + V
bar 2010
2013
Suppress Classifier alerts w hen W Ex PP
running macros
Text displayed w hen an item SP
w ithout a label cannot be checked
into SharePoint
Text displayed w hen OW A O
Basic/Light Mode is disabled
Update markings w hen indicated W Ex PP Pr + V

Use default label w hen replying to OL O M Notes

unmarked emails (A)

Use Alternate Data Stream (ADS) F

marking
Use From field for Originator OL O
Clearance
Warn if file contents cannot be OL O M Notes
accessed
Watermarks use marking format W
font

Allow classification of meeting requests and appointments

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook.
Note: OWA Classifier and Classifier Mail Add-in support classification of meeting requests and
appointments, but the support is not configurable.
Note: Visual markings (Subject, FLOT/LLOT and Attachment lists) are not supported on appointments.
This setting defines w hether the Classifier label selection features w ill be presented w hen the user is
drafting a meeting request or appointment.
Enabled (default) - The Classifier Label selection features w ill be presented in the Ribbon / Ribbon bar
and meeting requests w ill be labelled in the same manner as other messages.
Disabled - The Classifier Label selection features does not appear in the Ribbon / Ribbon bar and these
items will not be labelled.

Allow classification of tasks

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook.
Note: Folder view labelling of tasks is not supported.
Note: OWA Classifier supports classification of tasks subject to the standard OWA limitations that you
cannot create, accept or edit assigned tasks. Only local tasks can be created and edited within OWA.
This setting defines w hether the Classifier label selection features w ill be presented w hen the user is
drafting a task.

p204
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Enabled - The Classifier Label selection features w ill be presented in the Ribbon / Ribbon bar and tasks
w ill be labelled in the same manner as other messages.
Disabled (default) - The Classifier Label selection features w ill not appear in the Ribbon / Ribbon bar
and tasks w ill not be labelled.
Note: The label summary bar may not be shown when choosing to assign a task to someone.

p205
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Allow Folder View labelling

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Email Classifier and OWA Classifier.
This setting defines if users w ill be able to label unlabelled items in Outlook folders, and/or modify labels
on items in Outlook folders.
Disabled (default) - User's will not be allowed to set or modify label values on items in Outlook folders.
Enabled - User's will be allowed to set or modify label values on items in Outlook folders using the
mechanisms described below .
If the feature is Enabled, the user has access to two additional actions:
Note: OWA Classifier only supports the Set Label mechanism.

 A Label selected message(s) button when viewing a folder summary in Outlook

 A Set Label... button when viewing an open message.

A summary of user operation can be found in Folder View Labelling Operation.
It is possible that an attempt to label a document using the Folder View mechanism may fail (e.g.
permissions). The text displayed in this circumstance is configurable using the Text displayed w hen
Folder View labelling fails.

Allow label change on protected documents

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Word (Office Classifier).
This setting defines if users will be able to change the label and markings on protected word documents
(File > Info > Protect document > Restrict editing) w here Editing restrictions is set to No changes
(Read only) or Comments. This setting is applicable w hen either Add a Header / Footer /
Watermark and Add this image to header / footer / top / bottom / Watermark rules are used.
Note: If Editing restrictions is set to Filling in forms, then regardless of this setting the label value
can be changed, but any Headers / Footers / Watermarks will not be changed.
Note: Setting Editing Restrictions to Tracked changes has no impact on Classifier operation - the
label and markings can be updated.
Disabled (default) - Users can change label values on protected w ord documents,but the effect on
markings is unpredictable.
Enabled - Users will be allowed to modify label and marking values in Headers, Footers and
Watermarks on supported protected w ord documents.
For supported Editing restrictions types this is accomplished by Classifier registering Header/Footer/
Watermark label information as "Exceptions" w ithin the "Restrict Editing" mechanism. If the setting is
Enabled , Header/Footer / Watermark information w ill be displayed enclosed w ith square brackets (e.g.
[Classifier test Public]).
Note: If a document has never had a Classifier label applied (even an empty label) then Office Classifier
cannot add a marking to that (protected) document unless the whole Header / Footer / Watermark area
have been manually marked as Exceptions w ithin the Restrict Editing mechanism.

Allow manual upgrade when sending messages

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook.
Note: This setting has no effect if Automatically elevate email label is Enabled.

p206
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

If this setting is Enabled, and a high-water mark check rule is triggered because labels of attachments
are higher than the current message label, and it is possible to derive a label for the message that will
dominate all attachment labels, then the policy check dialog w ill present an Upgrade message button.
If the setting is Disabled, or a high-water mark label cannot be derived, then only a Remove
(attachment) button will be presented.

Allow use of OWA Basic/Light Mode

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to OWA Classifier.
This setting allow s a site to disable OWA Basic/Light Mode if it has only installed the OWA Classifier
Premium Mode.
Enabled (Default) - OWA Basic/Light Mode is available.
Disabled OWA Classifier w ill intercept any requests to operate in OWA Basic/Light Mode. The user
w ill be notified using the message configured under Text displayed when OWA Basic/Light
Mode is disabled.

Allow visual markings on a meeting request response

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook.
Note: This setting is only used if Allow classification of meeting requests and appointments is Enabled.
This setting supports the follow ing options w hich control in which circumstances Classifier will apply
Visual Marking rules (Subject/FLOT/LLOT)to Meeting Request responses.

Disabled Visual marking rules w ill never be applied to a meeting request response.
On Edit Response Visual marking rules w ill be applied if the user chooses Edit the response
before sending.
On Send Response Now Visual marking rules w ill be applied if the user chooses Send the response
now.
All Visual marking rules w ill always be applied.

Always use distribution list clearances

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook and OWA.
A clearance may be assigned to an Active Directory Distribution Group - that is a Distribution
Group that has an associated email address.
If there is no clearance assigned to a Distribution Group (DG) Email Classifier will attempt to expand the
DG and use the DG member's clearances to perform clearance checks.
If this setting is Disabled then DGs are always expanded. If the relevant setting is Enabled, then DG
clearance w ill be used if available. If DG clearance is not available then the DG will be expanded to
perform clearance checks.

p207
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Apply Headers/Footers when label is changed

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Excel.
Applying headers and/or footers in Excel via Classifier rules can have a performance impact. This is
because each time the header/footer is changed for each Worksheet, Excel communicates with the
default printer w hich becomes more noticeable as the number of sheets increases. This setting can be
used (in conjunction with Apply Headers/Footers when workbook is saved ) to reduce the impact.
Enabled - Every time the Label is changed, all Headers and Footers are updated.
Disabled -(Default) The Headers / Footers are not updated when the Label is changed. This can lead to
inconsistent markings on the Workbook when viewed in Print Preview or Page Layout view.
Note: Headers and Footers are always updated when the workbook / sheet is printed.

Apply Headers/Footers when workbook is saved

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Excel.
Applying headers and/or footers in Excel via Classifier rules can have a performance impact. This is
because each time the header/footer is changed for each Worksheet, Excel communicates with the
default printer w hich becomes more noticeable as the number of sheets increases. This setting can be
used (in conjunction with Apply Headers/Footers when Label is changed ) to reduce the impact.
Enabled - (Default) Every time the document is saved, all Headers and Footers are updated.
Disabled - The Headers / Footers are not updated when the workbook is saved. This can lead to
inconsistent markings on the Workbook when viewed in Print Preview or Page Layout view.
Note: Headers and Footers are always updated when the workbook / sheet is printed.

Automatically elevate email label

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook.
This setting can be Enabled to direct Classifier to try (w hen attaching a document) to automatically
raise the label on an email to encompass that document's label. If that automatic action cannot
complete (e.g. there is a clash of single selection list values), AND a Perform high-water mark check is
configured, then a further check is applied when the message is sent and the user involved in resolution
of any residual issues according to the Warn/Prevent setting in the rule.
If this setting is Enabled and a high-w ater mark check initially fails then the software will do the
following:

 For Hierarchic Selectors ( Single selection list) it will set the selector value to the highest value from
the message and the set of attachments and Pass the check.

 For informational Selectors (those with Include this Selector in Clearance Checks unset - Single
selection list and Multiple selection list) it will retain the message setting for the selector regardless
of any attachment values and Pass the check.

 For all other Selectors if a single value is available for the selector that will dominate the message
and attachment values for that selector, then the message label will be set to that value and the
check is Passed. If no such value is available, the check fails and the user will be notified of the
issue.
So a message labelled as "Confidential" with an attachment of "Confidential Sales" would have its label

p208
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

automatically changed to "Confidential Sales", but a message labelled as "Confidential Engineering" with
an attachment of "Confidential Sales" triggers the dialog described in Attachment Handling.
If this setting is Enabled, then the setting Allow manual upgrade when sending messages has no effect.

Automatically update Label fields

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Word.
This setting supports two values:
Disabled - (Default) - Fields populated using the Insert Marking as Field Code (Word only) ] action will
not be updated automatically when the classification is changed.
Enabled - Classifier will automatically search for fields containing Classifier markings whenever the
Classification is changed.
Note: Certain content (e.g. copied from a w eb page) can contain lots of 'fields' resulting in a
significant overhead when Classifier searches for field values to update. This setting allows
the user to control when the field update is performed.

Custom format for 'Insert Label'

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Word.
The name of the Marking Format to be used if incorporating a Classifier label into a Word document
using the Insert Label context menu action.
If this value is not set then the value associated with Custom Format for Summary Markings is used.

Custom format for 'Label' column

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook.
The name of the Marking Format to be used if presenting a Classifier label in a column in an Outlook
folder summary as described in Folder View - column name.
If this value is not set then the value associated with Custom Format for Summary Markings will be
used.

Display selector values in context menu

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to File Classifier.
This setting provides additional control over the context menu display as described in the File
Classifier Guide > Displaying selector values in the context menu (not using single click) .
Enabled - File Classifier context menu w ill present relevant selector values and the current
classification.

Disabled - (Default) File Classifier just presents the action in the context menu.

p209
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Enable Back Button on Save As

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Visio.
Enabled (default) - The Back button is available if a check dialog is shown during Save As operation.
Disabled - The Back button is not available if a check dialog is show n during Save As operation.
This setting should always be Disabled for Visio 2013/2016 as there is no means of cancelling a Save
As operation at the point at w hich Classifier is invoked. Leaving the setting to Enabled for Visio
2013/2016 may mean that rule actions are not performed at all.

Ensure attachment markings are consistent

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only relevant if you have installed and used Power Classifier or File Classifier.
Note: This setting is only applicable to Email, OWA and Notes Classifier.
This setting affects the checks made when a message is sent.
Enabled - Office Classifier supported attachments (Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Project and
Visio) are checked for the custom property set by File or Power Classifier to indicate that they have
updated the label value, and the visible markings may be inconsistent with the label value. If the
custom property is set, then the user is prompted and submission halted, allowing the user to take
corrective action. The text displayed to the user is configured through the Text to display if attachment
markings are inconsistent .
Disabled - The above check is not performed.

Ensure label dominates all portion markings

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook.
This setting indicates if Classifier should include Portion Markings in the Body of an email message when
performing Label Dominance checks.
It only has effect if Portion Marking is Enabled for Outlook.
Note: The message Subject and the message Body are scanned for portion markings. Thus a marking
(e.g. [RES] for Restricted) present in the Subject of a reply or forward message will be treated the same
as [RES] inserted as a Portion Marking within the message body.

Folder View column name

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook.
This setting (previously know n as Column name for Folder View)allows you to define the heading for a
column you can then add into folder view s. The column will show any Classifier label associated with a
message using the Custom format for Summary Markings .
 Define the required name (e.g. Classifier) as the Folder View column name .

p210
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Deploy the configuration change. You can then add the named column into the Inbox folder
as follows:
 Start Outlook
 Select the Inbox folder.
 Send a Classifier labelled message to that folder.
 Open and close the received message.
 Select View / Add columns (or Position the cursor over the headings for the Inbox and
choose Field Chooser from the context menu). This presents the dialog below. Select
User-defined fields in Inbox from the drop down.

Field Chooser
Note: The 'Column' name you assign does appear in the above list if you have chosen a
value that already appears in one of the other lists available under Field Chooser (e.g. Label
appears under All Appointment fields). You can check this by using the Manual definition of
column name mechanism described below.
 Select the required field and drag this into the required position in the folder column
headings.
 You can then replicate that Folder View to all other folders using the View / Change /
Apply Current View to Other Mail Folders action. Consider selecting the parent nodes
and using the Apply view to subfolders setting.
Manual definition of column name
 You can manually make your column name available in any folder as follows:
 Select the folder. Invoke Field Chooser and choose User-defined fields in folder . Click
New... and enter your configured Column name (e.g. Classifier Label).
 If you enter a name that is already in use in one the other lists you will be notified:

Field Chooser warning

 Select the new item and drag and drop it into the required place in the folder columns
headings.

p211
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Folder View column populate on start-up

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook.
This setting may be useful in avoiding problems (e.g. This function cannot be performed because the
message has been changed) when performing operations such as follow up or apply a category on
messages with the Folder View column name option is enabled.
Such problems are most likely to arise w hen running in on-line mode (rather than cache mode) for
messages delivered to the Inbox when Classifier is not running (e.g. overnight).
Enabled - On start-up, Classifier w ill search all the received main folders (usually the Inbox) in each
Mailbox, plus any subordinate folders, to ensure that the Classifier Folder View column property is
populated.
Disabled - (Default) No 'fix-up' action is performed at start-up and Classifier w ill perform any required
fix-up when the item is accessed.

Force Summary Marking in task pane

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint and Project.
The setting determines whether users are allowed to close the task pane that displays the Summary
Marking.
Enabled - Users cannot close the Summary Marking task pane.
Disabled - Users can close the Summary Marking task pane. There may be no means of re-instatement
if they do close the pane unless the Show Summary Marking action is Enabled.

Include embedded images when performing attachment checks

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook.
The setting determines how embedded images are handled by Check for the high-water mark , Check
clearance for attachments and Check for unlabelled attachments rules.
Enabled - (default) Embedded images will be processed as described in Attachment handling.
Note: If the message is in RTF format, attachment checks cannot be performed on
embedded attachments.
Disabled - Embedded images are excluded from Check for the high-water mark, Check Content, Check
clearance for attachments and Check for unlabelled attachments rules.

Maximum file size for icon overlay (in KB)

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to File Classifier.
If icon overlays are in use, each overlay (typically 6) has to load the file to determine the correct icon to
display. For large files this can lead to visible delays to explorer.
This setting allow s you to limit the icon overlay operation to files below a specified size.

p212
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

By default the value is not set indicting that no limit is applied.

McAfee Host DLP marking

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook.
This setting is only relevant if the associated setting McAfee Host DLP scan is Enabled, in which case it
determines the text string (as derived from the selected Marking Format) to be passed to McAfee. The
text string derived from the Marking Format can of course include the selected label values.

McAfee Host DLP scan

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook.
This setting relates to how Email Classifier interacts with McAfee Host DLP software (HDLP). Classifier
checks whether DLP is available at start up - if DLP is unavailable the setting is ignored.
Enabled Directs Classifier to call an API provided by DLP for use in Outlook environments to pass a
text string as part of Classifier and ePO integration.
The text string passed is determined by the Marking Format configured by McAfee Host
DLP marking. The text string derived from the Marking Format can of course include the
selected label values (classification).
The DLP API is invoked just before the message is sent.
It is a matter for McAfee configuration as to effect of the 'text string'.
ePO configuration :
It is assumed that ePO has been configured to trust Classifier as follow s, otherw ise both
components w ill process the message in an uncoordinated manner.

 Navigate to the policy catalogue and open the current client configuration.

 Select Settings / Operational Modes and Modules and then verify that Outlook
Add-ins / Activate 3rd Party Add-in Integration is Enabled .
 Go to Settings / Email Protection and under the Outlook 3rd party integration
section select Boldon James from the Vendor Name list.
 Re-publish the ePO policy.

Disabled (default) McAfee HDLP API is not invoked.

Portion Marking

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook, Word, Excel and PowerPoint.
A portion mark is usually an abbreviated marking derived from a label value (e.g. [P] for Public).
This Portion Marking application setting (one each for Outlook, Word, Excel and PowerPoint), controls
w hether users can insert a Portion Marking into the content of an Outlook message, Word document,
Excel Spreadsheet or PowerPoint presentation.
This Portion Marking action is only available if the relevant application Portion Marking setting is
Enabled, AND Configuration Settings / General Settings / Custom Format for Portion Marking has a

p213
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

valid Marking Format configured.

Note: Outlook must be configured to use W ord as the email editor. Outlook - Not supported in a Plain
Text message body.
Note: A Portion Marking may only be inserted into an empty cell in an Excel spreadsheet.
Note: (Outlook) Portion Marks (Choose Portion Mark) are alw ays inserted at the current insertion point
w ithin the message body (even if the visible cursor is in the Subject field).
If Portion Marking is available, then the user can insert a Portion Mark at the current position in the
message / document using either the Portion Mark action in the ribbon bar, or the Insert Portion
Marking action in the context menu for Word and Excel (the context menu action is not available in
Outlook or PowerPoint).
To insert a Portion Mark:
 Position the insertion point in the message / document.
 Choose the Portion Mark to be applied, either via the Portion Mark action on the ribbon bar
(see Portion Mark for a fuller description of the user options) or Insert Portion Marking
action from the Word or Excel context menu.
 The standard label selection dialog appears:

Portion Marking - Label Selection

 Choose the required label value and click OK. (If the user has defined Favourite Label
values, they w ill be available through the Favourites drop down).
 The label value w ill appear at the current insertion point formatted according to the
configured Custom Format for Portion Marking .

p214
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Portion Mark inserted - Office

Portion Mark inserted - Outlook

 To remove a Portion Mark, just select the Portion Mark text (including any delimiters) and
click Delete.

Label Dominance and Automatic Label Upgrade

When a Portion Mark is inserted, Office Classifier, where possible, automatically upgrades the current
label value to ensure that it dominates the Portion Mark being inserted as described in Label Dominance
.
Office Classifier only performs such label dominance checks at the time the Portion Mark is inserted. It
does not perform any more checking of the label against Portion Marks (e.g. on Label change or
document Save).
Office Classifier w ill make no change during dominance checking where the current label value contains
a value for a non-hierarchic element that is different to the value for that element in the Portion Mark.
For example: Label = Internal / Sales and Portion Mark = Internal / Support, then label would remain as
Internal / Sales w ith no user involvement.
Note: Single Selection list and Multiple selection list Selectors only take part in automatic upgrade of
Portion marks if they have Include this selector in clearance and attachment checks enabled.
Note: Email Classifier will correctly identify Portion Markings ONLY if the associated Marking Format has
delimiters around the entire marking format (e.g. [{Classification (Portion Mark)}]). See Properties
(Marking Format) for details on how to do this.
When a Portion Marking is inserted, Email Classifier, where possible, automatically upgrades the current
label value to ensure that it dominates the Portion Mark being inserted as described in Label Dominance
.
Email Classifier usually only performs such label dominance checks at the time the Portion Marking is
inserted. It does not perform any more checking of the label against Portion Marking (e.g. on Message
Send).
However, if the additional setting Ensure label dominates all portion markings is Enabled then a
dominance check w ill be performed if the user changes the label of the message. If Email Classifier
detects an attempted downgrade the following will be displayed and the label downgrade cancelled:

p215
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Portion Marking downgrade warning

Note: Any lowering of a Hierarchic selector constitutes dow ngrade, as will removal of a non-hierarchic
selector. Any other change of value of a non-hierarchic selector will not constitute a dow ngrade.

Process rules when exporting

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint and Project.
You can enforce rules (Enabled - default) such as Check these mandatory selectors (Check rules)
when an Export operation is performed. Any checks that fail w ill interrupt the flow and involve the user
in the choice of action according to the Warn / Prevent setting defined in the rule.
Note: If a policy check dialog appears for Pow erPoint or Project, the user must Fix the issue or
Continue, they cannot go Back.

Process rules when printing

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint and Project.
You can enforce rules (Enabled) such as Check these mandatory selectors (Check rules) when a
Print operation is performed. Any checks that fail w ill interrupt the flow and involve the user in the
choice of action according to the Warn / Prevent setting defined in the rule.
Note: If a policy check dialog appears for Pow erPoint or Project, the user must Fix the issue or
Continue, they cannot go Back.

Process rules when saving

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Word, Excel and PowerPoint, Project and Visio.
This setting allow s you to enforce rules (Enabled) such as Check these mandatory selectors (Check
rules) when a Save operation is performed. Any checks that fail will interrupt the flow and involve the
user in the choice of action according to the Warn / Prevent setting defined in the rule.
Note: If a policy check dialog appears for Visio, the user must Fix the issue or Continue, they cannot go
Back.

p216
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Search for Outlook Item Properties that match email label locations

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Outlook.
Disabled (Default) Standard processing of Label Locations applies.
Enabled When processing Label Locations, if a defined x-header item cannot be found, then
Classifier w ill check to see whether there is an Outlook Item Property w ith the
same name as the x-header that can be used instead.

Set property to refresh markings

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to SharePoint Classifier and File Classifier.
The effects of this setting are described in the SharePoint Classifier and File Classifier Guides.

Show Classifier 'C' on icon overlay

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to File Classifier.
This setting provides additional control over the appearance of Icon Overlays.

Enabled - (Default) File Classifier icon overlays w ill include the Classifier symbol .

Disabled - File Classifier icon overlays w ill NOT include the Classifier symbol .

Show Classifier on ribbon when reading

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Outlook.
This setting provides control over w hether the Classifier entry is show n in the ribbon bar w hen reading a
message.
Enabled - (Default) The Classifier ribbon entry is displayed.
Disabled - The Classifier ribbon entry is not displayed.

p217
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Show 'Insert Label' Context Menu

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Word.
This setting supports two settings:
Disabled - (Default) - The Insert Label context menu is not available in Word [see Insert
Marking as Field Code (Word only) ].
Enabled - The Insert Label context menu is available in Word.

Show label dialog on Save or Print

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint Project and Visio.
Further control over the style of the label dialog presented is provided by Show label dialog style.
Note: Regardless of the value of this setting, Classifier w ill always process the configured rules (e.g.
Check these mandatory selectors) w hich in some circumstances may result in a further label dialog
being shown.
This setting supports three values:
Default The user experience saving or printing a document is controlled by any rules defined (e.g.
Check these mandatory selectors and Check for use of default label ) and the setting
Process rules when saving .
Always The Label selection dialog will be presented if the user saves or prints a document. The user
can modify the label, or continue the operation.
If message label matches default label - If the current label matches the default label w hen the
user saves or prints a document, then the Label selection dialog will be presented. The user
can modify the label, or continue the operation.

Show label dialog on Send

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook and Lotus Notes
Further control over the style of the label dialog presented is provided by Show label dialog style.
Note: Regardless of the value of this setting, Classifier w ill always process the configured rules (e.g.
Check these mandatory selectors) w hich in some circumstances may result in a further label dialog
being shown.
This setting supports three values:
Default The user experience sending a message is controlled by any rules defined (e.g. Check these
mandatory selectors and Check for use of default label ).
Always The Label selection dialog will be presented if the user sends a message. The user can modify
the label, or continue the operation.
If message label matches default label - If the current label matches the default label w hen the
user sends a message, then the Label selection dialog will be presented. The user can modify
the label, or continue the operation.

Show label dialog style

p218
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is applicable to Microsoft Outlook, Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Project, Visio and Notes.
In various circumstances Classifier w ill automatically display a label selection dialog (e.g. Mandatory
selector required). By default, if Use Single Click with pre-defined labels is configured, then a Single
Click format is presented, otherwise the Full label selection dialog appears.
This per-application setting provides control over the style of dialog presented w hen Use Single Click
with pre-defined labels is configured AND one or more of the follow ing is triggered:

 Show label dialog on Save or Print

 Show label dialog on Send
 Show label dialog w hen mandatory label
This setting supports two values:
Single Click when configured - (default) A Single Click label selection dialog is presented if Use
Single Click with pre-defined labels is configured, otherw ise the Full label selection dialog appears.
Full Classification Dialog - The Full label selection dialog is presented even though Use Single Click
with pre-defined labels is configured.

Show label dialog when mandatory label

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is applicable to Email Classifier, Notes Classifier and Office Classifier (Microsoft Word,
Excel, PowerPoint, Project and Visio).
This setting modifies the end user experience when Mandatory Selector rules are triggered on Send,
Save or Print (see also Process Rules When Printing and Process Rules When Saving ).
If this setting is Enabled when a Mandatory Selector check fails (there is no value for the Mandatory
Selector), AND Warn/Prevent in the rule is set to Prevent, then the label dialog show n below is
presented rather than the general Rule exception dialog, allowing the user to set the label directly.
Further control over the style of the label dialog presented is provided by Show label dialog style.

Mandatory Label required dialog

The text that appears at the top of the dialog may be modified by the Text displayed when mandatory
label is absent setting.
If this setting is Disabled when a Mandatory Selector check fails (there is no label), OR Warn/Prevent is

p219
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

set to Warn, then the general Rule exception dialog is displayed with the Remove/Back/Continue
options.
The text in the body of this dialog is controlled by the relevant application Rule.

Mandatory Label Check

Show Summary Marking in task pane

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is applicable to Microsoft Outlook, Word, Excel, PowerPoint and Project.
This setting controls w hether the Summary Marking value appears in an information bar at the bottom
of an open document window. The default value is Enabled.
If there is currently no label value selected then the Text to display if no marking is available will be
displayed as the Summary Marking value.
Depending on the environment, the user can expand and contract this information bar, and may be
able to close the bar w ith no means of re-instatement. The Show Summary Marking action may be
Enabled to provide a Classifier menu action to re-instate the Summary Marking display if the
information bar is closed.
The Force Summary Marking in task pane may be Enabled to prevent the user from closing the
information bar.

Show Summary Marking in title bar

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is applicable to Microsoft Word, Excel, Pow erPoint, Project and Visio, but has no
effect in Visio or Pow erPoint 2010 (and later) which do not support alteration of the window title.
If the setting is Enabled the Summary Marking value is inserted into the Window title bar - it is
appended to the document name.
The default is Disabled – the title bar w ill not be changed by Classifier.

p220
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Suppress Classifier alerts when running macros

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Word, Excel and Pow erPoint.
The following must be Enabled for each required office application:
File > Options > Trust Center > Microsoft <W ord/Excel/PowerPoint> Trust Center > Trust
Center Settings >
Macro Settings > Developer Macro Settings > Trust access to the VBA project object
model
Disabled - (Default) Any Classifier alerts triggered w hilst running macros w ill be displayed and require
action.
Enabled - Classifier alerts triggered w hilst running macros w ill not be displayed.

Text displayed when an item without a label cannot be checked into

SharePoint

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to SharePoint Classifier.
The effects of this setting are described in the SharePoint Classifier Guide.

Text displayed when OWA Basic/Light Mode is disabled

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to OWA Classifier.
This setting allow s you to configure the User defined message to be displayed to a user if an attempt to
use Allow use of OW A Basic/Light Mode is inhibited by OWA Classifier.

Update markings when indicated

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Project and Visio.
Note: The setting is only relevant if you are using Power Classifier or File Classifier.
This setting provides an additional level of control if File or Power Classifier is used to label Office
Classifier documents.
Under default operation if File Classifier or Pow er Classifier labels a document it will set a custom
property on Office Classifier documents to indicate that the Label may not match the document
markings. Office Classifier applications detect this custom property the next time the document is
opened and update all markings.
It is possible (particularly if using Pow er Classifier to label many files) that the label values applied
cause unexpected effects on the markings. This setting allow s you to suspend (on a per application
basis) the automatic updating of markings, providing more time to resolve marking issues.
Enabled - (Default) When a document is opened, the office application will react to the custom
property set by File or Power Classifier and refresh the document markings when the
document is opened, clearing the custom property.

p221
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Disabled - The Office application ignores the custom property when a document is opened. However,
actions such as Save and Print may still trigger an update of markings.
Note: Newer versions of File Classifier and Power Classifier provide control over the setting of the
refresh custom property as described in the relevant product guide.

Use Alternate Data Stream (ADS) marking

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to File Classifier.
This setting provides additional control over w hether File Classifier writes label information to the
Alternate Data Stream for file types that are not supported (i.e. NOT configured in DocLabeller2 - e.g.
TXT files).
Enabled - (Default) File Classifier will store the label in the Alternate Data Stream.
Disabled - File Classifier will NOT write the label to the Alternate Data Stream for files that are NOT
configured in DocLabeller2.
Note: For Visio files, the General setting Use Alternate Data Stream (ADS) for Visio files takes
precedence.

Use default label when replying to unmarked emails

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Email, OWA, Mail Add-in and Notes Classifier.
Note: Classifier Mail Add-in and Notes Classifier always apply the default label.
This setting allow s you to control what happens if the original received message has no label.
Enabled The reply message adopts the default label value as the initial label value for the reply
message.
Disabled (default) The reply message starts using a blank label value.

Use From field for Originator Clearance

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook and OWA Classifier.
This setting is only relevant if you are using Perform Clearance Checking on Originator rules under
Email or OWA Classifier. In environments w here a user has the ability to submit mail from more than
one mailbox, this setting can be used to ensure that Email Classifier uses the From value for Originator
Clearance checks rather than the default (primary mailbox).
Enabled - Email / OWA Classifier will use the From value to perform Originator Clearance Checks.
Disabled - Email / OWA Classifier will always use the Primary mailbox identity to perform Originator
Clearance Checks.

Warn if file contents cannot be accessed

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook, OWA and Notes Classifier.

p222
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

This setting influences the operation of Check for the high-water mark . If the setting is Enabled, then
the user w ill be 'warned' of any failure to access a file during those checks. Such failures can arise for
example if encrypted ZIP files are attached, or the document is in a format inaccessible to Classifier
(e.g. an old PDF format). Further details can be found under Attachment Handling.

Watermarks use marking format font

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Classifier

Application Settings
Note: This setting only applicable to Microsoft Word.
This setting supports controls the effect of adding a Watermark as the result of an Add a Watermark
rule firing:
Disabled - (default) Classifier w ill set the Watermark font to Calibri.
Enabled - Classifier will set the Watermark font to the first font used in the applicable designated
marking format.

p223
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

General Settings

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
These settings are common to multiple applications, although a feature may only be applicable to a
subset of applications.

Configuration Settings - General Settings

The settings and their applicability are summarised in the table below:
Key to table
One of: OL (Outlook) / O(WA) / Notes / Mob / M(ailAdd-in) / W(ord) / Ex(cel) / PP(Pow erPoint)
/ Pr(oject) / V(isio) / CAD / SP / F(ile) the applications Application supports the
setting.
Note: Classifier Mail Add-in may sometimes be referred to as OW A 2013/2016.
(A) The feature is automatic (not configurable).
(Blank) The feature is not supported by the application.

Item Outl'k OWA Mail Notes Mob Word Ex'l P'Point Project CAD S'Point
Add-in Visio File Cl
API
Box

Automatically expand policy OL O Notes Mob W Ex PP Pr+V CAD SP+F

w arning messages
Azure RMS Document Tracking W Ex PP
Facility

Azure RMS Tracking portal URL W Ex PP

override

p224
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Cache Active Directory attributes OL W Ex PP Pr+V

on startup

Check Label Locations first OL O M Notes Mob W Ex PP Pr+V CAD SP+F

Box
Classification History W Ex PP

Classification History Display W Ex PP

(2010 or later)

Classifier Ribbon Single Click OL W Ex PP Pr+V

Buttons as a Gallery

Classifier ribbon group location OL W Ex PP Pr+V SP+F

Content checking - case OL W Ex PP

sensitive (3.9)

Content checking - include OL W Ex

document properties (3.9)

Custom format for 'Classifier OL O Notes Mob W Ex PP Pr+V CAD SP+F

Auditing' Box

Custom format for 'Label M W Ex PP Pr+V CAD

Summary' custom document
property

Custom format for Portion OL W Ex PP

marking

Custom format for Summary OL O Notes Mob W Ex PP Pr+V CAD SP+F

Markings

Disable OK on Label dialog if OL W Ex PP Pr+V

mandatory values are missing

Display of Favourites button OL W Ex PP Pr+V

Display of Label Dialog launch OL W Ex PP Pr+V CAD

button

Indicate mandatory selector OL W Ex PP Pr+V

check failures

Label integrity check failure error OL W Ex PP Pr+V F

message

Masking of Selectors against OL O W Ex PP Pr+V CAD

Clearance

Minimise space between selector OL W Ex PP

value buttons on ribbon

Prompt for reason for ignoring OL O Notes W Ex PP Pr+V CAD SP+F

policy warning

Remove Classifier Options from OL W Ex PP Pr+V F

the Ribbon Bar

Select value for Masked Selector OL O W Ex PP Pr+V CAD

Show 'Help' button on ribbon bar OL W Ex PP Pr+V SP+F

Show labeller 'Clear' button OL O M(A) Notes W Ex PP Pr+V SP+F

Show labeller 'Default' button OL O M(A) Notes W Ex PP Pr+V SP+F

Single Click best match OL O M Notes W Ex PP Pr+V CAD SP+F

Summary bar size changes are W Ex PP Pr+V

preserved

p225
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Summary Marking as black text OL W Ex PP Pr+V

on a white background

Text displayed when a OL O

distribution list fails to expand

Text displayed when attachment OL O Notes

check failed to complete

Text displayed when Folder View OL O

labelling fails

Test displayed when mandatory OL O Notes Mob W Ex PP Pr+V CAD SP+F

label is absent

Text displayed when originator OL O

check failed to complete

Text displayed when prompting OL O Notes Mob W Ex PP Pr+V CAD SP+F

for a reason for ignoring policy
warnings

Text displayed when recipient OL O Notes Mob

check failed to complete

Text displayed when RMS OL W Ex PP

protection failed to complete

Text displayed w hen S/MIME OL O

application failed to complete

Text to display for notifying of OL O Notes Mob W Ex PP Pr+V CAD SP+F

policy checks performed

Text to display for resolution of OL O Notes Mob W Ex PP Pr+V CAD SP+F

policy issues

Text to display if attachment OL O Notes

markings are inconsistent

Text to display if no marking is OL O M Notes Mob W Ex PP Pr+V CAD SP+F

available

URL for your labelling help site OL O Notes W Ex PP Pr+V CAD SP+F

Use Alternate Data Stream (ADS) F + API

for Visio files

User defined RMS protection W Ex PP

Automatically expand policy warning messages

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: Not applicable to Classifier Mail Add-in
Disabled (default) The text displayed in policy check dialogs w ill not be automatically expanded
w hen the dialog is first displayed, and w ill include the button show n below ,
allowing the user to view any additional text.

Enabled If enabled, Classifier automatically expands the text the first time the Policy Check
Dialog is displayed, and includes the follow ing button:

p226
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Azure RMS Document Tracking

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General
Settings
Note: Only applicable to Word, Excel and PowerPoint
This setting is only effective if RMS Client 2.1 has been installed.
The setting can be used to provide the user w ith the means to invoke RMS Tracking from the Classifier
Options menu.
Disabled (default) The Track Document action does not appear in the Classifier Options menu.
Enabled A Track Document action appears in the Classifier Options menu.

RMS Track document

The action is greyed until the document has been saved and has had RMS protection applied.
Selecting the Track Document action invokes the RMS tracking sequence - interacting with the
relevant portal.
The default portal address can be overridden using the Azure RMS Tracking portal URL override setting.

Azure RMS Tracking portal URL override

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General
Settings
Note: Only applicable to Word, Excel and PowerPoint.
This setting is only relevant if Azure RMS Document Tracking is Enabled.
It allows you to override the default RMS portal address by the supplied URL.

Cache Active Directory attributes on start-up

Admin: Labelling Configurations Þ {configuration} Þ Configuration Settings / General Settings
Conditions and Marking Formats may be defined that refer to Active Directory attributes. By default
Classifier w ill cache such attributes w hen they are first referenced. This setting allows you to direct
Classifier to cache the attributes when the application starts.

Disabled (Default) - Classifier will only cache Active Directory attributes w hen first referenced.
Enabled - Classifier will cache Active Directory attributes when the application starts.

p227
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

The setting for the Cache Active Directory attributes on startup.

Check Label Locations first

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: This setting is usually only relevant in certain specialised environments. It is not applicable to
Classifier Mail Add-in.
Disabled (default) - Classifier will check for an internal Classifier label before checking Label Locations.
Enabled - Classifier will check Label Locations for a label value before checking for an internal
Classifier label.

Classification History

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Word, Excel and Pow erPoint.
Disabled (default) Classifier w ill not maintain classification history information.
Enabled Classifier w ill store classification change history w ithin the document for supported
file types each time the document is saved.
Classification History Display controls whether the user can see and Clear the history information but
only for Office 2010 or later.

Classification History Display

p228
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Disabled (default) - The user will not be able to view any stored Classification History.
Enabled - The user will be able to view any stored Classification History
If this setting is Enabled, the Classification History is available via a separate File > Classifier >
Classification History option on the backstage view which will present the following dialog.

Classification History Display

The user may Clear all the history.
The text presented to the user may be configured using the User Interface Definition mechanisms (see
Classification History (UID) for further details).

p229
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Classification Ribbon Single Click as a Gallery

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
The option setting on the CAS under "General Settings -> Classifier Ribbon button as a gallery" allows
Single Click UI display to provide smaller real estate for Classifier Client icons on the Office Ribbon.

Note: By default this setting is turned off so it needs to be switched to ENABLED.

Note: This setting is not applicable to OWA Classifier, Classifier Mail Add-in, Notes Classifier or Mobile
Classifier.

This setting defines how Classifier inserts the Classifier label ribbon group. It supports two values and
by default it is Disabled:

Disabled With the option disabled for Classifier Ribbon button as a gallery, then the normal display
of Classifier icons is displayed on the Office Ribbon bar as shown below in the three
different modes.

Enabled With the option enabled for Classifier Ribbon button as a gallery, then the smaller real
estate display of Classifier icons is applied to the Office Ribbon.

Standard mode w ith gallery DISABLED.

p230
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Standard mode w ith gallery ENABLED.

Classifier ribbon group location

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: This setting is not applicable to OWA Classifier, Classifier Mail Add-in, Notes Classifier or Mobile
Classifier.
This setting defines how Classifier inserts the Classifier label ribbon group. It supports four values:
Default Classifier w ill insert the Classifier ribbon bar group after the Clipboard group in most
application situations, but after the Respond group in an Outlook Read message window.
First Classifier w ill attempt to determine the first group in the ribbon bar and insert the
Classifier group before this (first) group.
Last Classifier w ill insert the Classifier ribbon bar group at the end of the current groups in the
ribbon bar.
Custom Tab Classifier w ill present the Classifier Label selection group as a Custom Tab as per the
example below

Classifier Labeller Custom Tab

p231
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Note: Other softw are and or site/user configuration of the ribbon bar may have an effect on where the
Classifier ribbon group actually appears.

p232
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Classifier ribbon layout mode

The Classifier ribbon layout options can be found under Labelling Configuration>Configuration
Settings>General Settings>Properties .

Classifier ribbon layout mode setting.

Classifier ribbon layout mode value options.

The Classifier ribbon layout options:

 Default mode - as it exists today.

 Standard mode - This mode will move the label options into a single drop down split button and
the other menu and options are rationalised into more meaningful groups. The label split button will
contain a gallery of single click elements as w ell as options w hich relate directly to the label.

 Minimal mode - This mode will show just one button on the ribbon. This split button contains all
the Classifier functionality in one place.

p233
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Content checking - case sensitive

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook, Word, Excel and PowerPoint
Disabled (default) - The matching performed is case insensitive (e.g. apples and APPLES are the
same).
Enabled Case sensitive matching is performed.

Content checking - include document properties

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook, Word and Excel
Disabled Document properties are skipped when performing content checks.
Enabled (default) - Document properties are also checked when performing content checks.

Custom format for 'Classifier Auditing'

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: Not applicable to Classifier Mail Add-in
The name of the Marking Format to be used for incorporating a Classifier label into a classifier log entry.
If this value is not set then the value associated with Custom Format for Summary Markings will be
used.

Custom format for ' Label Summary' custom document property

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Office Classifier.
The name of the Marking Format to be used for storing a Classifier label into the Classifier 'private'
document property bjDocumentSecurityLabel ( Document Properties (Office Classifier) ).
If this value is not set then the value associated with Custom Format for Summary Markings will be
used.

Custom format for Portion Marking

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: This feature only applies to Word, Excel, PowerPoint and Outlook.
This is the name of the Marking Format to be used when inserting a user selected Portion Mark in an
Office Classifier document (Word / Excel / Pow erPoint), or an Outlook email (Email Classifier).
This Marking Format should include delimiters around the value to ease user identification in the content
and to allow Email Classifier to find markings in some situations.
You may wish to configure the alternative "Portion Marking" Selector values for use in this Marking

p234
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Format as described in Properties (Selector Values) / Portion.

Further details of Portion Marking can be found in Portion Marking.
Note: This setting must be configured before the Portion Mark action will appear in the application
ribbon bar.
Note: Any Environment properties included in a Marking Format may not appear if that Marking Format
is assigned as the Custom Format for Portion Markings.

Custom format for Summary Markings

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: (Summary Marking default) If this setting is blank, Classifier generates a simple text Summary
Marking using space separated selector value names, with a background colour corresponding to the
first selector value in the current Classification (label) that has a colour associated. If no colour is found,
Classifier w ill use an in-built default (FFFFC8 )
This is the name of the Marking Format to be used in the following situations:

 When presenting the Summary Marking in the Information Bar in a document or message window.
The display of the Summary Marking is controlled by the Show Summary Marking in Task Pane for
Email Classifier or Office Classifier and Show Summary Marking in Title Bar (Word / Excel /
PowerPoint) settings.
Note: Under OWA Classifier, Classifier Mail Add-in, Notes Classifier and Mobile Classifier the
summary marking is always presented (there is no configuration setting).

 Label summary at the bottom of Label Selection Dialog

 The ‘label’ button at the top of the policy check dialog

 When adding a label to the title of office documents

 When presenting a list of Favourites

 When presenting a list of Portion Mark values

 When presenting a list of Recently used labels and Portion Marks

If this setting is blank Classifier generates a simple text Summary Marking from the selector values in
the label.
Note: Given the usage listed above, you may find it useful to keep the Summary Marking format as
simple as possible (e.g. omit the Label Configuration name).
Note: Any Environment properties, or Document properties included in a Marking Format may not
appear if that Marking Format is assigned as the Custom Format for Summary Markings.

Disable OK on Label dialog if mandatory values are missing

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: Only applicable to Microsoft Outlook, W ord, Excel, PowerPoint, Project and Visio.
The label selection dialog presented in various circumstances includes an OK button.
By default the OK button is enabled even if there are mandatory selectors missing and the rule is
configured as Prevent. This may lead to user confusion.
This setting can be used to ensure that if a rule is configured as Prevent the OK button is disabled until
the user has selected a valid classification (rules configured as Warn will continue to enable the OK
button).
Disabled (default) - the OK button is available to the user even if the rule is configured as Prevent.
Enabled - The OK button is disabled if the rule is configured as Prevent until the user selects

p235
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

a valid classification.

Display of Favourites button

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: The feature is not applicable to OWA Classifier, Classifier Mail Add-in, nor under Notes 8, nor
Mobile Classifier.
This setting controls the visibility of the Favourites feature in the Label ribbon bar.
Disabled (default) - the Favourites button does not appear.
Enabled - the Favourites button appears and the features are available to the user.

Display of Label Dialog launch button

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: The setting is not applicable to OWA Classifier, Classifier Mail Add-in, Notes Classifier or Mobile
Classifier.
In the following circumstances, users may require access to a full Label selection dialog:

 Use Single Click with pre-defined labels is Enabled for the policy.

 Not all selectors are accessible via the ribbon (e.g. Text entry etc.).
If either of the above applies, then either a Label dialog button or a dialog launcher glyph is presented
according to this setting.

Disabled (default) A Classifier Label button does not appear - the dialog launcher glyph w ill
appear instead.

Classifier Label Glyph

Enabled A Classifier Label dialog button appears rather than the glyph.

Classifier Label button shown

The single click label dialog changes to present a Label Dialog button.

p236
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Single Click - Label Dialog button

Indicate mandatory selector check failures

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note : The setting is not applicable to OWA Classifier, Classifier Mail Add-in, Notes Classifier, Mobile
Classifier or SharePoint Classifier.

This setting provides control over w hether the* appears alongside missing mandatory selectors in the
label dialog.

Disabled The * will not appear alongside missing mandatory selectors in the label dialog.

Enabled (default) The * will appear alongside missing mandatory selectors in the label dialog.

Label integrity check failure error message

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General
Settings
Note: This item is only significant in very specific circumstances configured under Classifier Support
guidance.

Masking of selectors against clearance

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: Not applicable to Classifier Mail Add-in, Notes Classifier or Mobile Classifier.
Disabled The selector values available for selection by the user will comprise all the Selector values
available in the policy.
Enabled The selector values available to the user comprise only those values marked available in
the policy for which the user is cleared (but see also the second bullet below).

 Initial value for a Masked Selector:

If Select value for Masked Selector is Disabled:
o If a default is defined and not masked, then select the default.

o If there is no default defined, then the selector value is blank.

If Select value for Masked Selector is Enabled:

p237
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

o If a default value is defined and not masked, then select the defined default.
o If there is no default defined, or the default is masked, then select the first available value.

 If the user opens a labelled draft message, or an labelled document containing a selector value for
w hich they are not cleared, then the Label UI includes that existing value in the available list.

Minimise space between selector value buttons on

ribbon
Admin: Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General
Settings
This setting provides additional control over the placement of buttons on the ribbon.
Note: Checkboxes in the ribbon still appear in columns.
Disabled - (default) Selector value buttons are placed at intervals determined by the longest item in a
column.
Enabled - Selector value buttons are placed next to each other on ribbon bar row so as to minimise
space between them.

Prompt for reason for ignoring policy warning

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: This setting has no effect for rules that have the Challenge Options configured (see Warn /
Prevent / Audit / Challenge options for Check rules ).
This setting allow s you to ask the user to enter a reason if they choose to ignore a policy warning
(choose Continue). If Enabled, Text displayed w hen prompting for a reason for ignoring policy
warnings must have an associated User Message configured, otherwise the setting will have no effect.
Disabled - (default) The user is NOT asked to supply a reason after choosing Continue from a policy
check dialog.
Enabled - If the user chooses Continue from a policy check dialog they are presented with a dialog
asking them to supply a reason as to w hy they are ignoring the policy check. The text
displayed in the dialog is configured via the Text displayed when prompting for a reason for
ignoring policy warnings setting.

Policy override reason

The text entered appears in the relevant audit log.

Remove Classifier Options from the Ribbon Bar

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: This setting has no effect under versions of Microsoft Office prior to 2010.

p238
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Note: Only applicable to Email and Office Classifier.

Enabled The Label Options menu no longer appears in the Ribbon Bar. The various actions can be
found as follows:
Clear, Default and Help are available if the user invokes the Label Selection dialog .
Note: In some circumstances the label dialog is not available (e.g. there are three or less
ribbon bar selectors) and the user will not have access to the Clear and Default actions.
Note: You can force Help to be displayed using the Show 'Help' button on ribbon bar.
About Classifier can be found in the Office Backstage View (Select the File tab and
click Classifier).

BackStage View
Disabled Classifier Label Options appear in their usual location on the Ribbon Bar.

Select value for Masked Selector

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: This setting is only relevant if Masking of Selectors against Clearance is Enabled.
Note: Only applicable to Email, OWA and Office Classifier.
This setting can affect the initial value displayed for a selector when Masking of Selectors against
Clearance is Enabled. It is configured by selecting Enabled or Disabled (default) from the drop down
menu available in the right hand cell.
Disabled (Default) See description of Masking of Selectors against Clearance for the effects.
Enabled See description of Masking of Selectors against Clearance for the effects.

Show 'Help' button on ribbon bar

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: Not applicable to OWA Classifier, Classifier Mail Add-in, Notes Classifier or Mobile Classifier.
This setting defines how access to any site defined Help is presented to the user:
Enabled - A Help button appears as a separate button above Options within the Classifier Ribbon Bar.
Disabled (default) - A Help action appears under the Options menu in the Classifier Ribbon Bar.

Show labeller 'Clear' button

p239
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: Not applicable to Classifier Mail Add-in or Mobile Classifier.
This setting defines w hether the Classifier Clear action appears under Classifier Label Options (outlook
only) and / or on the Label selection dialog.
Enabled (default) - The Clear label action is available.
Disabled - The Clear label action does not appear under Classifier Label Options.

Show labeller 'Default' button

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: Not applicable to Classifier Mail Add-in or Mobile Classifier.
This setting defines w hether the Classifier Default action appears under Classifier Label Options (outlook
only) and / or on the Label selection dialog.
Enabled (default) The Default action is available.
Disabled The Default action does not appear under Classifier Label Options.

Single Click best match

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: This setting is only relevant if the current policy has Use Single Click with pre-defined labels
enabled.
Note: Not applicable to Classifier Mail Add-in or Mobile Classifier.
Disabled (Default) The action is that a Single Click button is only highlighted if its associated label
value exactly matches the currently selected label value.
Enabled The button w ith the best match (if any) to the current label value will be highlighted. This
best match is determined using the algorithm described below .
The objectives of the best match algorithm are that if a button is highlighted then all values assigned to
that button must appear in the current label, AND the only values that appear in the current label that
are not assigned to the button should be informational only. If there is more than one exact / best
match then only one button will be highlighted.
The Best match algorithm operates as follows:
If the current label exactly matches the label configured for a button, then that button is
highlighted.
If there is no exact match, then look for a button that:
o Matches all clearance relevant selector values in the current label (Note that 'no value
selected' is significant in this situation
AND
o For information only selectors [ones that do not have Include this selector in clearance
and attachment checks checked see below Edit values (Selectors)].
 Either the button has no value assigned for the selector
 OR
 The selector value assigned to the button exactly matches the value selected in the
label
Example:
Consider a configuration containing three selectors - Classification, Department and Project where the
Project is informational only, and the single click buttons below are defined:

p240
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Public Public / Sales -/Sales/-

Public / Sales / Project X Internal / Board

Label value Single Click Button

highlighted
Public Public
Public / Project Y Public
External / Engineering No match
Public / Sales / Project Y Public / Sales
Internal / Engineering No match
Public / Board No match
- / Sales / Y - / Sales / -

[Note that in the last case 'no value selected for Classification' is significant].

Summary bar size changes are preserved

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General
Settings
Note: Only applicable to Office documents.
Disabled Each new instance of a Classifier application will show the Summary bar, and the user may
alter the size of the Summary bar for that instance only.
Enabled (Default) The user may alter the size of the Summary bar (or Close), and the setting is
remembered.

Summary Marking as black text on a white background

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: Not applicable to OWA Classifier, Classifier Mail Add-in, Notes Classifier or Mobile Classifier.
This setting operates in conjunction with the Custom format for Summary Markings and is set by
selecting Enabled or Disabled (default) from the drop dow n menu available in the right hand cell.
Disabled (Default) The Marking format and Selector value colour settings are used when presenting
a Summary Marking.
Enabled All Marking format and Selector value colour settings is ignored, and the Summary
Marking presented will appear as Black text on a White background.

Text displayed when a distribution list fails to expand

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: This setting is only relevant to Email and OWA Classifier.
Unusual conditions may arise where Classifier is unable to expand a Distribution Group when
performing Check clearance for attachments, recipients or originator rules.
Classifier w ill prompt the user proffering a Policy check dialog with a Back choice, and depending upon
the 'Warn' / 'Fail' setting a Continue choice.
The dialog includes text summarising the condition - by default this will be:
Failed to expand the distribution list. Please contact your administrator.

p241
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

This default text may be replaced by site defined text via this setting. The setting is configured via the
drop dow n list in the right hand column. Selecting the blank entry Disables the setting (the default text
is presented). Selecting a User Message from the list presented Enables the setting and will replace the
default text with the text defined by the User Message.

Text displayed when attachment check failed to complete

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: This setting is only relevant to Email, OWA and Notes Classifier.
Classifier may be unable to complete configured Check for the high-water mark rules (Check rules).
Classifier w ill then prompt the user proffering the Policy check dialog with a Back choice, and depending
upon the 'Warn' / 'Fail' setting a Continue choice.
The dialog includes text summarising the condition - by default this will be:
If the Rule is set to Prevent:
The following attachments have a higher label than that of this message
Click Remove to delete these attachments or Back to return to the message.

If the Rule is set to Warning:

The following attachments have a higher label than that of this message.

This default text may be replaced by site defined text via this setting.
The setting is configured via the drop dow n list in the right hand column. Selecting the blank entry
Disables the setting (the default text is presented). Selecting a User Message from the list presented
Enables the setting and will replace the default text with the text defined by the User Message.

Text displayed when Folder View labelling fails

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: Only applicable to Email and OWA Classifier.
This setting is only relevant if the Outlook or OWA setting Allow Folder View labelling is Enabled.
The setting defines the text to be displayed to the user if an attempt to set or modify a label on an item
in a folder fails (e.g. because the user does not have the necessary permissions to the item).

Text displayed when mandatory label is absent

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: Not applicable to Classifier Mail Add-in.
This setting is only applicable if Show label dialog when mandatory label is Enabled, and a selector is
designated as mandatory by an applicable check Mandatory Selectors rule is configured AND the Warn/
Prevent in the rule is set to Prevent .
This setting defines the text that appears at the top of the body of the dialog shown below.
The dialog appears if the user attempts to send a message with one or more selectors designated as
mandatory in an applicable rule blank.

p242
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Mandatory Label required dialog

The setting is configured via the drop dow n list in the right hand column. Selecting the blank entry
Disables the setting (the default text is presented). Selecting a User Message from the list presented
Enables the setting and will replace the default text with the text defined by the User Message.

Text displayed when originator check failed to complete

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Email and OW A Classifier.
Classifier may be unable to complete configured Check clearance for originator rules. Classifier will then
prompt the user proffering Policy check dialog with a Back choice, and depending upon the 'Warn' /
'Fail' setting a Continue choice.
The dialog includes text summarising the condition - by default this will be:
An error occurred while determining whether you are cleared to send a message with the
selected label.
Please contact your administrator

This default text may be replaced by site defined text via this setting.
The setting is configured via the drop dow n list in the right hand column. Selecting the blank entry
Disables the setting (the default text is presented). Selecting a User Message from the list presented
Enables the setting and will replace the default text with the text defined by the User Message.

Text displayed when prompting for a reason for ignoring policy

warnings

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: Not applicable to Classifier Mail Add-in.
This setting allow s you to configure the text displayed (by associating a User Message) when a user is
prompted to enter a reason for ignoring policy warnings.
The setting is only relevant of Prompt for reason for ignoring policy warning is Enabled.

Text displayed when recipient check failed to complete

p243
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Email, OWA, Notes and Mobile Classifier.
Classifier may be unable to complete configured Check clearance for recipients rules (Check rules).
Classifier w ill then prompt the user proffering Policy check dialog with a Back choice, and depending
upon the 'Warn' / 'Fail' setting a Continue choice.
The dialog includes text summarising the condition - by default this will be:
An error occurred w hile clearance checking the recipients.
Please contact your administrator

This default text may be replaced by site defined text via this setting.
The setting is configured via the drop dow n list in the right hand column. Selecting the blank entry
Disables the setting (the default text is presented). Selecting a User Message from the list presented
Enables the setting and will replace the default text with the text defined by the User Message.

Text displayed when RMS protection failed to complete

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: This setting is only relevant to Email Classifier and Office Classifier (but excluding Project and
Visio).
Classifier may be unable to complete configured Apply this RMS policy rules (Apply rules). Classifier will
then prompt the user proffering Policy check dialog with a Back choice.
The dialog includes text summarising the condition - by default this will be:
Failed to apply RMS protection
This default text may be replaced by site defined text via this setting.
The setting is configured via the drop dow n list in the right hand column. Selecting the blank entry
Disables the setting (the default text is presented). Selecting a User Message from the list presented
Enables the setting and will replace the default text with the text defined by the User Message.

Text displayed when S/MIME application failed to complete

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: This setting is only relevant to Email and OWA Classifier.
Classifier may be unable to complete configured Apply S/MIME security rules (Apply rules). Classifier will
then prompt the user proffering Policy check dialog with a Back choice.
The dialog includes text summarising the condition - by default this will be:
Failed to apply S/MIME. Ensure Email Security is configured correctly in Outlook
This default text may be replaced by site defined text via this setting.
The setting is configured via the drop dow n list in the right hand column. Selecting the blank entry
Disables the setting (the default text is presented). Selecting a User Message from the list presented
Enables the setting and will replace the default text with the text defined by the User Message.

Text to display for notifying of policy checks performed

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: Not applicable to Classifier Mail Add-in.

p244
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Classifier includes a default text string that appears in the user dialog presented if a Policy check ( Check
rules) is configured and fails (e.g. One or more recipients of a message is not cleared for the current
label). An example of the dialog is shown below.
The text in the body of the dialog is controlled by the relevant application Rule.
The text that appears at the top of the dialog may be replaced via this setting (applicable to all
Classifier applications).

Example Policy Check dialog

The setting is configured via the drop dow n list in the right hand column. Selecting the blank entry
Disables the setting (the default text is presented). Selecting a User Message from the list presented
Enables the setting and will replace the default text with the text defined by the User Message.

Text to display for resolution of policy issues

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: Not applicable to Classifier Mail Add-in.
This setting can be used to modify the end user experience when Policy Check issues are resolved via
the Policy check dialog.
The default operation if this setting is disabled (blank) is summarised as follows:

 The softw are performs any configured policy checks.

 If any check fails a dialog is presented including Remove / Back / and possibly Continue.

 If the Remove action is available and the user chooses Remove, and the operation resolves all
issues, the underlying operation (e.g. Send / Save) does not require any further user involvement.
This setting defined the User Message shown in the dialog presented after successful resolution (e.g.
Remove) of Policy Check issues. The setting is configured via the drop down list in the right hand
column. Selecting the blank entry Disables the setting. Selecting a User Message from the list
presented Enables the setting.
The example dialog below shows the User Message Title appearing as a heading (Resolved policy issues
(SETTINGS)), and the message Text underneath (Policy resolution has completed).

p245
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Policy issue resolution confirmation

Text to display if attachment markings are inconsistent

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: This setting is only applicable to Email, OWA and Notes Classifier, and only if you have enabled
the relevant Ensure attachment markings are consistent setting.
This setting allow s you to configure the text presented to the user if an attachment is detected with an
inconsistent marking. The check performed is as described in Ensure attachment markings are
consistent.

Text to display if no marking is available

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: Not applicable to Classifier Mail Add-in.
The text defined here (applicable to all Classifier applications) w ill appear if there is no current label
value in:

 The information bar at the bottom of a document window or an email message window if the Show
Summary Marking in task pane setting is Enabled.

 The Window title for Word, Excel, and Pow erPoint (not 2010/2013) subject to Show Summary
Marking in Title Bar the setting is Enabled.
If there is no label defined (and this is valid in the policy), then any Markings using Message Formats
(e.g. FLOT) will just include blank space for each element referenced in the Format.
Note: This may be referred to as the "No Label text" and may be displayed if the document is
'unlabelled' or if the document contains Classifier label information, but with no values selected (empty
label).

p246
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

URL for your labelling help site

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
Note: Not applicable to Classifier Mail Add-in or Mobile Classifier.
You may use this setting (applicable to all Classifier applications) to define a link to a location that will
display label related help information to the user.
The link supplied must be a correctly formed absolute URL. Examples:

 http://ww w .xyz.com is a well formed absolute URL, ww w.xyz.com is not.

It needs a scheme protocol specifier (http:// in this case) to be a well formed absolute URL.

 file://products/MS/MSDN%20CD-KEYs.txt is a well formed absolute URL, file://products/MS/MSDN

CD-KEYs.txt is not.
It needs proper encoding of special characters (such as the space) to be a well formed absolute
URL.
Please also note that at present Classifier only supports http://, https:// and file:// schemes for the
URLs used in Classifier.
The user can access to this site via the Link to site defined help action.
Note: Whilst OWA Classifier supports the Help links defined in a Classifier Configuration, the nature of
OWA access may mean that a defined link is not accessible due to external access controls (e.g.
additional authentication requirements).

Use Alternate Data Stream (ADS) for Visio files

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General

Settings
The Visio file plug-in used by Classifier applications requires the Visio application to be installed and
runs an instance of Visio w hen it is invoked. This is generally not sensible in 'File Classifier / Classifier
API / Power Classifier for Files' contexts, and so by default these applications do not process Visio files.
This setting can be used to direct File Classifier and Classifier API to maintain labels for Visio files in the
Alternate Data Stream.
Disabled (Default) The Alternate Data Stream (ADS) w ill not be used to hold a label value for Visio
files.
Enabled The Alternate Data Stream (ADS) will be used to hold a label value for Visio files.
Note: This setting takes precedence over the File Classifier Application Use Alternate Data Stream
(ADS) marking setting. Pow er Classifier for Files does not use this setting, but version 3.10 supports an
equivalent parameter instead. Any label set using this ADS option will NOT be detected by the Classifier
enabled Visio and vice-versa.

User defined RMS protection

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / General
Settings
This setting is used to control w hether the user is presented with an Apply Ad Hoc protection option (or
just the Apply Template option) when a Check for RMS protection rule fires.

Disabled (Default) Only the Apply Template option is presented..

Enabled Both the Apply Template and Apply Ad Hoc protection options are presented.

p247
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Label Locations

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Label

Locations
Label Locations (Marking locations) allow s you to tell Classifier the (document and email/webmail)
properties that may contain label values that have not been established by Classifier (e.g. messages
arriving from another organisation), and to assign relative precedence to the different label locations. If
Classifier recognises its own Classifier Label property it always uses this as the label value for the
document or email.
Note: You do not have to configure any Label Locations, Classifier will just treat objects that have not
been labelled by Classifier as ‘unlabelled’.
Email and Document locations are managed by selecting Configuration Settings > Label Locations
and clicking Properties:

Label Locations
You can Add, Edit and Remove Label Locations by selecting the appropriate Add, Edit or Remove
button.
Clicking Add will insert a new row containing default settings which you can then Edit, which will
present a dialog allowing you to change the configured settings.

 For email locations the dialog is:

p248
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

E-mail Label Location settings

The Parameter field is only relevant to X-Header locations and is the name of the X-Header to
be checked.

 For document locations the dialog is:

Document Label Location settings

Property Setting contains either the user supplied Custom Document Property name, or the
Document Property selected from the drop dow n list (Author, Subject, Title, etc.
You must indicate the Marking Format to be used to try to parse the location.
Further details of the set of locations supported are described in:

 Supported mail label locations

 Supported document label locations
Further information on the parsing method can be found in Recognising and Parsing Label Markings

p249
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Supported document label locations

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Label

Locations
The following locations may be added and ordered:
Custom Document Property You may define multiple Custom Document Property entries each with
its own property name supplied in the Parameter field. If a custom
document property with that name is found its value will be assessed to
see whether a Label can be determined. Note that this feature is not
supported by Visio.
Document Property You may define multiple Document Property entries each with its own
property name supplied in the Parameter field (e.g. keywords). If a
document property with that name is found its value will be assessed to
see w hether a Label can be determined. A set of properties is available,
but not all properties are propagated (e.g. Comments is not saved in PDF
files.
Locations are searched in the order defined (use Up / Down to control the order) and the first configured
location found to contain a recognisable value is used to form the document label value.
A Marking Format must be supplied to be used to interpret any value found.
Note: Not all locations presented are supported by all applications. Check the product Release Note for
further information (e.g. AUTOCAD Classifier).

Supported mail label locations

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Label

Locations
Note: Classifier Mail Add-in 2013 only supports markings in Subject.
The following locations may be added and ordered:
First Line Of Text Classifier w ill assess the First line of text (FLOT) in the message body to see
w hether it contains a Label value. The Parameter field is not applicable.
Last Line Of Text Classifier w ill assess the Last line of text (LLOT) in the message body to see
w hether it contains a Label value. The Parameter field is not applicable.
Subject Classifier w ill assess the Subject (prefix and suffix) of the message to see
w hether it contains a Label value. The Parameter field is not applicable.
X-Header You may define multiple X-Header entries each having its own property name
(supplied as the Parameter value - i.e. your header location). If an SMTP header
with that name is found its value will be assessed to see whether a Label can be
determined.
Locations are searched in the order defined (use Up / Down to control the order) and the first configured
location found to contain a recognisable value is used to form the email/webmail message label value.
A Marking Format must be supplied to be used to interpret any value found.

Recognising and Parsing Label Markings

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Configuration Settings / Label

Locations
Note: Parsing of Markings in Label Locations can be problematic if some elements are optional, or if the
marking contains string selector values (date or text selectors). Setting Marking Selector options may
resolve matters.
Marking Recognition
Classifier needs to recognise and parse Markings in the following circumstances:

p250
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 When a message or document is opened and there is no Classifier Label property (e.g. Classifier will
check any Label Locations defined to see whether there is a Marking present which can be used to
derive a Label Value.

 When replying / forwarding messages Classifier may need to:

o Recognise and remove any FLOT or LLOT on the original email and replace it w ith markings
matching the current label.
o Recognise and remove any Subject Prefix or Suffix on the original email and replace it by a
marking that matches the current label.
To facilitate marking recognition, Marking formats used for parsing must include clear unique delimiters
as part of the Marking Format definition (e.g. [marking]). In addition, string based selectors (Text entry,
Date picker and Date offset) need to have Prefix and Suffix defined (see Marking Selector options ).
Marking Parsing
Classifier takes a string that it believes contains a Marking (determined using Marking Recognition
above) and uses the designated Label Location Marking Format (working left to right) to determine a set
of Label values (from the available Selectors) that produces that Marking.
The parsing essentially breaks the Marking into chunks that are either text or a label element, and for
label elements tries to determine the Selector value. The process allows for label elements included in
the marking format that have no value, and it also allows for the use of Alternate Selector label values.
If the Marking contains an alternative value then the appropriate primary Selector value is adopted by
the object label. This mechanism can be used to provide a 'mapping' between external and internal
values. For example:
Consider an organisation XYZ that internally has a Classification value of "Confidential", but receives
messages from a collaborative organisation (ABC) that may store "Sensitive" in a X-Header (e.g. X-ABC-
Classification). It wishes to map Sensitive to Confidential internally. So:

 Define the Classification value Confidential to have an alternate value of Sensitive.

 Define a Marking Format "ABC Sensitivity" that just contains the Classification label element but
with the Alternate value selected.

 Define an X-Header Label Location X-ABC-Classification and associate the ABC Sensitivity
Marking Format.

p251
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Combined Label Locations

Admin : Labelling Configurations ? {configuration}Configuration Settings / Combined Label Locations

The Label Locations feature allow s you to tell Classifier the (document and email/webmail) properties
that may contain label values that have not been established by Classifier (e.g. messages arriving from
another organisation). If Classifier can derive a label from a label location it will assume that label for
the document/message. Once Classifier has derived a label from a label location via the Label Locations
feature, it doesn’t process any remaining Label Locations.
In some circumstances, label values from external sources may be contained in multiple properties.
Combined Label Locations allow s values found in multiple locations into a derived label.
Multiple ‘combined label locations’ can be created. Each ‘combined label location’ can be assigned a
Name and Description to describe its purpose. Within each ‘combined label location’ you define the
locations as per the ‘Label Locations’ feature.
For non-Classifier labelled content, Classifier w ill start with the first ‘Combined Label Location’ and try
and create a label using the configured locations. If a label can’t be derived, Classifier will then move
onto the next ‘Combined Label Location’, and so on. If a label can’t be derived from any ‘Combined
Label Location’, Classifier w ill process the standard Label Locations to see if it can derive a label.

p252
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

POLICIES
Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies
The Label Configuration settings are made available to end-users through Classifier Policies. Each Policy
defines:

 Its Name and Description.

 The Policy Label UI presented (Selectors and Values available and how they appear to users of that
Policy), and presentation control through User Interface Definition.

 The Maximum number of labels to show (Recently used), Use Assisted Labelling and Use Single Click
w ith pre-defined labels features are available.

 The Policy Rules governing the application of Markings to Object Locations and the invocation of
“other” actions (e.g. applying RMS and S/MIME security).
One Classifier Policy can be used as the basis for a new policy through a ‘ Copy’ function.
Once you have defined a Policy it is published (as part of the configuration) to File store or to AD and
deployed to users using locally defined or group policy mechanisms. One Classifier Policy may be
associated w ith multiple Group Policies.
There must alw ays be at least one Policy defined. If your requirements are straightforward one Policy
may be sufficient with all users having the same capabilities. Additional Policies may be required if for
example, you want to limit the ability of some users to apply certain label Selectors / Values.
Access to all Policy Administration is through the Policies node under the Label Configuration. Selecting
this node show s a list of the current policies below the Policies node, and in the Policies summary
display to the right.
Policy administration actions appear under the following headings:

 Actions that operate on the Policy Object described in Policy Management.

 Actions that configure the Policy UI settings (Selectors and Selector Values) described in Policy Label
UI.

 Actions to define condition based Suggested Classifications .

 Actions to define Default Label (Policies) that can then be referenced for use in SharePoint Classifier
and Intelligent Default features.

 Actions that configure the Policy Rules described in Policy Rules Management.

 Details of all the rules supported is provided in Rules supported. Rules fall into three general types
as described in the subordinate topics - Add rules, Apply rules and Check rules.

Policy Management
Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies
This section describes the actions that can be performed when the Policies list window is visible.

The actions supported are:

 Add a new policy

 Properties (Policy)
 Settings
 Copy (Policy)
 Delete (Policy)
 Label Preview

p253
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

The effects of a policy can be tested using Publish Test Configuration in conjunction with Test Mode
Administration.

Policy Management

Selecting a specific policy will present various tabs in the central frame. Enabling an option (e.g. Use
Assisted Labelling) may add an extra tab (e.g. Connect Selectors) to the central frame.

The contents of the central frame change depending upon the tab selected. The example below shows
the display with Set Selectors tab selected.

Set Selectors display

p254
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

The detailed settings in a Policy are available w hen an individual policy is selected in the policy tree,
along with the relevant tab and are described in:

 Policy Label UI

 Suggested Classifications

 Default Label (Policies)

 Rules Management

p255
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Add a New Policy

The Add a New Policy section describes how to add a new policy.
Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies  Add a new policy

Adding a new policy.

To add a new policy:

1. Under Labelling Configuration>(Company Name)>Policies , select Policies.

2. From the Actions area, select Add a new policy. This will present a Add Policy dialog window.
3. See the Properties (Policy) for a description of the various fields or click on the links below .

 Policy Name and Description

 Maximum Number of Labels to Show

 User Assisted Labelling

 Use Decision Tree

p256
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 User Selectable Default Classification

 Use Intelligent Default Label

 Use Single Click With Predefined Labels

 Show Selector Captions on the Ribbon Bar

 Where Possible Wrap Buttons After

 User Interface Definition

 Default Language

4. Select OK and the new ly created Policy will appear in the Policies summary list. Once you have
created a Policy it appears under the Polices node in the left hand pane.
5. Selecting a Policy w ill change the adjacent pane to provide access to the underlying configuration.
The pane show s a summary of the Rules or Selector information, although when a new policy as
added the display w ill be empty (No Selectors and no Rules defined).
6. Configuration of the Selectors is described in Policy Label UI and Rules configuration is described in
Rules Management.

New Policy Settings

Properties (Policy)

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies  {policy}  Properties

Note the Maximum number of labels is dependent on the Display of Favourites button being Enabled.
This action presents the same dialog as Add a New Policy.
Note: The individual properties Policy Name and Description , User Interface Definition ,
Maximum Number of Labels and Use Single Click with Predefined Labels can be changed at any
time.

Note: The Use Assisted Labelling setting can never be unset on a policy once it has been set.

p257
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Policy Properties

To view the new policy:

1. In the Classifier Administrator go to Classifier Administration>Labelling

Configuration>(Company Name)>Policies>(Relevant Policy Name>Properties .
Properties lists the current (available) settings.
2. Modify the following settings (as required):

 Policy Name and Description

 Maximum Number of Labels to Show
 Use Decision Tree
 User Assisted Labelling
 User Selectable Default Classification
 Use Intelligent Default Label
 Use Single Click With Predefined Labels
 Show Selector Captions on the Ribbon Bar
 Where Possible Wrap Buttons After

p258
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 User Interface Definition

 Default Language

If you set Use Single Click with pre-defined labels, an extra Tab appears in the central frame that gives
access to the Single Click configuration features (example below ). Similarly if you set Use Assisted
labelling, an extra tab (Connect Selectors) is added.

Policy with Single Click

p259
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Policy Name and Description

Note: The Policy name must be unique in the Configuration.

Note: Policy names must only contain characters that are permitted in file paths except *, ?, : and . .

 Policy Name - (Only for the Administrator). The policies are not visible to end-users.

 Description - (Optional) Only for the Administrator. The description is not visible to end-users.

Maximum Number of Labels to Show

The Maximum number of labels to show controls the Recently used Labels feature - see also Display of
Favourites button).

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies  {policy}  Properties

Note: The feature is unavailable unless the Display of Favourites button is also Enabled, as this is
how Recently used labels are accessed.

This setting (on the Policy properties dialog) determines the number of label values remembered for
each of "Recently used Labels" and "Recently used Portion Marks ".

 If the Maximum number of labels to show is zero , then the Recently used Labels and Portion
Marks features are effectively D isabled. The user is never presented with the " Recent" lists.

 If the Maximum number of labels to show is > zero , then the Classifier maintains a list of the
most recently used labels and a list of the most recently used Portion Marks. The entry at the top of
a list is the most Recently Used Labels or Portion Mark . The lists are maintained in the Current
User section of the Registry.

Note: Even if a recently used Portion Mark list is maintained, it is available to the user if Portion
Marking is Enabled in the application (see Portion Marking).

See Recently Used Labels and Portion Marks for a description of when and how these lists appear to the
user.

Use Assisted Labelling

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies  {policy}  Properties

Note: The Use Assisted Labelling setting can never be unset on a policy once it has been set.

Note: The user interface for Assisted Labelling operates differently between Office and OWA
environments.

If the setting on the Policy properties dialog is unset, label selection is standard. The user sees

p260
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

individual drop-dow n lists for each selector.

If the setting is set then label selection operates as described in Assisted Labelling Operation .

Once you set Use Assisted Labelling for a policy you cannot unset it. The following warning is
presented.

Use Assisted Labelling warning.

To acknowledge the warning:

1. Click OK.
2. Select Cancel (on the Policy properties dialog) and take a copy or click OK to proceed.
3. Once you have set Use Assisted Labelling, an additional tab Connect Selectors appears when that
policy is selected, so that Assisted Labelling selectors can be configured.

p261
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Use Decision Tree

An configurable option has been added to the existing Policy Properties to allow Dec ision Tree
functionality to be enabled if required. The new setting is desc ribed in Enable Decision Tree
Functionality. Selecting this option will add an extra tab to the associated policy editor and
make it available to the c lient.

The Decision Tree Tab.

p262
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

User Selectable Default Classification

If you wish users to be able to choose their own default label rather than using the policy defined
default, then the User Selectable Default Classification can be Enabled.

If Enabled, a Set current label as default option appears in the Favourites menu assuming the
Display of Favourites button is also Enabled.

p263
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Use Intelligent Default Label

To provide flexibility over the default label functionality, the Use Intelligent Default Label feature can
be Enabled.

If Enabled, the default label that is applicable to a new document or email is determined by combining
any existing configured Default Label with entries in the Default Label (Policies) section that have
matching conditions attached to them.

Note: If the ‘User Selectable Default Classification ’ feature is enabled and a user has defined their own
default label, then the ‘User Selectable Default ’ will be used rather than any derived ‘Intelligent Default’

Using the Intelligent Default feature negates the need to duplicate policies where the only difference
betw een policies is the default label.

When deriving an Intelligent Default, a Classifier product will take the configured default label as the
starting point for the Intelligent Default. It w ill then determine which Default Labels have a matching
condition attached to them. These w ill be processed in turn, starting with the lowest priority, and the
values for each applied to the Intelligent Default label.

Note: As the matching Default Labels are processed, any existing values that are currently in the
Intelligent Default w ill be replaced even if the existing value dominates the value from the matching
Default Label

By defining appropriate conditions on labels in the Default Label section, you can configure different
default labels as required for your organisation. For example, you may wish to have a different
default label when a user in a ‘Finance’ group creates a new Excel w orkbook as opposed to when a
user in a ‘Marketing’ group creates a new PowerPoint presentation.

Use Single Click With Predefined Labels

The Use Single Click WIth Predefined Labels section will show you how to create a predefined
label.

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies  {policy}  Properties

Note: This setting (on the Policy properties dialog) must be Enabled on a policy for the Single Click
configuration tab to be shown.

Note: Single Click and Assisted Labelling can be used together, but you will not be able to configure
Single Click until you have added at least one selector under the Connect Selectors Tab.

Note: Changing a policy name that has been deployed invalidates any instances of that name set
through Group Policy configuration. Changing the description will have no side effects.

If you set Use Single Click with pre-defined labels, an extra Tab appears in the central frame that gives
access to the Single Click configuration features (example below ). Similarly if you set Use Assisted
labelling, an extra tab (Connect Selectors) is added.

p264
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

The standard label selection interface presents the available Selector values as 1 to 3 lists.
You can choose to pre-configure up to 12 label values that then appear as individual buttons in the
Ribbon Bar. The user still has the ability to select individual selector values via the Classifier Label
dialog box launcher arrow.

This topic describes configuration of the feature, additional information on the user experience can be
found in Single Click operation.

The initial state (with Single Click Enabled on the policy but un-configured) appears as:

Single Click buttons that a user can configure.

p265
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Single Click initial state.

To use single click with predefined labels:

1. In the Classifier Administrator go to Classifier Administration>Labelling

Configuration>(Configuration Name)>Policies>(Relevant Policy Name>Properties .
2. In the Properties window, select the Use Single Click with Predefined Labels checkbox.
Note: The matrix of single click buttons displayed is affected by a windows re-size operation, so short
Captions are advisable.
3. To configure the buttons for Single Click, select the relevant Policy and select the Single Click tab.
4. In the single click section, select Edit pre-defined labels. which will display the dialog which allows
you to configure each button.
5. In the grid, select a button whose properties will be configured or edited.

The assigned button that will be displayed on the client.

Note: You can configure any of the buttons. Configured buttons do not have to be adjacent and use
Publish Test Configuration to view the user effects.

p266
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

6. If you wish the button to be visible select the Show this button on the client checkbox. This will
make the other settings become available. If you uncheck Show this button on the client , any
settings for the button w ill be remembered, but the button is not shown to the user.
7. To choose the label value to be assigned to this button, click on the Label button. This will present
a dialog allowing you to choose the label value.
8. Select the the label value that w ill appear on the label.

Setting the predefined labels.

 Sensitivity - UNMARKED, SENSITIVE, COMMERCIAL-IN-CONFIDENCE.

 Distribution - INTERNAL, EXTERNAL.

 Project - In the drop dow n menu, select the project.

9. Click OK. To clear all the values for the button, click Clear. This will clear all values for the selected
button except for Show this button on the client .
10. In the drop down box, select the language. In Global Settings you can enter the text for each
language you have choosen.
11. Enter the caption text that w ill appear on the button. For example, SEN/INT/SALES.
12. Enter the text for the tooltip on the button.
13. Set the required button display options:

 Caption only - If this option is selected, only the configured caption is displayed.

 Show colour - If this option is selected, it w ill display a colour block. By default the colour is taken
from the Selector value configuration setting. To select a specific colour, in the drop down menu,
select the preferred colour block. A solid colour block (16*16) w ill appear in front of the caption.

 Show image - If this option is selected, the selected image appears in front of the caption. An
image may be selected in the drop dow n menu provided which will display all the configured images
that have been placed in the Image Library. The image will be scaled to fit w ithin the 16*16 space.

p267
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

14. If you select Clear, it will clear all the values for the selected button except for Show this button
on the client.
15. Click OK.

The result of adding a Single Click predefined label. The buttons colour and detail is displayed.

Show Selector Captions on the Ribbon Bar

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies  {policy}  Properties

Note: This setting is not applicable to Notes, Mail Add-in nor Mobile Classifier.

This setting controls the visibility of Selector captions in the ribbon bar:

 Enabled - (Default) Captions will appear.

 Disabled - Captions will not appear.

In the examples below Display selector values as buttons (Single selection list options ) is Enabled
for the first selector:

Classifier Ribbon Bar with captions

p268
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Classifier Ribbon Bar - no captions

Where Possible Wrap Buttons After

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies  {policy}  Properties
The Where Possible Wrap Buttons After allows you to control how Single selection list selectors are
presented if the Display selector values as buttons (Single selection list options ) is Enabled.

This value is only relevant if you have Enabled the Display selector values as buttons for one or
more Single selection list selectors or for a multi-selection list selector as described in Single selection
list options / Multiple selection list options .

The Classifier ribbon bar can accommodate a maximum of three rows of selector information. This
setting can be used to control how Classifier wraps these buttons within the Classifier Ribbon Bar.

If this value is not set (default), then Classifier will display the defined buttons for a selector on a single
row.
Each selector shown in the Ribbon Bar will start on a new row regardless of whether Display selector
values as buttons is Enabled or Disabled.
If there are more than three row s in total to appear in the Ribbon Bar (after wrapping), Classifier
reverts to the default (single row per selector) and the Classifier label

button is show n providing access to the Label selection dialog.

Standard Ribbon Bar re-sizing actions apply, so it is a site responsibility to check that the settings
configured are appropriate for the number of selectors and values to be displayed.

Examples of the effects of this can be found under Ribbon Bar examples, Label Selection dialog , Assisted
Labelling Operation and Tabs.

p269
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

User Interface Definition

The User Interface Definition allow s you to choose the user interface definition you wish to use from
those configured in the User Interface Library. The Default UI definition is always available.

p270
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Default Language
You can select the default languiage for the user interface. This allows you to choose the Policy Default
Language to be used by the algorithm for finding the language to display to find the correct (language
related) value to present to a user. See Properties (Classifier Administration .

Note: Only visible if Allow multiple languages is enabled.

The Image Library where you can add languages to the user interface.

To add multiple languages:

1. In the Classifier Administration, select Image Library.

2. Either click on Languages within the Global Settings Table or Properties. A dialog box will
appear.

Adding languages w ithin Global Settings. There is also an option to add different versions of languages.

3. To add a language click on the Add button. To remove a language, click on the Delete button.
These languages will appear in the follow ing drop down menu.

p271
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

The list where the different languages are contained.

p272
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Settings
The Policy User Interface Settings and the Suggested Classification Settings.

Policy User Interface Settings.

p273
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Suggested Classification Settings.

p274
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Policy User Interface Settings

The various setting options for the Policy User Interface. To see this area in the Classifier
Administrator go to Labelling Configuration>(Configuration Name)>Policies>(Policy
Name>Settings.

Note: The Style to Apply and Image To Apply options apply to the Label dialog, Policy Check dialog,
Challenge dialog, Organise Favourites dialog and Decision Tree dialog.

Note: The Caption Placement and Tab Placement only apply to the main Label dialog.

 Base Colour

 Caption Placement

 Custom Image

 Image to Apply

 Show Top Three Favourites

 Style to Apply

 Tab Placement

 Title Colour

p275
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Base Colour
The custom colour for the header section of the user interface when using the Custom Theme.

Note: The Base colour and Title colour only applies in the Custom Theme.

Selecting the Base Colour in the Classifier Administrator Policy Settings.

To select the base colour:

1. Open the Classifier Administrator and go to Labelling Configuration>(Configuration Name)

>Policies>(Policy Name>Settings>Policy User Interface Settings>Base Colour.
2. In the Policy User Interface Settings, Base Colour drop-dow n menu select a colour. Click OK.
3. Run the label dialog from w ithin an office application to see the selected base colour.

The Base Colour on the header item in Microsoft Word.

p276
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Caption Placement
Places a caption of the selector on the left (default) or at the top.

Custom Mode with captions set to the

left.

Microsoft Office Theme with custom image and captions at the top.

To select the placement of a caption:

1. Open the Classifier Administrator and go to Labelling Configuration>(Configuration Name)

>Policies>(Policy Name>Settings>Policy User Interface Settings>Caption Placement.
2. In the Policy User Interface Settings, Captions Placement drop-down menu select either:

 Top - Place caption at the top.

 Left - Place caption to the left.

3. Click OK.
4. Check the Office Application to see the applied caption placement.

p277
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Custom Image
A user can select an image from the Image Library to display on the UI

Note: This does not apply when using the Classifier Theme.

Image Library and adding a new image.

To select a custom image:

1. Open the Classifier Administrator and go to Labelling Configuration>(Configuration Name)

>Policies>(Policy Name)>Settings>Policy User Interface Settings>Custom Image.
2. The Custom Image replaces the default image. Select this image from the Image Library.
3. Go to the Image Library and click on Add a new image. A dialiog box will appear. Click Browse to
look for a new image, add a description (optional) and click OK.
4. Go back to Policies>All>Settings>Policy User Interface Settings>Custom Image and select
the image that was added.

Custom image and Image to apply.

5. Check that Image to Apply is set to Custom Image.
6. Click OK The custom image is rendered to a small size.
7. Open up an Office Application to see the image.

p278
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Label Dialog with

custom image.

p279
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Image to Apply
This controls what image is displayed in the dialog. There are 3 different types of selections, Default
Image, Custom Image or No Image.

Adding a Custom Image the the Image Library.

Label dialog shown with the

custom image

Label dialog shown with the default Image.

Label dialog shown with the no image

p280
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

To select an image:

1. Open the Classifier Administrator and go to Labelling Configuration>(Configuration Name)

>Policies>(Policy Name)>Settings>Policy User Interface Settings>Image To Apply.
2. Select one of the follow ing:

 Default Image (Default) - The default Classifier Image.

 No Image - Only the dialog description text is displayed.

 Custom Image - Replaces the default image w ith a custom image which is selected from the
Image Library.
3. Click OK
4. Open up an Office Application to see the image.

There are also options that can be set in outlook to make the theme Colorful, Dark Grey, Black or White.

p281
Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

p282
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Show Top Three Favourites

This option allows the user to add their top three favourites as selectable buttons on the ribbon.

Enabling the Show top three favourites in the Classifier Administrator Policy Settings.

To add a current label to your favourites list:

1. Open the Classifier Administrator and go to Labelling Configuration>(Configuration Name)

>Policies>(Policy Name)>Settings>Policy User Interface Settings>Show Top Three
Favourites.
2. Go to Show top three favourites and select Enabled. Click OK.
3. Start an Office Application like Microsoft W ord and to add one or more labels as favourite. Use the
Organise Favourites feature to put your favourites in order. The top three favourites from your
favourites list is displayed as buttons on the ribbon.

p283
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

This screenshot shows how you add a current label to your favourites and a list of the top three
favourites.

p284
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Style to Apply
The Style to Apply setting allow s a user to select a theme for an Office Application. A user can select
from a Microsoft Office Theme, a Classifier Theme or a Custom Theme.

Style to apply selections.

To apply the style:

1. Open the Classifier Administrator and go to Labelling Configuration>(Configuration Name)
>Policies>(Policy Name)>Settings>Policy User Interface Settings>Style to Apply.
2. In the style to apply dropdown menu, select one of the following:

 Original Classifier UI (Default) - Original Classifier user interface.

 Microsoft Office Theme - This will show a new style user interface with the colour scheme based
on the active Office Theme from active Office application. This only applies w hen using Microsoft
Office Applications.

 Custom Theme - The user decides what colour to use for the header and description text.

3. Click OK.
4. Open up an Office application to check to see if the style was applied successfully.

p285
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

The Microsoft Office Theme in Microsoft Outlook.

The Microsoft Office Theme in Microsoft Excel.

p286
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Tab Placement
A user can select to place a tab on the top or on the left. It is the top or left location of the tabs on tab
pages.

Tab Placement options in the Classifier Administrator Policy User Interface Settings.

To select a tab placement:

1. Open the Classifier Administrator and go to Labelling Configuration>(Configuration Name)

>Policies>(Policy Name)>Settings>Policy User Interface Settings>Tab Placement.
2. In the style to apply drop-down menu, select one of the following:

 Top (Default) - Places the tabs on the top.

 Left - Places the tabs on the left side.

3. Click OK.

p287
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

The tabs placed on the left (default).

The tabs placed on the top.

p288
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Title Colour
The custom colour for the description text in the header section of the user interface when using the
Custom Theme. A user can select a text colour for the title.

Setting the title colour for the title in the Classifier Administration Policy User Interface Settings.

To set the title colour:

1. Open the Classifier Administrator and go to Labelling Configuration>(Configuration Name)

>Policies>(Policy Name)>Settings>Policy User Interface Settings>Title Colour.
2. In the Policy User Interface Settings, Title Colour drop-dow n menu select a colour. Click OK.
3. Check an Office Application or Microsoft W ord to see the applied Title Colour.

Setting the Title Colour in the Classifier Administration Policy User Interface Settings.

p289
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Copy (Policy)

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies  {policy}  Copy

You can use an existing Classifier Policy as the basis for a new policy. All the existing settings will be
carried forward. This can save valuable time when developing new policies.

Copying an existing Classifier Policy as the basis for a new policy.

To copy an existing Classifier Policy as the basis for a new policy:

1. Go to Labelling Configurations>Policies>(Existing Policy)>Copy .

2. Select the Policies node and in the Policies Tree, select the relevant policy.
3. In the main column, select Copy to create a new entry in the list of policies named “Copy of
<source>”.
4. In the Actions column, select Properties. A Properties dialog window will appear.

Changing the name of the policy and description.

5. Modify the Name or Description as required.
6. Click OK to complete the action.

Delete (Policy)

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies  {policy}  Delete policy

p290
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

This section describes how to delete an existing policy.

Note: Prior to deletion you should consider the effects on any users currently using that Policy.

Note:The usual course of action is to ensure that all users are mapped (e.g. through Group Policy
configuration) to a different Policy before deletion.

Deleting a policy.

To delete a policy:

1. Go to Labelling Configurations>Policies>(Policy)>Delete .
2. In the main column, select the Policies node and in the Policies tree, select the relevant policy.
3. In the Actions column, select Delete.
4. On the Delete Policy confirmation, it will ask the question, "Are you sure you w ant to delete
"(name of policy)," click on the Yes button. If you do not w ant to delete the policy, click on the No
button.

p291
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Lock / Unlock Policy

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies  {policy}  Lock/Unlock policy
The Lock Policy action can be used to indicate to other Classifier administrators that the Configuration
cannot be published at the moment (e.g. because policy changes are incomplete).
If the policy is locked, the Unlock Policy action is displayed and the Publish Configuration action is
inhibited (greyed). There are similar Lock Unlock Configuration actions.

Note: however, that Unlock Configuration will NOT affect any policy locks, they w ill remain in effect.

The Lock and Unlock selections in the Actions column.

To lock/unlock a policy:

1. Go to Labelling Configurations>Policies>(Policy)>Lock Policy/Unlock Policy .

2. To unlock a policy, select Lock. To lock a policy select Lock.

Label Preview

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies  {policy}  Label Preview

This action will display the label interface for a policy as it appears in a Classifier application. If you wish
to see other effects of the policy (e.g. how FLOT will appear) you will have to use the Publish Test
Configuration action.

Note: Favourites does not appear in this dialog.

Note: Mandatory selectors w ill not be flagged as they are defined through application specific rules and
the Label Preview context is application independent.

To display the label interface:

1. Go to Labelling Configurations>Policy>Policies>Label Preview .

2. Select the Policies node.
3. in the Policies tree, select the relevant policy
4. Select Label Preview.
5. The Label selection dialog relevant to the selected policy is presented.

p292
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Label Values Preview dialog.

6. If the policy has Assisted Labelling enabled, you will see the Assisted Labelling label selection
interface relevant to that policy as per the examples in Assisted Labelling examples (excluding
favourites / mandatory).

p293
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Suggested Classification Settings

Configures the ability for a user to run a suggested classification on demand. Further information on
the Suggested Classification feature can be found Suggested Classifications .

Note: Suggested classifications are usually triggered by an appropriate ‘Check for a suggested
classification’ rule, but enabling ‘User-Driven Suggested Classification’ allows the user to trigger the
Suggested Classification manually by selecting a button from the Office Ribbon Bar or from within the
Classifier Labeller User Interface.

Note: In order for the feature to be available in a client that supports user-driven suggested
classification, the setting to ‘Allow user driven suggested classification’ needs to be enabled and
appropriate messages selected for all 3 of the possible outcomes.
.
Note: If a suggested classification check is performed manually by the user, the result of the check will
be displayed in the standard Classifier Policy Check dialog with the appropriate configured message.

Note: A ‘Check for a Suggested Classification’ rule is not required for User-Driven Suggested
Classification to function since this manual method of performing a check for suggested classification
w orks against the suggested classification configuration. Any configured ‘check for a suggested
classification’ rules w ill function as they normally would regardless of whether this feature is enabled or
not.

User-Driven Suggested Classification Settings

To set the Suggested Classification Settings:

1. Go to Labelling Configuration>Policy Management>Settings>Suggested Classification
Settings.

p294
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

2. The following classifications are:

Allow user-driven suggested classification?

 Enable - Allow user to trigger a suggested classification check.

 Disable - Disallow user to trigger a suggested classification check.

Text to display when a suggestion cannot be found

 The message to show when a user-driven suggested classification could not be found.

Text to display when a suggestion cannot be resolved

 The message to show when a user-driven suggested classification could not be resolved. This
typically happens w hen multiple clashing suggestions are applicable.

Text to display when a suggestion has been found

 The message to show when a user driven suggested classification has been found.

3. When all the required settings have been selected, click OK.

Policy Label UI
Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies
The Label Configuration defines the set of Selectors and Values available for policies. The follow ing
functions are available if the Set Selectors tab is selected to define and manage selectors in a policy:

 View or change the properties of a Selector in a policy using the Edit Selector action. The properties
are grouped by tab into General, which includes the ability to replace the Caption or Tooltip defined
in the Selector library for this policy, and (Selector) Values (Values can also be accessed directly
using Selector Properties / Options action).

 Make a Selector available or unavailable in the policy using Selectors in policy, and configure whether
they appear on the Ribbon or the general Label Selection dialog; and whether the Label Selection
dialog is configured to present the selectors across a number of Tabs.

 Control the Selector Values available in the policy and the default value using the Selector Properties
/ options action.

 Assisted Labelling may be configured using Connect Selectors - Assisted Labelling .

 If Use Single Click with pre-defined labels is Enabled, manage the associated interface through the
Single Click tab.

 Language (Policy) [Only available if Allow multiple languages is enabled - see Properties (Classifier
Administration)] allows you to switch the view to show the settings associated with a particular
Language.
When a new Policy is created it will have no Selectors assigned (unless it was established using the
Copy Policy action).

p295
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Selector Properties (Policy)

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Set

Selectors]/{selector}->Edit Properties
When a Selector is added to a Policy, the default is to assume that the settings defined in the Selector
Library are adopted. Some aspects can be modified at the Policy level; others cannot as per the table
below:

Attribute Selector Policy setting Notes/ Default

Library setting

Type Y Use Library setting.

Selector Name Y Use Library setting.

Colour Y Use Library setting.

Portion and Alternative Y Use Library setting.

encoding values

Caption Y Y Use Library setting.

(Selector Properties / General ).

ToolTip Y Y Use Library setting.

(Selector Properties / General ).

Value included Y Y Single selection / Multiple selection / Date

offset lists only.
Initially all values are included.
(Selector Properties / Options ).

Default value Y Initially no default is defined.

(Selector Properties / Options ).

Use names from Y Single selection / Multiple selection / Date

offset lists only.
The default is to use the selector Name.
(Selector Properties / Options ).

Show selector captions Y Default - Yes

on the ribbon bar
Display selector values Y Single selection lists, Multiple selection lists
as buttons and Date offset only.
The default is to use the selector Name.
(Selector Properties / Options ).
Where possible wrap Y
buttons at
Enable auto-complete Y Text entry only.
(Selector Properties / Options ).

Library vs Policy settings

The Policy settings listed in the table above may be modified for a particular Selector by selecting the
relevant Selector and then selecting the Edit Properties action. A dialog is presented which provides
two Tabs (General and Options). Access to the settings is merely a matter of selecting the appropriate
Tab, as in the examples below.

p296
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Selector Properties
The two tabs are described in:

 Selector properties / General

 Selector Properties / Options

Selector Properties / General

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Set

Selectors]/{selector}->Edit Properties/[General]
The General tab allows you to set the general properties of a Selector in this Policy as described below.
By default the Caption and Tooltip defined for this Selector in the Selector Library will be used. To define
policy specific settings:

To set the general properties of a selector in this policy:

 Select the Policies node and select the relevant policy in the Policies tree. Select the Set
Selectors Tab, and select the selector in the selector summary list for the relevant policy.
 Choose (Selected Items) Properties and select the General tab.

p297
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Selector Properties
 Language [Only visible if Allow multiple languages is enabled - see Properties (Classifier
Administration)]. You only need to define Language specific values if the
algorithm defined in Languages would not yield a suitable value from another
configured Language.
Choose the Language and then:
 Check or un-check the Use caption from Set Selectors and/or Use ToolTip from Set
Selectors.
 If un-checking enter your replacement Caption / replacement Tooltip into the text box
provided.
 Click OK to complete the changes.

Selector Properties / Options

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Set

Selectors]/{selector} -> Edit Properties
Depending upon the selector type a different set of options is presented:
To view or change the various setting for a selector in a policy:
 Select the Policies node and select the relevant policy in the Policies tree. Select the Set
Selectors Tab, and select the relevant selector in the selector summary list for the relevant
policy.
 Choose Edit selector options. This will present a dialog relevant to the selector type:
 Single selection list options

 Multiple selection list options

 Text entry options

 Date picker options

p298
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Date offset list options

 Selector Value Filtering

 Apply any changes.

 Click OK to complete the changes which are reflected in the Selector values area.
For all selector types:
If a default value is defined, it is used as the initial value when a new document or email message is
created unless there is pre-existing label that overrides it (e.g. document template label or an email
message created ‘in Reply to’).
A Value selected to be the default is indicated in the Default column in the Selector summary in the
parent window.
Note: Display of a default value is also affected by the setting Masking of Selectors against Clearance
and Select value for masked selector .

Single selection list options

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Set

Selectors]/{selector} -> Edit Properties
This dialog allow s you to define for Single selection list selectors:

Single selection list options

 Available values allows you to specify w hich of the values defined for the selector are actually
available in the current policy by checking /unchecking the appropriate boxes. The initial state
(when the selector is added into the policy) is that are all values are available.

 Default value allows you to specify a default value for the selector by selecting the appropriate

p299
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

value from the list.

 Use names from allows you to specify w hich of the 'Names' configured for a selector (Name,
Portion, Alternate Name, Alternate 2 and Alternate 3) is presented to the user for this policy. By
default the Names configured are used. Classifier applications will then present the relevant value
from the selected Use names from property. If there is no value configured for that property, then
Classifier w ill use the selector Name.

 Show value as allows you to specify how the selector will be presented if Use Single Click with pre-
defined labels is Disabled. Three options are supported:
Text only Only the caption will be presented
Colour and text The caption and background colour will be presented
Image and text The Image and caption will be presented.

 Display Style:

 Display values as buttons allows you to control how the selector values appear in the Ribbon [if
a Single selection list selector is configured to appear in the Ribbon (Selectors in policy)]. The
Properties (Policy) level setting Where possible wrap buttons after provides additional control.

 Display Values as a list allows you to control how the selector values appear in the ribbon [If a
multiple selection list selector is configures to appear in the ribbon (Selectors in policy)].The
Properties (Policy) level setting Where possible wrap buttons after provides additional control.

 Non-Assisted Labelling Policies - For non-Assisted labelling policies, the Display values as
buttons setting is found by selecting <Policy> \ Set Selectors \ <Selector> and then choosing
Edit selector options.

 Assisted Labelling Policies - For Assisted labelling policies Display selector values as buttons
should be set/unset for each instance of a single selection list selector in the Selector Sequence tree
(e.g. Select <Policy> \ Connect Selectors\ <Selector instance within the tree> and choose
Edit selector options). Setting the option via the Set selectors tab has no effect for Assisted
labelling policies.
Note: If Use Single Click with pre-defined labels is Enabled, then Use Single click with
pre-defined labels takes precedence (the Display selector values as buttons setting is
ignored).

 Disabled (default) : The selector will appear in the Ribbon as a drop down list of values.

 Enabled : The selector values appear as buttons in the Ribbon. Examples of the effects of this can
be found under Ribbon Bar examples, Label Selection dialog and Assisted Labelling Operation . The
Ribbon wrapping setting can be used to control the presentation of the buttons within the Ribbon.

Multiple selection list options

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Set

Selectors]/{selector} -> Edit Properties
This dialog allow s you to define for Multiple selection list selectors:

p300
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Multiple selection list options.

 Selected - column allows you to specify w hich of the values defined for the selector are actually
available in the current policy by checking /unchecking the appropriate boxes. The initial state
(when the selector is added into the policy) is that are all values are available.

 Default - column allows you to specify zero, one or more default values for the selector by checking
/ unchecking the appropriate boxes.

 Use names from - allows you to specify w hich of the 'Names' configured for a selector (Name,
Portion, Alternate Name, Alternate 2 and Alternate 3) is presented to the user for this policy. By
default the Names configured are used. Classifier applications will then present the relevant value
from the selected Use names from property. If there is no value configured for that property, then
Classifier w ill use the Selector Name.

 Show value as allows you to specify how the selector will be presented. Two options are
supported:

 Text only - Only the caption will be presented

 Colour and text - The caption and background colour will be presented

 Display Style:

 Display selector values as buttons allows you to control how the selector values appear in the
Ribbon [if a Multiple- selection list selector is configured to appear in the Ribbon ( Selectors in
policy)].

 Display Values as a list allows you to control how the selector values appear in the ribbon [If a
multiple selection list selector is configures to appear in the ribbon ( Selectors in policy)].The
Properties (Policy) level setting Where possible wrap buttons after provides additional control.

 Non-Assisted Labelling policies , - For non-Assisted labelling policies, the Display selector
values as buttons setting is found by selecting <Policy> \ Set Selectors \ <Selector> and

p301
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

then choosing Edit selector options.

 Assisted Labelling Policies - For Assisted labelling policies Display selector values as buttons
should be set/unset for each instance of a single selection list selector in the Selector Sequence tree
(e.g. Select <Policy> \ Connect Selectors\ <Selector instance within the tree> and choose
Edit selector options). Setting the option via the Set selectors tab has no effect for Assisted
labelling policies.
Note: If Use Single Click with pre-defined labels is Enabled, then Use Single click with
pre-defined labels takes precedence (the Display selector values as buttons setting is
ignored).

 Disabled (default) - Selector values displayed in the Ribbon w ill appear as check boxes.

 Enabled - The selector values appear as buttons in the Ribbon. The Ribbon wrapping setting can be
used to control the presentation of the buttons within the Ribbon.

Date picker options

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Set

Selectors]/{selector} -> Edit Properties
This dialog allow s you to define for Date picker selectors.

Date picker options

 No default - there is no default value defined

 Default using a time period - allows you to define a default value relative to the current date

 Default to a specific date - allows you to set a specific date as the default.

Text entry options

p302
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Set

Selectors]/{selector} -> Edit Properties
This dialog allow s you to define for Text entry selectors:

Text entry options.

 Default text - allows you to specify a default value.

 Enable auto-complete - can be Enabled so that Classifier will present previously used values that
match what the user types to assist completion of the value.

Date offset list options

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Set

Selectors]/{selector} -> Edit Properties
This dialog allow s you to define for Date offset selectors:
Available values allows you to specify w hich of the values defined for the selector are actually
available in the current policy by checking /unchecking the appropriate boxes. The initial state
(when the selector is added into the policy) is that are all values are available.
Default date period allows you to specify a default value for the selector by selecting the appropriate
value from the list.
Use names from allows you to specify w hich of the 'Names' configured for a selector (Name, Portion,
Alternate Name, Alternate 2 and Alternate 3) is presented to the user for this policy. By default the
Names configured are used. Classifier applications will then present the relevant value from the
selected Use names from property. If there is no value configured for that property, then
Classifier w ill use the Selector Name.

p303
Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Date offset list options

p304
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Selector Value Filtering

This feature allow s users to filter selector values. It provides an additional filter control that allow s
users to type in text that is used to filter the selector values in the list. This setting is available on Set
Selectors for non-assisted labelling policies and assisted labelling policies.

Note: This option needs to be set to on to allow users to filter selector values.

Note: Only applies to single selection list selector or a multi selection list selectors when the display
style is set to display values as a list.

The "Allow Users to filter selector values" option w hich allows users to filter selector values.

To filter a selector value:

1. Go to Labelling Configuration>(Configuration Name)>Policies>(Policy Name)>Set

Selectors Tab.

p305
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

2. Select a set single selection or multi selection selector from the list.
3. Select Edit Properties.
4. Select the Options tab.
5. Select the checkbox, "Allow users to filter selector values" .
6. To save click on the OK button. To cancel the action, click on the Cancel button.

Selectors in policy

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Set

Selectors]/{selector}->Selectors in policy
When configuring a policy, you need to control the selectors that are relevant to the policy. This action
allows you to Add or Remove selectors to/from a policy, and configure whether they appear on the
Ribbon or the general Label Selection dialog; and whether the Label Selection dialog is configured to
present the selectors across a number of Tabs.
Other selectors defined in the selector library that relate to (for example) externally defined label
elements may still be recognised and displayed. See Retained for more detail.

To manage the Selectors in the policy:

1. Select the Policies node and select the relevant policy in the Policies tree. Select the Set
Selectors Tab.
2. Choose Selectors in policy which will display a list of Selectors that are currently included in /
excluded from the policy.

Selectors in Policy w ith Available selectors and Selectors in Policy (Selector Name, Tab, Ribbon and
Retained).

3. Select the required Selector.

4. Click Add / Remove as appropriate. The Selector will be transferred to the other list.

Note: You cannot Remove a Selector from a policy if the policy has rules configured that

p306
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

refer to that Selector. In that circumstance the following dialog appears:

Remove Selector failure

5. The policy summary list will be updated to show the updated list of Selectors in the policy.
6. You can use the Ribbon and / or Tabs options to control how label selection appears to the user.

Ribbon

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Set

Selectors]/{selector}->Selectors in policy->Ribbon
Note: This feature is not applicable to Text entry or Date picker selector types which cannot be
presented in the Classifier Ribbon Bar.
You can control w hich single selection, multiple selection or Date offset selectors configured in a policy
appear in the Ribbon Bar using the Ribbon setting on the Selectors in Policy dialog - subject to a
maximum of three such selectors.
All selectors will be available through the general Label Selection dialog which can be invoked through
the

Classifier Label button or dialog box launcher if Single Click operation is active.
Checking the Ribbon box for a selector means that it will appear in the Ribbon Bar as well as the
general label selection dialog.

Tabs

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Set

Selectors]/{selector}->Selectors in policy
By default the general Label selection dialog shows all selectors configured for the current policy as in
the following example where the selectors appear in the order defined in the Selector Library ( Set
selector order).
The example below shows the first (Single selection list) selector with Display selector values as
buttons option Enabled (Single selection list options ), the second (Single selection list) selector has
the option Disabled and that selector appears as a drop down selection list.

p307
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Select Label - all selectors

You may wish to 'group' the selectors to reflect their usage. This can be achieved using the Tabs facility.
You can define one or more Tabs, and configure the Name of the Tab, and then which selectors appear
on each Tab.

Note: If you allocate one selector to a Tab, you must allocate all selectors to one of the Tabs; failure to
do this will result in a warning.

Some selectors not allocated to a Tab

 Consider the Tabs you require and establish them as follow s:

 Select the policy. Choose Selectors in policy and click Tabs. to display the Tabs
configuration dialog:

p308
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Tabs configuration
 Set the name for the Tab (double click to get an edit dialog, and use New to add any
additional Tabs you require. The example shows three Tabs established:

Three tabs
 Click OK. You can now allocate the selectors to the available tabs by choosing the Tab for
each selector via the Tab drop dow n in the Selectors in policy dialog:

p309
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Configure Tab
 The policy summary view is modified to show the Tab / selectors relationship:

Policy summary - tabs configured

 Once you have configured the selector / tab mappings you can check the results using Label
Preview:

Tab selection interface

 The user can navigate betw een the tabs.
 The order that selectors appear in the tab is the same as the selector order defined using
Set selector order. Thus, the first and third selectors could appear on the First tab with the
second selector appearing on the second tab, but the First selector would always appear at
the top of the First Tab.
 You can set the order of the tabs using Move Up / Down.
 You can Delete Tabs if they do not have any selector in the policy assigned to them.

p310
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Assisted Labelling and Tabs

 You can use tabs with a policy that has Use Assisted Labelling set. Using Assisted Labelling
in conjunction with Tabs just means the operation involves showing / hiding tabs according
to whether they currently contain selectors of interest.
 Selecting a value for one selector can follow the usual Assisted Labelling mechanisms to
provide additional selectors and values on the same or a different Tab.
 In the example below the First tab contains a Nature (of information) selector w hich is
flagged as Mandatory, but has no default defined. Once the user has chosen a value for
this selector, a second Tab appears which can depend on the value chosen in the First Tab.

Nature mandatory

Second Tab added

 The second Tab indicates that it also contains a mandatory selector.
 No automatic sw itch of focus occurs even if another tab appears.

p311
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Retained
Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Set
Selectors]/{selector}->Selectors in policy -> Retained

You may configure Selectors that are not available in all policies. Any Selector that is not available in
a policy is a potential Retained Selector for that policy.
If an email message or document is received containing a Selector value that is recognised in the
selector library, the value is presented if the selector is included in a Marking Format, even if it is not
related to an Active selector. If you use an existing label containing such a (non-active) selector value
as the basis for a new object (e.g. Reply to a received email message) the label value will be dropped
from the new label.
There may be circumstances where the label value received has been established under a different
policy (different group of users) and this value is to be retained as the value in the 'reply to' or
'forward' circumstance. Classifier caters for This requirement can be catered for in Classifier by adding
a selector into a policy and then designating it as Retained, which will ensure that the source label
value is propagated to the new object.
Another scenario is if a selector is no longer to be included in an active capacity, but the selector
settings are to be retained in rules in the policy.
Your Marking Formats may include such Retained Selectors so that Summary Markings would still
show any defined value. By default non-Active selectors are NOT propagated to new Documents or
email messages. You can modify this behaviour as follow s:

Retained selectors in policy.

To mark a selector as Retained:

1. Ensure the relevant Selectors are defined in the Selector Library.

2. Include the Selectors in appropriate Marking Formats.
3. Select the Policies node and select the relevant policy in the Policies tree. Select the Set
Selectors Tab.
4. Choose Selectors in Policy. This will present a dialog show ing the Selectors that are in the Policy.

p312
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

5. Any selector that is not in use in the policy can be marked as being a ‘Retained’ selector by selecting
the appropriate checkbox.
6. Click OK to commit the changes.

Language (Policy)

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Set Selectors] ->

Language
By default the Set Selectors list presents the selector Captions and Tooltips defined for the Configuration
default language.
You can select an alternative language from the Language drop dow n to see which items you have /
have not configured for that language as per the example below which shows the Caption and tooltip set
to blank because a non-default language has been selected and these values have not yet been
populated.

Policy display (Non-default language)

Connect Selectors - Assisted Labelling

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Connect Selectors]

Assisted Labelling allow s you to guide user selection of label values by limiting the choices of selectors
and / or selector values depending upon the value chosen for a preceding selector.
A policy is either an Assisted Labelling Policy or not as determined by whether the Use Assisted Labelling
option is checked on the policy Properties. If the option is checked then the Connect Selectors Tab
appears if the policy is selected; initially showing the root of the Selector sequence tree.
Note: Once a policy has been set as an Assisted Labelling policy it cannot be reverted to a standard
(Non-Assisted) Labelling policy.

p313
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Connect Selectors
All the standard policy management features apply, including defining the selectors and values that are
available in the policy (e.g. Selectors in policy and Edit Selector ). The only difference is that the
Connect Selectors Tab allows you to construct a dependency tree.
Note: Until you start to populate the Selector Sequence Tree, the effects of using the policy may be
indeterminate in terms of any label selection presented, default values and rule operation.
You start to build the Selector Sequence tree by adding one Selector at the root. This selector is the
user's first choice. You can limit the selector values available using Edit selector Options. The tree shows
Selectors and Selector values.
There are some fundamental constraints:

 The Selector Order defined in the Configuration is strictly enforced. Therefore if one branch of the
tree adds the third selector defined below a value for the first selector (essentially omitting the
second selector), the second selector cannot then be added further dow n.
 You cannot add a selector below a Multiple selection list value.
 Mandatory selector rules that demand a value for a selector that is not visible under certain
circumstances - should be avoided, because the associated rule w ill always fail.

 The default values defined in the policy selectors are ignored in the Assisted Label connected
selectors. Only default values configured in the connected selector are visible in the client.
The actions available for managing the Selector Sequence tree are:

 Add a selector

 Remove selector

 Edit selector options - includes the ability to set the default value for this branch of the tree.
The Assisted Labelling Examples topic describes some different uses of Assisted Labelling; the
associated configuration of the Selector Sequence tree and gives examples of the user experience.

p314
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Add a selector

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Connect Selectors] ->

Add a selector
To Add a Selector into the Assisted Labelling Selector Sequence tree:
 Select the Policies node and select the relevant policy in the Policies tree. Select the
Connect Selectors Tab.
 Choose a node in the existing tree w here you want to add a Selector. This could be below
the Root, an existing Selector or an existing Selector Value.

Add Selector Locations

 Choose Add a selector which will display a list of available selectors.

Add a selector
 Select the appropriate selector and Click Add.
 The selector is added to the tree below the chosen node. In this example, Department has
been added below the Root.

p315
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Department added below Internal

Once the selector has been added, you may wish to configure the values available using Edit selector
options. Initially all values for a selector (in the policy) are assumed to be available.
Note: The default values defined in the policy selectors are ignored in the Assisted Label connected
selectors. Only default values configured in the connected selector are visible in the client.

Remove selector

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Connect Selectors] ->

Remove selector
To Remove a Selector from the Assisted Labelling Selector Sequence tree:
 Select the Policies node and select the relevant policy in the Policies tree. Select the
Connect Selectors Tab.
 Select the Selector that is to be removed.
 Choose Remove selector. A warning may be presented:

Remove Selector warning

p316
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Click Yes and the chosen Selector will be removed from the tree.

Edit Selector Options

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Connect Selectors] 

{Selector}->Edit selector options
Once a selector has been added into the Assisted Labelling Selector Sequence tree, you may wish to
configure the selector values that will be available to the user in that branch of the tree. You can also
define the default value to be applied for this selector in that branch of the Selector Sequence tree.
Also see the Selector Library.

Note: The default values defined in the policy selectors are ignored in the Assisted Label connected
selectors. Only default values configured in the connected selector are visible in the client.

The Edit selector options tag.

To edit the selector options:

1. Go to Labelling Configurations>{configuration}>Policies>{policy}/[Connect
Selectors]>{Selector}->Edit selector options.
2. Select the Policies node and in the Policies tree, select the relevant policy.
3. Select the Connect Selectors Tab.
4. Select either the Selector or one value of the Selector whose values are to be edited. Select
either Single Select or Multi Select.
5. Choose Edit selector options. This will present the properties associated w ith the relevant
selector.

p317
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Edit selector options (single select).

6. On the General tab, you can override the Caption and Tool-tip values configured for the Selector in
the policy; if an override is not provided then values w ill come from the Selector Properties /
General page.

p318
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Edit selector options (multi select).

7. Select the Options tab, The options w ill vary with the type of selector.
8. Adjust the set of available values by checking/un-checking the appropriate boxes.
9. Set / unset the Default value as required. This default applies only to this branch of the tree.
10. Set the Use names from value to an attribute of the Selector. The default is to use the Name
attribute.
11. Display Style: Select the Display style ( Display values as buttons / Display values as a list ).
For Assisted labelling policies Display values as buttons should be set/unset for each instance of a
single selection list selector in the Selector Sequence tree (e.g. Select <Policy> \ Connect Selectors\
<Selector instance in the tree> and choose Edit selector options). Setting the option via the Set
selectors tab has no effect for Assisted labelling policies.

 Display values as buttons allows you to control how the selector values appear in the Ribbon bar
[if a Single selection list selector is configured to
appear in the Ribbon bar (Selectors in policy)]. The Properties (Policy) level setting Where possible
wrap buttons after provides additional control. Also see Multiple selection list. Single select
and Multi select selectors can select how values are displayed, Text, Colours and Text, Images and
Text, Check Boxes or Buttons.

 Display Values as a list allows you to control how the selector values appear in the ribbon bar [If
a multiple selection list selector is configures to appear in the ribbon bar ( Selectors in
policy)].The Properties (Policy) level setting Where possible wrap buttons after provides additional
control.

 Checked - The selector values w ill appear as buttons and the Properties (Policy) level setting Where

p319
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

possible wrap buttons after provides additional control.

 Unchecked - The selector values will appear as check boxes.

12. Checkboxes:

 Retain Selection if valid when parent selection changes (Set/unset) on each selector node in
the Connect Selectors tree. This setting has the following effect, by default (Disabled), if
the user changes the choice of a parent selector value, any choice of subordinate value(s) must be
made afresh. If the setting is Enabled then changing the choice of a parent value will
Retain any currently selected subordinate values that are available under the new
parent choice. Consider the scenario described in Example 1 - Categories with many Annotations :
The user could select Cat 3 + A1/A2. Subsequently selecting Cat 1 would by default (
Disabled) drop A1/A2, but enabling Retain Selection on the Annotation node below Cat 1
would remember A1.

 Always include this selector's values when the parent has multiple selections is only
applicable to Multiple selection selectors. Consider two multiple selection lists Make (a list of
manufacturers) and Models (a list of the models available for each manufacturer) established as
assisted labelling tree (Models below Make). The user selects Make A + models A1, A2 and A4,
and Make C w ith Models C5 and C8. Enabling the setting on each Model branch w ill ensure that the
label constructed w ill include all selected Makes and Models (Makes A + C / Models A1 + A2 + A4 +
C5 + C8).

 Allow users to filter selector values - Users can filter selector values.

Assisted Labelling examples

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Connect Selectors]

This topic provides examples illustrating how Assisted Labelling might be used to simplify and / or direct
users' choice of labels. This is not an exhaustive list; the basic mechanisms can be used to provide a
variety of effects.
Each example is presented in a separate sub-topic.
The examples are:

 Example 1 - Categories with many Annotations

 Example 2 - An additional user choice if Category 2 is selected

 Example 3 - Separation of Personal and Corporate information

Example 1 - Categories with many Annotations

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Connect Selectors]

Note: This example assumes only two selectors are present. However, the general mechanism can be
extended dow n to a third level. This may also involve more than three different selectors, subject to the
presence of no more than three selectors in any one branch. Thus not only are the selector values
configurable, based on a value selected at the parent selector level, but entirely different child selectors
may be configured as available for selection, depending on the choice at the parent selector level.
Consider an organisation that needs to label information with two selectors called Category and
Annotation.
There are several Category values, yet many Annotation values, but only certain combinations are valid.
If Assisted Labelling is not configured, the user would be presented with a long list of Annotation values
and have no guidance as to whether they had selected a valid combination, potentially leading to
frustration and labelling errors.
You can improve the user experience and reduce the incidence of mislabelling be implementing Assisted
Labelling along the following lines:
 Define all the Category values (e.g. Cat 1, Cat 2, .....)

p320
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Define all the Annotation values (e.g. A1, A2, A3, .....)
 Define the matrix of valid combinations:
Category Annotation

Cat 1 A1
A3

Cat 2 [Blank - indicating this category has no associated Annotations]

Cat 3 A1
A2
A4

... ...

 Configure the two Selectors ( Category and Annotation) and configure the full set of values
for each.
 Create a Policy and add both Selectors into the policy.
 [In preparation for Example 2, add a third selector Visual Markings with values Yes and
No, and add this into the Policy]
 Check that the Policy works and that the selectors and values are all available.
 Set Use assisted labelling on the policy.
 Select the policy, and select the Connect Selectors Tab.
 Select the Root node and choose Add a selector. Select Category and click Add.
 Expand the tree to show the Category values.
 Select Cat 1, choose Add a selector. Select Annotation and click Add. Repeat the process
for Cat 3, etc.
Note: Cat 2 is omitted from the preceding step as the table at the start indicates it has no
associated Annotation value.
 Under Cat 1 select Annotation and choose Edit selector options. Ensure that only the
appropriate Annotations ( A1 and A3) are selected (uncheck all others). Set a default if
appropriate.
 Repeat the process for the other Category values (Cat 3 etc).
 The example below shows how the tree would look for the Cat 1 /2/3:

p321
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Category and Annotation Sequence Tree

The user experience is different under Microsoft Office and OWA as per the following:
Office Classifier
Initially the Classifier label shows only the Category selector with no default value.

Initial state - no category selected

Selecting Cat 2 will not show the Annotation selector as there are no annotations defined for this
Category.

Cat 2 selected
Selecting Cat 3 w ill add the Annotation selector to the display and present the configured Annotation
values.

Cat 3 with Annotations

OWA Classifier

p322
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

initially only the first selector is show n - in this example Classification:

OWA Assisted Labelling initial state

Selecting a value extend the label selection according to the configuration. In the example below,
selecting General Business has made Annotation available for selection.

OWA Assisted Labelling General Business selected

Example 2 - An additional user choice if Category 2 is selected

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Connect Selectors]

p323
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

This example assumes the previous example ( Example 1 Categories with many Annotations ) has been
configured as its starting point.
In the previous example, Cat 2 might have no annotations because it relates to externally consumable
information where the annotations would have no meaning. The organisation wishes to give users
further control if they select Cat 2 value over the applicability of Visible Markings (Header / Footer /
Flot etc.) to such information (documents and messages). Assisted Labelling allows you to define
different rules that only take effect based on a user choice.
This might be achieved as follow s using the Selector in the Configuration called Visual Markings with
two values (Yes and No).
 Select the Connect Selectors Tab. Expand the tree.
 Select the Cat 2 node and choose Add a selector. Select Visual Markings and click Add.
 Select Visual Markings in the tree and choose Edit selector options.
 Set the default value to Yes.

Visual Markings selector

 Define rules that only fire if Visual Markings = No and insert blank Visual Markings (a blank
Marking is one that generates no text).
The user experience is different under Microsoft Office and OWA as per the following:
Office Classifier
Initially the Classifier label shows only the Category selector with no default value.

Initial state - no category selected

Selecting Cat 2 w ill show the Visual Markings selector with Yes and the default and No as the other
choice.

p324
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Visual Markings choice

OWA
The operational sequence is the same, but the presentation is different as per the examples under
Example 1 - Categories with many Annotations .

p325
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Example 3 - Separation of Personal and Corporate information

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Connect Selectors]

In this example an organisation w ishes to have a clear distinction between Personal (e.g. users
arranging social activities using e-mail) information and Corporate information.
All Corporate information must be labelled with a Classification and Department, and rules are
defined to apply visual markings etc. Personal information is the responsibility of the individual who
must ensure that it does not contain corporate information. Personal information is marked simply with
PERSONAL - which can be checked by Firewalls etc.
This can be achieved as follows:
 Configure the three Selectors and their values - Nature (Personal and Corporate),
Classification (Public, Internal and Confidential) and Department (Sales, Finance and
Engineering).
 Create a Policy and add all three Selectors into the policy. Ensure that the order in the
policy is as listed above ( Set selector order).
 Check that the Policy works and that the selectors and values are all available.
 Set Use assisted labelling on the policy.
 Select the policy and select the Connect Selectors Tab.
 Select the Root node and choose Add a selector. Select Nature and click Add.
 Expand the tree to show the Nature values.
 Select Corporate, choose Add a selector. Select Classification and click Add.
 Re-select Corporate, choose Add a selector. Select Department and click Add.
 This will result in the following Selector Sequence tree:

Nature of Information

p326
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Both Classification and Department are immediately below Corporate which means that both
selectors will appear when Nature = Corporate.
 Select Nature and choose Edit selector options. Set the default to Corporate.
The user experience is different under Microsoft Office and OWA as per the following:
Office Classifier
Initially the Classifier label shows the default Nature = Corporate with the Classification and
Department selectors available for selection.

Nature set to Corporate

If the user switches to Nature = Personal, the Classification and Department selectors are removed.

Nature set to Personal

OWA
The operational sequence is the same, but the presentation is different as per the examples under
Example 1 - Categories with many Annotations .

Suggested Classifications
Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}  [Suggested
Classifications]
Note: Suggested Classifications are only supported by Microsoft Outlook, Word, Excel, PowerPoint,
Project and Visio applications.
This feature allow s you to define one or more Suggested Classifications for a policy. These can then be
referenced in Check for suggested classification rules such that when a document is saved or printed, or
a message is sent the Suggested Classifications are evaluated and the appropriate action is performed.
Each Suggested Classification has one or more Conditions defined (stored in the Condition Library), and
Selector settings that indicate either selector value(s) to be applied, and/or that a selector should be
cleared.
Note: Currently, suggested classifications are only triggered if you enable the ‘check for a suggested
classification and automatically apply’ rule. This change will allow the user trigger the Suggested
Classification manually by selecting a button from the Ribbon Bar or from w ithin the Labeller UI.

Note: If you run the suggested classification manually, the suggested label w ill automatically be
calculated and show n in the Policy Check dialog. If we fail to suggest a label, a message box would be
displayed to inform the user, e.g. "Document was set to the suggested classification" / "Unable to
determine a Classification for the document".

Note: If you as the Admin have enabled the original ‘check for a suggested classification’ rule and
this new manual option w as also enabled, then both w ill apply. So even if the user manually triggered
the suggest label, w hen they save, send or print the document, the rules will also be triggered, including
the ‘check for a suggested classification and automatically apply ’ rule.

p327
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Note: This manual option w ill only be applicable to the outer labeller UI, i.e. not the inner labeller UI
w hich can be launched from w ithin the Policy Check dialog.

Note: Policy Dialog Summary label button w ill be disabled when displayed from a Use Suggested
manual operation to avoid looping.

Suggested Classifications.

To view the Suggested Classification:

1. Go to Labelling Configurations>(Configuration Name)>Policies>(Policy Name)>Suggested

Classification Tab.
2. Select the Policies node and in the Policies tree, select the relevant policy.
3. Select the Suggested Classifications Tab. Initially there are no Suggested Classifications defined.
Suggested Classifications are listed alphabetically.

The functions supported are:

o Add a new Classification.
o Edit Classification.
o Delete (Suggested Classification) .

o Suggested Classification Warnings

Add a New Classification

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Policies  {policy} / [Suggested

Classification] -> Add a new classification
Note: Suggested Classifications are only supported by Microsoft Outlook, Word, Excel, PowerPoint,
Project and Visio applications.
Note: Text and Date selectors cannot be specified w ithin a suggested classification.
Note: The Admin must enable the Check for a suggested classification rule and select the checkbox for

p328
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

the "Automatically apply when possible " then both will apply.

To add a new (suggested) Classification:

1. Go to Labelling Configurations>(Configuration Name)>Policies>(Policy Name)>Suggested

Classification Tab>Add a New Classification.
2. Select the Suggested Classifications tab.
3. In the Actions column, select Add a New Classification . This will present the same dialog as
Properties (Suggested Classification):
4. Specify a Name and Description. The Name is referenced from Check for Suggested Classification
rules.

Properties (Suggested Classification).

5. The current selector settings are displayed as:

 Set: <list of values>

 Clear: <list of selectors>

6. To display a dialog that allow s you to define which selectors are to participate; which selector values
should be applied; and the Selectors that should be cleared of any current value. click on the
Classification button.
Note: Text and Date selectors cannot be specified w ithin a suggested classification and will not be
presented in the dialog shown below.

p329
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Classification Label Values.

Select one or more of the following:
Note: A selector takes no part unless it is Checked. If a selector is Checked, you can either defined
the value(s) to be applied, or select the 'empty' selector value to indicate that any value currently
defined should be cleared.

 Sensitivity - Unmarked/Sensitive/Commercial-In-Confidence

 Distribution - Internal/External

 Project - In the drop dow n menu, select a project.

7. To apply your specified settings, click on the OK button. Then the Properties dialog window is
displayed.
8. Define the conditions that are to apply. Either select from the conditions listed, or click New...
w hich displays the Add a new condition dialog. (See Properties(Condition) for details of the Condition
types, options and Actions.)
9. If you want to Check / Uncheck "Automatically apply when possible " select the checkbox.
(Default is Enabled). This setting influences the operation of an Check for a suggested classification rule.
10. Select a (or define a New...) Message to display when this Suggested Classification cannot
be applied. This text will be displayed in the policy check dialog if (for example) there are two
incompatible selector values defined by different Suggested Classifications, or the Suggested
Classification is incompatible w ith the current Classification.

Edit Classification

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Policies {policy} / [Suggested

Classification] -> Edit Classification

p330
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

A user can edit the properties of a Suggested Classification and select the label elements that will be
included or excluded. There is an option to automatically apply conditions that must be satisfied in order
for the label to be applied and to choose the message that will be displayed when the Suggested
Classification cannot be applied.

Essentially, the same dialog and operation is presented w hen you Add a new Classification.

Note: Any Property may be modified.

New Classification.

To view or change the properties of a Suggested Classification:

1. Go to Labelling Configurations>(Configuration Name)>Policies>(Policy Name)>Suggested

Classification Tab>Edit Classification.
2. Select the relevant Suggested Classification.
3. In the Actions column, select Edit Classification. A Properties dialog window will appear.
4. Edit the name of the classification.
5. Select the label elements to be included or excluded. To do this click on the Classification button.
A Classification dialog window will appear.

p331
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Classification Label Elements.

Select one or more of the following:

 Sensitivity - Unmarked/Sensitive/Commercial-In-Confidence

 Distribution - Internal/External

 Project - In the drop dow n menu, select a project.

6. Click on the OK button. Then the Properties dialog window is displayed.

7. Check or Uncheck "Automatically apply when possible " select the checkbox. (Default is
Enabled). This setting influences the operation of an Check for a suggested classification rule.
8. In the drop down menu, select the " Message to display when this Suggested Classification
cannot be applied".
9. Click on the OK button. To cancel, click on the Cancel button.

Delete (Suggested Classification)

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Policies {policy}/[Suggested

Classification]/Delete

You can easily delete a Suggested Classification assigned to a policy.

p332
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Deleting a Suggested Classification.

To delete a Suggested Classification:

1. Go to Labelling Configurations>(Configuration Name)>Policies>(Policy Name)>Suggested

Classification Tab>Delete Classification.
2. Select the Suggested Classifications tab.
3. In the list, select the relevant Suggested Classification.
4. Select Delete. A Delete Policy confirmation dialog is presented.
5. It asks the question, "Are you sure you want to delete (Policy Name)?" To complete the
deletion, click on the Yes button. To cancel, click on the No button.

p333
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Suggested Classification Warnings

This is a setting that allows multiple suggested classification w arnings for the same content to be
prevented. It is an option to allow you to stop show ing the same content warning when saving or
printing a document.

Note: If Enabled, the policy check result w ill display a checkbox to allow the user to 'Don't show this
warning again.'

Note: This check only applies to Microsoft Office Documents, it is not applicable for Outlook.

Content Check Warning, "Don't show this warning again."

A true enabled rule.

p334
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

To enable a rule:

1. Go to Labelling Configuration>Policies>(Policy)>Set Rules Tab.

2. In the list select Word Documents - Check for suggested classifications.
3. In the Actions Column under Set Rules select Edit Rule. The Edit Rule window will appear.
4. Edit the rule by clicking on the highlighted text. Set to the Suggested Classification to Warn and the
Action to Warn.Then select warning messages from the user defined message library as appropriate.
Note: This only applies if it is set to Warn or Challenge. It does not apply to the Prevent rule.
5. Set "Allow warning to be ignored" to True.
6. To save, click on the OK button.

Default Label (Policies)

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}  [Default Label]
This feature allows you to define one or more Default labels that can then be referenced when
configuring SharePoint Classifier (3.10 or later) Library default label values (see the SharePoint
Classifier Guide (3.10 or later) for further details). Any Default Labels that are configured with an
associated condition can be used when deriving an Intelligent Default label.
Each defined Default label has a unique name and an associated Classification/Label. Additionally, a
condition can be assigned to the Default label.
Initially there are no Default Labels defined. Default Labels are listed alphabetically.

Default Label tab.

The following actions are supported:

 Add a new Default Label

 Properties (Default Label)

 Delete (Default Label)

Add a new Default Label

p335
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Policies  {policy}/ [Default Labe] ->

Add a New Default Label

Note: Only applicable to SharePoint Classifier.

To add a new Default Label:

1. Select Policies and select the relevant 'policy' and select the Default Label tab.
2. Choose Add a new Default Label . This will present essentially the same dialog as Properties
(Default Label):

Add a new Default Label

3. Specify a unique Default Label Name. The name is used w hen configuring a SharePoint Library
default label.
4. Click on the Classification button and select the required values from the Classifier Label dialog
presented.
5. Click on the Conditions button if you want to associate conditions with the Default label. When
used in conjunction w ith the Intelligent Defaults feature, the Default label values will be used when
deriving the Intelligent Default if the conditions match.
6. Click Ok to complete the process.
7. The summary list of Default Labels is updated.

Properties (Default Label)

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/[Default Label] ->

Properties
Note: Only applicable to SharePoint Classifier (3.10 or later).

p336
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

To view or change the properties of a Default Label:

1. Select Policies and select the relevant 'policy' and select the Default Label tab. Select the
relevant Default Label.
2. Choose Properties. Any Property may be modified.

Essentially the same dialog and operation is presented when you Add new Default Label.

Delete (Default Label)

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Default Label] ->

Delete
Note: Only applicable to SharePoint Classifier (3.10 or later).

To delete a Default Label:

1. Select Policies and select the relevant 'policy' and select the Default Label tab. Select the
relevant Default Label.
2. Choose Delete - a confirmation dialog is presented. Click OK to complete the deletion.

Note: Classifier Administration has no way of know ing whether a 'Default Label' item has been used
w ithin SharePoint, so all deletions are allowed. If you delete a Default Label entry, then it will disappear
from the Configuration and SharePoint will not be able to apply any action that referenced that Default
Label Name.

Rules Management
Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}
Classifier uses Rules to control the operations performed by individual applications. Each rule applies to
a single application. It is only the effect of Rules that end users see; the Rule definitions are purely a
matter for Administrators.
Rules apply to a single Policy. If you need to support multiple policies using similar rules it may be
useful to establish the first Policy and then use the Copy (Policy) mechanism to establish initial rules for
the second Policy that may then be edited to achieve the required effects.
This section describes the general Rule administration mechanisms illustrated by a few specific
examples. The set of Rules supported varies across individual applications. The complete list of rules
supported by the various applications can be found in Rules supported. The rules supported fall into
three general types:

 Add rules which cause a Marking or Meta-data to be added to a message or document.

 Apply rules which apply a setting to a message or document.

 Check rules that check some aspect of site policy and involve the user if the policy is contravened.
The general Rule management topics available are (knowledge of these is assumed in the Rules
supported section and its sub-topics):

 What is a rule?

 Set Rules tab, which provides access to the Rules Management functions .

 Add a rule

p337
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Edit (Rule)

 Delete (Rule)

 Copy (Rule)

 Defining Label Conditions

 Rule Overlap Handling

Rules Management View

What is a Rule?

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}

Each Rule definition comprises:
Name A name that is unique in the Labelling Configuration. This value may appear in audit
messages.
Application One of the applications that Classifier supports (Microsoft Excel, Outlook, Pow erPoint,
Project, Visio, Word, OWA or Notes etc.).
Label condition The Rules are organised as a tree which presents the rules as a hierarchy under nodes
(Always, No Label and Any Label nodes) w ith the most generally applicable rules at
the top (under Alw ays) and the most specific rules (in label value terms) towards the
bottom and right. This tree structure is explained fully under the Set Rules Tab.
Each rule is either label independent (Alw ays, No label, Any label), or label related and
appears as follows:

 Rule action and configurable settings

 With this label, Rule action and configurable settings

p338
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Each rule is application specific, but the administration interface allows you to create
(common) rules for multiple applications
Action This is the action to be performed by the application if the Label condition applies.
Actions may require additional configurable parameters (Rule Options) to define their
effects. Rules fall into three broad groups:

 Rules that add Visual or Meta data . These rules allow you to add a Marking to a
Location using a Marking Format to the existing information. E.g.
o Add a header here to any existing text in this format (documents)

o Add this x-header in this format

 Rules that apply settings to ensure particular effects are achieved involving
an application other than Classifier . E.g.
o Apply this RMS policy (various applications)
o Apply a delivery report request (Outlook)

 Rules that perform policy checks . These rules allow you to check various aspects
of a user's actions against your site policy, and to alert the user if the policy check
fails. E.g.
o Check these mandatory selectors. Warn user if check fails with this
message. (All applications)
o Check number of recipients does not exceed number . Warn user if check
fails with this message. (Outlook and OW A)
Rule options Zero, one or two Rule options that supply any variable aspects of the rule such as those
highlighted in the Action examples above.
Label value This defines the label value(s) to which the rule applies. When a rule is created you
choose at the outset whether it applies Always (i.e. regardless of the current label
value); when there is specifically No Label selected; to Any label (i.e. there is a label
value but specific settings are not relevant); or to a specific configurable label value .
Prerequisite conditions These are optional and are not applicable to OWA rules. Prerequisite
conditions may be defined such that the rule is only applicable if the prerequisite
conditions are satisfied. It is possible to define two rules for the same application at the
same point in the rules tree. This potential conflict is resolved by the rule highest up the
tree taking preference (see Rule Up / Down).
All Rules are managed through the Set Rules Tab which is available once you have selected the relevant
policy.
You can define multiple rules as described in Adding Rules. This may lead to situations where more than
one rule could apply to a single application and action. Classifier decides rule precedence as described
in Rule Overlap handling.
Note: New versions of Classifier Administration may provide 'new ' rules which although quite similar to
an existing rule, provide additional features in such a way that they must be treated as a brand new rule
that supersedes the existing rule type. In such circumstances, existing rules will continue to operate,
but cannot be edited through Classifier Administration. To take advantage of the new facilities you must
establish a brand new rule; modify the configuration to make use of that new rule, and deleted the
original rule.

p339
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Set Rules Tab

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules]

Selecting the Set Rules tab shows all existing rules and provides access to all Rule management
functions (Add a rule, Edit (Rule), Delete (Rule) and Copy (Rule).
The Rules are organised as a tree which presents the rules as a hierarchy under nodes ( Always, No
Label and Any Label nodes) w ith the most generally applicable rules at the top (under Always) and
the most specific rules (in label value terms) tow ards the bottom and right.
When you create a rule, you choose at the outset where it resides in the tree by selecting a node from
the tree. The selected node can be one of the following:
Always A rule inserted here is applied regardless of the label value (includes No Label) unless
there is a more specific rule (lower down the tree) that takes precedence.
No Label The rule will only be applicable if there is no label value selected (all selectors are
blank). There are no rules associated with this node in the example below.
Any label There is a label value defined (it does not match a No label rule) but specific selector
values are not relevant.
A node below Any Label relating to a more specific Label value
(e.g. Classification = Public, Department = Any in the example below ). These nodes all
appear as an expandable tree structure under the Any Label node, reflecting the
Selectors and Values available in the Policy . The example below shows a rule "Outlook
Emails apply FLOT" under Alw ays and a more specific Rule to be applied only when
Classification is Public ("Outlook Emails apply FLOT a").

.
Rules tree
The top part of this display shows a tree structure view that presents all the current Rules.
The bottom part of the display show s a summary list of the Rules applicable to the node selected in the
top part. Selecting the Always node w ill show all the rules associated with that in the lower half of the
display.

p340
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

The Rules Triggered summary show s:

Application Excel, Outlook, Pow erPoint, Project, Visio, Word, OWA or Notes.
Name The name of the rule.
Rule option 1/2/3 Shows the value of the first / second / third rule parameters (if any). These will
contain Label values for rules having specific label conditions, or Format names
for example.
The following presentation features are available in the low er part:

 Sort according to column using a column heading option.

 Re-order the columns using drag and drop.
 Hovering over a cell in the display pops-up the full value of the cell.
 Filter the list by selecting the context menu in the column header and choosing the appropriate value
from the list presented. To revert to the full list select the All option from the head of the list.
Tip: You can expand / contract the entire rules tree by selecting a node in the labels tree (e.g. the
Always labels node) and pressing the Plus (+) or Minus (-) keys on the numeric key pad.

Add a rule

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule
Rules can only be added when the Set Rules Tab is selected. To define a new rule for a policy:
 Select the Policies node, and select the relevant policy.
 Select Set Rules Tab and select the relevant node in the Rules label tree.
 If you want to:
- Add a rule that applies regardless of whether a Label value is defined or not then select
Always.
- Add a rule that applies only if there is no label value then select No Label.
- Add a rule that applies if any label value is defined (not blank) then select Any label.
- Otherwise select a node corresponding to label value in the label tree . The example
below shows Classification selected, so adding a rule here would apply if there was any
Classification value selected.

p341
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Add a rule
 Choose Add a Rule. This will launch the Rule wizard which operates as described in Rules
Wizard operation. The wizard is aw are of whether you have chosen All Labels or a specific
label value and tailors its operation appropriately. Selecting a node in the Label structure
tree (e.g. Sensitivity = Confidential) and then selecting Add a rule with a specific label
value selected assumes that you want a rule dependent on that Label Value and adopts the
selected label value as the initial value for the Label condition. You may modify this during
the wizard sequence.
Note: Certain rule types (Label Change Check, Mandatory Selector Check, Selector Expiry
Check and Content Check) provide a setting (Allow multiple rules of this type) which
influences the duplicate rules checking.
 If you inadvertently add a duplicate rule at the same point in the rule tree, the w izard will
w arn you, but will establish the new rule. However, a rule with prerequisites defined is not a
duplicate of a rule without prerequisites defined. The following shows an example of a
duplicate rules dialog:

Rule Conflict

p342
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Rules wizard operation

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule
This topic describes how new rules can be added.
Note: The full set of Rule Templates supported by each of the various Classifier applications and all the
associated settings is defined in Rules supported.
 Invoking Add a Rule starts a wizard.
 You can go forward and backwards through the wizard ( Next / Back), or Cancel the
sequence at any time. Only if you click Finish at the end of the sequence will the changes
be finalised.
 A list of applications is presented (Outlook Emails, Outlook Web Emails, Word documents,
etc. depending upon your licence).

Choose Application
 Choose the application(s) to which this rule will apply.
 An Action choice screen is presented listing the Rule templates relevant to your chosen
application(s). If you select multiple applications, the list will only show those rules that are
common all the applications selected. If the list is empty, there are no rules common to the
chosen applications.
 By default the list show s all the rules relevant to your chosen applications. You can filter this
list to show only the Add, Apply or Check rules.
The example below shows the general layout of the dialog presented for Word:

p343
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Rule wizard – Word Rule Templates

 Select the required rule entry from the list and click Next.
 The Edit Rule dialog is presented containing the selected rules template.
 If required, modify the default Rule Name supplied - the name must be unique.
 A template may contain configurable features. These appear highlighted in the template.

Rule wizard – Label value placeholder

 To set any configurable feature, click on the placeholder to launch the associated

p344
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

configuration dialog.
 If you are creating or modifying a rule that is Label value specific, the currently defined label
value is presented as one of these placeholders. Click on the current label value
placeholder to modify the label setting ( "Selector" = "Classification" in the example
above). This is described fully in Defining Label Conditions .
 Other examples of configurable features are Message Format names, Action choices,
S/MIME security level, RMS policy selection and W arning level configuration.
Note: The full set of Rule Templates supported by each of the various Classifier applications
and all the associated settings is defined in Rules supported.

Rule wizard – Choosing Format

You can if necessary establish a New Marking format using the New... button on the above
dialog.
 Prerequisite conditions may be defined (Step 4: at the bottom of the rule configuration
dialog) such that the rule is only applicable if the prerequisites are met. Selecting the
prerequisite placeholder (Initially There are no prerequisite conditions defined ) will present
the dialog below showing currently defined Conditions applicable to this application

Prerequisite Conditions
You can choose from the currently defined conditions, or click New to Add a new condition.
 Once you have finished making changes, select OK and the new rule is added to the Rule
tree.

Rule Icons

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules]

Each rule presented by the w izard has a status indicated by an icon that appears at the start of its
entry.
Icon Status Description

Rule available A rule that you can add, modify or delete.

p345
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Rule unavailable A rule that is not available under the licence you currently have applied.
The rule is greyed out, and no actions are available.

Rule Deprecated A rule that was created using a previous version of Classifier
Administration, and that is no longer supported. The rule is greyed out, will
have no effect and the only action supported is Delete.

Edit (Rule)

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Edit
rule
Note: Although you can establish a (common) rule for more than one application at a time, you must
subsequently edit those rules individually.
Existing Rules may be edited.

To edit a rule:

1. Select Labelling Configuration>(Configuration Name)>Policies>(Policy Name)>Set Rules

Tab.
2. Expand the Rules tree to display the relevant rule. Select the relevant Rule.

Edit a rule

3. Select Edit Rule. This will launch the Edit Rule dialog which operates as described in Rules Wizard
operation. The wizard is aw are of the rule you have selected and uses this to set initial values for
the rule.
4. You may change various aspects of the rule. You CANNOT move rules between the primary nodes
in the rule tree other than by a suitable copy / paste / rename sequence. You can modify a specific

p346
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

label condition as long as the change would not cause the rule to move between the primary nodes
in the tree.
5. Amend settings as required.
6. Once all changes have been made proceed to the end and click on the OK button.

Delete (Rule)

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Delete
rule
Rules may be deleted at any time.
 Select the Policies node, and select the relevant policy. Select the Set Rules Tab.
 Expand the Rules tree to display the relevant rule. Select the relevant Rule.
 Choose Delete Rule.
 Click OK on the delete confirmation.
 The Rules tree is updated accordingly.

Copy (Rule)

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Copy
rule
You can use an existing rule as the basis for a new rule. The new rule will be given a name derived from
the source Rule w ith a unique suffix, such as (1), added at the end.
The new rule will have configurable features added or removed to ensure it complies with the
destination in the rule tree. Thus you can copy a rule from below the No Label node and paste it below
a specific Label value. For example if the source is a "For emails..." rule and the destination is under a
specific label (e.g. Classification Selector) then the new rule will adopt the target Label value as its
starting point.
To use an existing Rule as a template for a new rule:
 Select the Policies node, and select the relevant policy. Select the Set Rules Tab.
 Select the relevant source Rule in the Rule tree (Outlook apply FLOT in the example below).

p347
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Copy Rule - Select Source

 Choose Copy Rule.
 Choose the target location for the rule (e.g. below Internal in the example above).
 Choose Paste Rule. This will insert a copy of the source rule into the selected location in
the rules tree.

p348
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Copy Rule - Pasted Copy

Note: If you attempt to copy a rule into a location that already has an instance of the same
rule you will be warned and requested to address the anomaly as per the screen shot below.
The copy will be inserted but you should take appropriate steps to rectify the situation.
 Select the copy (Outlook apply FLOT(1) in the example above) and edit it to match your
requirements, including Renaming the rule.
Note: Certain rule types (Label Change Check, Mandatory Selector Check, Selector Expiry
Check and Content Check) provide a setting (Allow multiple rules of this type) which
influences the duplicate rules checking.

Copy rule - Duplicate warning

Defining Label Conditions

p349
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
When you define a Rule that includes a label condition (e.g. “For documents with this label, add a
w atermark in this format”), the Rule Wizard presents you with a dialog (when you select the label
condition placeholder) that allow s you to define the label matching criteria for the available Selectors.
The initial Selections w ill reflect the location in the Rule tree that you chose to add the rule.

Rule wizard – Setting Label Condition

 Choose the criteria for each of the presented Selectors. The choices presented are:
<Any> Any valid value from the set of Values defined for this Selector. Blank (no
selection) would not match. Selecting <Any> results in the Selector name
appearing in the label condition.
Undefined Any valid selector value or <Blank>.
Value A specific value from the set of values available for the Selector. Selecting
a value results in the chosen Value appearing in the label condition.
Note: For Text entry and Date Picker selectors you use presence of a value in the rule
condition - the actual value is irrelevant.
Note: For Multiple selection list selectors you can only choose one value from those
available. You can of course define other (similar) rules that fire on other values of that
same selector. If several rule instances apply because more than one value has been
selected for that Multiple selection list, the Rule overlap handling algorithm applies.
 So choosing Classification = Public / Department = <Any> results in a label condition of
“Classification"="Public”, “Selector"="Department” being presented in the label
condition placeholder.
Note: If you change the Label condition in a rule, the rule position in the rule tree will change to reflect
the new settings.
Note: You cannot set a label condition where all selectors are set to Undefined; you should add the rule
directly under the Any Label node instead.

p350
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Rule overlap handling

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules]

If there are multiple rules defined affecting a single application location, the rule having the “best
match” is actioned. The "best match" is determined using an algorithm which treats the last Selector
defined in the policy as being the most significant, and the first Selector defined in the policy as being
the least significant.
For many sites the Rules Tree contains a small number of rules affecting any one Marking location (e.g.
FLOT), and rule precedence can be determined visually based on the algorithm: "The rule associated
w ith the most important selector (towards the Bottom) in the tree wins unless there is a rule using a
more specific label value (tow ards the Right) for that selector".
Note: It is possible to have multiple similar rules defined below the same node in the rule tree. For
example, there might be tw o Add LLOT rules, one w ith a specific Condition associated (e.g. If External
recipient), and one with no associated Conditions. The Rule highest up the tree takes precedence. Use
the Move rule up / down actions to manage this precedence.
Rules are defined in the Rule tree below :

 Always
 No Label
 Any Label
 Further nodes under Any Label corresponding to the specific defined Label condition.
More than one rule affecting the same location may be defined in the overall Rule tree. Classifier uses
the following algorithm to determine the Rule to apply w here more than one rule might apply:
Always rules only apply if there is no other similar Rule that takes precedence, including < No label>
rules.
[A similar rule would be one that affects the same location (e.g. FLOT). Note that you could have
multiple rules applying for X-Header / document property etc. from different branches of the Rule tree
as long as they are for different X-Header / document property values].
No Label rules only apply if there is no label value selected. It is mutually exclusive with < Any Label>
rules, with <Label condition> rules, and with <Always> rules.
Any Label rules only apply if a label value has been selected and there is no other similar Rule with a
specific label condition that also applies – i.e. there is no other applicable rule further dow n the tree.
A <specific selector value > defined in a rule makes a 'better' match in the label matching algorithm
than <Any> that is in turn 'better' than a <Not Relevant>, that in turn is better than an <Always>
match.
For Multiple selection lists, the value at the head of the list is treated as the least significant and the
value at the bottom of the list is treated as the most significant. Consider a Multiple selection list having
three values V1, V2 and V3; and rules R1, R2 and R3 that apply Markings M1, M2 and M3 associated
w ith each of those selector values. If the user select values V1 + V3, there are two applicable rules (R1
and R3) - Classifier uses the list order to determine rule precedence (bottom of list is most significant)
and Rule R3 / M3 will be applied.
Example scenario:
Consider a scenario where you want three different FLOT Markings depending upon the label value:

 No Label - "This message has no label value defined".

 Label of [Confidential + any Department] - "CONFIDENTIAL / <Department> - HANDLING

CHECKS APPLY".

 All other label values - "<Classification> / <Department>".

1. Define the three Marking Formats.

2. Define three separate FLOT rules under the relevant nodes in the Rules tree ( No Label, Always
and Classification = Confidential ) assigning the appropriate Marking Format.
3. The code w ill apply the relevant Marking depending upon the label value selected.

p351
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

A more complex example of rule overlap handling is explored in the Appendix - Example of ‘Best
matching Rule’ algorithm .
Note: Duplicate rules are rules that affect the same application location AND have the same label
condition. Classifier Administration flags such duplicates at appropriate times, and you should address
such anomalies by removing one of the duplicate rules.
Note: Certain rule types (Label Change Check, Mandatory Selector Check, Selector Expiry Check and
Content Check) provide a setting (Allow multiple rules of this type) which influences the duplicate rules
checking.

Move rule up / down

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules]

It is possible to have multiple similar rules defined for an application below the same node in the rule
tree. For example, there might be tw o Add LLOT rules, one w ith a specific Condition associated (e.g. If
External recipient), and one with no associated Conditions. The Rule highest up the tree takes
precedence.
Rules relating to a single application are grouped together below a node (Alw ays / Any Label / Label
value etc.)in the rules tree. Use the Move rule up / Move rule down actions to manage this
precedence by moving rules w ithin the group of rules applicable to an application.
 Select a rule in the rule tree
Note: The Move rule up / dow n actions will only be available if there is more than one rule
applicable to the application and there is a rule above ( Up is available) and/or there is a rule
below (Down is available).
 Select a rule in the rule tree and use the Up / Down actions to rearrange the rules.

Rules supported
Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules]
This section covers all the rules supported by Classifier applications. Rules are application specific but
may vary according to the Classifier policy in use. The Application Rule support table below shows
the rules presented for each application. Rules for an application are only available if the relevant
licence has been applied.
In the table below , x.y (e.g. 3.5) indicates a feature that is new in that version of Classifier
Administration. Application versions prior to that number do not support the feature (Classifier 1.3
(which preceded 3.4) is assumed as the baseline).
Note: Component release notes may document limitations that apply even if the table below indicates
support for a feature.
The rules are grouped into the rule categories (topics) show n in the table:

 Add rules - Rules that add a marking or meta-data to the document or message.

 Apply rules - Rules that apply a setting to a document or message.

 Check rules - Rules that check that the policy (as defined by these rules) is being follow ed.
You may define multiple instances of each type of rule and may set pre-requisite Conditions. Multiple
instances of a rule may be associated w ith a single label value as long as different conditions apply to
each rule (e.g. Insert a different FLOT if there is an attachment). Classifier determines which rule to
apply based on the ‘best fit’ between the run time label and the label values associated with the rule as
described in Rule Overlap Handling.
Details on the individual rules can be found by following the links above.

p352
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Add rules

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
Office, Email, OWA, Mail Add-in, Notes and Mobile Classifier allow Markings and/or Metadata based on
the current label value to be applied to the current document / message. One common use is to
facilitate recognition by software and users that the email message is labelled, and the value of that
label.
Any Marking defined through these mechanisms overwrites any existing value in the same location
defined by any other means (e.g. the user).
Note: Any rich text formatting specified in a Format is ignored when used in a location that does not
support such features (e.g. Subject field).
Note: If your site uses Word templates to set Header/Footers etc. you may find that Insert Marking as
Field Code (Word only) is more appropriate for Word than some of the rules below .
Separate rules appear for each supported “Location”. For each Location rules are available in a general
(Add ...) or a Label specific (W ith this <Label>, add .....) form depending on whether you are adding
the rule as an Any label or a rule associated with a specific label value.
Application Rule support
The table below indicates the rules supported by each application [OL (Outlook) / O(WA) / Notes / Mob /
M(ailAdd-in) / W(ord) / Ex(cel) / PP(Pow erPoint) / Pr(oject) / V(isio) / CAD / SP / F(ile)/DCS/ Box
indicates that the application supports the setting].
Marking / metadata Outl'k OWA Mail Notes Mob Word Ex'l P'Point Project CAD S'Point DCS
Add-i Visio File Cl
n Box
Add a FLOT OL OWA 3.10.0 Notes Mob
Add a LLOT OL OWA 3.10.0 Notes Mob
Add to Subject here OL OWA 3.10.0 Notes Mob
Add this X-Header OL OWA 3.10.0 Notes 3.7.4
Add attachment list OL OWA 3.10.0 Notes
(Attachment list format) OL OWA Notes
Add these addresses OL OWA
Add this Outlook item propety OL
Add a Textbox on the header W
Add a Textbox on the footer W
Add a textbox on the top PP
Add a textbox on the bottom PP
Add a textbox to top of page V
Add a textbox to bottom of V
page
Add a cover page marking W Ex PP V
Add a header here W
Different 1st page W
Different odd/even pages W
Add a header Ex Pr + V CAD
Different 1st page Ex
Different odd/even pages Ex
Ex
Smart selection
PP
With alignment
Add a footer here W
Different 1st page W
Different odd/even pages W
Add a footer Ex Pr + V
Different 1st page Ex
Different odd/even pages Ex
Ex
Smart selection
PP
With alignment
Add an image into header OL W Ex PP
Add an image into footer W Ex PP

p353
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Add watermark image W

Add a cover page marking W Ex PP V
Add an image as a watermark OL W
Add this document property W Ex PP Pr + V CAD DCS
Add this custom document W Ex PP Pr CAD DCS
property
To add a new Add... rule:
(a) Perform the operations common to all rules:
 Select the policy and select the Set Rules Tab.
 Select either the Always, No Label, Any Label node or a specific label value node in the rules
tree.
 Choose Add a rule to start the Rules wizard. Select the appropriate applications(s) and click
Next. This presents the rules available for the application(s) chosen.
 If required, choose the appropriate rule category filter (Add/Apply/Check rules).
 Select the appropriate ‘Add ...’ rule from the list of rules displayed. This will present the
appropriate rule edit template.
 If the rule is label value based then select the label value token and configure the label
setting to meet your requirements.
(b) Set any rule specific settings and be aw are of any rule specific features as described in the
relevant sub-topic. The Add ... rules supported and their settings tokens (<Label> , here, this,
....) are:

Note: In the table below , Mail Add-in (3.10.0) only supports messages (not meeting requests for
example).

For emails Dialog presented w hen aplaceholder is selected

Add a FLOT in this
format.
Add a LLOT in this
format.
See also Examples
of FLOT.
Note: Only
supported for
messages and
meeting requests. (Basic this format selection dialog referenced below)

Add to subject
here in this
format.
Note: Only
supported for
messages and
meeting requests.
Note: A Reply/
Forward operation
w ill check for any
existing
recognisable (Basic this format selection dialog above)
Subject marking
and strip if found
before applying a
Subject marking
appropriate to the
current label.

p354
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Note: Email
Classifier may
truncate the
original subject to
accommodate the
Prefix / Suffix.
Note that if the
Prefix or Suffix is
itself longer than
the maximum
subject length,
then the Prefix /
Suffix is not
included in the
updated Subject
value.

Add this x-header

in this format.
Note: In a Lotus
Notes
environment, for
the x-classification
(above) to be
transmitted across
an SMTP
connection, (Basic this format selection dialog above)
classification must
be included in the
Domino server list
of x-headers to be
transmitted across
that connection
(the "x-" is
automatically
applied by
Domino).
Note: Any
characters that
are not "7 bit US-
ASCII" in a
marking format
that is used to
populate an X-
Header field on an
email generated by
Email or OWA
Classifier appear
as '?' when the
message is sent.
You might use the
Alternate Value
mechanisms
described in
Administration
Guide/
Configuration
Settings/Label
Locations/
Recognising and
Parsing Label
Markings to
provide a mapping
from your selector
values (non-Ascii)
to 7 bit US-ASCII

p355
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

and back again.

However, this
approach will not
w ork for Text entry
selector values.

Add an attachment (Basic this format selection dialog above)

list of Classifier
documents
showing labels in
this format.
(Not supported
by Mobile
Classifier, nor
Appointments).
See also
Attachment List
Notes.
Note: Only
supported for
messages and
meeting requests.

Add these
addresses to
these recipients
(Not supported
by Notes
Classifier or
Mobile Classifier
and not
supported for
Tasks)
Note: The addition
of recipients is
performed after
any recipient type
checks.

Add this Outlook

Item property in
this format
(Only supported
by Outlook)
See also Search for
Outlook Item
Properties that
match email label
locations.

For documents:

p356
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Add a Textbox on
the header in this
format
Add a Textbox on
the footer in this
format
(Word only)
When a TextBox
has been inserted
via the rule, the
text is formatted
according to the
defined Marking
Format. The user
is free to
manipulate the
Textbox (e.g.
move it, format it
etc).
When the rules
run, if an existing Word Textbox in header or footer
Classifier 'TextBox'
exists in the
header/footer only
the text (field
code) is updated,
thus any
customisations
made by the user
to the box will
remain, and the
alignment applied
from the original
marking format is
retained regardless
of alignments of
marking formats
associated with
subsequent rules
applied (e.g. due
to label change).
This means that
any changes made
by the user to the
text content (e.g.
font, colour, size,
etc.) will be lost
the next time the
rule fires.
For Word: This
behaviour is (Presented when Options above is pressed)
modified if the
Marking Format Word Add Textbox settings
has 'Use Plain
Text' specified. In
this case Classifier
w ill simply replace
the text content,
but leave any
surrounding
formatting
unchanged. (Note
that any
formatting set by

p357
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

the user within

the text w ill still be
replaced.)

Add a Textbox on Basic this format selection dialog above

the top of the
slides in this
format
Add a Textbox on
the bottom of the
slides in this
format
(PowerPoint
Only)
Add a textbox to
bottom of page in
this format
(Visio Only)
Note: Add TextBox
to top of page in
this format” is only
applicable to Visio.
When a TextBox
has been inserted
via the rule, the
text is formatted
according to the
defined Marking
Format. The user
is free to
manipulate the
Textbox (e.g.
move it, format it
etc).
When the rules
run, if an existing
Classifier 'TextBox'
exists in the
header/footer only
the text (field
code) is updated,
thus any
customisations
made by the user
to the box will
remain, and the
alignment applied
from the original
marking format is
retained regardless
of alignments of
marking formats
associated with
subsequent rules
applied (e.g. due
to label change).
This means that
any changes made
by the user to the
text content (e.g.
font, colour, size,
etc.) will be lost
the next time the

p358
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

rule fires.

Add a header in (For most applications - Basic this format selection dialog above)
this format
(For Excel - only the follow ing:)
(Supported by
Excel, Project,
Visio and
AutoCAD)
Add a footer in
this format
(Supported by
Excel, Project,
Visio)
For Excel, you can
choose Smart
Selection which
w ill cause Classifier
to add the
header/footer into
the first vacant
location found
following the order
that you define. If
there are no
vacant slots, the
marking is not
w ritten.
The other
applications always
replace any
existing text.
See also Add Excel Header/Footer placement
Header / Footer
additional notes.

Add a footer in Basic this format selection dialog above applies.

this format with
this alignment
Add a header in
this format with
this alignment
(Supported by
PowerPoint only)
PowerPoint always
replaces any
existing text. Pow erPoint Alignment
The alignment
option supports
two settings:
Fit to
Placeholder The
Footer placeholder
is not resized.
Fit to Slide/
Page (Default)
The Header/Footer
placeholder is
resized to be the
w idth of the slide.

p359
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

See also Add

Header / Footer
additional notes.

Add a header here

to any existing text
in this format
Add a footer here
to any existing text
in this format
(Word only)
This format allows
you to define the
marking format,
and provides
control over
Insert/Replace,
and first page and
Different odd/even
page usage.
See also Add
Header / Footer
additional notes
and Settings to
Auto Enable
Microsoft Office
Header / Footer
controls.

Word Header and Footer position

(Word) This rule will apply a Text Box marking to the first page of a Word document /
Add a cover page Pow erPoint document / Excel spreadsheet (only the first spreadsheet) / Visio
marking in this drawing when the document is saved.
format to First
The first page may be a Word 'Cover Page' if one has been inserted.
Page with these
settings. The application rules supported provide control over the placement of the text box
through the settings dialog presented when the these hyperlink is clicked.
(Excel/
PowerPoint/
Visio)
Add a cover page
marking in this
format with these
settings

Add a watermark (Basic this format selection dialog above)

in this format
(Word and
Outlook)

p360
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Note: If
documents are
protected then
Allow label change
on protected
documents may be
relevant.
Note: Under
Word, Classifier
adds an entry to
the Watermark
gallery if there is
an "Add
Watermark" rule
configured
applicable to the
current label value.
Although the user
might use this
gallery entry to
remove the current
w atermark,
Classifier will
always perform
any applicable rule
when the
document is saved.
Note: Classifier
also supports a
mutually exclusive
Add this image as
a watermark rule
to apply an image
rather than a text
w atermark.
Note: You can use
the Watermarks
use marking
format font to
control the font
used for the
Watermark.

Add this image

into header with
this text wrapping
and this alignment
Add this image
into footer with
this text wrapping
and this alignment

(Word Only)
Add this image to
top of page with
this text wrapping
and this alignment
Add this image to
bottom of page
w ith this text
wrapping and this
alignment
(PowerPoint

p361
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Only)
Note: These
above can be used
alongside the
corresponding Add
a Header or Footer
rules.

Add this image

into header with
this format
Add this image
into footer with
this format
(Excel Only)
Note: These
above can be used
alongside the
corresponding Add
a Header or Footer
rules.

Add this image as

a watermark
(Word Only)
Note: Classifier
also supports a
mutually exclusive
Add a watermark
rule to apply text
rather than an
image as a
w atermark.

p362
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Add this document

property in this
format.
Add this custom
property in this
format.
(Custom
Property feature
is not supported
by Visio) Define Custom Property
If the Marking to
be written is
empty, the Custom
Property is
removed.
Note: Document
properties are
visible through the
standard Office Select Document Property
property viewing
menu action. (Basic this format selection dialog above)
Office Document
Properties >
Advanced
Note: Saving as
PDF: You can
populate various
standard document
properties (Title,
Author, Subject
and Keywords)
that will be
propagated if you
save an Office
document as PDF.
However, Office
applications do
NOT propagate any
Custom Properties
to the PDF. In
particular the
bjDocumentSecurit
yLabel is NOT
propagated. Email,
OWA and Notes
Classifier w ill check
defined Label
Locations for
recognisable labels
in standard PDF
file properties for
the Check for the
high-water mark
and Add an
attachment list
rules.
Note: Not all
properties listed
are supported by
all applications.
Properties
supported by an
application can be
found via File-

p363
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

>Info->Properties
(Advanced
Properties) or
similar.
Note: Office
Classifier and CAD
Classifier always
populates the
private Classifier
label Document
Property.

Multiple instances of the these rules can be defined as long as each Rule contains a different Custom /
Document Property name.
(d) Specify any Prerequisite Conditions required. Not applicable to OWA.
(e) Complete the wizard sequence by supplying a name for the rule. The name of the application
w ill automatically be pre-pended.
Note: You may subsequently edit the rule to change any of the settings (e.g. the marking format used).

Attachment List Notes

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
You may configure a rule that adds an attachment list into the body of the email or web email message
(see Add rules).
The attachment list comprises the attachment names and any label value associated with each
attachment (only for attachment types supported by Classifier).
Note: Further details on how Email, OWA and Notes Classifier try to determine a label value for various
file types can be found in Appendix - Label Propagation Mechanisms .
Examples of how attachment lists appear in received messages are shown below:

p364
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Outlook - Example of Attachment List

The Classifier Attachment List: text is configurable via the User Interface Library > General Messages
(UID) General Email Content > Classifier Attachment List setting.

OWA - Example of Attachment List

p365
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Add Header / Footer additional notes

Note: Office Classifier configures the Header/Footer as defined by the relevant rules, but it is the
Office application that applies the Header/Footer to the document. For example, configuring Word or
Excel rules to apply different First/Odd/Even page header/Footer will only have the desired effect if you
have also configure the document to use different First/Odd/Even page header/Footer.
Settings to Auto Enable Microsoft Office Header / Footer controls allows you to further automate control
over these features.
Note: Some applications apply limits to the size of headers/footers (including formatting control
information - font size, name and colour e.g. &"Arial,"&11&K00C000
UNMARKED&"Arial,"&11&K000000 EXTERNAL&"). If limits are exceeded, Classifier first removes
formatting information before truncating the text. Excel has a limit of 253 characters, Project has a limit
of 256 characters and Visio has a limit of 127 in each of Header/Footer Left/Right/Centre. Check that
the expected effects apply in each of your applications.
Notes for Word: Header/Footer markings cannot be added to 'form-filling' protected documents. For
documents protected in other ways Allow label change on protected documents may be relevant.
The Add a header / footer here rules allow you to defined w hether the Marking is merely inserted, or
replaces any pre-existing header / footer.
Notes for PowerPoint:
Headers - PowerPoint does not support application of headers to slides. Any Rules to apply headers will
only take effect on Notes produced by Pow erPoint.
Footers - In order to apply footers to PowerPoint presentations users must ensure that standard
PowerPoint footers are enabled on each slide via the slide masters layout.
If you need to apply formatting as gradient fill or colour to header or footer shapes, these should be
applied to the presentation using the slide master and not directly to the slide itself. Applying such
formatting directly to the header and footer may be lost if the label is changed (and not applied to the
slide master).
Copy/Paste considerations . This situation can become further confused if slides are pasted from another
presentation. Depending upon the Copy/Paste options selected (e.g. 'Use Destination Theme' or 'Keep
source formatting'), the source PPT Master/Slide settings can take effect in the target presentation.
Microsoft KB article KB913500 describes a scenario where headers and footers may become out of sync
w hen slides have been pasted from other presentations. The following link may also be useful -
http://social.msdn.microsoft.com/Forums/en-US/innovateonoffice/thread/2085dcd1-6977-4bcb-9e74-7f
1f49a83d61/ .
Notes for Visio: Visio only supports plain text modifications to headers so any rich text features
defined in the Marking format are ignored.
You can view any plain text header you have applied via File / Print / Print Preview.
Visio does not support multiple line Headers / Footers. Only the first line defined by a Marking appears.
Notes for Project: Do not create headers or footers of 256 characters or more in Project as
COMException fatal errors are likely to occur.
Notes for CAD: AutoCAD and DraftSight support the Add a Header rule, but the header only appears
w hen the design is printed, and the location of the header is an application matter.
Notes for Excel: Headers/Footers may not be displayed in Excel even when Classifier is configured to
display headers/footers in Excel. This may be because you do not have a printer configured, or you do
not have a printer set as the default. Please refer to Microsoft KB article
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/172320/en-us .
Note: To view headers and footers in Excel click the View tab then Page Layout.

p366
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Removable Visual Markings

Certain rules that apply visual markings can be configured to allow the user to remove them, or in the
case of Outlook to choose not to apply them. The administrator can configure on a per rule basis
w hether a marking can be suppressed by the user. If a marking can be suppressed, the display of the
relevant visual marking can be toggled on/off by a menu item under the Options menu in the Classifier
ribbon in the relevant Office application.

Note: If the ‘allow user to remove’ option is set to true then when a rule applies then the user can
choose to remove the marking from the Options menu (under Visual Markings).

Note: The user can then ‘restore the markings’ by re-checking the appropriate item under the Options ->
Visual Markings menu.

To add a rule that allow s user control over the display of the visual markings:

1. Go to Labelling Configuration>(Configuration Name)>Policies>(Policy Name)>Set Rules

Tab.
2. In the Actions column, select Add a rule. An Application Choice window will appear.

Select an application or asset to w hich the rule you select will apply.

3. Select an application, for example, Word Documents.

4. Click on the Next button. An Edit Rule window will appear.
5. In the drop down menu, select All Rules.

p367
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

A list of all the rules.

6. Add a rule that supports the " Allow user to remove" option.
7. Click on the Next button. An Edit Rule window will appear.

p368
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Editing the rules parameter hyperlinks.

8. Set the appropriate options on the rule and click on the highlighted " Allow user to remove" text
and in the dropdow n menu select true to allow the user to control the visibility of the marking.
9. Click on the OK button.

The applicable rule that was just added as an example.

p369
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

10. To finish and save, click on the OK button. To not save, click on the Cancel button. The rule w ill be
updated and added to the list of Set Rules in the Applicable Rules area.

p370
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Visual Markings Controlled by the User

A visual marking refers to content that is added to a document or message via an appropriate Classifier
rule, for example, text in a Word document header, or a subject prefix for Email messages. If a rule to
add a visual marking is applicable for the current application and label then the Classifier will add the
content. In some circumstances, it may be useful to allow the user to decide on whether the visual
marking should be present on a particular document or added to an email.

The Administrator can configure on a per rule basis whether the visual marking can be suppressed by
the user by setting the ‘Allow user to remove’ element of a visual marking rule.

If a document has visual markings whose display can be toggled by the user then they will be able to
remove/restore them via the ribbon.

The text for the menu items in the ribbon can be configured in the usual way by modifying the
appropriate default text in the `Menus` section of the User Interface Library.

Examples of FLOT

A FLOT (First Line of Text) label is inserted into the email or web email message when a Send operation
is performed. The FLOT displays a visual representation of the Label value to the recipient of the email
message.
The figures below show examples of a received email message containing a FLOT Marking.

Outlook FLOT example 2010

p371
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

OWA FLOT example

Apply rules

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
Office, Email, OWA and Notes Classifier allow settings based on the current label value to be applied to
the current document / message.
Separate rules appear for each supported “Location”. For each Location rules are available in a general
(Add ...) or a Label specific (W ith this <Label>, add .....) form depending on whether you are adding
the rule as an Any label or a rule associated with a specific label value.
Application Rule support
The table below indicates the rules supported by each application [OL (Outlook) / O(WA) / Notes / Mob /
M(ailAdd-in) / W(ord) / Ex(cel) / PP(PowerPoint) / Pr(oject) / V(isio) / CAD / SP / F(ile) / Box indicates
that the application supports the setting].
Rule Outlook OWA Mail Notes Mob Word Excel P'Point Project CAD S'Point
Add-in Visio File Cl
Box
Apply S/MIME security OL OWA
Apply this Box Classification Box
Apply this Category OL
Apply a delivery report request OL OWA
Apply a read receipt request OL OWA
Apply this importance value OL OWA
Apply this sensitivity value OL OWA
Apply this expiry value OL OWA
Apply this RMS policy or option OL W Ex PP
Apply an update to field codes W
Apply SealPath protection OL FC
Apply Seclore protection OL FC
Do this with the document Box

To add a new Apply... rule:

(a) Perform the operations common to all rules:
 Select the policy and select the Set Rules Tab.
 Select either the Always, No Label, Any Label node or a specific label value node in the rules
tree.

p372
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Choose Add a rule which starts the Rules wizard. Select the appropriate applications(s) and
click Next. This will present the rules available for the application(s) chosen. If required,
choose the appropriate rule category filter (Add/Apply/Check rules).
 Select the appropriate 'Apply ...’ rule from the list of rules displayed. This will present the
appropriate rule edit template.
 If the rule is label value based then select the label value token and configure the label
setting to meet your requirements.
(b) Set any rule specific settings - see Apply rules - descriptions .
(c) Specify any Prerequisite Conditions required (Not applicable to OWA).
(d) Click OK and Next on the edit template dialog and c omplete the wizard sequence by supplying
a name for the rule. The name of the application w ill automatically be pre-pended.
Note: You may subsequently edit the rule to change any of the settings (e.g. the marking format used).

Apply rules - descriptions

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
This topic provides Apply rule specific information.
For emails only: Dialog presented w hen theplaceholder is selected
Apply S/MIME security to the message using Sign
Only
(Not supported by Notes or Mobile Classifier)
This rule allows you to request that S/MIME
security be applied w hen the message is sent
Note : Any label value included in the body (e.g.
FLOT) is protected. A label value included as an
X-Header or Subject value is outside the data
protected by signing/encrypting the email
message.
Apply this Category
(Not supported by Notes or Mobile Classifier)
This rule allows you to request that a named
Outlook Category be applied w hen the message is
sent.
Note: Categories are stripped from messages
once they reach the message store - i.e. a
recipient will not see the Category that w as set.

Apply a delivery report request There are no rule specific settings.

(Not supported by Notes or Mobile Classifier)
This rule allows you to request that a delivery
report is requested w hen a message is sent.
Apply a read receipt request There are no rule specific settings.
(Not supported by Notes or Mobile Classifier)
This rule allows you to request that a read receipt
is requested w hen a message is sent.

p373
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Apply this importance value

(Not supported by Notes or Mobile Classifier)
This rule allows you to request that a specific
message Importance property is set w hen a
message is sent.

Apply this sensitivity value

(Not supported by Notes or Mobile Classifier)
This rule allows you to request that a specific
message Sensitivity is set w hen a message is sent.

Apply this expiry value

(Not supported by Notes or Mobile Classifier)
This rule allows you to request that a specific
expiry value is set w hen a message is sent.

Apply SealPath protection. Warn user if check fails There are no rule specific settings.
w ith this message
To define the action to take if for some reason the Sealpath
(Only supported by Email Classifier and File protection cannot be applied, assign the required Warn
Classifier) user and this message settings as described in Warn /
Prevent / Audit / Challenge options for Check rules.
This rule causes the current Label information to
be passed to SealPath (via an API) w hich
determines the appropriate RMS policy and applies
that policy. The warn/prevent dialog w ill appear if
for some reason that call to SealPath fails.
Apply Seclore protection. Warn user if check fails There are no rule specific settings.
w ith this message
To define the action to take if for some reason the Seclore
(Only supported by Email Classifier and File protection cannot be applied, assign the required Warn
Classifier) user and this message settings as described in Warn /
Prevent / Audit / Challenge options for Check rules.
This rule causes the current Label information to
be passed to Seclore (via an API) w hich
determines the appropriate RMS policy and applies
that policy. The warn/prevent dialog w ill appear if
for some reason that call to Seclore fails.

For Outlook emails, and Word, Excel and

PowerPoint documents
Apply this RMS policy or option Warn user if

p374
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

check fails with this message

(This rule is applicable to emails and documents,
but is NOT supported by OWA Classifier, Notes
Classifier, Visio or Project applications)
This rule allows you to request that a specific RMS
policy be applied to a message or document
[chosen from the list presented - empty if none
are found for the user] or, that a specific action is
taken.
To define the action to take if for some reason the RMS
- All applications Remove Protection .
policy cannot be applied, assign the required Warn user
- For emails the policy is applied w hen the and this message settings as described in Warn / Prevent /
message is sent - the associated RMS banner Audit / Challenge options for Check rules.
w ill not be visible prior to this time .
- For documents the RMS policy is assigned
w henever the label value is changed.
- Outlook only Do not forward which will cause
the MailItem.OlPermission to be set to 1 or
olDoNotForw ard.
Additional notes on usage of this rule can be found
in Apply RMS policy notes .
Additional considerations apply if you are using
Azure RMS as documented in Azure RMS support.
For Documents
Apply an update to field codes containing this
document property
(Only supported by W ord)

For Box Classifier

Apply this Box Classification

The text value entered should exactly match (including case

sensitivity) a Classification value defined w ithin your Box
environment.
See the Box Classifier Guide.
Do this with the document

See the Box Classifier Guide

Apply RMS policy notes

p375
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
Note: The Apply RMS policy feature is only available if your site has an RMS (Microsoft Window s Rights
Management Services) environment configured.
Note: Ensure that all clients are configured to use the RMS policies you have deployed before trying
Office Classifier integration. If you can apply an RMS policy from Word, Excel, Outlook, and PowerPoint
manually then the Office Classifier integration features should function.
Note: A user may view their RMS permissions through the usual RMS View permissions action.
Note: If the configured RMS template can't be enabled for some reason, then the current action (e.g.
email message submission) is blocked.
Note: All RMS templates should allow programmatic access to email contents. Otherwise, issues may
arise when Outlook tries to reply to or forward a received message. For example, FLOT, LLOT and
Attachment block may not be as expected because the content of the message cannot be processed by
Classifier. [Check that the user has Access the message programmatically RMS permission set to
Yes.]
Note: Classifier Administration queries the AD RMS Service Configuration point specified in AD and
connects to the AD RMS management w eb service to query the list of templates. If the web service is
accessible the RMS combo box is populated with a list of templates.
Note: Additional considerations apply if you are using Azure RMS as documented in Azure RMS support.

Azure RMS support

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
The following applies if you are using Azure RMS:
Classifier does not currently support Managed (Department) templates.
Classifier Administration and Email and Office Classifier need to know how to located the Azure RMS
templates.
1. Ascertain the required location using the Get-AadrmConfiguration PowerShell administration tool
and noting the value associated with LicensingExtranetDistributionPointUrl .

Get-AadrmConfiguration
2. Set the follow ing registry entry to enable Classifier Administration to find the policy values to be
presented when configuring an Apply RMS policy rule:
HKLM\Software\Wow6432Node\Microsoft\MSDRM\ServiceLocation\EnterprisePublishing
(REG_SZ) default value: <http(or https)://RMS_Cluster_Name/_wmcs/Licensing> .
(See AD RMS Service Discovery under https://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd772753
(v=ws.10).aspx for related information.)
3. Classifier w ill first look for Azure templates under %LocalAppData%\Microsoft\DRM
\Templates.
If none are found it w ill check the location configured under one of the following:
HKCU\Software\Policies\Microsoft\Office\15.0\Common\DRM\AdminTemplatePath

p376
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

HKCU\Software\Microsoft\O ffice\15.0\Common\DRM\AdminTemplatePath
w hich should contain an expandable string that points to the file store where the admin templates
are kept.

Check rules

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
The Configuration can define that the following checks be performed when a message is sent, or a
document is saved / printed.
For each type of Check supported, rules are available in a general (Check ...) or a Label specific (With
this <Label>, check.....) form depending on whether you are adding the rule as an Any label or a rule
associated with a specific label value.
Some checks (e.g. mandatory selectors) are supported by all applications, others (e.g. Perform
Clearance checks) are only applicable to one class of application, or only a subset of the applications.
Application Rule support
OL (Outlook) / O(WA) / Notes / Mob / M(ailAdd-in) / W(ord) / Ex(cel) / PP(Pow erPoint) / Pr(oject) / V
(isio) / CAD / SP / F(ile) / Box indicates that the application supports the setting.
^ The operation of these rules is limited under CAD Classifier for DraftSight. If a rule triggers, a warning
is presented to the user, but the action cannot be cancelled regardless of the buttons visible.
Rules Outl' OWA Mail Notes Mobil Wor Exce P'Poi Projec CAD S'Point DCS
k Add-in e d l nt t & File
emails Visio
Check these mandatory selectors OL OWA 3.10.0 Note Mob W Ex PP Pr + VCAD SP + F
s ^
Check for Author label change W Ex PP Pr + VCAD
^
Check for label change OL OWA 3.10.0 Note Mob W Ex PP Pr + VCAD SP + F
s ^
Check for the high-water mark OL OWA 3.10.0 Note
s
Check clearance for attachments OL 3.10.0
Check clearance for recipients OL OWA 3.10.0 Note Mob
s
Check clearance for originator OL OWA
Check subject length does not OL OWA 3.10.0 Mob
exceed
Check subject length exceeds OL OWA 3.10.0 Mob
Check message size OL OWA 3.10.0
Check content (Enterprise) OL W Ex PP
Check number of recipients OL OWA 3.10.0 Mob
Check for these recipients OL OWA 3.10.0 Mob
Check for Reply to All response OL 3.10.0
Check for use of default label OL OWA 3.10.0 Mob W Ex PP Pr + V
Check with the user OL OWA 3.10.0 Note Mob W Ex PP Pr + VCAD F
s ^
Check these selectors for expired OL OWA 3.10.0 W Ex PP Pr + VCAD SP + F
dates ^
Check for additional recipients on OL OWA 3.10.0
reply or forward
Check for unlabelled attachments OL
Check for a suggested OL W Ex PP Pr + V DCS
classification
Check RMS user defined W Ex PP
permissions for uncleared
recipients
Check for RMS protection W Ex PP

p377
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

To add a new Check... rule:

(a) Perform the operations common to all rules:
 Select the policy and select the Set Rules Tab.
 Select the Always / No Label / Any Label node / or a specific label value node in the rules
tree.
 Choose Add a rule which starts the Rules wizard. Select the appropriate applications(s) and
click Next. This will present the rules available for the application(s) chosen.
 If required, choose the appropriate rule category filter (Add/Apply/Check rules).
 Select the appropriate rule ‘Check ...’ rule from the list of rules displayed. This presents the
appropriate rule edit template.
 If the rule is label value based then select the label value token and configure the label
setting to meet your requirements.
 Set any rule specific settings (the items below follow the rule list order above):
(b) Set any rule specific settings and be aware of any rule specific features as described in the
relevant sub-topic. The Check ... rules supported and their settings tokens ( <Label>, this,
these, ....) are:

 Check these mandatory selectors . Warn user if check fails with this message.
 Check for author label change and permit alteration. Warn user if check fails with this message.
 Check for label change and permit alteration. Warn user if check fails with this message.
 Check for the high-water mark of all attachments. Warn user if check fails with this message.
 Check clearance for attachments . Warn user if check fails with this message. See Perform Clearance
Checks when sending messages for details of how these checks are implemented.

 Check clearance for recipients . Warn user if check fails with this message. See Perform Clearance
Checks when sending messages for details of how these checks are implemented.

 Check clearance for originator . Warn user if check fails with this message. See Perform Clearance
Checks when sending messages for details of how these checks are implemented.

 Check subject length does not exceed these characters. Warn user if check fails with this message.
 Check subject length exceeds these characters. Warn user if check fails with this message.
 Check message size including all attachments does not exceed these kilobytes (KB). Warn user if
check fails with this message.

 Check content for this. Warn user if check fails with this message and Show hits.
 Check number of recipients does not exceed these. Warn user if check fails with this message.
 Check for these recipients . Warn user if check fails with this message.
 Check for Reply to All response and Warn user if check fails with this message.
 Check for use of default label . Warn user with this message.
 Check with the user. Warn user with this message.
 Check these selectors for expired dates . Warn user with this message.
 Check for additional recipients on reply or forward . Warn user with this message.
 Check for these unlabelled attachments . Warn user with this message.
 Check for a suggested classification and Automatically apply. Warn user with this message if a
suggested classification is available for manual application, or this message if the suggested
classification cannot be applied.

 Check RMS user defined permissions for uncleared recipients

p378
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Check for RMS protection

The bold items in the rules above indicate configurable settings. Warn user and this (message) place
holders are common to all these rules and only described once in Warn / Prevent / Audit / Challenge
options for Check rules. The other bold items are rule specific and are described discretely below.

(c) For all the Check rules the Warn / Prevent / Audit / Challenge options should be assigned as
described in Warn / Prevent / Audit / Challenge options for Check rules .
(d) Complete the wizard sequence by supplying a name for the rule. The name of the application
w ill automatically be pre-pended.
Note: You may subsequently edit the rule to change any of the settings (e.g. the marking format used).

Check these mandatory selectors

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
This rule is applicable to all applications and can be used to define that checks should be applied to
ensure that the label chosen meets label validity criteria – in particular that any Selector set as
Mandatory has a value chosen.
Different rules can be defined for different applications. So a selector may be Mandatory for documents
(e.g. an archive annotation), but such a setting might be irrelevant to emails. You might also have a
label value related rule that requires a value for one Selector only if another Selector has a particular
value.
Note: For Outlook Emails only - see also for further information on the user experience when this rule
fires for an Outlook Show label dialog when Mandatory Label message.
Note: A single Check these mandatory selectors rule may be defined for SharePoint which will apply
to all document types. See SharePoint Classifier Guide / Viewing and Changing Label Value after
upload section for usage.
Note: The operation of this rule is limited under CAD Classifier for DraftSight . If a rule triggers, a
w arning is presented to the user, but the action cannot be cancelled regardless of the buttons visible.
The rule has the form:
Check these mandatory selectors . Warn user if check fails with this message
 Perform the operations common to all rules as described in Check rules (a) (Select policy,
Set rules tab, etc).
 Select these mandatory selectors, which will present you with a dialog showing all the
active Selectors available in the policy.

p379
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Define Mandatory Selectors

 For each Selector choose Mandatory or Optional as required.
 Set / unset Allow multiple rules of this type . By default (Disabled), Classifier
Administration will detect duplicate rules of this type and only action 'the first' in the rules
tree. Enabling this setting means that Classifier w ill action each of the 'duplicate' rules in
turn - which may of course lead to multiple policy check dialogs.
Note: Each potentially duplicate rule must have the setting enabled, otherwise duplicates
are not allowed.
 Assign the required Warn user and this message settings as described in Warn / Prevent /
Audit / Challenge options for Check rules .
 Click OK and Next on the edit template screen and complete the wizard sequence by
supplying a name for the rule.

Check for Author label change

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
The rule is only applicable to Office Classifier applications and allows you to define label change abilities
specific to the 'Author' w hich apply instead of the abilities defined via a general Check for label change
rule. If no Check for Author label change rule is applicable, then the Author will be subject to any
general Check for label change rule defined.
Note: For the purposes of this rule the 'Author' is not the Microsoft Office Author which is easily
changed by the user, but is a value stored in a Classifier specific manner in a bj-Saver custom property.
This property holds the identity of the first person to save the document. All documents, new, old,
unlabelled and labelled have the bj-Saver property set on them when they are first changed (saved) and
there is not an existing bj-Saver property present. If an existing document is opened which does not
have a bj-Saver value, the current user's identity will be used to populate bj-Saver. Deletion of the
bj-Saver value is possible. [For Visio documents bj-saver is stored as a 'Solution XML Element', rather
than a document custom property]
Note: If both a Check for Author Label Change rule and a general Check for Label Change rule are
configured, then the Check for Author Label Change rule will apply if the current user is the 'Author',
otherwise the general Check for Label Change rule will apply.
Note: The operation of this rule is limited under CAD Classifier for DraftSight . If a rule triggers, a
w arning is presented to the user, but the action cannot be cancelled regardless of the buttons visible.
The rule has the form:

p380
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Check for author label change and permit alteration. Warn user if check fails with this
message
 Perform the operations common to all rules as described in Check rules (a) (Select policy,
Set rules tab, etc).
 Select the alteration token which will present you w ith the following per-selector choices :

Label Change Check Options

Permitted Change Description

Any change is the default and means that the user may make any change to
this selector value but the rule is not triggered. Rule success
auditing still occurs.
No change means that no change is permitted and therefore any change to the
label value for this selector triggers the rule and perform the
prevent / warn / audit action.
Downgrade only appears for Hierarchic selectors, and means that the user is
permitted to dow ngrade the value of a hierarchic selector, any
attempt to raise the value (e.g. from Public to Internal) triggers the
rule and perform the prevent / w arn / audit action.
Upgrade only appears for Hierarchic selectors, and means that the user is
permitted to upgrade the value of a hierarchic selector, any attempt
to lower the value (e.g. from Internal to Public) triggers the rule
and perform the prevent / w arn / audit action.

Additional Values only appears for Multiple selection list selectors indicating that the
user may add additional values, but may not remove any existing
values set.

Removing values only appears for Multiple selection list selectors indicating that the
user may remove values, but may not add additional values.

Increase Date only appears for Date picker or Date offset selectors, indicating that
the user can set a date / choose a new offset that results in a date
later than any currently applied date

Decrease Date only appears for Date picker or Date offset selectors, indicating that
the user can set a date / choose a new offset that results in a date
earlier than any currently applied date.

Note: The upgrade dow ngrade check feature is only applicable if you have designated a

p381
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Selector available in the Policy to be Hierarchic (see Properties (Selector values) Hierarchy
Setting).
Note: If the Microsoft Office auto save feature is enabled in any of the applications, the
user warning messages may be displayed when the auto save feature executes.
 Set / unset Allow multiple rules of this type . By default (Disabled), Classifier
Administration will detect duplicate rules of this type and only action 'the first' in the rules
tree. Enabling this setting means that Classifier w ill action each of the 'duplicate' rules in
turn - which may of course lead to multiple policy check dialogs.
Note: Each potentially duplicate rule must have the setting enabled, otherwise duplicates
are not allowed. Assign the required Warn user and this message settings as described in
Warn / Prevent / Audit / Challenge options for Check rules .
 Click OK and Next on the edit template screen and complete the wizard sequence by
supplying a name for the rule.

Check for label change

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
This rule is applicable to all applications.
Note: A single Check for label change rule may be defined for SharePoint. However, SharePoint
Classifier limits the scope for label changing. See SharePoint Classifier Guide / Viewing and
Changing Label Value after upload section for further details.
Note: The operation of this rule is limited under CAD Classifier for DraftSight . If a rule triggers, a
w arning is presented to the user, but the action cannot be cancelled regardless of the buttons visible.
Note: Mail Add-in only supports this rule w hen forwarding or replying to a message item (not for
meeting requests etc).
The rule can be used to limit user's ability to change labels:

 To change labels on existing documents – that is if they open an existing document that is labelled
any changes to the label are policed according to this rule.

 To limit the user's ability to change labels if using Sent or Received email or web email messages as
the basis for a new email message. Thus the option affects Reply to / Forw arding and Re-send
actions and limits the user’s ability to manipulate the label for the new email message (which uses
the label from the existing email message as its initial label value).
Note: If both a Check for Author Label Change rule and a general Check for Label Change rule are
configured, then the Check for Author Label Change rule will apply if the current user is the 'Author',
otherwise the general Check for Label Change rule will apply.
The rule has the form:
Check for label change and permit alteration. Warn user if check fails with this message
 Perform the operations common to all rules as described in Check rules (a) (Select policy,
Set rules tab, etc).
 Select the alteration token which will present you w ith the following per-selector choices :

p382
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Label Change Check Options

Any change is the default and means that the user may make any change to this selector
value but the rule is not triggered. Rule success auditing will still occur.
No change means that no change is permitted and therefore any change to the label value
for this selector w ill trigger the rule and perform the prevent / warn / audit action.
Downgrade will only appear for Hierarchic selectors, and means that the user is permitted
to dow ngrade the value of a hierarchic selector, any attempt to raise the value (e.g. from
Public to Internal) w ill trigger the rule and perform the prevent / warn / audit action.
Note: Mobile Classifier w ill treat the Downgrade setting the same as Any change.
Upgrade will only appear for Hierarchic selectors, and means that the user is permitted to
upgrade the value of a hierarchic selector, any attempt to lower the value (e.g. from
Internal to Public) w ill trigger the rule and perform the prevent / warn / audit action.
Note: Mobile Classifier w ill treat the Upgrade setting the same as Any change.
Additional Values will only appear for Multiple selection list selectors indicating that the
user may add additional values, but may not remove any existing values set.
Removing values will only appear for Multiple selection list selectors indicating that the
user may remove values, but may not add additional values.
Increase Date will only appear for Date picker or Date offset selectors, indicating that the
user can set a date / choose a new offset that results in a date later than any currently
applied date.
Decrease Date will only appear for Date picker or Date offset selectors, indicating that the
user can set a date / choose a new offset that results in a date earlier than any currently
applied date.
Note: The upgrade dow ngrade check feature is only applicable if you have designated a
Selector available in the Policy to be Hierarchic (see Selector Value Properties Hierarchy
Setting).
Note: If the Microsoft Office auto save feature is enabled in any of the applications, the
user warning messages may be displayed when the auto save feature executes.
 Set / unset Allow multiple rules of this type . By default (Disabled), Classifier
Administration will detect duplicate rules of this type and only action 'the first' in the rules
tree. Enabling this setting means that Classifier w ill action each of the 'duplicate' rules in
turn - which may of course lead to multiple policy check dialogs.
Note: Each potentially duplicate rule must have the setting enabled, otherwise duplicates
are not allowed.
 Assign the required Warn user and this message settings as described in Warn / Prevent /
Audit / Challenge options for Check rules .
 Click OK and Next on the edit template screen and complete the wizard sequence by
supplying a name for the rule.

p383
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Check for the high-water mark

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
Note: This rule is only applicable to Email, OWA and Notes Classifier.
This rule can be configured to apply checks when sending an email or w eb email message to ensure that
the email message Label ‘dominates’ labels associated with any attachments (including attached email
messages, and documents in .ZIP files). The checks are limited to attachment types supported by
Classifier (see Appendix - Label Propagation Mechanisms ).
Examples of the end user experience when these rules are triggered can be found in Attachment
Handling.
Note: Saving as PDF: You can populate various standard document properties ( Title, Author,
Subject and Keywords) that will be propagated if you save an Office document as PDF. However,
Office applications do NOT propagate any Custom Properties to the PDF. In particular the
bjDocumentSecurityLabel is NOT propagated. Email, OW A and Notes Classifier will check defined
Label Locations for recognisable labels in standard PDF file properties for the Check for the
high-water mark and Add an attachment list rules.
Note: For Outlook Emails, the operation of this check is modified if Automatically Elevate email label is
Enabled. If the label can be elevated automatically to dominate all attachments ( Label Dominance), the
user will not be involved in the operation regardless of the rule settings.
Due to the nature of the OWA and Notes environments it is not possible to support an equivalent to the
Automatically elevate email label feature. In some unusual circumstances this can give rise to different
user experiences as described in User experience variance betw een Email, OWA and Notes.
The rule has the form:
Check for the high-w ater mark of all attachments. Warn user if check fails with this message
 Perform the operations common to all rules as described in Check rules (a) (Select policy,
Set rules tab, etc).
 There are no rule specific settings applicable to these rules.
 Assign the required Warn user and this message settings as described in Warn / Prevent /
Audit / Challenge options for Check rules .
 Click OK and Next on the edit template screen and complete the wizard sequence by
supplying a name for the rule.
Note: A High-water mark check including Visio attachments requires that Visio is installed for the check
to complete successfully. If Visio is not installed, a prompt may appear to install Visio. The same
consideration applies to Visio files inside a ZIP. OWA does not support High-w ater mark checks for Visio
files.
Note: Embedded images may be excluded from these checks using the Include embedded images when
performing attachment checks setting.

Attachment Handling

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
Note: Opening attachments from emails and then attempting to change the Label is not recommended
because this can lead to Email Classifier only seeing the original attachment. It is strongly
recommended to save the attachment first, amend it, and then re-attach it.
Note: OWA Classifier does not support checking of Labels on Visio files since it requires that the
application is installed on the server.
Note: Images pasted into a message (e.g. using a 'Snipping tool') appear as an unlabelled attachment
but with no meaningful name (file type) and as a consequence these are ignored by high-water mark
checks.
Note: ADS (Additional Data Stream) - Email Classifier (Outlook) can access label values stored in ADS
for an attachment (e.g. as might be set on a text file by File Classifier), and use that value as part of
high-water mark checks. Any value found is then stored w ith the attachment and is available for use in a

p384
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

subsequent Forw ard action. However:

- Saving any attachment w ill NOT preserve ADS information.
- Attaching a file using drag and drop will NOT preserve ADS information.

Selecting an ADS labelled item in explorer and then invoking Send to w ill NOT provide access to the
label value.
Email, OWA and Notes Classifier can be configured to take account of the label values of attachments
w hen performing high-w ater mark checks w hen sending an email, web or Notes email. Further details
on how Email, OWA and Notes Classifier try to determine a label value for various file types can be
found in Appendix - Label Propagation Mechanisms .
Note: By default documents embedded in Office documents will be ignored when performing high-water
mark checks. This behaviour can be modified using the HW MCheckEmbeddedOfficeDocuments registry
setting (see Client Configuration Registry settings ).
Note: Outlook - You can control how embedded images are handled using the Include embedded
images when performing attachment checks setting.
The checks are intended to ensure the Email label dominates any attachment labels (see Label
Dominance).
If the high-water mark check fails and the setting Automatically elevate email label (Outlook Emails
only) is set then the software will try to apply a label that allows the check to pass (Least upper
bound).
If this setting is not Enabled, or the software cannot automatically rectify the problem, then the sender
is presented w ith a dialog (examples below) presenting the possible actions as permitted by the Allow /
Warn settings in the Check for the high-water mark rule.
Note: OWA and Notes Classifier do not support Automatically elevate email label, nor Ensure label
dominates all portion markings. In some circumstances this can give rise to different user experiences
as described in User experience variance betw een Email, OWA and Notes.
Zipped Files Handling
It is possible to send an email or web email message containing a compressed zipped file. These
compressed zipped files may contain labelled items. Upon sending an email message containing zipped
files as an attachment, Email, OWA and Notes Classifier will attempt to de-compress these zip files and
check the contents for any Classifier labelled items (e.g. Word, Excel or PowerPoint document) include
their labels in the high-w ater mark checks.
Attempts to access encrypted .ZIP files triggers a high-water mark check failure if the setting Warn if file
contents cannot be accessed is Enabled. If the setting is disabled, failures are ignored by the check.
Similarly failure to access a file w ithin a ZIP file triggers a warning depending upon the setting.
Note: Email, OWA and Notes Classifier impose no limit on the nesting levels in a ZIP file, but have only
been tested to de-compress to a nesting level of 7.
High-water mark check failure user interface
If high-water mark checks are applied, then Classifier performs the necessary checks and presents a
dialog should one or more attachments fail the checks. The failing attachments are listed (under details)
along with a reason for failure (either the attachment label value, or "Failed to access archive"). If Allow
manual upgrade when sending messages is Enabled AND a high-water mark label can be derived
(and Automatically elevate email label is Disabled), then both the Upgrade Message and Remove
buttons will be presented; otherwise only the Remove button will be available. Clicking Upgrade
Message will raise the label to the high-w ater mark value; clicking Remove will remove the
attachment.

p385
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Attachment Check
The user selects from the available options - Remove / Upgrade Message ( Outlook Emails only), Back
or Continue.

OWA Attachment Check

Note: OWA Classifier does not support the Automatically elevate email label setting supported by Email
Classifier. This is because the nature of OWA Classifier architecture means that there is no means of
informing the user of any actions taken.

User experience variance between Email, OWA and Notes

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
Email Classifier (Outlook) supports two settings that OWA Classifier and Notes Classifier do not:

 Automatically elevate email label

 Ensure label dominates all portion markings

p386
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

If these settings are enabled, the user experience of an apparently similar sequence may be different as
outlined in the following examples:
A With a high-water mark check configured and Automatically elevate email label enabled:
Draft a message and attach a document w ith a label value 'above' the label set on the
message; then click Send.
o Under Outlook the Automatically elevate email label setting w ill come into play and,
assuming that the document label is suitable, the message label w ill be raised automatically
and message submission can proceed w ithout user involvement.
o Under OW A and Notes the high-water mark check will be triggered and the user w ill be
asked to resolve the mismatch.
B With high-water mark and label change checks configured, and with Automatically elevate
email label, Ensure label dominates all portion markings and Portion Marking enabled
for Outlook:
Define a rule to add to Subject as a marking prefix (e.g. a parsable marking such as [RES] for
Restricted),
Reply to a message that contains a 'high' label value in its Subject prefix (e.g. [RES]),
Change the label on the (reply) message to a 'lower' level (e.g. Public)
Click Send.
o Under Outlook, the Ensure label dominates all portion markings setting w ill cause [RES] in
the received Subject to activate the Automatically elevate email label action to reset the
label to [RES] and the submission proceeds w ithout user involvement.
o Under OW A and Notes the label change rule w ill be triggered A
( utomatically elevate
email label and Portion Marking are not supported) and the user is asked to resolve the
issue.

Check clearance for attachments, recipients or originator

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
Note: Notes Classifier only supports domain based recipient clearance checks.
Note: Mobile Classifier only supports domain based recipient clearance checks, and does NOT support
Originator clearance checks.
Note: Mail Add-in does not support Check clearance for originator. Check clearance for recipients /
attachments only supports SMTP domain clearance checks.
These rules can be used if your configuration has Clearance features configured (see Clearance settings
). You can configure rules to check the clearance of the Originator, or Recipients or both. These checks
are performed when a message is sent.
Definition of these rules is straightforward and described below. Implementation of the checking process
and related Classifier configuration settings is described in Perform Clearance Checks when sending
messages.
Note: When Recipient Checks are performed, then the membership of any distribution group (DG) is
also checked (not Notes).
Note: Outlook Emails only - If a member of a DG is ‘removed’ as part of the Remove action then the DG
is replaced by the expanded set of ‘cleared’ members prior to submission.
Note: Attachment clearance checks check that the recipient clearance (how ever derived) allows each
individual attachment to be sent, as opposed to a High-water mark check which calculates the
high-water mark across all the attachments and the message label before performing a recipient
clearance check.
Note: Embedded images may be excluded from these checks using the Include embedded images when
performing attachment checks setting.
Note: Recipient clearance check is not supported for tasks.
These rules have the form:

p387
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Check clearance for attachments . Warn user if check fails with this message
Check clearance for recipients . Warn user if check fails with this message
Check clearance for originator . Warn user if check fails with this message
See Perform Clearance Checks when sending messages for details of how these checks are
implemented
 Perform the operations common to all rules as described in Check rules (a) (Select policy,
Set rules tab, etc).
 There are no rule specific settings applicable to these rules.
See Check attachments/recipients/Originator - Warn / Prevent for a description of the end
user experience when these checks are triggered.
 Assign the required Warn user and this message settings as described in Warn / Prevent /
Audit / Challenge options for Check rules .
 Click OK and Next on the edit template screen and complete the wizard sequence by
supplying a name for the rule.

Check subject length

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
Note: These rules are only applicable to Email and OWA Classifier.
These rules can be used to check that the message subject size is w ithin site defined values. The rules
have the form:
Check subject length does not exceed these characters). Warn user if check fails with this
message
Check subject length exceeds these characters. Warn user if check fails with this message
 Perform the operations common to all rules as described in Check rules (a) (Select policy,
Set rules tab, etc).
 Select the these size token w hich will present you with a text entry dialog allowing you to
enter a numeric value for the Upper/Lower subject size.

Supply size or number

 Enter the required value in bytes.
 The Subject Length check takes place before any Subject Prefix/Suffix rule is applied.
 Assign the required Warn user and this message settings as described in Warn / Prevent /
Audit / Challenge options for Check rules .
 Click OK and Next on the edit template screen and complete the wizard sequence by
supplying a name for the rule.

Check message size

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a

p388
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

rule or Edit rule

Note: These rules are only applicable to Email and OWA Classifier.
Note: A message size check is only approximate and includes the message body and all attachments
(including embedded images). The check is performed before any markings or attachment list is applied
to the body (excludes recipient addresses for example).
These rules can be used to check the overall message size. The rule has the form:
Check message size including all attachments does not exceed these kilobytes(KB). Warn user
if check fails with this message
 Perform the operations common to all rules as described in Check rules (a) (Select policy,
Set rules tab, etc).
 Select the these size token w hich will present you with a text entry dialog allowing you to
enter a numeric value for the message size limit.

Supply size or number

 Enter the required value in kilobytes (KB).
 Assign the required Warn user and this message settings as described in Warn / Prevent /
Audit / Challenge options for Check rules .
 Click OK and Next on the edit template screen and complete the wizard sequence by
supplying a name for the rule.

Check content

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
Note: This rule is only applicable to Email Classifier, Office Classifier (Word, Excel and Pow erPoint) and
Notes Classifier.
Note: Content checking of RMS protected items never yields a match as the content is not accessible.
Note: Embedded images are excluded from Outlook Content Checks.
You must have configured one or more "matchers" as described in Content Library before you can
configure these rules.
See Content Checking User view for further details of how the checks are performed and the user
interaction.
Further control of the operation of a content check is provided through the following General Settings:

 Content checking - case sensitive .

 Content checking - include document properties

The rule has the form:
Check content for this. Warn user if check fails with this message and Show hits
 Perform the operations common to all rules as described in Check rules (a) (Select policy,
Set rules tab, etc).
 Select this choose one or more Matchers to be used when performing this content check.

p389
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Choose Content Matchers

 Set / unset Allow multiple rules of this type . By default (Disabled), Classifier
Administration will detect duplicate rules of this type and only action 'the first' in the rules
tree. Enabling this setting means that Classifier w ill action each of the 'duplicate' rules in
turn - which may of course lead to multiple policy check dialogs.
Note: Each potentially duplicate rule must have the setting enabled, otherwise duplicates
are not allowed.
 Click OK.
 Select Show hits.

Show hits
 Check the Show highlighted content matches if you want the user to see full detail. If
Show highlighted content matches is unchecked, the user will see no details of matches
found.
Note: Highlighting of matches in PDF files is only possible if Adobe Reader / Adobe Acrobat
if Edit > Preferences > Search > Enable search highlights from external server is
Enabled.
 Assign the required Warn user and this message settings as described in Warn / Prevent /
Audit / Challenge options for Check rules .
 Click OK and Next on the edit template screen and supply a name to complete the wizard.

Check number of recipients

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
Note: These rules are only applicable to Email and OWA Classifier and are not supported for tasks.
Note: The number of recipients check will, where possible, include the number of recipients
introduced by Distribution Lists. The number of recipients check is performed before any Add these
addresses to recipient type rule.

p390
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

The rule has the form:

Check number of recipients does not exceed these. Warn user if check fails with this
message
 Perform the operations common to all rules as described in Check rules (a) (Select policy,
Set rules tab, etc).
 For Check number of recipients rules (Email and OWA Classifier only):
 Select the these token which will present you with a text entry dialog allowing you to enter
a numeric value.

Supply size or number

 Enter the required value.
 Assign the required Warn user and this message settings as described in Warn / Prevent /
Audit / Challenge options for Check rules .
 Click OK and Next on the edit template screen and complete the wizard sequence by
supplying a name for the rule.

Check for these recipients

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
Note: This rule is only applicable to Email and OW A Classifier and is not supported for tasks.
Note: The Recipient type check is performed before any action to add additional recipients.
The rule allows you to check for use of a particular recipient type. For example you may wish to
discourage the use of Bcc. The rule has the form:
Check for these recipients . Warn user if check fails with this message
 Perform the operations common to all rules as described in Check rules (a) (Select policy,
Set rules tab, etc).
 Select these (the recipient type token) which will present you with a dialog allowing you to
choose w hich type of recipient the check applies (To, Cc or Bcc).

To Cc Bcc
 Set / unset Allow multiple rules of this type . By default (Disabled), Classifier

p391
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Administration will detect duplicate rules of this type and only action 'the first' in the rules
tree. Enabling this setting means that Classifier w ill action each of the 'duplicate' rules in
turn - which may of course lead to multiple policy check dialogs.
Note: Each potentially duplicate rule must have the setting enabled, otherwise duplicates
are not allowed.
 Assign the required Warn user and this message settings as described in Warn / Prevent /
Audit / Challenge options for Check rules .
 Click OK and Next on the edit template screen and complete the wizard sequence by
supplying a name for the rule.

Check for Reply to All response

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
Note: This rule is only applicable to Email Classifier.
The rule allows you (for example) to limit use of the Reply to All action.
If Warn user is set to Prevent, Classifier will attempt to disable the Reply to all button. How ever, it is
sometimes possible for a user to circumvent this disabling. If the setting is Warn, or the user finds a
w ay to circumvent the disablement, the user is prompted in the usual manner.
The rule has the form:
Check for Reply to All response and Warn user if check fails with this message
 Perform the operations common to all rules as described in Check rules (a) (Select policy,
Set rules tab, etc).
 Assign the required Warn user and this message settings as described in Warn / Prevent /
Audit / Challenge options for Check rules .
 Click OK and Next on the edit template screen and complete the wizard sequence by
supplying a name for the rule.

Check for use of default label

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
Note: This rule is applicable to Email, OWA and Office Classifier, but not Notes or SharePoint Classifier).
This rule might be used to draw the user's attention to the fact that they are sending an email or saving
/ printing a document w ith the default label value. This may be useful if for example you have defined a
default label setting in the policy that limits circulation forcing users to specifically choose another label
value to achieve a broader circulation.
Note: This Check for use of default label rule only takes effect the first time a message is sent. If the
user changes the label to a different value then back to the default, the rule still fires. The rule does not
apply to replies or forwards.
Note: Availability of the <Label> specific variant of the Check for default rule might seem unnecessary.
However, it is included for consistency and may still be configured.
The rule has the form:
Check for use of default label . Warn user with this message
 Perform the operations common to all rules as described in Check rules (a) (Select policy,
Set rules tab, etc).
 Assign the required Warn user and this message settings as described in Warn / Prevent /
Audit / Challenge options for Check rules .
 Click OK and Next on the edit template screen and complete the wizard sequence by
supplying a name for the rule.

p392
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Check with the user

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
Note: This rule is applicable to Email, OWA, Notes, Office Classifier and File Classifier
Note: The operation of this rule is limited under CAD Classifier for DraftSight . If a rule triggers, a
w arning is presented to the user, but the action cannot be cancelled regardless of the buttons visible.
This rule type can be used so that (for example) the user's attention is drawn towards the action they
are about to perform or to remind them of site process requirements they should follow prior to
sending a message or saving / printing a document. Such rules will take effect every time a message is
sent, or document is saved or printed.
The rule has the form:
Check with the user and Show Fix option. Warn user with this message
 Perform the operations common to all rules as described in Check rules (a) (Select policy,
Set rules tab, etc).
 Set the Show / Hide Fix option

Show or Hide the Fix button

Note: The default is to Show the Fix button which will be assumed for any rules defined
prior to this option being available (3.10).
 Assign the required Warn user and this message settings as described in Warn / Prevent /
Audit / Challenge options for Check rules .
 Click OK and Next on the edit template screen and complete the wizard sequence by
supplying a name for the rule.

Check these selectors for expired dates

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
Note: This rule is not applicable to Notes Classifier.
Note: The operation of this rule is limited under CAD Classifier for DraftSight . If a rule triggers, a
w arning is presented to the user, but the action cannot be cancelled regardless of the buttons visible.
Note: This check is performed when opening a document (Office Classifier); when sending a message
(Email Classifier and OW A Classifier); when setting the classification on a file (File Classifier); and when
the label dialog is opened (SharePoint Classifier).
The rule allows you to warn users that they are about to view / send an item that includes a date
selector item that has expired. The check compares the date in the item classification with the current
local date. If the current local date is later than the date in the item classification, the rule fires and the
relevant warn action taken. The rule has the form:
Check these selectors for expired dates . Warn user if check fails with this message
 Perform the operations common to all rules as described in Check rules (a) (Select policy,
Set rules tab, etc).

p393
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Select these which will present you with a dialog allowing you which of the date selectors
are to be checked. If you do not have any Date picker or Date offset selectors defined in the
policy the list will be empty.

Label Expiry
 Choose the selectors that are to be checked for expiry.
 Set / unset Allow multiple rules of this type . By default (Disabled), Classifier
Administration will detect duplicate rules of this type and only action 'the first' in the rules
tree. Enabling this setting means that Classifier w ill action each of the 'duplicate' rules in
turn - which may of course lead to multiple policy check dialogs.
Note: Each potentially duplicate rule must have the setting enabled, otherwise duplicates
are not allowed.
 Assign the required Warn user and this message settings as described in Warn / Prevent /
Audit / Challenge options for Check rules .
 Click OK and Next on the edit template screen and complete the wizard sequence by
supplying a name for the rule.

Check for additional recipients on reply or forward

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy} / [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
Note: This rule is only applicable to Email, OWA Classifier and Mail Add-in.
Note: Mail Add-in only supports this rule w hen forwarding or replying to a message item (not for
meeting requests etc.).
This rule might be used to draw the user's attention to the fact that they are forwarding or replying to
an email and have inserted additional recipients (you can remove recipients and the rule will pass).
The rule has the form:
Check recipients list for additions on reply or forward. Warn user with this message
 Perform the operations common to all rules as described in Check rules (a) (Select policy,
Set rules tab, etc).
 Assign the required Warn user and this message settings as described in Warn / Prevent /
Audit / Challenge options for Check rules .
 Click OK and Next on the edit template screen and complete the wizard sequence by
supplying a name for the rule.

Check for unlabelled attachments

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule

p394
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Note: This rule is only applicable to Email Classifier and Notes Classifier.
Note: Embedded images may be excluded from these checks using the Include embedded images when
performing attachment checks setting.
This rule might be used to draw the user's attention to the fact that they are sending an email
containing an attachment that is unlabelled when attachments of that type would normally be labelled
(e.g. an unlabelled Word document).
Note: Pasting images into a message (e.g. using a 'Snipping tool') does not trigger an attachment
check as there is no meaningful file name (file type) associated with the 'attached image'.
The rule allows you to configure the attachment types (file extensions) that trigger the rule.
The rule has the form:
Check for these unlabelled attachments. Warn user with this message
 Perform the operations common to all rules as described in Check rules (a) (Select policy,
Set rules tab, etc).
 Select these and a dialog is presented allowing you to control the file extensions that will
trigger the rule.

Unlabelled attachment types

 Assign the required Warn user and this message settings as described in Warn / Prevent /
Audit / Challenge options for Check rules .
 Click OK and Next on the edit template screen and supply a name for the rule to complete
the wizard.

Check for a Suggested Classification

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
Note: This rule is only applicable to EMail Classifier, Word, Excel, Pow erPoint, Project and Visio.
This rule might be used to check aspects of the document/message (as defined by the associated
conditions) and to suggest modifications to the current Classification according to the Classification
Settings defined by Edit Classification.

Suggested Classification Processing

All Suggested Classifications defined for the policy are checked. If the conditions associated with a
Suggested Classification are met then that Suggested classification is applicable.

The set of applicable Suggested Classifications is then checked as follows:

 If one applicable Suggested Classification sets a value for a selector and another applicable
Suggested Classification Clears that selector then Classifier stops the process and the defined
Warn action is invoked using the 'cannot be applied' message.

 If one or more Suggested Classifications are applicable, Classifier will attempt to apply each of the
applicable Classification settings. Classifier uses its high-water mark algorithm to determine whether

p395
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

a defined selector value should be applied. It then takes notice of any Clear setting(s).
Note: This rule is applied before the Check mandatory selector rule, so the option to Clear a
selector value should be used with care.

 If the Suggested Classification includes a setting that cannot be applied to the current Classification
(e.g. set a value for a single selection non-hierarchic selector that already has a different value
defined), then Classifier stops the process and the defined Warn action is invoked with the 'cannot
be applied' message.

 If all the applicable Suggested Classifications are successfully processed and the resulting
Classification is different to the original Classification then the Automatically/Manually apply
setting is invoked. That is:
Manually apply - the user is warned using the 'suggested classification available' message.
Automatically apply - any suggested classifications that are designated as Automatically apply if
possible will be automatically applied (if possible) with any unprocessed suggested classification
being flagged to the user using the 'suggested classification available' message.

The rule has the form:

Check for a suggested classification and Automatically apply. Warn the user with this
message if a suggested classification is available for manual application, or this message if the
suggested classification cannot be applied.
 Perform the operations common to all rules as described in Check rules (a) (Select policy,
Set rules tab, etc).
 Assign the required Warn user and this message settings as described in Warn / Prevent /
Audit / Challenge options for Check rules .
 Click OK and Next on the edit template screen and complete the wizard sequence by
supplying a name for the rule.

User Driven Suggested Classification

There is a ‘suggested classification check’ which can be configured to be run when a message is sent or a
document is saved. The suggested classification can be run on demand

Enabled Via Policy Setting

When messages are configured to display when a suggestion can be found, can ’t be found, or can’t be
resolved (this means a clash of 2 or more suggestions that can ’t be decided between).

Note: Suggested Classifications can be run on demand by enabling the "Allow user driven suggested
classification" setting.

p396
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Enabling the "Allow user driven suggested classification" setting. The suggested classifications can be
selected in the "Text to display" drop down menus.

The messages are configured in the ‘User Message Library’ of the Classification Administration Server:

To configure a message:

1. Go to the User Message Library.

p397
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Adding a new user message.

2. Select Add a New Message. An Add User Message dialog window w ill appear.
3. Fill in the fields (Name, Language, Message Text, Help URL ).
4. To finish, click on the OK button.

Check RMS user defined permissions for uncleared

recipients
Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
Note: This rule is only applicable to W ord, Excel and PowerPoint.
Note: This rule is ONLY meaningful if your users have a w orking RMS system.

This rule will check any Ad Hoc RMS protection applied to a docum ent to ensure that any
users given access are 'cleared' (SMTP dom ain clearance) for the current label.

The rule is configured in the sam e manner as desc ribed in Check clearance for attachments,
recipients or originator.

Check for RMS protection

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
Note: This rule is only applicable to W ord, Excel and PowerPoint.

p398
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Note: This rule is ONLY meaningful if your users have a working RMS system.
For example, an attempt to invoke the Apply Ad Hoc Protection button without RMS established may
cause the application to crash.
This rule is used to inform the user that no RMS protection has yet been applied.
The rule has the form:
Check for RMS protection. Warn user if check fails with this message
 Perform the operations common to all rules as described in Check rules (a) (Select policy,
Set rules tab, etc).
 Assign the required Warn user and this message settings as described in Warn / Prevent /
Audit / Challenge options for Check rules .
 Click OK and Next on the edit template screen and complete the sequence by supplying a
name for the rule.
If a Check for RMS protection rule is configured, Classifier w ill check a document for applied RMS. If
RMS has been applied, the check passes.
If the check fails, a policy check dialog is presented:

Check for RMS protection dialog

[The UID configuration settings (buttons and tool-tips) for the RMS protection policy check
dialog are found under the Policy Check (UID) item.]
If the user clicks Apply Template, then a list of available templates is presented.
Depending upon the whether User defined RMS protection is Enabled, the Apply Ad Hoc Protection
button may be presented which presents the following dialog:

p399
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

RMS Apply Ad Hoc Protection

[The UID configuration settings (buttons and tooltips) for the RMS Apply user defined
permissions dialog are found under the RMS Apply User Permissions (UID) item.]
The dialog presents a subset of the settings available through the standard Restrict Access
action - presenting only those items that are available programmatically.

The Edit Rule screen.

p400
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Warn / Prevent / Audit / Challenge options for Check rules

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
 All Check rules require the items below to be configured.
If a Check rule is triggered, a Policy Check dialog will be presented; the dialog contents and
buttons shown w ill depend on the configuration of the rules triggered.
Note: The operation of various check rules are limited under CAD Classifier for
DraftSight. If a rule triggers, a warning is presented to the user, but the action cannot be
cancelled regardless of the buttons visible.

Example Policy Check dialog

Note: The Back button may be unavailable in some circumstances. See Process rules when
printing and Process rules when saving.
 Select the Warn User token which will present you with a choice of Warn, Prevent, Audit
only or Challenge Advise User settings.

Action
 Choose Warn / Prevent / Audit only / Challenge as required.
Warn allows users to override the check at submission time by using the Continue button.
Prevent inhibits override capability by removing the Continue button.
Note: The Prevent option may never be used. It is included for consistency and may be
configured.
Audit only - no dialog is presented to the user, but the occurrence is audited and the action
allowed to proceed.
Challenge is similar to the Warn option above (presenting the Continue button), but
provides the ability to present the user w ith a pre-configured set of reasons. Choosing

p401
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Challenge enables the Options button which is described further under Challenge options.
Note: Mobile Classifier w ill treat a Challenge setting as if Warn had been chosen.
 Click OK.
 Select this message and choose the message to be displayed.

Choose message

Challenge Options

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Policies {policy}/ [Set Rules] -> Add a
rule or Edit rule
Note: The operation of various check rules are limited under CAD Classifier for DraftSight . If a rule
triggers, a warning is presented to the user, but the action cannot be cancelled regardless of the
buttons visible.
If (Challenge) Options is selected from the Advise user dialog (see Warn / Prevent / Audit / Challenge
options for Check rules), the Options button becomes available providing access to the Challenge
Options dialog show n below:

Challenge Options
This allows you to define how the Challenge Policy Failure dialog appears:

 The message containing the Challenge description text presented in the dialog.

p402
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Zero, one or more pre-configured reasons (messages) that appears in the dialog presented to the
user.

 Whether the user can supply a "free text" reason ( Show user input field above and Other below).

Challenge Policy Failure

The Challenge description heading and supporting text for the dialog above are configured as the
Message Title and Message Text respectively of a message within the User Message Library. The
Message Name appears in the list of messages presented.
The Challenge reasons are configured as messages with the User Message Library. The Message Name
appears in the list of messages presented in the Challenge Options dialog. The Message Title appears
as the caption alongside the radio button in the Challenge dialog, and the Message text appears as a
tool-tip, and is also included in the audit event log written.

p403
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

CLEARANCE SETTINGS
Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Clearance Settings
Note: Clearance Settings are only relevant if your site has decided to implement the Classifier
Clearance handling features.
The Clearance Settings nodes are hidden until the associated setting ( Application Settings) is Enabled.

Clearance Settings
If the Clearance settings nodes (e.g. Email Domains) do not appear then:
 Open Global Settings/Application Settings .
 Set Clearance Check email domains to Enabled if required (to allow you to configure
and use Email Domain clearances) .
 Set Clearance check Library to Enabled if required (to allow you to define clearances for
use w ith SharePoint Classifier).
 Set Dynamic Clearances to Enabled if required (to allow you to define Dynamic
Clearances)
The features supported are summarised as:
Email Domains This allows you to apply checks to messages destined for external email
domains. The clearances defined can be used by Email, OWA or Notes
Classifier, in conjunction with rules, to ensure that labelled messages are
not sent to recipients that do not have the necessary Clearance.
Clearance Library This allows you to define Clearance definitions which can then be used by
Classifier SharePoint (2016) to apply clearance based control over the
items that can be inserted into a SharePoint (2016) library.
Dynamic Clearances This allows you to define recipient Clearances derived at run time from an
items Active Directory attributes (User / Contact or Exchange Distribution
Group).
Note: For New Classifier Configurations, Dynamic Clearances are Enabled by default - although no
Dynamic Clearances are defined and therefore there is no effect.
The performance of clearance checks is controlled by the relevant application Check clearance for
attachments / recipients / originator rules. Operation of these rules and the effects of associated

p404
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

configuration settings is described in Perform Clearance Checks when sending messages .

The end user experience when these rules are triggered is described in Check
attachments/recipientsOriginator - Warn / Prevent .
Email Domain Clearances are held in the configuration and distributed via the same mechanism.
Changes to email domain clearances take effect the next time each client is started and retrieves the
updated configuration information.

Perform Clearance Checks when sending messages

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Clearance Settings
Note: Only Single Selection list and Multiple selection list selectors with Include this selector in
clearance and attachment checks set take part in Clearance Checking.
[See Check attachments/recipients/Originator - Warn / Prevent for a description of the end user
experience when these checks are triggered.]
The Configuration can use the policy rules:

 Check clearance for attachments (Email Classifier)

 Check clearance for recipients (Email, OWA, Notes and Mobile Classifier)

 Check clearance for originator (Email and OWA Classifier)

to define that, depending on the label, attachment / recipient and / or Originator clearance should be
checked if an email or w eb email message is sent. That is each recipient / originator must have a group,
specific or domain clearance that indicates they are permitted to receive / send information with the
current label. These checks are configured as described in Check rules.
Note: For the purposes of an Originator check the Originator is determined according to the Email
Classifier setting "Use From field for Originator Clearance ". By default this w ill be the identity of the
Primary Mailbox - that is the first mail box configured in the current profile.
The operation of the Clearance check is influenced by which of the following settings is enabled (see
Clearance Settings):

 Dynamic Clearances

 Clearance Check email domains (Email, OWA and Notes Classifier)

If none of the above is Enabled then no clearance checks are performed
If Dynamic Clearances are enabled, then Classifier first checks to see whether a Dynamic Clearance
for the recipient provides suitable Clearance. If no suitable dynamic clearance is available, the algorithm
w ill proceed domain clearance checks (if Enabled).
If Clearance Check email domains is set then perform clearance checks on all external recipients
using the appropriate email domain clearance value.
For Single selection list selectors , the label value must be permitted by the domain / recipient
clearance for the check to pass.
For Permissive Multi-select selectors, the domain / recipient clearance must include one of the
values in the label for the check to pass.
For Restrictive Multi-select selectors, the domain / recipient clearance must include ALL of the
values in the label for the check to pass.

Check Attachments/Recipients/Originator - Warn / Prevent

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Clearance Settings

If no Check attachment / recipients / originator rules are defined then recipient clearances are not
checked at email message submission time.
If rules are defined, and the originator / all recipients are cleared for information/ attachments within

p405
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

the current email message label then email message submission continues uninterrupted regardless of
whether Warn or Prevent is chosen.
If the originator or recipients fail the clearance check then the effect is dependent upon the
Warn/Prevent or Challenge setting in the Rule definition:

 If Audit only is set then the occurrence is audited and the email submission proceeds but requires
no user involvement.

 If Warn, Prevent or Challenge is set then email message submission is interrupted and the sender
is presented with a dialog (shown below) indicating the problem and presenting options as to how to
proceed as per the examples below.
Note: If Recipient Checks are performed, then the membership of any expanded distribution group
(DG) as governed by Always use Distribution List clearance is also checked.
Note: Outlook Emails only - If a member of a DG is ‘removed’ as part of the Remove action then the DG
is replaced by the expanded set of ‘cleared’ members prior to submission.
The dialogs below are show n in accordance with the Warn, Prevent or Challenge settings
Attachments / Recipients / Originator failing the clearance check are presented, with the text as defined
by the relevant rule(s).

Originator - Recipient Clearance Check dialog.

Clicking the Remove button (Outlook only) for recipients removes all failing recipients.
Clicking Change button (Outlook only) alongside the Originator (or the large Label button at the top of
the dialog) w ill show a label selection dialog allowing the user to change the label.
The Back button allows the user to cancel the Send action and return to the email message window to
make adjustments to the email message content and/or recipients.
The Continue button is only available if the Warn or Challenge option has been selected and if clicked
proceeds w ith the email message submission. Any clearance check failures still applicable will be
audited.

p406
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

OWA Originator - Recipient Check

If all problems are fully addressed then the message proceeds to submission. Note however that Portion
marking and / or attachment label checks may still prevent submission.

Email Domains
Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Clearance Settings  Email Domain
Clearances
Note: Not supported by Classifier Mail Add-in.
An Email Domain Clearance defines the clearance that should be assigned to a given email domain
address space.
The configuration features are only available if Clearance check email domains is Enabled as
described in Clearance Settings.
If recipient clearance checking is enabled through an appropriate Check clearance for attachments
/recipients rule for Outlook, OWA or Notes, then any external recipient is checked using an Email
domain clearance that matches their email address.
These domain clearances are administered through the Clearance Settings / Email Domain. The
following actions are supported:

 Add a new email domain clearance.

 Edit email domain clearance .
 Delete email domain clearance .
The summary display show s all defined email domain clearances and the associated clearance
information in per selector columns.
Note: You should probably establish a domain clearance setting for your own (internal) domain, and it
may be useful to establish a default (minimal) domain clearance to handle any recipient addresses that
do not match any other configured domain clearance (see Add a new email domain clearance).

p407
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Add a new email domain clearance

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Clearance Settings Email Domain

Clearances  Add a new email domain clearance
Note: Remember to establish one or more email domain clearances to cover your internal users.
 Select Email domain Clearance Configuration in the left hand pane.

Email Domains
 Choose Add a new email domain clearance . This will start a wizard.
Note: You can establish a 'default' email domain clearance (one that matches any
addresses that do not match any other configured email domain clearance) by leaving the
Email domain field blank. The resulting entry w ill appear in the summary list as Any
unmatched email domains , and operate as a backstop.

p408
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

New Domain Clearance

 Enter the Email domain Address space for the SMTP domain for w hich you wish to define a
clearance in the usual form (e.g. for a second level domain abc.xyz, or for a first level
domain xzy - no leading '.' and no '*').
 You can check Include subdomains if you want the clearance to apply to all sub domains
of that address space. So for example an address space of abc.xyz with Include
subdomains checked would apply to domains w ith addresses of pqr.abc.xyz or lmn.abc.xyz
etc.
 Check all the Label values that the domain is cleared for.
 Complete the w izard and the domain clearance entry will appear in the summary list pane.

p409
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Domain Clearance Summary

Edit email domain clearance

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Clearance Settings  Email Domain

Clearances  Edit email domain clearance

To edit the email domain clearance:

1. Select Clearance Settings / Email Domain Clearances . This will show a list of configured domain
clearances.
2. Select the relevant entry.
3. Select Edit email domain clearance . This will present a (pre-populated) Email Domain
Clearance Properties dialog box.
4. Change the Name for the SMTP domain if required in the usual form (e.g. xxx.yyy).
5. You can select the checkbox Include subdomains if you want the clearance to apply to all sub
domains of that address space. So for example an address space of abc.xyz with Include
subdomains checked would apply to domains w ith addresses of pqr.abc.xyz and lmn.abc.xyz.
6. Check all the Label values that the domain is cleared for. Complete the wizard.
7. Click on the OK button and the summary display will be updated.

Delete email domain clearance

Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Clearance Settings  Email Domain

Clearances  Delete email domain clearance

p410
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Note: Only applicable to SharePoint Classifier (3.10 or later).

To delete the email domain clearance:

1. Select Clearance Settings / Email domain clearance . This will show a list of configured domain
clearances.
2. Select the relevant Entry.
3. Select Delete email domain clearance .
4. Click on the Yes button to the delete the confirmation or No to cancel the action.

Clearance Library
Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Clearance Settings  Clearance Library
Note: Only applicable to SharePoint Classifier (3.10 or later).
The Clearance Library allows you to define Clearance definitions which can then be used by Classifier
SharePoint (2016) to apply clearance based control to the items being inserted into a SharePoint (2016)
library. That is, an item can only be inserted into a Library if its label is allowed by the clearance
associated with the Library.
These features are only available if Clearance Library is Enabled as described in Clearance Settings.
Initially there are no Clearances defined.
Each defined Clearance has a Clearances Default Labels defined. Clearances are listed alphabetically.

Clearance Library
The following functions are supported:

 Add a new clearance.

 Properties (Clearance).

p411
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Delete (Clearance).
The summary display show s all defined clearances and the associated clearance information in per
selector columns. You can reorder these columns, but not delete any of them.

Add a New Clearance

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Clearance Settings  Clearance Library

 Add a new clearance
Note: Only applicable to SharePoint Classifier (3.10 or later).
 Select Clearance Library in the left hand pane.display a dialog similar to the following:

New Clearance
 Enter the Name.
 Check all the Label values relevant to the Clearance.
 Click OK, and the domain clearance entry w ill appear in the summary list pane.

p412
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Clearance Library summary

Properties (Clearance)

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Clearance Settings  Clearance Library

 Properties clearance
Note: Only applicable to SharePoint Classifier (3.10 or later).
 Select Clearance Settings / Clearance Library . This will show a list of configured
clearances.
 Select the relevant entry.
 Choose Properties. This will display the same dialog (pre-filled) as that displayed by Add a
New Clearance.
 Change the Name as required.
 Check all the Label values relevant to the Clearance.
 Click OK, and the summary display will be updated.

Delete (Clearance)

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Clearance Settings  Clearance Library

 Delete clearance
Note: Only applicable to SharePoint Classifier (3.10 or later).
 Select Clearance Settings / Clearance Library . This will show a list of configured
clearances.
 Select the relevant Entry.
 Choose Delete clearance.

p413
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Click Y es / No to the delete confirmation.

Note: SharePoint Classifier (3.10 or later) associates the Clearance Name with a Library and then uses
that Name to access the actual Clearance from the Classifier Configuration. If the Clearance Name
cannot be found in the current Configuration, then no clearance checks will apply to the library.
Therefore take care before you delete a Clearance.

p414
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Dynamic Clearances
Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration}  Clearance Settings  Dynamic
Clearances
Dynamic Clearances allow you to define Clearances that will be determined at run time based on User
property value conditions.
Such Clearance values w ill be used if Dynamic Clearances is Enabled under Application Settings and in
the following situations:

 To check Originator Clearance in conjunction with a Check clearance for Originator rule.

 To check Recipient clearance in conjunction with a Check clearance for recipients rule.

 To check attachment clearances in conjunction with a Check clearance for attachments rule.

 To apply clearance filters to the Label dialog if Masking of selectors against clearance is Enabled.
The Conditions relating to Dynamic Clearances are similar to other conditions, but have a specific
'Condition Type' of Dynamic Clearance User Properties . They are managed as other Conditions (
Condition Library).
A configuration option Always use Distribution List clearances is supported by Email and OWA
Classifier. If the option is Disabled then DGs are always expanded. If the option is Enabled, then DG
address is used to derive a clearance (if available), otherwise the DG will be expanded to perform
clearance checks.

Add a new Dynamic Clearance

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Clearance Settings Dynamic Clearances

Add a new Dynamic Clearance
 Select Dynamic Clearances in the left hand pane.

Dynamic Clearances
 Choose Add a New Dynamic Clearance . This will display the follow ing:

p415
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Add a New Dynamic Clearance

 Enter a name for the Clearance.
 Check all the Selector values contributing to this Dynamic Clearance.
 All conditions of type 'Dynamic Clearance User Properties' defined are presented.
Select one or more existing conditions. Conditions can be created using the Condition
Library actions - indeed 'Dynamic Clearance User Properties' conditions can only be modified
/ deleted using Properties (Condition) / Delete (Condition).
Note: You can define a Dynamic Clearance with no associated conditions. In such cases the
Dynamic Clearance operates as a 'default clearance' applicable to every recipient/originator
etc..
Note: If you select multiple conditions, those conditions must All be true for the Dynamic
Clearance to be applied.
 Complete the w izard and the Dynamic Clearance entry will appear in the list.

p416
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Properties (Dynamic Clearances)

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Clearance Settings Dynamic Clearances

 Properties
 Select Dynamic Clearances in the left hand pane.
 Select the relevant Dynamic Clearance and click Properties.
 This presents the same dialog as Add a new Dynamic Clearance, populated with the existing
settings.
 Modify any elements of the Dynamic Clearance and click OK.

Delete (Dynamic Clearance)

Admin : Labelling Configurations {configuration} Clearance Settings Dynamic Clearances

 Delete
 Select Dynamic Clearances in the left hand pane.
 Select the relevant Dynamic Clearance and click Delete.
 A confirmation dialog is presented.
Note: If you delete a Dynamic Clearance, any associated Conditions are unaffected.

p417
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

EMAIL, OWA, MAIL ADD-IN, NOTES AND MOBILE

DIFFERENCES
Enabling and Disabling functionality :

 Email and Notes Classifier functionality can be enabled and disabled globally via Global Settings /
Classifier Application Settings.

 OWA Classifier functionality can only be enabled and disabled via install/remove product actions.
Browser support information can be found under Browser Support (OW A).

 Notes and Mobile Classifier functionality can only be enabled and disabled via install/remove product
actions.
Application Differences :
Taking Outlook functionality as the baseline, the follow ing topics summarise the differences betw een the
applications:

 OWA Classifier and Classifier Mail Add-in vs Email Classifier .

 Notes Classifier vs Email Classifier .

 Mobile Classifier vs Email Classifier .

p418
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

OWA Classifier and Classifier Mail Add-in vs Email

Classifier
OWA Classifier and Classifier Mail Add-in (3.10.0) support subsets of the features supported by
Email Classifier (Outlook) as detailed in the various tables in this document:

 Classifier Application Settings

 General Settings
 Rules supported
In addition there are various other differences summarised below :
Portion Marking in a message (nor any related Portion Marking features) is not supported by OWA /
Mail Add-in Classifier.

Policy Test Mode capability does not extend to testing in OWA or Mail Add-in environments.

Mail Add-in only supports messages. Other message types (e.g. appointments) are not supported.
Labelling of Calendar items is only supported in OWA Premium view.

During a Reply / Forward sequence, Email Classifier removes any existing subject markings at the time
the new message is created. Due to the environment, OWA / Mail Add-in can only 'replace' the subject
markings at the time the message is sent.

Enable/Disable of the OWA / Mail Add-in Classifier is via server based Install/Uninstall and Licence.

Message templates are not supported by OWA / Mail Add-in Classifier.

Assisted labelling and Environment properties in Marking Formats are supported by OWA / Mail Add-in
Classifier, but there are some differences.

The following are not supported:

o Favourites,
o Recently Used Labels and Portion Marks,
o Document properties in Marking Formats,
o Content Checking.
The Add Category to message rule is not supported by OWA / Mail Add-in Classifier: since Folder
View Labelling (Outlook) is not available, the category can only be set on Sent Items and the feature
w ould be incomplete.

Whilst OWA / Mail Add-in supports the Help links defined in a Classifier Configuration, the nature of
accessing these environments may mean that a defined link is not accessible due to external access
controls (e.g. additional authentication requirements).

The nature of the OWA / Mail Add-in environments means that checking must take place at the Server
(when the message is sent) and the error handling interactions do not alw ays operate quite the same
as in the Outlook client. In particular, Attachment labels are not checked until the message is sent and
it is not possible to support an equivalent to the Automatically elevate email label feature.

The server tends to run for extended periods and changes to the configuration do not take place in the
same manner as for a client (w here closing and restarting all Classifier supported applications will
ensure the latest configuration is used by a desktop client).

The end user experience may vary in some scenarios outlined in User experience variance between
Email, OWA and Notes.

Mail Add-in: On send, Classifier add-in code is invoked and Classifier performs any checks required. If
Classifier checks pass, all configured markings are applied. Note that subsequent checks by OWA/Mail
Add-in (e.g. no recipients), or indeed other add-ins, or user (e.g. no Subject) may cause message
submission to be halted w ith the draft message now showing the marking information. This is different
to Email Classifier w here Classifier is invoked after Recipient / Subject checks etc.

Notes Classifier vs Email Classifier

p419
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Notes Classifier essentially supports a subset of the features supported by Email Classifier (Outlook).
The key differences are:
 Application of RMS and S/MIME security to a message is not supported by Notes Classifier.
 Portion Marking in a message is not supported by Notes (nor any related Portion Marking features)
and attachment labels are not checked until the message is sent (there is no Automatically elevate
email label). The end user experience may vary in some scenarios as outlined in User experience
variance betw een Email, OWA and Notes.
 Enable/Disable of the Notes Classifier is via server based Install/uninstall and Licence.
 Message templates are not supported by Notes Classifier.
 Folder View labelling is not supported by Notes Classifier.
 The Favourites button is not supported under Notes 8.
 The nature of the environment means that error handling interactions does not operate quite the
same as in the Outlook client. In particular the dialogs presented if Check rules fail (e.g. Recipient
clearance or high-w ater mark checks) do NOT present the Fix actions (e.g. Upgrade, Remove), the
user has to rectify the anomalies.
 Only a subset of Classifier Applications Settings is supported by Notes Classifier.
 Only a subset of General Settings are supported by Notes Classifier.
 Only a subset of Rules are supported by Notes Classifier.

p420
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Mobile Classifier vs Email Classifier

Mobile Classifier essentially supports a subset of the features supported by Email Classifier (Outlook).
The key differences are:
 Label selection presents a Single click interface - as a consequence the policy to be used must
define single click settings.
 The label of a message is presented at the top of the message body.
 Images (e.g. in Single Click buttons) are not supported by Mobile Classifier.
 UI Definitions are not supported by Mobile Classifier, so actions on dialogs such as Back and
Continue w ill always appear as such.
 Application of RMS and S/MIME security to a message is not supported by Mobile Classifier.
 Portion Marking in a message is not supported by Mobile Classifier (nor any related Portion Marking
features).
 Enable/Disable of the Mobile Classifier is via App install/uninstall on the users device, using server
based Service Install/uninstall applying Licence control.
 Message templates are not supported by Mobile Classifier.
 Folder View labelling is not supported by Mobile Classifier.
 The Favourites, Recently Used and Options features are not supported under Mobile Classifier.
 The nature of the environment means that error handling interactions does not operate quite the
same as in the Outlook client. In particular the dialogs presented if Check rules fail (e.g. Recipient
clearance) do NOT present the Fix actions (e.g. Upgrade, Remove), the user has to use Back/
Continue rectify /ignore the anomalies.
 There are currently no Classifier Applications Settings specified for Mobile Classifier.
 Only a subset of the General Settings are supported by Mobile Classifier.
 Only a subset of Rules are supported by Mobile Classifier.

Browser Support (OWA)

OWA Classifier supports Client Basic and Client Premium.

For information regarding support for other browsers see the OWA Classifier Release Note.

Note: Chrome is the recommended browser.

The recommended browsers are:

 Google Chrome

 Microsoft Edge

 Internet Explorer 11

 Safari

 Firefox

 Opera

p421
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

CONFIGURATION DEPLOYMENT
Note: If you wish to Publish the Classifier Configuration via Active Directory then the Active Directory
Schema must be updated ( Extending the Active Directory Schema ). Schema update is not required if
you intend to Publish the configuration via file store.
If you wish to use the optional Classifier Management Agent, then this must be installed and configured
as described in the Management Agent Guide.
The schematic below shows logically how the Classifier configuration is deployed.

Configuration Deployment

Creating and Modifying the Configuration

Step 1 The process starts by the Administrator creating an initial configuration on their local
machine and evolving that configuration to the point where it is deemed suitable for
deployment to a user community. This might initially be to a pilot group or into a test
environment, but might ultimately be the entire user population.
Step 2 Once the configuration is stable the Administrator will Publish the configuration to the Master
Configuration location. This can be the Active Directory (needs Extending the Active
Directory Schema to have been run), some suitable (shared) File Store location.
You can also produce a copy of the configuration in a format suitable for retrieval from a URL
location as supported by Classifier Clients (Outlook, Word etc.) and Classifier Management
Agent using Create Web Configuration .
(Step 2A) (Modifying the configuration) If an Administrator plans to modify the Master Configuration
they must ensure their local machine holds an up to date copy of the Master Configuration -
Get Server Configuration - will overwrite any existing local copy. The Administrator can then
modify the configuration and re-publish using Publish Configuration.
Note: If you Publish the configuration to File Store you must ensure that the target (Master) location
has suitable permissions. End users should have the ability to Read from that location and
Administrators w ho are to modify the Master configuration must also have the ability to write to that
location using the netw ork path.
Classifier application retrieval of Configuration
Classifier applications need to know where to find the Master Configuration, and which Policy in the
Configuration should be used. All Classifier Applications determine this by searching Registry Key
settings in precedence order as described in Configuration Registry Search Algorithm and its sub-topics
These registry settings may be established either directly, or using Group Policy Option mechanisms as
described in:
o Set the Registry Keys Directly .

o Set the Registry Keys using Group Policy .

The next steps vary according to whether the Classifier Management Agent is in use.

p422
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Management Agent in use:

Step 3a/b The Management Agent retrieves the Master Configuration, checking for updates according
to its own configuration settings in conjunction w ith Web Host Settings if applicable. The
retrieved configuration is stored locally (Management Agent setting - CommonConfigFolder).
Step 3c The client application(s) are configured to retrieve their configuration from the location
w ritten by the Management Agent (3b).
Management Agent not in use and for applications not using the Management Agent (O WA
Classifier etc.):
Step 3/4 Each Classifier application periodically (e.g. on start up) retrieves the configuration from the
Master location, but only if the Master configuration is 'later' than the local version. For Email
and Office Classifier the Validity Period registry setting can be used to control when the
check should be performed. The retrieved configuration is stored locally unless
ClientServerOverride is Enabled, or the application (e.g. OW A) is operating in ServiceMode.
Classifier Registry Entry Grouping
The Registry entries relevant to Classifier operations are grouped as follows:

 Label Configuration policy settings to ensure that Classifier Client products (e.g. Email and Office
Classifier) will obtain their Classifier Configuration from the correct location and that users will be
assigned the correct Classifier policy (available for Local Machine and Current User). The Registry
Keys and the effects if the policy setting is not configured corresponding to these settings are
described in Label Configuration Registry Settings .
o This includes a sub-group of settings relating to Service Mode that are only available for
the Local Machine.
o Web Host Settings that are only applicable if you plan to retrieve master configuration from
a URL location.

 Client Configuration policy settings that can be used in unusual circumstances to control some
aspects of Classifier Client operation (available for Local Machine and Current User). The Registry
Keys corresponding to these settings are described in Client Configuration Registry Settings .

 Manually configurable - Settings to Auto Enable Microsoft Office Header / Footer controls .

 File Classifier policy settings (available for Local Machine and Current User) that can be used to
control aspects of File Classifier operation. These are only relevant if you are using File Classifier and
are described in File Classifier Registry settings .

 Management Agent policy settings as described in the Classifier Management Agent Guide .
Note: OWA Classifier is configured per server, and all users of that OWA server will operate under the
Configuration and Policy used by that server.
Note: OWA Classifier only changes its configuration after a restart. Thus after publishing an updated
configuration, an IISRESET w ould be required to cause OWA Classifier to use that new configuration.
Note: If you are using Group Policy mechanisms, the Client operation relies on the Group Policy settings
reaching the client. If the effects are not as expected you should run regedit and check that the relevant
entries are present. Running GPUPDATE /Force may be of assistance. Check that the client machine is
properly recognised in the domain - removing and re-introducing the client can resolve this issue.
Note: If a user is a member of more than one grouping you can use Group Policy Resultant set of Policy
(RosP) to establish the configuration they w ill actually get (i.e. the Classifier Policy they will use).

p423
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Configuration Registry Search Algorithm

Each Classifier application / service context (e.g. Email or Office Classifier, OWA Classifier, etc.) looks
for relevant configuration registry settings below various locations in the registry.
The locations searched vary with the application type and further details can be found under:

 Client Registry Locations (Email and Office Classifier, Notes Classifier, File Classifier, CAD Classifier,
Pow er Classifier for files and Power Classifier for SharePoint).

 Classifier Service Registry Locations (OWA Classifier, Classifier Reporting, SharePoint Classifier,
Classifier Management Agent).

 Exchange Classifier Registry Locations (Exchange Classifier).

 Classifier Administration Registry Locations

Client Registry Locations

This covers the Classifier Applications: Email and Office Classifier, Notes Classifier, File Classifier, CAD
Classifier, Pow er Classifier for files and Power Classifier for SharePoint.
Each will look for the configuration registry settings:

Setting (examples)
ClientServerOverride
LabelConfiguration
Policy
PolicyFileClassifier
PolicyOutlook
ServerFileSystemRoot
ServerRootType
UseWebServer etc
ValidityPeriod

in the following registry locations, in the order shown:

1. HKEY_CURRENT_USER\ SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon James\ConfigManager .
2. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTW ARE\Policies\Boldon James\ConfigManager .
3. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTW ARE\Boldon James\ConfigManager .
Note: Power Classifier for files and Power Classifier for SharePoint also provide support for their own
ServiceMode settings as documented in Pow er Classifier for Files Guide and Power Classifier for
SharePoint Guide.
Note: Application specific settings can be found in similar locations with ConfigManager replaced by the
application name (e.g. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon James\ File Classifier).
Note: For 64-bit machines that are to run 32-bit Classifier applications (e.g. Email Classifier and Office
Classifier), item 3 above would need registry keys establishing under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTW ARE\Wow6432Node\Boldon James\ConfigManager.

Classifier Service Registry Locations

This topic covers the Classifier Applications: OW A Classifier, Classifier Reporting, SharePoint Classifier,
Classifier Management Agent.
Note: If more than one service (OW A Classifier, SharePoint Classifier, etc.) is installed on a single
system, they w ill all use the same registry settings. For these services, use of ServiceMode (items 1 or 2
below ) is recommended as it ensures separation of registry key usage by these services and other

p424
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Classifier applications (e.g. Email and Office Classifier) running on the same system.
Each will look for relevant registry settings (Blank = Not used by that service):

Setting OWA Reporting SharePoint Management

Agent
(32-bit)

LabelConfiguration Y Y Y
Policy Y Y Y
ServerFileSystemRoot Y Y Y Y
ServerRootType Y Y Y Y
UseWebServer etc. Y

below the following registry locations in the order shown.

1. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTW ARE\Policies\Boldon James\ConfigManager\ServiceMode .
2. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTW ARE\Boldon James\ConfigManager\ServiceMode
3. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTW ARE\Policies\Boldon James\ConfigManager .
4. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTW ARE\Boldon James\ConfigManager .
Note: For 64-bit machines that are to run 32-bit Classifier applications (e.g. Management Agent), items
2 and 4 above would need registry keys establishing under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTW ARE\Wow6432Node\Boldon James\ConfigManager\ServiceMode or
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTW ARE\Wow6432Node\Boldon James\ConfigManager.

Exchange Classifier Registry Locations

Exchange Classifier looks for configuration registry settings:

Setting
LabelConfiguration
ServerFileSystemRoot
ServerRootType

below its own private ExchangeServiceMode branch and searches the following locations in the order
shown:
1. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon James\ConfigManager
\ExchangeServiceMode
2. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Boldon James\ConfigManager\ExchangeServiceMode
See Exchange Classifier Guide > Classifier Routing Agent ) for further information.

Classifier Administration Registry Locations

The Classifier Administration Server uses the following registry location to store the last "published to"
location:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\ SOFTWARE\Boldon James\ConfigManager.

Set the Registry Keys directly

The screen shot below shows an example (from a 64-bit environment) of the values you need to
establish if you are setting the keys for end users under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Boldon
James\ConfigManager that control access to the Classifier Configuration information.

p425
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

The values w ill of course depend on your local environment and whether you are using Active Directory
or File Store as the Master Configuration location, and whether Classifier Management Agent is
deployed. See description in Label Configuration Registry Settings for more information.
Note: For Management Agent, OW A Classifier and SharePoint Classifier it is recommended that registry
entries are established under ServiceMode (see Label Configuration Registry Settings ).

Local Machine Registry Keys

Set the Registry Keys using Group Policy

This assumes that your Group Policy has been extended as described in Applying the supplied ADM/
ADMX/ADML files.
The following types of Group Policy settings are provided for Classifier:

 Label Configuration settings described in Label Configuration Registry Settings .

o A sub group of settings relating to Service Mode are only available for the Local Machine.

 Client Configuration settings described in Client Configuration Registry Settings .

 File Classifier settings are only relevant if you are using File Classifier. They are described in File
Classifier Registry settings .

 Management Agent settings are only relevant if you are deploying the Classifier Management
agent. These settings are described in the Management Agent Guide .
The mechanisms are the same for each of the above. The examples below cover the Label Configuration
settings as these are the most likely to be used.
 Firstly define the settings that are to be common to all users of a PC (i.e.
HKEY_Local_Machine).

p426
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 For 2003; from Active Directory Users and Computers select the domain (e.g.
CLASSIFIER.TEST) and select Properties from the context menu. Select the Group Policy
tab.
 For 2010; use Group Policy Management Editor MMC to get directly to the tree.
 Select the Default Domain Policy entry and click Edit.
 Select Computer Configuration / (Policies /) Administrative Template / (Classic
Administrative Templates) / Boldon James / Label Configuration which will present
the following settings:

Set HKLM Group Policy Settings

 Select Configuration Distribution Server Type and choose Properties (2003) or Edit
policy setting (2010)

Configuration Distribution Server Type

p427
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Ensure that the setting is Enabled, and choose which method you w ish to use (File System
or Active Directory). Click OK.
 If you choose File System you will then have to define the (shared) location of the
configuration files by selecting File Based Configuration Location , choosing Properties
and then entering the network path to the location (e.g. \\ICS-SVR-1\Classifier
Configuration) as per the example below.

Define Master Configuration Location

 Secondly apply the settings that may vary per user
 Select User Configuration / Administrative Template / (Classic Administrative
Templates) / Boldon James / Label Configuration which will present the following
settings:

Set HKCU Group Policy Settings

p428
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Select Label Configuration Name and choose Properties. Ensure that it is Enabled and
enter the name of your Configuration (e.g. Classifier test). Click OK.
 Select Policy Name and choose Properties. Ensure that the setting is Enabled and enter
the name of the policy applicable (e.g. All Users). Click OK.
 If you need to set the Configuration Validity Period - described in Label Configuration
Registry Settings, then select Downloaded Configuration Validity Period and choose
Properties.
 Ensure that it is Enabled and enter the required validity period in hours. Setting a value of
0 (zero) will restore default operation so that the Configuration validity is checked each time
a Classifier enabled application starts. Click OK.

Applying supplied ADM/ADMX/ADML files

Classifier Administration supplies various .ADM and ADMX/ADML files available from the sub-folder
Classifier Group Policy Templates beneath the Classifier Administration Server folder in the Base
Bundle. These can be used to extend the group policy settings. The steps below provide an example of
how to extend Group Policy settings using the supplied files.
ADM style files:
o ClassifierConfig.ADM and ClassifierConfigPerUser.ADM .

o FileClassifierConfig.ADM and FileClassifierConfigPerUser.ADM (only relevant if you are

using File Classifier, but benign if installed and not used).
Note: If when upgrading to a later version of Classifier Administration the settings supported by
an ADM file have been extended, you will have to Remove the old template before adding the
new ADM file.
The precise steps will depend on your environment.
 Navigate to Computer Configuration.
 For Window s Server 2003 this may be from Active Directory Users and Computers; select
CLASSIFIER.TEST and select Properties from the context menu, then select the Group
Policy Tab; Select the Default Domain Policy entry and click Edit.
 For Windows Server 2008 you can use the Group Policy Management Editor MMC snap-in
to get directly to the target tree. Expand Domains and then expand the domain (e.g.
CLASSIFIER.TEST) and select Default Domain Policy below that. Choose Edit... from the
context menu.

Group Policy Management

 Select Computer Configuration / (Policies /) Administrative Templates and select
Add/Remove Templates from the context menu.

p429
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Select Add and then brow se to the relevant install location (e.g. Program Files\Boldon
James\Classifier Administration ).
 Select the relevant ADM files and click Open followed by Close. The files will be added
w hich will add new entries below both the Computer Configuration and User Configuration
Administrative Template nodes.
ADMX/ADML style files (provided in pairs)
o ClassifierManagementAgent.admx and ClassifierManagementAgent.adml (these are
only relevant if you are using the Classifier Management Agent, but benign if applied and
not used).
 Copy the pair of files from the Classifier Group Policy Templates folder:
 ClassifierManagementAgent.admx to Windows\PolicyDefinitions

 ..\\en-US\ ClassifierManagementAgent.adml to Windows\PolicyDefinitions

\en-US

 Start the Group Policy Management tool.

Once the ADM/ADMX/ADML files have been applied, the various settings can be configured
through the Group Policy Management Editor:
 Select a group policy object and choose Edit... from the context menu.
 .Open the relevant branch in the tree e.g. one of:
o ..\Classic Administration (ADM)\Boldon James\...
o ..\Administrative Templates: Policy definitions..\Boldon James\ Classifier
Management Agent
in the screen shot below

Group Policy Management Editor

 Select the relevant sub-tree and configure the settings as required.

Registry Keys set by Group Policy

p430
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

The following keys (HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE) relate to Configuration location, the Configuration and
Policy.
Note: It is recommended that registry entries are established under ServiceMode (Label Configuration
Registry Settings) for Management Agent, OWA Classifier, SharePoint Classifier.
Note: A full description of all the Registry settings relevant only to the Management Agent can be found
in the Management Agent Guide.
The example below shows entries under ...\Policies\Boldon James\ConfigManager. You can generally set
up relevant entries under any of the supported registry locations and the precedence defined in
Configuration Registry Search Algorithm applies if entries appear in more than one sub-tree. However,
the algorithm expects to find the following as 'pairs' under a sub-tree:

 Label Configuration + Policy

 ServerRootType + ServerFileSystemRoot (if relevant)

Registry Keys - Configuration Settings

Label Configuration Registry settings

These registry settings are used to indicate the location from which a Classifier application should
retrieve its Classifier Configuration, the applicable Label Configuration and the Policy that it will use. The
Registry settings are defined below under Registry Settings.
Certain Classifier applications are more suited to a Service style of operation and a set of equivalent
keys is defined below under Service Mode Registry Settings .
Classifier applications use a common precedence algorithm to search for their Registry settings below
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE and HKEY_CURRENT_USER. The locations and the precedence algorithm are
described in Configuration Registry Search Algorithm .
The settings can be established either directly, or using Group Policy mechanisms as described in:

 Set the Registry Keys Directly

 Set the Registry Keys using Group Policy

Further details can be found in the sub-topics below :

 Registry Settings

 Service Mode Registry settings

p431
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

 Web Host Settings

Registry Settings
The Entries (and Policy setting name) listed below are established under ...\Boldon
James\ConfigManager.
Entry \ClientServerOverride (Client Server Override)
Type REG_DWORD (Prior to 3.7 this was a REG_SZ setting, but newer softw are versions will
continue to w ork with the old setting).
Data Normally Classifier client applications (e.g. Email and Office Classifier) retrieve their
configuration from the designated location (AD or file store) AND save a copy locally to
facilitate offline operation. In some environments this can be inappropriate. This setting
can be used to inhibit the local storage of the configuration.
0 (default if not configured) The standard operation applies (local storage of the
configuration).
1 The configuration is not stored locally.

Entry \CommonConfigFolder (Configuration download folder)

This item is only applicable if you are using Classifier Management Agent and is
documented in the Classifier Management Agent Guide.

Entry \DeferredConfigDownload (Deferred Configuration Download)

Type REG_DWORD
Data This setting controls configuration download behaviour for Client mode only.
0 (default if not configured) Immediate - if an updated configuration is detected by a
new instance of a client application, download completes before the application
proceeds.
1 Deferred - if an updated configuration is detected by a new instance of a client
application, the application does not wait for the new configuration download to
complete. Instead the application proceeds using the existing configuration and the
configuration download proceeds as a separate thread.

Entry \LabelConfiguration (Label Configuration Name)

Type REG_SZ
Data This setting controls configuration dow nload behaviour for Client modes. The default is to
dow nload server configuration immediately.

Entry \Policy (Policy Name)

Type REG_SZ
Data The name of the policy in the configuration that this user should use. E.g. "All users".

Entries \PolicyFileClassifier (File Classifier Policy Name)

\PolicyOutlook (Outlook Policy Name) - Notes Classifier also supports this
setting.
Type REG_SZ
Data [These are only required if there is a need for File Classifier or Outlook or Notes to operate
under a different policy to that used by other classifier applications ].
The name of the policy in the configuration that this user should use when running File
Classifier / Outlook / Notes (e.g. "All users File Classifier"). These settings are only of
significance in File Classifier, Outlook and Notes. All other applications w ill use the value
defined by Policy above. If the relevant value is undefined, File Classifier / Outlook /
Notes w ill use the value defined by Policy above.

Entry \ServerFileSystemRoot (File Based Configuration Location)

Type REG_SZ
Data (Only required if ServerRootType = 0 )

p432
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Path to the location that holds the Classifier Configuration folder

Note: For remote locations, this value should be specified as a full UNC path, rather than
using Drive letters.

Entry \ServerRootType (Configuration Distribution Server Type)

Type REG_DWORD
Data 0 Configuration is held in File Store (ServerFileSystemRoot key is then significant)
1 Configuration is held in Active Directory

Entry \ValidityPeriod (Downloaded Configuration Validity Period)

Type REG_DWORD
Data 0 The centrally held Configuration (held in File Store or AD) is checked for validity at
the start of each session. This is the default assumed if the entry is not set.
> 0 The time in hours for w hich the local (cache) copy of the Configuration is assumed to
be valid. No further dow nloads of the Configuration will be performed until the
ValidityPeriod has expired, even if the central version is updated. This setting can be
useful for some w orkstation environments (e.g. due to the netw ork speed the time to
check the Configuration validity at start of each application becomes noticeable and
annoying). It should be used with care as it may result in users operating with out of
date configurations.

Entry \UseManagementAgent (Use Management Agent)

Type REG_DWORD
Data Note: This entry is only supported under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE.
This entry controls w hether the Classifier Client applications (Email and Office Classifier / File
Classifier (3.10 or later)) use Classifier Management Agent (see Classifier Management Agent
Guide for further details).

0 (Disabled - the default if not configured). Classifier Client applications will continue to
retrieve configuration directly and w ill not register with the Management Agent.
1 (Enabled) Classifier Client applications will use the Management Agent:
- Each Classifier client w ill obtain its configuration via the Management agent and not
check for a more recent configuration as described in Management Agent Guide >
Configuration update – single point of contact.
- The Email and Office Classifier clients ( not File Classifier) will register with the
Management Agent as part of Client Application Monitoring .

Service Mode Registry Settings

The Keys (and Policy setting name) listed below are established under ...\Boldon
James\ConfigManager\ServiceMode . If defined these are used by Management Agent, OWA
Classifier and SharePoint Classifier in preference to any other settings that may be defined. Use of
Service Mode is recommended for these components. Under ServiceMode the configuration is retrieved
from the designated Master location - no local cache is maintained. These items are not supported for
PerUser policy settings.
Entry \ServerRootType (Service Mode Configuration Distribution Server Type)
Type REG_DWORD
Data 0 Configuration is held in File Store (ServerFileSystemRoot key is then significant)
1 Configuration is held in Active Directory

Entry \ServerFileSystemRoot (Service Mode File Based Configuration Location)

Type REG_SZ
Data (Only required if ServerRootType = 0 )
Path to the location that holds the Classifier Configuration folder

p433
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Entry \LabelConfiguration (Service Mode Label Configuration Name)

Type REG_SZ
Data The name of the label configuration to use. e.g. Classifier test. Only applicable to some
applications.

Entry \Policy (Service Mode Policy Name)

Type REG_SZ
Data The name of the policy in the configuration that this user should use. E.g. "All users". Only
applicable to some applications.

p434
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Web Host Settings

The Keys (and Policy setting name) listed below are required if you wish either Classifier Clients or
Classifier Management Agent to retrieve the Master Configuration from a Web location. See also Create
Web Configuration.
Two sets of settings are defined which should be established under ...\Boldon
James\ConfigManager\ServiceMode for Management Agent use, or under ...\Boldon
James\ConfigManager for Classifier Clients usage. The names presented through the Policy Manager
interfaces differ (e.g. Service Mode Use Web Server for the Management Agent vs Use Web Server for
direct client use).
If the client UseManagementAgent registry entry is set, then any client related settings are ignored.
If the Management Agent is not in use, then these settings can be used to direct the clients to retrieve
the Master Configuration from the designated web location.
Entry \UseWebServer (Service Mode Use Web Server)
\UseWebServer (Use Web Server)
Type REG_DWORD
Data 0 Disabled (default) relevant applications w ill retrieve Master Configuration according
to other configuration settings.
1 Enabled - Client and/or Management Agent w ill attempt to retrieve Master
Configuration from the location defined by WebServerConfigFile and other settings
defined in this topic.

Entry \WebServerConfigFile (Service Mode Web Server Config URL)

\WebServerConfigFile (Web Server Config URL)
Type REG_SZ
Data Mandatory if UseWebServer is Enabled.
A valid URL to the file containing the zipped version of the Master Configuration. See
Create Web Configuration for further description.

The directory that contains the master configuration must also contain an appropriate
version.txt file.

Entry \WebConfigKey (Service Mode Web Config Key)

\WebConfigKey (Web Config Key)
Type REG_SZ
Data Mandatory if UseWebServer is Enabled.
An encrypted version of the key used to encrypt the zipped configuration file as described
in Create Web Configuration.

Entry \WebServerCertificateValidation (Service Mode Server Certificate Validation)

\WebServerCertificateValidation (Server Certificate Validation)
Type REG_DWORD
Data 0 Ignore errors. Certificate validation errors on https sites w ill be ignored.
1 (default if not defined) Stop if errors. The dow nload w ill fail if https sites return
errors.

Entry \WebClientTimeout (Service Mode Web Client Timeout)

\WebClientTimeout (Web Client Timeout)
Type REG_DWORD
Data 0 (default) The relevant netw ork default timeout applies (e.g. 20 seconds).
>0 The number of milliseconds allow ed before the attempt to retrieve the Master
Configuration times out.

p435
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Client Configuration Registry settings

The following Registry settings are available that can be used to control some aspects of Classifier
Client operation (available for Local Machine and Current User). The settings can be established either
directly, or using Group Policy Option mechanisms as described in:

 Set the Registry Keys Directly

 Set the Registry Keys using Group Policy

Client Configuration keys can be used in unusual circumstances to override Classifier configuration
settings, and can be defined under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE / HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\Boldon
James\Classifier:
Entry \AllowClassificationHistoryClear (Allow User to clear Classification History)
Type REG_DWORD
Data 0 The user is not allowed to Clear Classification History.
1 (default) The user is allow ed to clear Classification History.

Entry \DisplayContentCheckProgress
Type REG_DWORD
Data 0 Progress information is not displayed whilst performing Content Checks.
1 (default) Progress information is displayed whilst performing Content Checks.
Prior to Classifier 3.14, the progress information w as show n throughout the Content Check
w hich could sometimes cause flickering. From 3.14, the progress indicator is only
show n during the (possibly lengthy) index building activity.

Entry \HWMCheckEmbeddedOfficeDocuments (Check high-water mark in embedded Office

documents)
Only applicable w hen high-water mark checks are performed.
Type REG_DWORD
Data 0 (default) Documents embedded w ithin Office documents will not be included in high-
w ater mark checks.
1 Documents embedded w ithin Office documents will be included in high-w ater mark
checks.

Entry \IgnorePasswordProtectedZips (Ignore Password Protected Zip Files)

Only applicable w hen high-water mark checks are performed. It overrides any Warn if file
contents cannot be accessed setting.
Type REG_DWORD
Data Not configured - The Warn if file contents cannot be accessed setting w ill take effect.
0 The Warn if file contents cannot be accessed setting w ill take effect.
1 Any failures to access zip files (or files in zip files) during high-w ater mark checking are
ignored.

Entry SetOutlookResiliency (Set Outlook Resiliency)

By default, Outlook may disable Addins that it considers are taking to long (1000ms) to be
instantiated.
To stop the Classifier AddIn being disabled, Classifier establishes the follow ing Reg_DWORD
key at start-up w ith a vlue of 1.
Office 2010
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Office\14.0\Outlook\Security\DontDisplayHKLMAd
dins
Office 2013
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Office\15.0\Outlook\Outlook\Resiliency\AddInList
BoldonJames.SAFEoffice.Addin.Connect

p436
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Office 2016
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Office\16.0\Outlook\Outlook\Resiliency\AddInList\
BoldonJames.SAFEoffice.Addin.Connect
This default Classifier behaviour can be overridden by setting this key (see Data below ).
Type REG_DWORD
Data Not configured - The default behaviour applies and the key defined above is established.
0 - The keys defined above are not established.

Entry \ShowNotificationMessagesAtStartup (Show Notification Messages At Startup)

This can be used to control whether the "Application Test Mode w arning" dialog (see Publish
Test Configuration) appears.
Type REG_DWORD
Data Not configured - The default behaviour applies and the "Application Test Mode warning" dialog
appears.
0 The "Application Test Mode w arning" dialog is not shown. You still cannot exit Test Mode if
Classifier applications are active.
1 The "Application Test Mode warning" dialog is shown.

Settings to Auto Enable Microsoft Office Header /

Footer controls
The following Registry settings are available that can be used to automatically enable certain Microsoft
Office application settings pertinent to Header / Footer operation (available for Local Machine and
Current User).
These settings can be established directly ( Set the Registry Keys Directly) ; the delivered Group Policy
templates do not include these settings.
The settings can be established under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE / HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE
\Boldon James\Classifier. The Registry Keys corresponding to these settings are
Entry \ExcelAutoEnableDifferentFirstPage
Only applicable if relevant Excel Header/Footer 'Different first page' rules are configured.
Type REG_DWORD
Data 0 (default) Feature is disabled.
1 Auto enables 'Different First Page' header/footer on the first worksheet of a w orkbook.
2 Auto enables 'Different First Page' header/footer on all worksheets of a w orkbook.

Entry \ExcelAutoEnableDifferentOddEvenPages
Only applicable if relevant Excel Header/Footer 'Different Odd & even pages' rules are
configured.
Type REG_DWORD
Data 0 (default) Feature is disabled.
1 Auto enables 'Different Odd/Even Pages' header/footer on thefirst worksheet of a
w orkbook.
2 Auto enables 'Different Odd/Even Pages' header/footer on all w orksheets of a w orkbook.

Entry \PowerPointSlideMarkings
Only applicable w hen Pow erPoint Footer rules are configured.
Type REG_DWORD
Data 0 (default) Classifier footer markings w ill be added to all the slides in the presentation.
1 Classifier markings footer w ill be added to the First slide only of the presentation.
2 Classifier markings footer w ill be added to the Title slides only of the presentation.
3 Classifier markings footer w ill be added to all slides Except the first slide of the
presentation.

p437
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

4 Classifier markings footer w ill be added to all slides Except title slides of the
presentation.
5 Classifier markings footer w ill be added to None of the slides of the presentation.

Entry \WordAutoEnableDifferentFirstPage
Only applicable if relevant W ord Header/Footer 'Different first page' rules are configured
Type REG_DWORD
Data 0 (default) Feature is disabled.
1 Auto enables the 'Different First Page' header/footer setting for first section of a
document.
2 Auto enables the 'Different First Page' header/footer setting on all sections of a document.

Entry \WordAutoEnableDifferentOddEvenPages
Only applicable if relevant W ord Header/Footer 'Different Odd & even pages' rules are
configured
Type REG_DWORD
Data 0 (default) Feature is disabled.
1 Auto enables the 'Different Odd/Even Pages' header/footer setting onall sections of a
document.

File Classifier Registry settings

These settings (available for Local Machine and Current User) can be used to control aspects of File
Classifier operation.
The settings can be established either directly, or using Group Policy Option mechanisms as described
in:

 Set the Registry Keys Directly

 Set the Registry Keys using Group Policy

The settings can be established under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE / HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE
\Boldon James\File Classifier. The Registry Keys corresponding to these settings are:
Entry \EnableFileLabelCaching ( not currently supported by FileClassifierConfig.ADM)
Type REG_DWORD
Data When File Classifier is invoked in Windows Explorer to present Icon Overlays indicating the
label, File Classifier has to open each item to determine the label, and this can take a
noticeable amount of time if large files are involved.
This EnableFileLabelCaching option can be used to cause File Classifier to store a copy of
the label in an Alternate Data Stream (for All file types) facilitating faster access the next
time. File Classifier will not change the ‘last modified time ’ when caching label values.
File Classifier will look for for the first instance of the registry key in the follow ing locations:
HKCU\SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon James\File Classifier
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon James\File Classifier
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Boldon James\File Classifier
Note: However, in some non-NTFS environments (e.g. ‘NetApp ONTAP’) the action to
preserve ‘modified time’ does not work and all files accessed end up with a modified time set
to the current date/time.

0 (default if not defined) File Classifier w ill not use an Alternate Data Stream to
hold a cache of the Label for all file types.
Non-zero File Classifier will cache the label in an Alternate Data Stream for all file types.

Entry \SelectableFilesLimit (Selectable Files Limit)

Type REG_DWORD
Data This setting is only applicable to File Classifier.

p438
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

0 (default if not defined) An unlimited number of files are selectable by the user.
>0 The number of files that may be selected for Classification. If this value is exceeded
the “Classify” option becomes disabled.

Entry \UseSingleColour (Use Single Colour) Only relevant to File Classifier

Type REG_DWORD
Data This setting is only applicable to File Classifier.
0 (default) File Classifier attempts to use all the overlays to reflect the colours associated
w ith the first selector value.
1 File Classifier only uses the default icon overlay

EXTENDING THE ACTIVE DIRECTORY SCHEMA

Note: In order to extend the schema, the user / Administrator needs to have permission to write to the
configuration container and the schema.
Note: For Windows 2003, the Window s Server 2003 Administration Tools Pack (ADMINPAK.MSI) must
be installed.
Note: The schema extension requires LDIFDE.EXE to be available - this may only be available by default
on a Domain Controller system. LDIFDE.EXE can be made available by using Server Manager to add
either Active Directory Domain Services (ADDS) or Active Directory Lightw eight Directory Services (AD
LDS roles).

 Install the Classifier Schema Extension package from the Classifier Schema Extension
sub-folder of Classifier Administration Server in the Base Bundle.
 The Classifier Schema Extension package can be deployed using either
ClassifierSchemaExtension.msi or Setup.exe.
 After installation, from the Start menu locate All Programs / Boldon James /
Administration Tools .
Note: Extending the schema is a non-reversible operation.
 Run Classifier Schema Extension .

Schema Extension
 Click Start to update the schema
 The tool will update the Active Directory schema and show a confirmation dialog; click OK
For Windows 2008 systems, ensure that the Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS)
tools are installed, otherw ise this will fail with error "Please ensure that the Active Directory
Domain Services tools are installed".

 Click Exit.

SOFTWARE DEPLOYMENT
Desktop Clients

p439
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Email and Office Classifier and Notes Classifier can be deployed via standard MS Group Policy
mechanisms using the appropriate EMailAndOfficeClassifier.MSI or NotesClassifierClient.msi files.
The licence (distributed as part of the Configuration) controls the applications to w hich you have
access.

OWA Classifier
OWA Classifier must be installed on each Server that runs OWA supporting users that are to use
Classifier features.

Classifier Administration Server

Classifier Administration must be installed on a central (Administrator) server that can be accessed by
the designated administrators via a w eb brow ser. Classifier Administration controls access to features in
accordance w ith the Licences applied. The licence information is distributed as part of the Configuration
and is utilised by client applications to determine w hich features are presented to users.

Classifier Clearance Service

The Clearance Service can only operate on a single system at a time (the service should only be running
once in the domain). Note that there is no associated licence file for this component - you are granted
the rights to use it through the client licence you purchase.

APPENDIX - LABEL PROPAGATION MECHANISMS

To support Label Propagation, the various Classifier products need to Read and Set Labels and Markings
on items in a consistent manner.
This topic summarises the mechanisms used by each Classifier Application when processing a label
value.
Note: This section describes functionality available in the current version. Classifier product versions
prior to this may support only a subset of features described below.
Note: In the text below, BJ label refers to a custom Classifier property that holds the Label value in an
encoded form. This is usually converted to a Summary Marking if it is to be presented to a user. It is
sometimes referred to as the 'SISL' label. [For Visio documents BJ label is stored as a 'Solution XML
Element', rather than a document custom property]
The three tables below summarise:

 Document types supported.

 Supported file extensions and Label Locations.

 Application operation.
Document types supported
L Set the Label on an item of this type. Depending on the item type, the label is stored in an
application custom property, as Meta-data, or a 'standard' property (e.g. ZIP Comment
field). The ability to change a label can be limited by Check for label change rules.
M Apply a Marking on an item of this type. A marking held in a Label Location may be used to
determine a label value.
R Read the label of an item of this type.
SPL Set a SharePoint label (only visible under SharePoint).
U For these items, labels under SharePoint cannot be changed.
ADS Set a Label value stored in NTFS Alternate Data Stream (ADS). Note that this is not
available in all environments (neither OWA attachments nor SharePoint upload). See also
Attachment Handling for further details of high-w ater mark handling of ADS under Outlook.
SA Save as - Document properties containing label information will be stored.

Office Email Mail SharePoint File Power CAD API Box

Classifier Classifier Attachments Classifier Classifier Classifier Classifier
Type (MS (Email, OWA for
Office) & Notes files
Classifier)

p440
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Word (5) R/L/M - R R/L R/L R/L R/L R

Excel (5) R/L/M - R R/L R/L R/L R/L R
PowerPoint R/L/M - R R/L R/L R/L R/L R
Project R/L/M - R R/L R/L R/L R/L R
Visio (4) R/L/M - R (4 - not - - ADS -
OWA)
DWG, DXF - - R R R R R/L/M R R
ZIP - - R R/L R/L R/L R/L R
Message (3A) - R/L/M R R/U R/L R/L R/L R
PDF (6) SA R R/L R/L R/L R/L R
HTML (3) (2) - (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) R
Open Office (1) - (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) R
(3)
Media (3) - - R R/L R/L R/L R/L R
Text / RTF - - - SPL ADS ADS R/L
Other - - - SPL ADS ADS ADS

1 (Open Office documents) Office applications (e.g. Word, Excel) will store private custom
properties containing label information when saving as Open Office documents and that Label
information is available if the document is subsequently opened by the same office application.
However, this information is not available to other Classifier applications (e.g. File Classifier or
Outlook). By default File Classifier / Power Classifier stores label information in the ADS
(not available to Outlook). A specific plug-in (3) can be configured that w ill cause FC/PC to
store the label information as a custom property that can be accessed by that same plug-in
meaning it will be accessible to Outlook (for attachment checks). Label information set by File
Classifier / Pow er Classifier is not available to Office Classifier. Label information set by
w hatever mechanism may be meaningless to Open Office applications.
Thus MS Office applications and File Classifier may manifest different label values for the same
file.
2 (HTML documents). Word can save as a web page (HTM/HTML) or a single Web page
(MHT/MHTML) both of which will store private custom properties (e.g. the label) that are
recovered if Word subsequently opens that document. How ever, this information is not available
to other Classifier applications (e.g. File Classifier or Outlook).
[Word can also save as a filtered Web page (HTM/HTM) which does NOT include the custom
properties - such a document will appear as unlabelled when subsequently opened using Word.
Excel can save as HTML, but does not store custom properties so is unlabelled if opened
subsequently.]
By default File Classifier / Power Classifier stores label information in the ADS (not available
to Outlook). A specific plug-in (3) can be configured that w ill cause FC/PC to store the label
information as meta-data that can be accessed by that same plug-in meaning it will be
accessible to Outlook (for attachment checks).
Label information set by File Classifier / Pow er Classifier is not available to Office Classifier.
Thus MS Office applications and File Classifier may manifest different label values for the same
file.
3 (3A - Exchange Classifier only) Support for these requires additional configuration of Classifier
Plugins under guidance from Classifier Customer Support.
4 Visio must be installed on the platform for this to work (e.g. so not supported under
SharePoint).
Visio is launched to access a Visio file, so can incur a significant overhead (e.g. HWM checks in
Outlook).
5 Word and Excel can save documents as other types (e.g. W ord to TXT and Excel to CSV). Such
Save actions w ill typically indicate to the user that some information may be lost. Classifier
labelling and marking information may be lost.
6 Saving as PDF: You can populate various standard document properties ( Title, Author,
Subject and Keywords) that will be propagated if you save an Office document as PDF.
However, Office applications do NOT propagate any Custom Properties to the PDF. In particular
the bjDocumentSecurityLabel is NOT propagated. Email, OW A and Notes Classifier will check
defined Label Locations for recognisable labels in standard PDF file properties for the Check for
the high-water mark and Add an attachment list rules.

p441
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

File Classifier, Pow er Classifier and the Classifier API (API is only supplied to support integration
w ith technology partner products) can set the relevant custom properties of a PDF document.

Supported file extensions and Label locations

Type Supported file Label may be found from

extensions
Word doc, dot, docx, docm, BJ Label custom property, Supported document label
dotm, dotx locations.
Excel xls, xlt, xlsx, xlsm, xltm, BJ Label custom property, Supported document label
xltx locations.
Pow erPoint ppt, pps, pot, pptx, pptm, BJ Label custom property, Supported document label
ppsx, ppsm, potx, potm locations.
Project mpp, BJ Label custom property, Supported document label
(2010>) locations
Visio (4) vsd, vss, vst, vsdx [vsdx BJ Label custom property, Supported document label
(2010>) support introduced in locations
Classifier 3.5] Note Visio must be installed for labels to be accessible, and
Visio checks are never performed under OWA for example.
HTML (2,3) html, htm See note 2
Open Office odf, odt, odp See note 1.
(1,3)
PDF PDF BJ Label custom property, Supported document label
locations.
ZIP ZIP Comment field (as might be set using File or Power
Classifier).

Message (3A) EML, MSG BJ Label custom property, Supported document label
locations.
Media (3) JPG, JPEG, JPE, JPC, JPF, BJ Label custom property (XMP Metadata).
JPS, JPX, JP2, J2C, J2K,
JFIF, MP4, TIF, TIFF, WMA
Text / RTF TXT, RTF Alternate Data Stream (as might be set using File or Power
Classifier).

AUTOCAD DWG, DXF BJ Label custom property, Supported document label

DraftSight locations.
Other Alternate Data Stream (as might be set using File or Power
Classifier).

Application operation

Application Notes

Office Classifier Open:

 For the supported document types (see tables above) it uses the BJ label value
if it exists, otherw ise it checks configured locations ( Supported document label
locations) to determine the current label value.
Save:

 For the supported file extensions (above) it sets the current BJ label, plus any
Markings defined by the configured rules.

 For all other document types (e.g. PDF, RTF, TXT etc.) markings may be
applied (using configured rules) to the document properties (e.g. Author,
Header). These markings may be visible in the saved item, but there is no
separate BJ label available to other applications. Other Classifier applications

p442
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

(e.g. Email Classifier) may see the file as unlabelled.

See notes above (1,3) regarding Open Office documents.
See notes above (2,3) regarding HTML documents.

Email Classifier Open received messages use the BJ label value if it exists, otherwise check
configured locations (Supported mail label locations ) to determine the current label
OWA Classifier
value.
Notes Classifier
When performing operations on attachments (not Mobile Classifier) relating to
Mobile Classifier high-water mark or Attachment list rules:
Try to ascertain a label for each item as per 'Label may be found from ' in
the table above. Attachment types that are not supported, or not configured
are treated as unlabelled.
Save/Send: Sets the current BJ label, plus any Markings defined by the configured
rules to message properties when the message is Saved or Sent.

SharePoint Uploading a Classifier labelled file :

Classifier
Try to ascertain a label for the item as per 'Label may be found from ' in the table
above. Attachment types that are not supported, or not configured are treated as
unlabelled.
Uploading an unlabelled file :
Unlabelled items may be labelled after upload. For Classifier supported items
(excluding Visio and message items) the BJ label value will be stored, and for Office
Classifier supported items a custom property is set to direct Office Classifier to
update the Markings when the documents is next opened.
For all other items, any label applied is only associated with the item whilst it is
stored in SharePoint. This value is referred to a SharePoint label.

File Classifier Read:

Power Classifier Try to ascertain a label for the item as per 'Label may be found from ' in the table
above. Attachment types that are not supported, or not configured are treated as
unlabelled.
Write:

 For documents supported by Office Classifier , write the BJ label value, and set
a custom property to ensure that Office Classifier will update all Marking
locations the next time the file is opened.
Note Visio is not supported by Pow er Classifier or File Classifier.
Note that from version 3.8 Pow er Classifier has a Set Update Markings
option which controls this effect as described in the Power Classifier Guide.

 For PDF write the BJ label custom property.

 For ZIP files overwrite the Comment field.

Note: The Comment is visible via Actions / Comment if the archive is opened
using winzip.

 MSG files can be labelled using File or Power Classifier.

 For other supported file types write the BJ label custom property.

 All other attachment types optionally w rite the label to the NTFS Alternate
Stream Data.

CAD Classifier Open:

 For the supported document types (see tables above) it uses the BJ label value
if it exists, otherw ise it checks configured locations ( Supported document label
locations) to determine the current label value.
Save:

 For the supported file extensions (above) it sets the current BJ label, plus any

p443
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Markings defined by the configured rules.

Classifier API Read:

(Only supplied to  For the supported document types ( dll, zip, pdf, html, jpg, xls, xlsx, ppt,
support integration
pptx, vsd, doc, docx, mpp, odp, ods, odt, msg, pdb, txt, xps ) it uses the
w ith technology
BJ label value if it exists, otherw ise it checks configured locations (Supported
partner products.)
document label locations ) to determine the current label value.
Write:

 For the supported file extensions (above) it sets the current BJ label, but no
rules (e.g. markings) are applied. See Classifier API documentation for
run-time parameters.
Note: Visio files can only be accessed if Visio is installed AND there is a significant
overhead as Visio will be loaded for each document accessed.

Box Classifier Read:

 For the supported document types ( dll, zip, pdf, html, jpg, xls, xlsx, ppt,
pptx, vsd, doc, docx, mpp, odp, ods, odt, msg, pdb, txt, xps ) it uses the
BJ label value if it exists, otherw ise it checks configured locations (Supported
document label locations ) to determine the current label value.
(Any information held in the Alternate Data Stream is lost when uploaded.)
Write:

 Box Classifier never changes any document.

Note: The Open operational above described the general order when trying to find a label value. This
can be reversed by the Check label Locations first setting.

General Limitations:

 Any Classifier label assigned to an RMS or S/MIME protected item w ill only be available when the
item is fully opened by a suitable application, so File / Pow er Classifier, Email /OWA / Notes
Classifier and SharePoint Classifier does not have access to labels in these circumstances.

 Attempts to W rite a label value fail if the file is Read Only, or if the file is in use by another
application.

 Attempts to Read a label may fail if the file is in use by another application.

 Attempts to Read or Write a label fail if you do not have permission to access the file, or the file is
RMS protected or encrypted.

 Attempts to Read or Write a label fail if the file is masquerading - i.e. the content does not match
the file extension (e.g. .TXT renamed as .DOC).

p444
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Plugins
Label recognition is performed by a Classifier component that is common across the Classifier
applications. This component utilises information held in an XML file (DocLabeller2) in a Plugins folder in
the configuration:

Plugins DocLabeller2
The file contains a section for each file type supported, defining information such as the file extensions
relevant to the file type, the (Write) properties that Classifier supports and the DLL used to process that
file type:

p445
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Plugins XML
Support for new file types, and extending support for existing file types may require updates to
Classifier softw are (e.g. a new DLL) and / or changes to this XML file.
The initial contents of this XML file are generated when the first Classifier Configuration is generated and
the file is propagated as part of the Classifier Configuration.
The following general sequence should be followed to modify and propagate changes to DocLabeller2:
 Ensure any Classifier Client, Administration and Server software changes are applied and
deployed.
 Get the current master configuration using Get Server Configuration. The retrieved
configuration is stored under ...\ Boldon James\Configuration as outlined in Configuration
Archives.
 Make the necessary changes to ...\Label Configurations\Plugins\DocLabeller2.
 Publish the updated Configuration using Publish Configuration.
 The changes w ill become effective in the applications in due course.

APPENDIX - EXAMPLE OF ‘BEST MATCHING RULE’

ALGORITHM
The following example illustrates the effects of Rule Overlap Handling where a relatively complex set of
<Label condition> rules have been defined.
Consider a label structure supporting the following three Selectors with their associated values:
Designation Department Region
Public Sales Asia
Internal Finance Europe

Now consider a number of instances of the same basic Rule (e.g. Outlook FLOT) each with its own Label
match criteria:

Designation Department Region Notes

p446
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Rule 1 No Label Will only (and always) match if no label

value is selected.

Rule 2 Always Will only apply if none of the other rules

match the label condition criteria

Rule 3 <Not Relevant> Finance Europe

Rule 4 <Any> <Any> Europe

Rule 5 Public Finance <Not

Relevant>

Rule 6 <Any> Finance Europe

Rule 7 Public <Any> Europe

Rule 8 Public Finance Europe

Creating the rules above results in the following rule tree structure:

Rule overlap tree

The rule overlap algorithm operates on the basic premise that the more specific the label matching

p447
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

criteria, the higher the w eighting of the rule (higher weighting wins). Selector ordering is taken into
account (the second selector in the policy has a higher weighting than the first selector etc.).
The table below shows all the possible values of the selectors defined above, and which rule each
possible combination triggers. Rule 2 is the catchall rule that applies if there is no more specific match.

<Blank> <Blank> <Blank> Rule 1

<Blank> <Blank> Europe Rule 2
<Blank> <Blank> Asia Rule 2
<Blank> Sales <Blank> Rule 2
<Blank> Sales Europe Rule 2
<Blank> Sales Asia Rule 2
<Blank> Finance <Blank> Rule 2
<Blank> Finance Europe Rule 3
<Blank> Finance Asia Rule 2
Public <Blank> <Blank> Rule 2
Public <Blank> Europe Rule 2
Public <Blank> Asia Rule 2
Public Sales <Blank> Rule 2
Public Sales Europe Rule 7
Public Sales Asia Rule 2
Public Finance <Blank> Rule 5
Public Finance Europe Rule 8
Public Finance Asia Rule 5
Internal <Blank> <Blank> Rule 2
Internal <Blank> Europe Rule 2
Internal <Blank> Asia Rule 2
Internal Sales <Blank> Rule 2
Internal Sales Europe Rule 4
Internal Sales Asia Rule 2
Internal Finance <Blank> Rule 2
Internal Finance Europe Rule 6
Internal Finance Asia Rule 2

Now consider a Label value of “Public; Finance; Europe” – it matches every single rule defined above
w ith the exception of Rule 1 (No Label) w ill only match if no label value is selected.

Classifier must pick the ‘best’ match. This appears fairly easy because Rule 8 is an exact match for all
three elements. However, if Rule 8 w as not defined the answer is less obvious.

So ignoring Rules 1 and 8 in this instance, the algorithm can be summarised as follow s:

Any Rule that has a specific match for the Region (most significant selector) is ‘better’ than any Rule
that only has an <Any> or <Not Relevant> or <Alw ays> match for Region. Hence Rules 3, 4, 6 and 7
are immediately ‘better’ matches than Rules 2 and 5 can be ignored in the next refinement.

Now considering the preceding Selector (Department) in the policy, any rule that specifically matches
the Department value is ‘better’ than a Rule that has only an <Any> or <Not Relevant> or <Always>
match. Hence Rules 3 and 6 are ‘better’ than Rules 4 and 7.

Finally considering the first Selector (Designation) the <Any> is ‘better’ than a <Not Relevant> or
<Always> match which means that Rule 6 is ‘better’ than Rule 3, hence Rule 6 is the ‘best’ match. If
Rule 6 is subsequently deleted, then Rule 3 would be the 'best' match for this example label value.

p448
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

APPENDIX - BJTRACE LOGGING FACILITY

Note: Classifier components log major incidents to the Window s Event Log. The features in this section
are intended only for use under the guidance of Classifier Customer Services.
Office and Email Classifier, and Classifier Administration also include a Trace View er diagnostic tool that
may be used under guidance from Classifier support.
The Boldon James tracing tool allow s tracing options to be set for Email and Office Classifier. BJTrace is
installed during the Email and Office Classifier installation procedure. It is also installed with Classifier
Administration and Clearance Service. To run the tool BJTrace is located at: C:\Program Files\Common
Files\Boldon James\Logging\BJTrace.exe. Click the BJTrace.exe icon to start the application.
Note: There are two versions of the bjlogger (32 and 64-bit). Logging from 32-bit applications may be
displayed in view er windows in the 64-bit bjtrace, and vice-versa. Whilst this may not in itself be an
issue, it can be confusing because (for example) changes made to the logging settings from the 64-bit
bjtrace environment w ill have no effect on logging from a 32-bit application seen in a view er window in
that environment (and vice-versa).
Note: It is important that the size of the memory-mapped file (used to hold logging output) is the same
in both 32 and 64 bit environments. This is the default, and the default size is usually sufficient. Having
different sizes defined in the 32 and 64 bit environments is likely to lead to a crash if the file is initially
created using the smaller size. Alternatively, the other w ay round, you may see the following
messagebox displayed: "MapView OfFile failed: error=5” if you attempt to open a viewer window in
bjtrace. The memory map file size setting is accessed from bjtrace, Tools/options menu item, select the
Advanced tab, and there is a textbox for configuring the shared memory size.

To enable logging of any of the Classifier component products, run the BJTrace tool. Choose File /
Application Information, then select the application to be traced and choose Edit Settings. The
following dialog displays:

Trace Viewer Configuration

Choose the appropriate application component name and set the logging level and destination. Click OK
and all logging that meets or exceeds the chosen log level will be sent to the view er or file as
configured.
Note: End user environments do not usually have the necessary permissions to configure logging levels
etc, and therefore the administrator may have to logon to establish the diagnostic environment in
preparation for an actual diagnostic session.

p449
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Classifier logging to view er

APPENDIX - AUDITING EVENT MESSAGES

Admin : Global Settings / Auditing
Classifier auditing is controlled through the Global Audit settings, and through Classifier Administration
/ Properties. If auditing is enabled event entries will appear in the Windows Application event log with
the following general appearance:

Event Log entry

p450
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Source will typically be BoldonJames-Classifier.

Event ID will be one of the values from the table of Event ID values shown below.
Task Category indicates the type of the event.
Item Details and Event Details will vary according to the event as in the following example:
Recipient clearance check :
Item Details:
Subject: test audit
Search Key: 731FB99731AC444C9ED350B73E224E40
Classifier-DocId: 81cd7a56-ed3a-43d6-ba09-ccd19e636860
Label: Confidential Sales

Event Details:
To: [email protected]
Cc: -
Bcc: -
From: [email protected]
Attachments: -
Rule: Recipient Clearance Check
Failed Recipients: [email protected]

The table below summarises the events that may appear depending upon the Audit settings and the
conditions that arise.
Note: Not all events may appear for each application. For example OWA does not support Portion
Marking, so it will never generate event 1125.
Note: Warning entries can be produced either when a rule fires and causes the user to be involved, or if
a rule fires but is configured as Audit only.
Event ID Severity Description
Category values
1 Classifier Auditing
2 Classifier Outlook Auditing
3 Classifier Word Auditing
4 Classifier Excel Auditing
5 Classifier PowerPoint Auditing
6 Reclassification Tool Auditing (not used)
7 Recipient clearance check
8 High-water mark check
9 Originator clearance check
10 Label downgrade check
11 Label validity check
12 Label change check
13 Label upgrade check
14 Warning failure override
15 Label auto upgrade
16 Classifier initialised
17 Classifier Project Auditing
18 Classifier Visio Auditing
19 OWA auditing
20 Rule
21 Policy
22 User Clearance
23 Domain Clearance
24 User Defined Messages
25 Selector Library
26 Marking Format Library
27 Settings
28 Auditor
29 User Clearance

p451
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

30 Default Label Check

31 User warning check
32 Admin Marking Library
33 Admin Global Settings
34 Admin User Message Library
35 Admin Configuration Settings
36 Admin Policy Selector
37 Admin Policy Rule
38 Admin SMTP Domain Clearance
39 Admin Configuration Transfer
40 Content Inspection Check
41 Admin Content Library
42 SharePoint Classifier Auditing
43 Admin UI Definitions
44 Maximum Subject length check
45 Minimum Subject length check
46 Recipient type check
47 Recipient count check
48 Message size check
49 Notes Classifier Auditing
50 S/MIME Auditing
51 RMS Auditing
52 Author label change check
53 Document Author property set
54 Reply to all check
55 Mandatory Selector check
56 Document Content Inspection check
57 Exchange Classifier Auditing
58 File Classifier Auditing
59 Response Recipients check
60 Label Expiration Check
61 Exchange Classifier Administration Auditing
62 Mobile Classifier Auditing
63 McAfee HDLP Check
64 Classifier CAD auditing
65 Administration of Condition Library
66 Unlabelled attachment check
67 Suggested classification check
68 Box Classifier auditing
69 Admin Clearance Library
70 SealPath
71 Attachment Clearance Check
72 Seclore Auditing
73 Document RMS Protection CHeck

Event ID Severity Description

Event Definitions
1000 Success Office Classifier initialised in application.
1001 Success Classifier running in Test Mode
1002 Warning Classifier Configuration not found
Classifier Licensing
1005 Error Office Classifier licence error.

Emails and Web Emails (Outlook / OWA / Notes) Categories applicable

O/L OWA Notes

1101 Success A message has been sent 2 19 49

p452
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

1102 Success A message has been saved 2 N/A N/A

1103 Success A message has been opened 2 N/A N/A
1104 Success A message has been closed 2 N/A N/A
1105 Success A message has been printed 2 N/A N/A
1106 Warning Failed to apply RMS policy to a message 2 N/A N/A
1107 Warning Failed to apply Outlook S/MIME security to a message 2 19 N/A
1108 Warning Failed to access a file (e.g. Check for high-w ater mark) 2 19 49
1109 Warning Originator clearance check failed 9 19 N/A
1110 Success Originator clearance check succeeded (Not Notes) 9 19 N/A
1112 Error Recipient clearance check failed 7 19 49
1113 Success Recipient clearance check succeeded 7 19 49
1114 Warning Label validation failed 2 19 49
1115 Success Label validation succeeded 2 19 49
1116 Error Attachment check failed 8 19 49
1117 Success Attachment check succeeded 8 19 49
1118 Warning Upgrade check failed 13 19 49
1119 Success Upgrade check succeeded 13 19 49
1120 Warning Downgrade check failed 8 19 49
1121 Success Downgrade check succeeded 8 19 49
1123 Warning Change check failed 12 19 49
1124 Success Change check succeeded 12 19 49
1125 Success Portion marking Auto upgrade succeeded 15 N/A N/A
1126 Warning Warning failure override 14 19 49
1127 Success An item security label has been auto upgraded due to an 15 N/A N/A
attachment containing a higher label than the outlook
item.
1128 Success An existing label value has been changed using the Folder 2 N/A N/A
View labelling feature (this audits the original label).
1129 Success A label has been applied using the Folder View labelling 2 N/A N/A
feature (this audits the new label)
1130 Success Default label check succeeded 30 49 N/A
1131 Warning Default label check failed 30 49 N/A
1132 Success Warn user check succeeded 31 49 N/A
1133 Warning Warn user check failed 31 49 N/A
1134 Success Content inspection check succeeded 40 N/A N/A
1135 Warning Content inspection check failed 40 N/A N/A
1136 Success SharePoint Classifier item added 42 N/A N/A
1137 Success SharePoint Classifier item updated 42 N/A N/A
1138 Success SMIME successfully applied on Send 50 50 N/A
1139 Success Maximum Subject length check succeeded 44 44 N/A
1140 Warning Maximum Subject length check failed 44 44 N/A
1141 Success Minimum Subject length check succeeded 45 44 N/A
1142 Warning Minimum Subject length check failed 45 44 N/A
1143 Success Recipient type check succeeded 46 44 N/A
1144 Warning Recipient type check failed 46 44 N/A
1145 Success Recipient count check succeeded 47 44 N/A
1146 Warning Recipient count check failed 47 44 N/A
1147 Success Message size check succeeded 48 44 N/A
1148 Warning Message size check failed 48 44 N/A
1149 Warning Message RMS failed 51 N/A N/A
1150 Success Message RMS succeeded 51 N/A N/A
1151 Warning Reply to all check failed 54 54 N/A
1152 Warning Message mandatory selector check failed 55 55 N/A
1153 Success Message mandatory selector check succeeded 55 55 N/A
1154 Warning Message response recipients check Failed 59 59 N/A
1155 Warning Message label expiration check Failed 60 60 N/A
1156 Warning McAfee check failed 63 N/A N/A
1157 Success McAfee check succeeded 63 N/A N/A

p453
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

1158 Error Unlabelled attachment check failed 66 N/A N/A

1159 Warning Unlabelled attachment check passed 66 N/A N/A
1160 Success Message Suggested classification nothing to apply 67 N/A N/A
1161 Success Message Suggested classification applied automatically 67 N/A N/A
1162 Warning Message Suggested classification calculated 67 N/A N/A
1163 Success Message Suggested classification applied manually 67 N/A N/A
1164 Warning Message Suggested classification failed to calculate 67 N/A N/A
1165 Warning Sealpath protection failed to apply 70 N/A N/A
1166 Success Sealpath protection successfully applied 70 N/A N/A
1167 Error Attachment clearance check failed 71 N/A N/A
1168 Success Attachment clearance check 71 N/A N/A

Categories
applicable

2000 Info Used for unexpected conditions often related to limitations. The
Warning text logged describes the condition).
Error

File Classifier Categories

applicable

2100 Success File Classifier Labelled 58

Documents (Excel, PowerPoint, Project, Visio and Word and CAD) Categories
applicable
(E,P, P, V,W,C)

3000 Success A document has been saved 4,5,17,18,3,64

3001 Success A document has been opened 4,5,17,18,3,64
3002 Success A document has been closed 4,5,17,18,3,64
3003 Success A document has been printed 4,5,17,18,3,64
3004 Warning Document label validation has failed 11
3005 Success Document label validation has succeeded 11
3006 Warning Document upgrade check failed Not used
3007 Success Document upgrade check succeeded Not used
3008 Warning Document downgrade check failed Not used
3009 Success Document downgrade check succeeded Not used
3010 Warning Document change check failed 12
3011 Success Document change check succeeded 12
3012 Warning Document warning failure override 14
3013 Success Default label check succeeded 30
3014 Warning Default label check failed 30
3015 Success Warn user check succeeded 31
3016 Warning Warn user check failed 31
3017 Warning Document RMS failed 51
3018 Success Document RMS succeeded 51
3019 Warning Document Author change check failed 52
3020 Success Document Author change check succeeded 52
3021 Success Document Author property set 53
3022 Warning Document mandatory selector check failed 55
3023 Success Document mandatory selector check succeeded 55
3024 Success Document content inspection succeeded 56
3025 Warning Document content inspection failed 56
3026 Warning Document label expiration check failed 60
3030 Success Document Suggested classification nothing to apply 67
3031 Success Document Suggested classification applied automatically 67
3032 Warning Document Suggested classification calculated 67
3033 Success Document Suggested classification applied manually 67

p454
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

3034 Warning Document Suggested classification failed to calculate 67

3035 Warning Document Sealpath protection failed to apply (not currently 70
used)
3036 Success Document Sealpath protection successfully applied (not 70
currently used)

Exchange Classifier Administration Categories

applicable

4000 Warning Item checks failed 57

Classifier Administration Categories

applicable
5007 Success Successfully retrieved label configuration from server 28
5008 Success Successfully published label configuration 28
5009 Error Failed to publish label configuration 28
5010 Success Clearance default value changed 22
5011 Success Settings changed 27
5012 Success User defined message added Not used
5013 Success All audit settings enabled Not used
5014 Success Audit settings changed 24
5015 Success User defined message has been saved 23
5016 Success Save SMTP template 22
5017 Success Save clearance template Not used
5018 Success Saved new marking format 26
5019 Success Copied marking format 26
5020 Success Copied policy 21
5021 Success Deleted policy 21
5022 Success Edited policy Not used
5023 Success Added new policy 21
5024 Success Added new label format Not used
5025 Success Added new labelling configuration based on template Not used
5026 Success Selector library changed 25
5027 Success Marking format changed 26
5028 Success Policy control library changed 21
5029 Success Rule changed 20
5030 Success Delete Label Configuration 28
5031 Success Rename Label configuration 28
5032 Success Selector operation 25
5033 Success Configuration settings changed 33,35
5034 Success Content library changed 41
5035 Success Classifier Administration initialised 28
5036 Success Classifier Administration closing 28
5037 Success UI definitions changed 43
5038 Success Delete Marking Format 26
5039 Success Condition Library changed 65
5040 Success Save Clearance library template 69

Active Directory Clearance Categories

applicable

6000 Success User Clearance successfully updated 29

p455
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Box Classifier Categories

applicable

7000 Success Box label added 68

7001 Success Box label updated 68
7002 Success Box item deleted 68
7003 Success Box item quarantined 68
7004 Success Box item released 68
7005 Warning Box item release failure 68
7006 Warning Box item quarantine failure 68
7007 Warning Box item delete failure 68
7008 Warning Box label change failure 68

SharePoint Classifier (3.10 or later) Categories

applicable

8000 Success SharePoint Classifier document library changed 42

8001 Error SharePoint Classifier document library change fail 42
8002 Success SharePoint Classifier client files installation 42
8003 Error SharePoint Classifier client files installation fail 42
8004 Success SharePoint Classifier item change 42
8005 Error SharePoint Classifier item change fail 42
8006 Success SharePoint Classifier apply default label 42
8007 Error SharePoint Classifier apply default label fail 42
8008 Success SharePoint Classifier insufficient permissions 42
8009 Error SharePoint Classifier insufficient permissions fail 42
8010 Success SharePoint Classifier quarantine list move 42
8011 Error SharePoint Classifier quarantine list move fail 42
8012 Success SharePoint Classifier quarantine list restore 42
8013 Error SharePoint Classifier quarantine list restore fail 42
8014 Success SharePoint Classifier quarantine permissions modified 42
8015 Error SharePoint Classifier quarantine permissions modified fail 42
8016 Success SharePoint Classifier quarantine permissions restored 42
8017 Error SharePoint Classifier quarantine permissions restored fail 42

Audit Event Field Tables

p456
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

APPENDIX - CONTENT CHECKING FILE TYPES

SUPPORTED
Admin : Labelling Configurations  {configuration}  Content Library
The following file types are recognised and processed by Email Classifier Content Checking.
Adobe Acrobat (*.pdf)
Adobe Framemaker MIF (*.mif)
Ami Pro (*.sam)
Ansi Text (*.txt)
ASCII Text
ASF media files (metadata only) (*.asf)
CSV (Comma-separated values) (*.csv)
DBF (*.dbf)
EBCDIC
EML files (emails saved by Outlook Express) (*.eml)
Enhanced Metafile Format (*.emf)
Eudora MBX message files (*.mbx)
Flash (*.swf)
GZIP (*.gz)
HTML (*.htm, *.html)
JPEG (*.jpg)
Lotus 1-2-3 (*.123, *.wk?)
MBOX email archives (including Thunderbird) (*.mbx)
MHT archives (HTML archives saved by Internet Explorer) (*.mht)
MIME messages
MSG files (emails saved by Outlook) (*.msg)
Microsoft Access MDB files (*.mdb, *.accdb, including Access 2007 and Access 2010)
Microsoft Document Imaging (*.mdi)
Microsoft Excel (*.xls), EXCEL 2003 XML (*.xml), EXCEL 2007 and 2010 (*.xlsx)
Microsoft Outlook data files (*.PST) (added in version 7.67)
Microsoft Outlook/Exchange Messages, Notes, Contacts, Appointments, and Tasks (See note 2)
Microsoft Outlook Express 5 and 6 (*.dbx) message stores
Microsoft Pow erPoint (*.ppt), Pow erPoint 2007 and 2010 (*.pptx)
Microsoft Rich Text Format (*.rtf)
Microsoft Searchable Tiff (*.tiff)
Microsoft Word for DOS (*.doc), Word for Windows (*.doc), Word 2003 XML (*.xml), Word 2007 and
2010 (*.docx)
Microsoft Works (*.wks)
MP3 (metadata only) (*.mp3)
Multimate Advantage II (*.dox)
Multimate version 4 (*.doc)
OpenOffice versions 1, 2, and 3 documents, spreadsheets, and presentations (*.sxc, *.sxd, *.sxi, *.sxw ,
*.sxg, *.stc, *.sti, *.stw, *.stm, *.odt, *.ott, *.odg, *.otg, *.odp, *.otp, *.ods, *.ots, *.odf) (includes
OASIS Open Document Format for Office Applications)
Quattro Pro (*.w b1, *.wb2, *.wb3, *.qpw)
QuickTime (*.mov, *.m4a, *.m4v)
RAR (*.rar) (See note 4)
TAR (*.tar)
TIFF (*.tif)
TNEF (winmail.dat files)
Treepad HJT files (*.hjt)
Unicode (UCS16, Mac or W indows byte order, or UTF-8)

p457
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Visio XML files (*.vdx)

Window s Metafile Format (*.w mf)
WMA media files (metadata only) (*.w ma)
WMV video files (metadata only) (*.w mv)
WordPerfect 4.2 (*.w pd, *.wpf). WordPerfect (5.0 and later) (*.w pd, *.wpf)
WordStar version 1, 2, 3 (*.w s), WordStar versions 4, 5, 6 (*.w s), WordStar 2000
Write (*.wri)
XBase (including FoxPro, dBase, and other XBase-compatible formats) (*.dbf)
XML (*.xml), XML Paper Specification (*.xps)
XSL
XyWrite
ZIP (*.zip)

Appendix - Address Book to AD attribute mapping

The following table show s the mapping of Address Book properties to AD attributes used by Classifier.

Address Book Property A/D User Attribute

Account SamAccountName
City City
Common Name CN
Company Company
Country/Region Country
Department Department
Description Description
Display Name DisplayName
Email Address legacyExchangeDN
Extension attribute n (n = 1 to 15) extensionAttribute n (n = 1 to 15)
Fax number facsimileTelephoneNumber
Given Name GivenName
Home telephone number HomePhone
Initials Initials
Mobile telephone number Mobile
Office physicalDeliveryOfficeName
Pager number Pager
Printable display name displayNamePrintable
Proxy address ProxyAddresses
SMTP address mail
State/Province St
Street StreetAddress
Surname Sn
Telephone notes info
Telephone number telephoneNumber
Title title
URL url
User culture msEXCHuserCulture
Zip/Postal Code PostalCode

p458
Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

p459
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Index
-A-
Active Obsolete and Retained Selectors and values 145
Add a FLOT 353
Add a footer 353
Add a footer here 353
Add a header 353
Add a header here 353
Add a LLOT 353
Add a New Classification 328
Add a New Clearance 412
Add a new condition 178
Add a new Default Label 336
Add a new Dynamic Clearance 415
Add a new email domain clearance 408
Add a new expression 168
Add a new image 94
Add a new label configuration 128
Add a new marking format 148
Add a new matcher 171
Add a new message 98
Add a New Policy 256
Add a new policy role 53
Add a new selector 131
Add a new UI definition 101
Add a Question 190
Add a rule 341
Add a selector 315
Add a User or Group To a Role 47
Add a watermark 353
Add an attachment list 353
Add Header / Footer additional notes 366
Add rules 353
Add these addresses 353
Add this custom property 353
Add this document property 353
Add this image as a watermark 353
Add this image into footer 353
Add this image into header 353
Add this image to bottom of page 353
Add this image to top of page 353
Add this x-header 353
Add to subject 353
Administrator Management Menu 44
Algorithm for finding the text to display 83
Align Text 161
Allow classification of meeting requests and appointments 204
Allow classification of tasks 204
Allow Folder View labelling 206
Allow Folder View labelling 206
Allow label change on protected documents 206
Allow manual upgrade when sending messages 206
Allow use of OWA Basic/Light Mode 207
Allow visual markings on a meeting request response 207
AllowClassificationHistoryClear 436
Always use distribution list clearances 207
Appendix - Address Book to AD attribute mapping 458
Appendix - Auditing Event Messages 450
Appendix - BJTrace Logging Facility 449
Appendix - Content Checking File Types Supported 457

p460
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Appendix - Example of ‘Best matching Rule’ Algorithm 446

Appendix - Label Propagation Mechanisms 440
Application Settings 77
Apply a delivery report request 372
Apply a read receipt request 372
Apply Headers/Footers when label is changed 208
Apply Headers/Footers when workbook is saved 208
Apply RMS policy notes 376
Apply rules 372
Apply rules - descriptions 373
Apply S/MIME security 372
Apply this Category 372
Apply this expiry value 372
Apply this importance value 372
Apply this RMS policy 372
Apply this sensitivity value 372
Applying supplied ADM/ADMX/ADML files 429
Assisted Labelling examples 320
Assisted Labelling operation 27
Attachment Handling 384
Attachment List Notes 364
Audit non-privileged attempts to Publish Configuration 66
Audit Settings 78
Automatically apply if possible 328
Automatically elevate email label 208
Automatically expand policy warning messages 226
Automatically update Label fields 209
Azure RMS Document Tracking 227
Azure RMS support 376
Azure RMS Tracking portal URL ov erride 227

-B-
Base Colour 276
Bottom Pane 200
Browser Support (OWA) 421
Buttons (Selector values) 143

-C-
Cache Active Directory attributes on start-up 227
Caption Placement 277
Challenge (UID) 104
Check Attachments/Recipients/Originator - Warn / Prevent 405
Check clearance for attachments, recipients or originator 387
Check clearance for originator
Check clearance for recipients 387
Check content 389
Check for additional recipients on reply or forward
Check for Author label change 380
Check for label change 382
Check for Reply to All response 392
Check for RMS protection 398
Check for the high-water mark 384
Check for these recipients 391
Check for unlabelled attachments 394
Check for use of default label 392
Check Label Locations first 228
Check message size 388
Check number of recipients 390
Check RMS user defined permissions for uncleared recipients 398
Check rules 377
Check subject length 388
Check subject length does not exceed 388
Check subject length exceeds 388
Check these mandatory selectors 379
Check these selectors for expired dates 393

p461
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Check with the user 393

Classification 130
Classification History 228
Classification History (UID) 106
Classification History Display 229
Classifier Administration 43
Classifier Administration Registry Locations 425
Classifier Administration Server Guide 9
Classifier Application Settings 202
Classifier Application Settings (Office)
Classifier Configuration 43
Classifier Decision Tree 31
Classifier Documentation 10
Classifier ribbon group location 231
Classifier ribbon layout mode 233
Classifier Service Registry Locations 424
Clear (Label value) 39
Clearance 404
Clearance Library 411
Clearance Settings 404
Client Configuration Registry settings
Client Registry Locations 424
ClientServerOverride (Client Server Override) 431, 432
Column name for Folder View 210
Columns 187
Combined Label Locations 252
Common Label Handling Features 12
Common Label interface actions 17
CommonConfigFolder (Configuration download folder) 431, 432
Condition Library 176
Configuration Archives 62
Configuration Deployment 422
Configuration Folder Paths 44
Configuration of the Decision Tree 34
Configuration Registry Search Algorithm 424
Configuration Settings 201
Configuration size estimation 69
Connect Selectors - Assisted Labelling 313
Content checking - case sensitive 234
Content checking - include document properties 234
Content Checking User view 174
Content Inspection Check (UID) 107
Content Library 165
ContentCheckFieldFlags 175
Copy (Condition) 184
Copy (Expression) 170
Copy (Marking Format) 162
Copy (Message) 99
Copy (Policy) 290
Copy (Rule) 347
Copy (UI definition) 102
Create a Custom Role 55
Create Web Configuration 73
Custom format for ' Label Summary' custom document property 234
Custom format for 'Classifier Auditing' 234
Custom format for 'Insert Label' 209
Custom format for 'Label' column 209
Custom format for Portion Marking 234
Custom format for Summary Markings 235
Custom Image 278
Custom Roles for Policies 53

-D-
Date Format 153
Date offset list 139
Date offset list options 303

p462
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Date picker 139

Date picker options 302
Decision Making Process Example 32
Decision Tree (UID) 109
Decision Tree Editor 193
Decision Tree in the Client 35
Decision Tree Options 194
Default 39
Default Label (Policies) 335
Default Label Values 14
Default Language 271
DeferredConfigurationDownload (Deferred Configuration Download) 432
Defining Expressions 166
Defining Label Conditions 350
Delete (Clearance) 413
Delete (Default Label) 337
Delete (Dynamic Clearance) 417
Delete (Expression) 170
Delete (Image)
Delete (Label Configuration) 129
Delete (Marking Format) 164
Delete (Matcher) 173
Delete (Message) 99
Delete (Policy) 290
Delete (Rule) 347
Delete (Selector) 145
Delete (Suggested Classification) 332
Delete (UI definition) 102
Delete a User or Group from a Role 53
Delete email domain clearance 410
Disable OK on Label dialog if mandatory values are missing 235
Display of Favourites button 236
Display of Label Dialog launch button 236
Display selector values as buttons 299
Display selector values in context menu 209
Document Properties (Office Classifier) 15
Dynamic Clearances 415

-E-
Edit (Rule) 346
Edit Available Answers 198
Edit Classification 330
Edit email domain clearance 410
Edit Selector 134
Edit selector options 317
Email Domains 407
Email, OWA, Mail Add-in, Notes and Mobile Differences 418
Enable Back Button on Save As 210
Enable the Decision Tree Functionality 192
Ensure attachment markings are consistent 210
Ensure label dominates all portion markings 210
Example 1 - Categories with many Annotations 320
Example 2 - An additional user choice if Category 2 is selected 323
Example 3 - Separation of Personal and Corporate information 326
Examples of FLOT 371
ExcelAutoEnableDifferentFirstPage 437
ExcelAutoEnableDifferentOddEvenPages 437
Exchange Classifier Registry Locations 425
Extending the Active Directory Schema 439

-F-
Favourites 22
Features versus Licence 88
File Classifier (UID) 110
File Classifier Registry settings 438

p463
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Folder View column name 210

Folder View column populate on start-up 212
Folder View Labelling (UID) 111
Folder View Labelling operation 40
Font options and Rich Text Formatting 161
Force Summary Marking in task pane 212

-G-
General Messages (UID) 114
General Settings 224
Get Server Configuration 59
Global Settings 76

-H-
HWMCheckEmbeddedOfficeDocuments 436

-I-
IgnorePasswordProtectedZips (Ignore Password Protected Zip Files) 436
Image to Apply 280
Include embedded images when performing attachment checks 212
Indicate mandatory selector check failures 237
Insert a Question into the Decision Tree 196
Insert Label 15
Insert Marking as Field Code (Word only) 15
Inserting a Directory Attribute 160
Inserting a Document Property 158
Inserting a Hyperlink 156
Inserting a Selector Element 150
Inserting an Environment Property 157

-L-
Label 130
Label Configuration Registry settings
Label Dominance 146
Label integrity check failure error message 237
Label Locations 248
Label Options 38
Label Preview 292
Label Propagation 13
Label Selection (UID) 115
Label Selection Dialog 19
Label Selection Interfaces 17
LabelConfiguration 432
LabelConfiguration (Label Configuration Name) 431
LabelConfiguration (Service Mode Label Configuration Name) 431, 433
Labelling Configurations 127
Language (Message) 99
Language (Policy) 313
Language (Selectors) 134
Languages 83
Licence 86
Licence file names 86
Link to site defined help 39
Lock / Unlock Policy 292

-M-
Management Agent (UID) 117
Mandatory Selectors 14
Marking 147
Marking Format 147

p464
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Marking Library 147

Marking location 248
Marking Selector options 154
Masking of selectors against clearance 237
Matchers 171
Matching algorithm control 175
Maximum file size for icon overlay (in KB) 212
Maximum Number of Labels to Show 260
McAfee Host DLP marking 213
McAfee Host DLP scan 213
Menus (UID) 118
Message Properties (Email, OWA, Mail Add-in, Notes and Mobile) 16
Minimise space between selector value buttons on ribbon 238
Mobile Classifier user interface 37
Mobile Classifier vs Email Classifier 421
Move rule up / down 352
Move Up / Move Down 132
Multiple selection list 136
Multiple selection list options 300

-N-
New (Selector value) 141
Notes Classifier vs Email Classifier 420

-O-
Obsolete / Restore Selector 144
Organise Favourites (UID) 119
OWA Classifier and Classifier Mail Add-in vs Email Classifier 419

-P-
Perform Clearance Checks when sending messages 405
Permissions for Publish to AD 63
Plugins 445
Policies 253
Policy 432
Policy (Policy Name) 431
Policy (Service Mode Policy Name) 431, 433
Policy Check (UID) 120
Policy Label UI 295
Policy Management 253
Policy Name and Description 260
Policy User Interface Settings 275
PolicyFileClassifier 9, 432
PolicyFileClassifier (File Classifier Policy Name) 431
PolicyOutlook 9, 432
Portion Mark 23
Portion Marking 213
PowerPointSlideMarkings 9, 437
Preview a Marking Format 161
Printable Labels 14
Process rules when exporting 216
Process rules when printing 216
Process rules when saving 216
Prompt for reason for ignoring policy warning 238
Properties (Classifier Administration) 59
Properties (Clearance) 413
Properties (Condition) 180
Properties (Default Label) 336
Properties (Dynamic Clearances) 417
Properties (Expression) 169
Properties (Image) 95
Properties (Label Configuration) 129
Properties (Marking Format) 148

p465
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Properties (Matcher) 173

Properties (Message) 99
Properties (policy) 257
Properties (Selector values) 141
Properties (UI Definition Items) 103
Properties (UI definition) 102
Publish Configuration 60
Publish Test Configuration 70

-Q-
Question Library 186
Question Properties 189

-R-
Recently Used Labels and Portion Marks 24
Recognising and Parsing Label Markings 250
Recognition of received Label values 14
Registry Keys set by Group Policy 431
Registry Settings 432
Removable Visual Markings 367
Remove a Node 195
Remove Classifier Options from the Ribbon Bar 238
Remove selector 316
Rename Favourite 22
Retained 312
Ribbon 307
Ribbon (UID) 122
Ribbon Examples 18
RMS Apply Template (UID) 124
RMS Apply User Permissions (UID) 125
Rule Icons 345
Rule overlap handling 351
Rules Management 337
Rules supported 352
Rules wizard operation 343

-S-
Search for Outlook Item Properties that match email label locations 217
Select value for Masked Selector 239
SelectableFilesLimit (Selectable Files Limit) 438
Selector 130
Selector Actions 131
Selector Library 130
Selector Properties (Policy) 296
Selector Properties / General 297
Selector Properties / Options 298
Selector Value Filtering 305
Selector Values 130
Selectors in policy 306
ServerFileSystemRoot 9, 432
ServerFileSystemRoot (File Based Configuration Location) 431
ServerFileSystemRoot (Service Mode File Based Configuration Location) 431, 433
ServerRootType 9, 432
ServerRootType (Configuration Distribution Server Type) 431
ServerRootType (Service Mode Configuration Distribution Server Type) 431, 433
Service Mode Registry Settings 433
Set a Label 199
Set property to refresh markings 217
Set Rules Tab 340
Set the Registry Keys directly 425
Set the Registry Keys using Group Policy 426
Settings 273
Settings Applicable Across the Organisation 76

p466
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Settings to Auto Enable Microsoft Office Header / Footer controls 437

Show 'Help' button on ribbon bar 239
Show 'Insert Label' Context Menu 218
Show Classifier 'C' on icon overlay 217
Show label dialog on Save or Print 218
Show label dialog on Send 218
Show label dialog style 219
Show label dialog when mandatory label 219
Show labeller 'Clear' button 240
Show labeller 'Default' button 240
Show Selector Captions on the Ribbon Bar 268
Show Summary Marking 39
Show Summary Marking in task pane 220
Show Summary Marking in title bar 220
Show Top Three Favourites 283
ShowNotificationMessagesAtStartup (Show Notification Messages At Startup) 436
Single Click best match 240
Single Click operation 25
Single selection list 135
Single selection list options 299
Software Deployment 439
Style to Apply 285
Suggested Classification Settings 294
Suggested Classification Warnings 334
Suggested Classifications 327
Summary bar size changes are preserved 241
Summary Marking as black text on a white background 241
Summary Marking default 235
Supported document label locations 250
Supported file extensions and Label locations 440
Supported mail label locations 250
Suppress Classifier alerts when running macros 221
System Roles Management 45

-T-
Tab Placement 287
Tabs 307
Test Mode Administration 71
Text Display 151
Text displayed when a distribution list fails to expand 241
Text displayed when an item without a label cannot be checked into SharePoint 221
Text displayed when attachment check failed to complete 242
Text displayed when Folder View labelling fails 242
Text displayed when mandatory label is absent 242
Text displayed when originator check failed to complete 243
Text displayed when OWA Basic/Light Mode is disabled 221
Text displayed when prompting for a reason for ignoring policy warnings 243
Text displayed when recipient check failed to complete 244
Text displayed when RMS protection failed to complete 244
Text displayed when S/MIME application failed to complete 244
Text entry 138
Text entry options 303
Text to display for notifying of policy checks performed 244
Text to display for resolution of policy issues 245
Text to display if attachment markings are inconsistent 246
Text to display if no marking is available 246
Title Colour 289

-U-
Update markings when indicated 221
URL for your labelling help site 247
Use Alternate Data Stream (ADS) for Visio files 247
Use Alternate Data Stream (ADS) marking 222
Use Assisted Labelling 260
Use Decision Tree 262

p467
 Classifier Administration Server Guide UM644001

Use default label when replying to unmarked emails 222

Use From field for Originator Clearance 222
Use Intelligent Default Label 264
Use of Templates 17
Use of User Messages 96
Use Single Click With Predefined Labels 264
UseManagementAgent 432
User defined RMS protection 247
User experience variance between Email, OWA and Notes 386
User Interface Definition 270
User Interface Library 100
User Message Library 96
User Roles and Permissions 57
User Selectable Default Classification 263
UseSingleColour (Use Single Colour) Only relevant to File Classifier 438
UseWebServer 435

-V-
ValidityPeriod 9, 432
ValidityPeriod (Downloaded Configuration Validity Period) 431
View Client Licence status 92
Visual Markings Controlled by the User 371

-W-
Warn / Prevent / Audit / Challenge options for Check rules
Warn if file contents cannot be accessed 222
Watermarks use marking format font 223
Web Host Settings 435
WebClientTimeout 435
WebConfigKey 435
WebServerCertificateValidation 435
WebServerConfigFile 435
What is a Rule? 338
WordAutoEnableDifferentFirstPage 9, 437
WordAutoEnableDifferentOddEvenPages 9, 437

p468